FIRE TRAINING FACILITIES AT FIRE STATION #48 - 05-0002-FD
City of Clearwater
Post Office Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758-4748
Telephone (727) 462-6126 Fax (727) 462-6989
Public Works
Construction
Bandes Construction Company, Inc.
Attn: Mr. Jim Dalka
1368 Spalding Road
Suite "C"
Dunedin, Florida 33758
21$ MCI
OFFICIAL RECORDS AN[,) February 10, 2009
LEGW11Vf SRVCS DEPT
RE: Fire Training Facilities @ Fire Station # 48 (05-0002-FD)
Dear Mr. Dalka:
The work of the above referenced project is completed and acceptable as of November 8, 2008.
However, if at some later date any defects appear due to construction, you will be expected to accept
the responsibility according to the Guarantee of the General Conditions which reads:
«The ICc '101 sh1a111C ?d .? t ?? ?1 ' ? c t Imd orwy-dm e,to
At this time we have also included your "Contractor's Evaluation" for this project.
Sincerely,
Ed Burke
Construction Coordinator
City of Clearwater
cc: Gary A. Johnson, C.G.C., Public Services Director
Robert Maue, Project Engineer
Roger Larkin, Construction Inspector
Cyndie Goudeau, City Clerk
Andrea Beane, Public Services Senior Accountant
Project File
Warranty File
CITY OF CLEARWATER CONSTRUCTION DIVISION
CONTRACTOR'S PAST PERFORMANCE REPORT
Contractor: Bandes Construction Co., Inc. City Project No.: 05-0002-FD
Address: 1368 Spalding Rd., Suite "C" Type of Work: Building & Site Construction
City/State/Zip: Dunedin Fl. 33698-5039
Phone: (727) 733-5558 Fax No.: (727) 738-8225
Project Name: Fire Training Facilities Q Fire Station # 48
Completion Date: November 8, 2008 Final Contract Amount: $3,593,503.56
ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS
Performance Maximum Rated
Value Value
1. Pursuit of the Work. 12 12
2. Proper MOT and Minimize Impacts to Traveling Public. 12 12
3. Timely and Complete Submittal of Documents. 8 0
4. Timely Completion of Project. 16/20 note #4 14
5. Coordination / Cooperation with CI Personnel,
Property Owners and Utilities Company. 10 10
6. Mitigate Cost and Time Overruns 12 12
7. Environmental Compliance 10/12 note #4 12
8. Conformance with Contract Documents. 20 12
Total Score 100/106 84
Construction Project Coordinator Date Buildin ons ctio ana r Date
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
AND
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FIRE TRAINING
FACILITIES @
FIRE STATION #48
05-0002-FD
prepared for
Clearwater
U
ISSUE FOR BID
APRIL/2007
Clearwater
CONSTRUCTION SERVICES
410 N. Myrtle Ave., 33755
PO Box 4748, Clearwater, FL 33758-4748 f- ? . a .
Phone: (727) 462-6126, Fax: (727) 462-6989'
TRANSMITTAL FORM
Official Records & Legislative Services
Attn: Susan Chase, City Clerk Specialist
Date: November 7, 2007
Re: Current Certificate of Liability
Insurance
WE ARE SENDING TO YOU
® ATTACHED ? UNDER SEPARATE COVER VIA
THE FOLLOWING ITEMS:
? Shop Drawings ? Prints ? Plans
? Copy of Letter ? Change Order ? Specifications
? Samples
? As Requested
COPIES DATE NO. DESCRIPTION
1 11/07/07 1 Attached faxed copy of "Current Certificate of Liability Insurance" for Bandes
Construction Co., Inc. for the "Fire Training Facilities Fire Station #48" 05-0002-FD
THESE ARE TRANSMITTED AS CHECKED BELOW:
? For approval & payment ? Approved as submitted
? As requested ? For review and comment
? ?
? Approved as noted
? Return _ corrected prints
ROUTE DATE RECEIVED DATE REVIEWED INITIALS & COMMENTS
REMARKS: Attached Current Certificate of Liability Insurance for your Executed Contract.
SIGNED: ` ? cs),??
Alice Eckman, Construction Office Specialist
Please notify us if attachments are not included
Thank you for your business
cc: Kathy Bedini, Staff AssistantJEngineering (Copy of Certificate)
T-rom:tdI86yAmersen NLr..anrsmermubaunnyamayatu. rmuv. ice-recrauua a -rv...z - ..e?.?w. - -... oa`.--
acoRD CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE OP ID
?
°A'1094DIDN "
BANEIZ-3 11/02/07
PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A NRITER OF INFOR ATIM
ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
Carlisle Fields & Company, Inc HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMENDe EXTEND OR
Box 7910
0
P ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
.
.
Clearwater PL 33758-7910
Phone:727-797-0441 raX:727-725-3663 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC#
INSURED INSURERA soutbo= omm" xm=o o Co. 10190
INSURER B:
Banddt Construction Co . , Inc.
an
INSURER C*
1368 :Lldin
d • 3Sl te C
9
R
l
INSURER D:
98
FL 34
i
Di md
INSURER E:
COVERAGES
THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NDTWITHSFRNDING
ANY REQUIREMENT. TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR
MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJEGTTO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH
POLICES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIvtS.
LTR TYPE OF W43URANCE POLICY FAMS3BR' DATE flit DATE (MHIOMM LRSS9
0E+10RAL LUSLITY EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000
A X ' x COMMEtCfAL6ENERALLIPBILITY BINS 11/02/07 11/02/08 PREMI?SES(Eaoccurence $50,000
CLAIMS MADE Fx1OCCUR HIED EXP (Any one person) $ 5,000
PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $1,000,000
GENERAL AGGREGATE s2,000,000
GENT. AGGREGATE LIMITAPPLIESPER: PRODLICTS-COMP/OPAGG $ 2,000,000
X POLICY 7 PRO- LOC
AUT OWSLE LIABI-rTY COMBINED SINGLE LINU
$1,000,0DO
Fi ANY AUTO BINDER 11/02/07 11/02/06 (EaaccidaM
X ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY
$
(Per person)
SCHEDULED AUTOS
X HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY
$
X NON-OWNEDAUTOS (Per accident)
-- - PROPERTYDiAMAGE 3
(Per accident)
GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $
ANY AUTO OTTER THAN EAACC $
AUTO ONLY: AGO $
EXCES&(LMRE.LA LIASLITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ s , o o o , Q D ok
A X OCCUR 0 CLAIMS MADE BINDER 11/02/07 11/02/08 AGGREGATE $ 5,000,000
s
DEDUCTIBLE
X
0 RETENTION $ $
WORKERS COMPEN&ATION AND TORY LI{4T5 ER
EMPLOVERV LN8fL1TY •. - ,
E.L. EACH ACCIDENT
$
ANY' PROPRIETORPARTwjwxECUTIVE
OFFICERIMEMBEREXCLUDED?
.. E.L. DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $
IV describe under
IAL PROVISIONS belax I
E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT
$
OTHER
DE&CR V WN OF OPERATIONS 1 LOCATXXNS / f U> ADDED 1 SPECIAL PROl MMO
Project: rice Training raciiities at Fire station 048- 1700 N Belcher Rd
Clearwater 1% 33756
Certificate holder is hereby named as additional insured with respects to
general liability.
f•vO9 ffm%-ATC Yf%F nan CANCELLATM
CITYC-1 SMUILD ANY OF TM AIROW DESCR M POLICES HM CANCEIED BOOM TIE EXPIRATION
DATE TlI mw, THE i IJsLom WLL a mvoR TO wiL 10 DAYs WRITTEN
NOTICE TO TIE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NWED TO THE LET, BUT FALLURE TO DO SO $HALL
City of Clearwater MOOSE NO OBUMATWN OR LViBLITY OF ANY MID UPON THE BMURER, ITS AGENTS OR
Public Services Construction
Box 4748
O
P REPREBE4TATnIES.
.
.
Clearwater rL 33758-4748
Tn?
AUTHDFWM
61
ACORD 25 (MI08) W ` WPA VRV wRFVRHrwir 1000
ADDENDUM TO AGREEMENT FOR
CONSTRUCTION OF Fire TraininFacilities @ Fire Station # 48
CITY OF CLEARWATER CORTRACT # 05'--G-O0-2-FD
In reference to tracf. 05-0002-FD datedAugust 17, 2007 between City of Clearwater, the
Owner, and :Bander Construction, the Contractor, it is further AGREED as follows:
1. The owner has reserved the right to purchase certain portions of the material for the Project directly in
order to save applicable sales tax in compliance with Florida Law since owner is exempt from the
payment of sales tax.
2. The attachments lettered A, B, and C, attached hereto (as amended by notations thereon) and
incorporated herein shall be executed by the Contractor and applicable Sub-contractors and the terms
thereof shall govern the purchase of materials for the Project as determined by the Owner.
3. The contract price shall be reduced by the cost of the materials purchased by owner plus the normally
applicable sales tax as bid by the Contractor even if the cost is in excess of the cost for the materials as
bid by the Contractor. However, for purposes of calculating engineering fees, contractor fees, architects
fees, and any other amounts that are based on the contract amount, the original contract amount shall be
used.
4. The Contractor reserves the right to authorize payments for invoiced materials, prior to Owner's
authorization process, as outlined in attachment D.
5. The Contractor will assist Owner in owner's direct purchase of materials for the project. However,
owner Acknowledges that Contractor's Sub-contractors nonetheless each reserves the right to purchase
project materials directly, without Owner's prior approval and consequent power to eliminate
reimbursement of sales tax.
This addendum, upon its execution by both parties, is made an integral part of the aforementioned
agreement.
CITY OF CLEARWATER:
Date: o
• - '.?_ :::lip ?ja?'<-..:
City Manager/Oit
CONTRACTOR:
Date:
es, President
Contractor Bandes Construction
ATFEST:
C1 Clerk
'.City's Cor Orate S a }
M ?
APPROVED - v
Camilo A. Soto
Assistant City Attorney
Counte signed-
Fr nk V. Hibbard, ayor
q77ESTI:
aci Browning
,, ? etary
a
ATTACHMENT "A"
FROM CITY OF CLEARWATER {O?tNER)
TO.
Bandes Construction
{CONTFtPCZOR)
OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIALS
PROJECT:Fire_Training Facilities @ Fire Station # 48 - 05-0002-FD
1. The Contract Price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for material, supplies, and
equipment which will be a part of the Contractor's Work. The owner, being exempt from sales tax,
reserves the right to make direct purchases of various construction materials included in the Contractor's
contract. Owner-purchasing of construction material, if selected, will be administered on a deductive
Change Order basis. Additionally, Purchase Orders will include owner's Certificate of Exemption number.
2. The Contractor shall provide the Owner a list of all intended suppliers, vendors, and material for
consideration as Owner-Furnished Materials. The Contractor shall submit price quotes from the vendors,
as well as a description of the materials to be supplied, estimated quantities, and prices.
3. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials
furnished by the Owner in accordance with these Special Provisions including, but not limited to, verifying
correct quantities, verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing
and obtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, inspection and
acceptance of the goods at the time of delivery due to the negligence of the Contractor. However, the
owner assumes the risk of damage or loss during the time that the building materials are
physically stored at the job site prior to their installation or incorporation into the project. The
Contractor shall coordinate delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other
arrangements normally required by the Contractor for the particular material furnished. The Contractor
shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials. The Contractor agrees to
indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non-
payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the Contractor.
4. As Owner-Furnished Materials are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall visually inspect
all shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for material delivered. The Contractor
shall assure that each delivery of Owner-Furnished Materials is accompanied by documentation adequate
to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist of a
delivery ticket and an invoice from the supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such
additional information as the Owner may require. The Contractor will then forward the invoice to the
Owner for payment, pursuant to Attachment A of this Contract.
5. The Contractor shall insure that Owner-Furnished Materials conform to the Specifications and
determine prior to acceptance of goods at time of delivery if such materials are patently defective, and
whether such materials are identical to the materials ordered and match the description on the bill of
lading. If the Contractor discovers defective or non-conformities in Owner-Furnished Materials upon such.
visual inspection, the Contractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials in the
Contractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming condition
so that repair or replacement of those materials can occur without undue delay or interruption to the
Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise incorporates into the Contractor's
Work such defective or nonconforming Owner-Furnished Materials, the condition of which it either knew
or should have known by performance of an inspection, Contractor shall be responsible for all damages
to the Owner, resulting from Contractor's incorporation of such materials into the Project, including
liquidating or delay damages.
6. The Contractor shall maintain records of all Owner-Furnished Materials it incorporates into
Contractor's Work from the stock of Owner-Furnished Materials in its possession. The Contractor shall
account monthly to the Owner for any Owner-Furnished Materials delivered into the Contractor's
possession, indicating portions of all such materials which have been incorporated in the Contractor's
Work.
7. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees
for all materials and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or
damage-repair calls shall be forwarded to the Contractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier,
vendor, or subcontractor.
8. Notwithstanding the transfer of Owner-Furnished Materials by the Owner to the Contractor's
possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all Owner-Furnished Materials.
9. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Contractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and
penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that sales made by
Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination"
shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a
determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not subject to appeal.
Contractor agrees to promptly notify owner of any audit, assessment, proposed assessment or notice of
deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to Owner-Furnished Materials.
10. On a monthly basis, Contractor shall be required to review invoices submitted by all suppliers of
Owner-Furnished Materials delivered to the Project during the month for use by the Contractor and either
concur or object to the Owner's issuance of payment to the suppliers, based upon Contractor's records of
materials delivered to the site and any defects in such materials.
11. In order to arrange for the prompt payment to the supplier, the Contractor shall provide to the
Owner a listing indicating the acceptance of the goods or materials within 30 days of receipt of said goods
or materials. The list shall include a copy of all applicable Purchase Orders which will include owner's
Certificate of Exemption number, invoices, delivery tickets, written acceptance of -the delivered item, and
such other documentation as may be reasonably required by the Owner. The check will be released,
delivered and remitted directly to the supplier. The Contractor agrees to assist the Owner to immediately
obtain partial or final release or waivers as appropriate. At the end of the Project, Contractor will be
provided with a deductive Change Order for the cost incurred by the Owner to provide all Owner-
Furnished Materials. Salvage materials shall be stored or removed from the site by the Contractor at the
Owner's direction, or may be turned over to the Contractor for salvage or disposal at the Contractor's
option.
12. The Contractor shall be entitled to the benefits of any discounts attributable to the early payment
of vendor invoices for materials furnished by the Owner pursuant to the Specifications.
13. The Contract between Contractor and Owner is hereby amended to clarify that Owner-
Furnished Material shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining the Contract
Sum due Contractor.
OP ID 'DATE (MM/ODIYYYY)
ACORD CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE BA=E_1 08/06/07
PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION
ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
Carlisle Fields & Company, Inc HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR
P.O. Box 7910 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
Clearwater FL 33758-7910
Phone:727-797-0441 Fax:727-725-3663 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC#
INSURED INSURER A. Westfield Insurance Company 09528
INSURER B:
Bandes Construction Co., Inc.
Robert INSURER C
1368 Spaulding Road, Suite C INSURER D
Dunedin FL 34698
INSURER E'
Gf\/1?JLu
V w v
THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY REQUIREMENT. TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR
MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS. EXCLUSIONS AIJD CONDITIONS OF SUCH
POLICIES AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS
-
LTR NSR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER FULICY EFFIEC71VE
DATE (MWDD/YY) POLICY EXPIRATION
DATE (MMIDDIYY) LIMITS
GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE
- $ 1,000,000
A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY TRA3B23961 11/02/06 11/02/07 DAMAGE TOTZENTEU
PREMISES (Ea occurence) $ 100 , 000
CLAIMS
MADE XI OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5 , 000
X .
Blanket Addl Ins PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000
GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 1,000,000
GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 1,000,000
LOC
POLICY X JECT
F
AUT OMOBILE LIABILITY - COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT
$ 1,000,000
A X ANY AUTO TPA3823961 11/02/06 11/02/07
[Ea accident)
ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY
P $
SCHEDULED AUTOS er person)
(
X HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY
t
id $
$ NON-OWNED AUTOS en
)
(Per acc
PROPERTY DAMAGE
i $
dent)
(Per acc
GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $
ANY AUTO OTHERTHAN EA ACC $
AUTO ONLY: AGG $
EXCESS/UMBRELLA LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 5, 0 0 0, 0 0 0
A $ OCCUR CLAIMS MADE TRA38233961 11/02/06 11/02/07 AGGREGATE $S,000,000
DEDUCTIBLE $
HX RETENTION $ _
_ $
WORKERS COMPENSATION AND VVCSIAIU-
TT
TORY LIMITS ER
EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $
ANY PROPRIETORIPARTNER/EXECUTIVE
OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED?
E.L DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE
$
If yes. describe under
E.L. DISEASE -POLICY LIMIT
$
SPECIAL PROVISIONS below
OTHER
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS / VEHICLES I EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT / SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Project: Fire Training Facilities at Fire Station #48 -1700 N Belcher Rd
Clearwater FL 33756
Certificate holder is hereby named as additional insured with respects to
general liability.
VGn IIr I?r/'11 L IIVLV V? - -
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION
CITYOC2
DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN
NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL
IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR
City of Clearwater
Ste 220
tl
A
th M REPRESENTATIVES.
e
ve
yr
100 Sou TATIVE
Clearwater FL 33756 AUTHORIZED REPRO
nr ran onenrlnal .1000
ACORD Z5 (Z001/08)
r-
ab/ UO/ U! LU111111111YCL -,' 1IG / /JOOGGO
b -1 .-.
COVERAGES
SURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING
THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TOTHE IN
R DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR
H
E
ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OT
EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH
IN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS
,
THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HERE
MAY PERTAIN
,
POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
POLICYEFFECTIVE POLICYEXPIRATION LIMITS
INSR DD'L POLICY NUMBER DATE MM! IYY AT MM IYY
LTR NSRO TYPE OF INSURANCIF EACH OCCURRENCE ?
GENERAL LIABILITY
$
PREMISES Esoccurence
COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY
-1 MED EXP (Any onepersbn) $
OCCUR
CLAIMS MADE F
PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $
GENERALAGGREGATE S
PRODUCTS - COMPIOPAGG $
GENT AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: -
POLICY J C LOC
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT
(Eaaccident) $
ANY AUTO
ALLOWNEDAUTOS BODILY INJURY
(Per person) $
SCHEDULEDAUTOS
HIREDAUTOS BODILYINJURY
(Per accident) $
NON-OWNEDAUTOS
PROPERTYDAMAGE
(Per accident) $
AUTOONLY - EAACCIDENT $
ITY
GARAGELIABIL
THERTHAN EA ACC
$
ANY
AUTO O
AUTO ONLY: AGG $
EACH OCCURRENCE $
EXCESSIUMBRELLA LIABILITY
AGGREGATE $
OCCUR CLAIMS MADE
$
DEDUCTIBLE
RETENTION $
/08 WCSTATU- OTH-
X
WC10D-0011338-2007A 02/21/D7 02/21 T Y IMITS EEL
A WORKERS COMPENSATION AND 11000,000
EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $
ANY PROPRIETDRIPARTNERIEXECUTIVE E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $1,000,000
OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED?
Ifyes,describe under
E.L. DISEASE POLICY LIMIT .
$1, 000,ODO
SPECIAL PROVISIONS below
OTHER
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS 1 LOCATIONS /VEHICLES I EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT I SPECIAL PROVISIONS
w w •,nc, , ATI/11,I
CERTIFICATE HULUtIt
[C-sty o Clearwater is additional insure
Fire Training Fac. FS #48 1700 N.Selcher Rd.Clearwater F1
City of Clearwater
100 S. Myrtle Ave.
Suite 220
Clearwater, FL 33756
USA
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION
DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN
NOTICE To THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE.TO DO SO SHALL
IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE f? / f\ A?? -
n Annpn CCIRPORATION 1988
ACORD 25 (2D01108) BANG-b7
•
ADDENDUM NO. 1
for
Fire Training Facilities at Fire Station No. 48
Clearwater, Florida
Project Number 05-0002-FD
DATE: May 14, 2007
SUBJECT: Addendum No. 1
TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned
Bidders on the above project are hereby notified that the following Addenda are made to
the Contract Documents:
1. Interior Lighting for Proposed Burn Tower Building:
As part of the design and permitting requirement for the proposed burn
tower building, the Contractor shall provide stairway lighting on each level
of the building's stairwell along with exit lighting for the building.
2. Permitting:
The City of Clearwater and its consultants are securing the following
permits for the project:
Site Plan:
• Southwest Florida Water Management District (SWFMWD) Permit
• City of Clearwater Site Plan Approval
• Pinellas County Health Department Permit (Water)
• Florida Department of Environmental Protection Permit (Wastewater)
• National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) Permit
(Stormwater)
Proposed & Existing Training Facility Buildings:
• City of Clearwater Building Department Permit
The Contractor shall be responsible for securing all other permits as
required for the project.
3. Request for Information:
Last date to submit RFI's is Thursday, May 24, 2007.
a
Addendum No.I -Fire Training Facilities at Fire Station 48_051107.doc Page I
i
END OF ADDENDUM #1
THE CITY OF CLEARWATER
PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA
By: /s/WiIIiam B. Horne, II
City Manager
•
Addendum No.I -Fire Training Facilities at Fire Station 48 051 107.doc Page 2
•
ADDENDUM NO. 2
for
Fire Training Facilities at Fire Station No. 48
Clearwater, Florida
Project Number 05-0002-FD
DATE: May 24, 2007
SUBJECT: Addendum No. 2
TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned
Bidders on the above project are hereby notified that the following Addenda are made to
the Contract Documents:
Existing On-Site Well for Irrigation:
The existing well pump is estimated to be a 3 HP pump that provides an
estimated 55 GPM.
• 2. Proposed & Existing Training Facility Building Permits:
Two (2) separate building permits have been required by the City of
Clearwater Building Department for the project, which the City and its
consultants are securing for the project as stated in Addendum No. 1. The
Proposed Training Facility Building will have one (1) permit, and the
Existing Training Facility Building will have one (1) permit.
3. Revisions to Proposed Training Facility Plans:
The Architect and his sub-consultants have revised a portion of the
proposed training facility plans as indicated in the attached document.
Please Note for Clarification: The Architect's document references
the plan revisions as "Addendum No. 1 Items", which is in reference
to being the first revision to the construction plans and is included in
Addendum No. 2.
Hard copies of the revised construction plan sheets are being sent out for
your review and use. If you wish to receive the revised plan sheets
sooner, please download the electronic files (PDF's) from the following
location:
ftp://ftpserver.myclearwater.com/Engineering/FireStation48/
User Name: vendor
Pass Word: clearwater
Addendum No.2-Fire Training Facilities at Fire Station 48 052407.doc Page
•
4. Bidders Proposal, Item 25 Sodding, and Section IV, para. 25.2.2.1.3 Sod
or Seed:
All sod shall be bahia grass. Seeding will not be authorized for use. See
sheet 2.1 for limits.
5. Technical Specification Section IV, Article 54 Lawn Maintenance
Specifications:
Replace Article 54 with the attached revised Article 54 dated May 24,
2007.
6.
Refer to Section V, "Bidder's Proposal" form:
The third and fourth lines both should read as follows:
Bidders Grand Total
Bidders Grand Total
(Numbers)
(Words)
7. Request clarification to "Bidder's Proposal", Item 22 and 23:
Item 22 includes light fixtures. Item 23 includes conduit, wiring, pull boxes,
electrical items described on ES-1 & EP-1 etc.
•
END OF ADDENDUM #2
THE CITY OF CLEARWATER
PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA
BY: /s/William B. Horne, II
City Manager
•
Addendum No.2-Fire Training Facilities at Fire Station 48_052407.doc Page 2
•
May 21, 2007
Mr. Robert A. Maue, P.E.
Clearwater Public Works Administration
100 S. Myrtle Avenue, Room 220
Clearwater, FL 33756
Re: Addendum No. 1 Items
Dear Mr. Maue:
Rob, The following Addendum items need to be issued to bidders:
1. City of Clearwater permitting requires separate building permits for the existing building
renovations and the new training building. Sheets A-1, A-2, A-3, A-8, A-9, A-10, A-11,
and A-12 are separated into a separate permit set for the existing building renovations. The
general contractor will process two separate permits. The training building permit set will
include the sheets listed above due to the data required for both buildings.
2. Life Safety Plan Sheet A-4.3 has been included in the Training Building Issued for Bid
• drawings.
3. In reference to Sheet A-2: Refer to Revisions dated 5-17-07. Signed and sealed tie-in survey
to be submitted to Clearwater Building Department at the completion of the concrete slab
for the Training Building. Florida Product Approval Numbers and construction type and
occupancy classification has been noted on Sheet A-2.
4. In reference to Sheet A-4.1: Door swing and location has been modified for Door 10
Training Building.
In reference to Sheet A-4.2: Location of movable partition wall in Rooms 127 and 129 and
walls in Storage 126 and 128 are relocated along with Doors 27, 28, and 29. Men's 124 and
Women's 123 rear wall has been relocated. Detail Stair Section A4.2-01 has been added to
drawing for clarity.
6. In reference to Sheet A-10: Interior wall and ceiling finish requirement schedule has been
added to the drawing. The reflected ceiling plan was modified to reflect changes on Sheet
A-4.2 as listed in Item 5 above, and revised mechanical returns.
7. In reference to Sheet S 1.1: This sheet indicates modified dimensions for the movable
partition wall column support.
8. In reference to Sheet M-1: Refer to revised tables dated 5-17-07.
• 9. In reference to Sheet M-2: Refer to revised ductwork layout.
10. In reference to Sheet M-3: Refer to revised Mechanical Roof Part. Plan and condensing
unit tie-down details.
11. In reference to Sheet M-4: Refer to Revised AHU-I/CU-1 Split System DX Cooling Valve
with By-pass Damper Detail.
If you have any questions or concerns, please call me.
Thank you.
Sincerely,
Alex Plisko, Jr., AIA, NCARB
AP/ss
0
•
ADDENDUM NO. 3
for
Fire Training Facilities at Fire Station No. 48
Clearwater, Florida
Project Number 05-0002-FD
DATE: May 25, 2007
SUBJECT: Addendum No. 3
TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned
Bidders on the above project are hereby notified that the following Addenda are made to
the Contract Documents:
1. Bid Opening and Request for Information:
The Bid Opening Date has been changed to 1:30 PM on Thursday, June
28, 2007. The last date to submit RFI's has been changed to Thursday,
June 14, 2007.
•
END OF ADDENDUM #3
THE CITY OF CLEARWATER
PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA
By: /s/William B. Horne, II
City Manager
0 Addendum No.3-Fire Training Facilities at Fire Station 48_052507.doc Page 1
ADDENDUM NO. 4
for
Fire Training Facilities at Fire Station No. 48
Clearwater, Florida
Project Number 05-0002-FD
DATE: June 5, 2007
SUBJECT: Addendum No. 4
TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned
Bidders on the above project are hereby notified that the following Addenda are made to
the Contract Documents:
1. Response to Contractor's Comments:
COMMENT 1: HAS A PHASING PLAN AND A PROJECT DURATION BEEN ESTABLISHED?
CAN THE CONTRACTOR WORK IN ALL AREAS AS IMPLIED BY THE
DRAWINGS? IS THE PROJECT DURATION 450 DAYS AS IMPLIED BY THE
• NOTE AT THE BOTTOM OF PAGE 13 OF SECTION IV?
Response: The Contractor shall be responsible for control and construction phasing
of the project's work area except for the parking areas adjacent to the
existing fire department building. The Contractor shall provide full access
to the fire station for all emergency vehicles during the project duration,
and the Contractor shall coordinate all construction activities around the
existing fire department building and parking areas with the City's
Representative to minimize disruption to the employee's that work in this
building. The project duration is 450 days as stated in Article 1.2 and
Article 40 of Section IV (Technical Specifications) in the contract
documents.
COMMENT 2: CONFIRM THAT IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S OPTION TO PROVIDE
BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE COVERAGE, SINCE IT IS NOT SPECIFICALLY
MENTIONED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS. PLEASE NOTE THAT PAGE 2 OF
SECTION IV STATES "CITY OF CLEARWATER DOES NOT EXCEPT ANY
BUILDERS RISK DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PERIOD"
Response: The Contractor is required to provide builder's risk insurance for the
project.
COMMENT 3: CONFIRM THAT ALL MATERIAL TESTING SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE
CITY AS STATED PER PART 13 OF SECTION Ill, SINCE THE INDIVIDUAL
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DO NOT SPECIFICALLY IDENTIFY EITHER
THE OWNER OR THE CONTRACTOR.
•
Addendum No.4-Fire Training Facilities at Fire Station 48_060507.doc Page I
• Response: The Contractor is responsible for all material testing required on this
project. The Section III General Conditions Section of the City's
Construction Document has been revised (dated 5/09/2007) to reflect this
requirement. Replace Section III General Conditions with the revised
Section III General Conditions located at the following link:
htto://www.mvclearwater.comlciov/deats/awalengi n/Prod uctio n/stdsaecs/index.as
COMMENT 4: CLARIFY THE ALLOWANCE REQUIREMENTS AS OUTLINED PER PART 11
OF SECTION III SENTENCE (1!) OF PARAGRAPH 11.2 STATING THAT THE
"CONTRACTOR'S COST FOR UNLOADING AND HANDLING ON THE SITE,
LABOR, INSTALLATION COSTS, OVERHEAD, PROFIT AND OTHER
EXPENSES CONTEMPLATED FOR THE ALLOWANCES HAVE BEEN
INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT PRICE AND NOT IN THE ALLOWANCES..."
SINCE THE ALLOWANCE IS MERELY A PERCENTAGE OF THE BID
AMOUNT AND NO SPECIFIC SCOPE OF WORK IS DEFINED IT WOULD BE
IMPOSSIBLE TO ACCURATELY ESTIMATE THESE COSTS AND INCLUDE
SAME IN THE CONTRACT AMOUNT.
Response: This section is not the same as the Contingency (10%) listed at the bottom
of the Bid Form in Section V.
COMMENT 5: CLARIFY THE CONTRACTORS WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE AS
OUTLINED PER PART 6 OF SECTION III THE SECOND SENTENCE OF
• PARAGRAPH 6.12 STATING THAT "...INCLUDES DEFECTS OR DAMAGE
CAUSED BY ABUSE, VANDALISM, MODIFICATION OR OPERATION BY
PERSONS OTHER THAN CONTRACTOR, SUBCONTRACTORS OR
SUPPLIERS" IT IS HIGHLY UNUSUAL THAT THE CONTRACTOR IS
REQUIRED TO WARRANT AND GUARANTEE THE WORK DUE TO THESE
CONDITIONS. THIS TYPE OF WARRANTY WOULD BE EXTREMELY
EXPENSIVE AND PROBABLY SHOULD BE COVERED BY THE OWNER'S
INSURANCE POLICY.
Response: The Contractor is responsible for all aspects of the project until it is
officially turned over to the City of. Clearwater. The 1-year warranty applies
to any defects in work and material.
COMMENT 6: PROVIDE ADDITIONAL CLARIFICATION AND/OR DESCRIPTION OF WORK
FOR THE FOLLOWING BID ITEMS AS OUTLINED ON THE BIDDERS
PROPOSAL FORM PER SECTION V.
A. BID ITEM #5 WELL ABANDONMENT - WHERE ON SITE IS THE WELL
LOCATED? WHAT TYPE OF WELL IS IT?
Response: The well is located within the proposed parking area, east of the
stormwater pond. The well appears to be a groundwater monitoring well or
piezometer approximately 15-feet in depth.
B. BID ITEM #22 SITE LIGHTING - PLEASE NOTE THAT BID ITEM #23 IS
ALSO LISTED AS SITE LIGHTING. WHAT IS THE DIFFERENCE
BETWEEN THE TWO BID ITEMS AND WHAT SHOULD BE INCLUDED IN
• EACH?
Addendum No.4-Fire Training Facilities at Fire Station 48 060507.doc Page 2
•
Response: This items as addressed in Addendum No. 2.
C. BID ITEM #80 SIGNS - WHAT SHOULD BE INCLUDED FOR PROJECT
IDENTIFICATION, SINCE THERE IS NO SITE SIGNAGE SHOWN ON THE
DRAWINGS?
•
Response: Section IV, Article 50 covers the requirements for project signs. An exact
sample will be given at the preconstruction meeting to the contractor along
with the necessary decals.
COMMENT 7: SPECIFICATION SECTION 01322 OF SECTION IV-C REQUIRES A
"QUALIFIED PHOTOGRAPHER". SHOULD THE CONTRACT PRICE INCLUDE
AN INDEPENDENT PROFESSIONAL OR CAN THE CONTRACTORS ON SITE
SUPERINTENDENT BE THE PHOTOGRAPHER?
Response: The site superintendent is acceptable as the photographer.
COMMENT 8: THE SECTION THROUGH THE RETENTION POND AS THE SHOWN ON
SHEET C3.2 IMPLIES PLANTING MATERIAL AT THE LITTORAL SHELVES. IF
PLANTS ARE REQUIRED, PROVIDE A SPECIFICATION FOR EACH ALONG
WITH CORRESPONDING QUANTITIES TO BE INCLUDED IN THE
CONTRACT PRICE.
Response: Sheet C3.2 has been revised to include the following table "Plant
Specifications for Littoral Shelf".
SCIENTIFIC NAME COMMON PLANT SPACING PLANT
NAME SIZE QUANTITY
CANNA FLACCIDA YELLOW BR 3 FT O.C. 780/12,574 SQ FT
CANNA
HYPERICUM ST. JOHN'S 1 4 FT O.C. 540/12,574 SQ FT
FASCICULATUM WORT GALLON
JUNCOS EFFUSUS SOFT RUSH BR 3 FT O.C. 780/12,574 SQ FT
PANICUM HEMITOMON MAIDENCANE GALLON 4 FT O.C. 540/12,574 SQ FT
FsARTINA BAKERI SAN DGRASS
COR GALLON 4 FT O.C. 540/12,574 SQ FT
COMMENT 9: THE FOLLOWING QUESTIONS RELATE TO BID ITEM #74 - FIRE RESCUE
SUPPLY/STORAGE FACILITY.
A. PROVIDE SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE OVERHEAD DOORS AT PASS
THROUGH BAY AND STORAGE AREA #1, CERAMIC TILE FLOORS AT
RESTROOM #1 AND #2 AND WINDOW SILLS.
Response: See enclosed specification for Overhead doors. 1"x1" sheet ceramic tile
for restroom floors, 4"x4" ceramic tile for window sills.
Addendum No.4-Fire Training Facilities at Fire Station 48_060507.doc
Page 3
• B. SHOULD ROOM SIGNS AND WINDOW BLINDS BE INCLUDED? IF SO,
PLEASE PROVIDE A SPECIFICATION.
Response: Room signs are not to be included, but window blinds are to be included.
The window blinds should be a standard commercial grade mini-blind that
fits the length and width of each window opening.
C. ARE THE EXPOSED CONCRETE FLOORS SEALED AT THE PASS
THROUGH BAY, STORAGE AREA #1, STORAGE AREA #2 AND EMS
SUPPLY? IF NOT, PROVIDE A SPECIFICATION FOR THE FLOOR FINISH
IN THESE AREAS.
Response: Sealing per C5.2, Floor Slabs, Note C, unless specified for other finishes.
D. IS A BASE CABINET OR ONLY A COUNTERTOP TO BE INCLUDED
ALONG THE NORTH WALL OF THE BREAKROOM?
Response: All furnishings to be provided as outlined on Sheet C5.1, Note 3.
E. SHOULD CERAMIC TILE OR EPOXY PAINT BE APPLIED TO THE WALLS
AT RESTROOM #1 AND #2?
Response: Epoxy Paint.
• F. IS A GREASE TRAP REQUIRED BY THE CLIENT EVEN THOUGH IT MAY
NOT BE REQUIRED BY CODE?
Response: No.
G. VERIFY THAT ALL THE INTERIOR DOORS ARE TO BE AWI CUSTOM
GRADE PREFINISHED WOOD DOORS PER SECTION 08210 AS
OUTLINED PER SECTION IV-B.
Response: Yes.
H. VERIFY THE SIZE, TYPE AND LOCATION OF THE ACOUSTICAL PANEL
CEILINGS, SINCE SPECIFICATION SECTION 09511 OF SECTION IV-B
INCLUDES TWO DIFFERENT SIZES AND TWO DIFFERENT TYPES.
Response: 2x4 size #215 type.
I. CLARIFY THE EXTERIOR WALL CONSTRUCTION SINCE THE PLAN
DETAILS IMPLY A STANDARD METAL BUILDING WALL PANEL,
WHEREAS PAGE 7 OF SECTION IV SPECIFIES A FACTORY
ASSEMBLED "SANDWICH" PANEL.
Response: The Panel Rib Wall Detail on Sheet C5.4 applies.
J. CLARIFY THE SPECIFICATION AND INTENT FOR GENERAL NOTES #8
AND #9 ON SHEET C5.1 FOR THE 6' TALL WALL PANELS WITHIN THE
•
Addendum No.4-Fire Training Facilities at Fire Station 48 060507.doc Page 4
• PASS THROUGH BAY AREA. WHAT TYPE OF PANELS ARE REQUIRED
AND WHAT TYPE OF WATER PROOFING SEAL IS NECESSARY?
Response: The interior 6-foot tall wall panels shall be the same material as the exterior
walls and sealed along the floor, joints and any penetrated opens with a
waterproof silicone epoxy.
K. VERIFY THE ROOFING REQUIREMENTS SINCE THE GENERAL
GUIDELINES PER SECTION IV-B INDICATES THAT A SBS MODIFIED
ROOF IS PREFERRED OVER THE STANDARD METAL BUILDING
STANDING ROOF.
Response: Metal.
COMMENT 10: VERIFY THE LOCATION OF THE PRIMARY ELECTRICAL SERVICE FOR
BOTH THE BURN TOWER AND THE FIRE RESCUE SUPPLY/STORAGE
FACILITY. ALSO VERIFY THAT THESE BUILDINGS ARE NOT REQUIRED TO
BE CONNECTED TO THE EMERGENCY GENERATOR.
Response: The primary electric service for the site is located next to the generator
room located at the west side of the existing training facility. The proposed
& existing training facility will have it's own primary feed from the primary
service and will be on a back up generator as indicated in the Technical
Specifications IV-C.
• The proposed fire rescue supply/storage facility will have it's own primary
feed from the primary service and will be on a back up generator separate
from the proposed & existing training buildings. The supply building will
utilize an existing generator and switch currently located at another City
facility located on Range Road (Fire Maintenance building). General
Services will coordinate with the contractor on installation of the switch
gear and generator. The City is responsible for the installation of this
generator.
The proposed burn tower will have it's own primary feed from the primary
service separate from the proposed fire rescue supply/storage facility and
the proposed & existing training buildings and will not be on back up
generator.
COMMENT 11: SECTION IVB INCLUDES "UNIFORM WIRING POLICY FOR THE CITY OF
CLEARWATER", WHICH TALKS ABOUT AN "INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY"
ROOM OF MINIMUM SIZE OF 10' X 10'. THE FIRE RESCUE
SUPPLY/STORAGE FACILITY FLOOR PLAN ONLY SHOWS A 5'X 5' I.T.
CLOSET ON THE SECOND FLOOR. IS THIS CORRECT TO USE A 5'X 5'
CLOSET AND INCLUDE THE REST OF THE ITEMS REQUIRED BY THE
WIRING DOCUMENT?
Response: Yes.
COMMENT 12: IS THE FORTHCOMING ADDENDUM INCLUDING INFORMATION; FROM
• THE "PARKS DEPT. "ABOUT THE LOCATION OF THE ON-SITE WELL TO BE
Addendum No.4-Fire Training Facilities at Fire Station 48_060507.doc Page 5
• USED FOR IRRIGATION AND AS TO THE QUANTITY OF FLOW AND/OR
PRESSURE AVAILABLE?
Response: All of the information available for the existing irrigation well was provided in
Addendum No. 2.
COMMENT 13: REFERENCE: E-1, LIGHTING SHADED FIXTURES W/ EM OF NL BESIDE
THEM. ARE EM BALLASTS TO BE SUPPLIED OR NOT? E-7, LEGEND SAYS
THESE FIXTURES SHOULD BE PROVIDED WITH EM BALLAST. E-4, RISER
CIRCUITRY IS PROVIDED FROM EM PANEL WITH BACKUP GENERATOR.
Response: Emergency ballast is not required; the fixtures are on emergency generator.
COMMENT 14: ELECTRICAL E-2, NOTES, MANY OF THE NOTES STATE "PROVIDE FINAL
CONNECTION", WHILE POSTED BY A RECEPTACLE SYMBOL. IF MORE
THEN THE RECEPTACLE IS TO BE PROVIDED, WE NEED FURTHER
EXPLANATION?
Response: Verify exact connection requirements with manufacturer's cut sheet and
instructions.
COMMENT 15: ELECTRICAL 16000, 1.02, E-7.1 INDICATED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT FOR
CONCEALED DRY LOCATION. IS EMT ACCEPTABLE INSTEAD?
• Response: EMT is not acceptable. Provide rigid steel conduit.
COMMENT 16: ELECTRICAL 16000, 1.02, E-8, MINIMUM SIZE CONDUIT IS NOT
INDICATED. IS IT /2"?
Response: We do not have sheet E-8. Minimum size conduit is Y2"; only for site lighting
minimum size conduit is %".
COMMENT 17: ELECTRICAL E-2, NOTE I. INDICATES RIGID STEEL CONDUIT - IN/OR
UNDER SLABS. COULD PVC CONDUIT BE USED IN LIEU OF RIGID?
Response: PVC in not acceptable. Provide rigid steel conduit.
COMMENT 18: PLEASE CONFIRM THAT THE FOLLOWING ARE CORRECT.
¦ A: THE PROJECTION SYSTEMS, TV CABLING BOX & STUB ONLY
SYSTEM/CABLING - NOT IN CONTRACT.
¦ B: PHONE/DATA CABLING BOX & STUB ONLY SYSTEM/CABLING -
NOT IN CONTRACT
¦ C: SOUND OR PAGING SYSTEMS, RACEWAY OR CABLING - NOT
IN CONTRACT
Response: Correct.
2. Fire Rescue Supply/Storage Building Windows:
All windows are to be hurricane impact single hung windows meeting Miami-
is Dade requirements. See note 15 on Sheet C5.1.
Addendum No.4-Fire Training Facilities at Fire Station 48_060507.doc Page 6
•
3. Fire Rescue Supply/Storage Building Restrooms:
The handicap access shower for each restroom shall be deleted from the plans.
END OF ADDENDUM #4
THE CITY OF CLEARWATER
PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA
BY: /s/William B. Horne, 11
City Manager
•
•
Addendum No.4-Fire Training Facilities at Fire Station 48_060507.doc
Page 7
LJ
ADDENDUM NO. 5
for
Fire Training Facilities at Fire Station No. 48
Clearwater, Florida
Project Number 05-0002-FD
•
•
DATE: June 11, 2007
SUBJECT: Addendum No. 5
TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned
Bidders on the above project are hereby notified that the following Addenda are made to
the Contract Documents:
1. Response to Contractor's Comments:
COMMENT 1: AT THE NEW FIRE TRAINING BUILDING; REFER TO THE ALUMINUM AND
GLASS ENTRY DOORS (MARK 1 AND 2, TYPE A). IS PANIC HARDWARE
REQUIRED FOR THESE FOUR (4) DOOR LEAFS?
Response: Doors 1& 2 are not required to be equipped with panic hardware.
COMMENT 2: REFER TO YOUR ADDENDUM NO. 4, PAGE 4, ITEM D. IS A BASE CABINET
OR ONLYA COUNTERTOP TO BE INCLUDED ALONG THE NORTH WALL OF
THE BREAKROOM? THE RESPONSE SAYS ALL FURNISHINGS TO BE
PROVIDED AS OUTLINED ON SHEET C5.1, NOTE 3. IS THE 12'-6" CABINET
OR COUNTERTOP ALONG THE NORTH WALL A CITY SUPPLIED
"FURNISHING" ITEM?
Response: The base cabinet and countertop is to be included as kitchen furnishings,
and therefore will be the responsibility of the City to have installed.
COMMENT 3: REFER TO ADDENDUM NO. 4, PAGE 3, COMMENT 9, AND THE ENCLOSED
SPECIFICATION FOR OVERHEAD DOORS, REVISED 0610512007. THIS
NEEDS ANOTHER REVISION, SINCE "SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS"
THAT MEET THE MIAMI/DADS WIND REQUIREMENTS CAN ONLY BE
OBTAINED UP TO 14'-0" IN WIDTH. TO OBTAIN A 20'-0" WIDE BY 16'-0" HIGH
DOOR MEETING THE MIAMI/DADE REQUIREMENTS, "OVERHEAD COILING
DOORS" WILL BE REQUIRED.
Response: The wind load requirement for the proposed Fire Rescue Supply/Storage
Building roll-up sectional overhead doors is not the Miami/Dade wind load
requirement. The wind load requirement for these doors is the building's
wind load requirement. See Sheet C5.2, Design Criteria, Paragraph B.
Addendum No.5-Fire Training Facilities at Fire Station 48 061 107.doc
Page 1
•
END OF ADDENDUM #5
THE CITY OF CLEARWATER
PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA
BY: /s/William B. Horne, II
City Manager
U
•
Addendum No.5-Fire Training Facilities at Fire Station 48_061 107.doc
Page 2
ADDENDUM NO. 6
for
Fire Training Facilities at Fire Station No. 48
Clearwater, Florida
Project Number 05-0002-FD
DATE: June 18, 2007
SUBJECT: Addendum No. 6
TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned
Bidders on the above project are hereby notified that the following Addenda are made to
the Contract Documents:
Response to Contractor's Comments:
COMMENT 1: PLEASE REFER TO DRAWING C2.1 SITE PLAN AT THE FIRE TRAINING
FACILITIES AT FIRE STATION NO. 48: KEY NOTE 27 - COVERED
CONCRETE PAD WITH BLEACHERS (SEE ARCH. PLANS). DRAWINGS A-2
AND A-4.1 DO NOT INDICATE ANY BLEACHERS AT THIS PAD, AND WE SEE
~- NO SPECIFICATIONS FOR THEM IN THE SPEC BOOK. PLEASE VERIFY
THAT "BLEACHERS" ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THIS PROJECT.
Response: No. Bleachers are not part of the bid requirements. The owner has
bleachers on site that will be used.
COMMENT 2: ARE THERE ANY ADDITIONAL APPROVED BURN TOWER MANUFACTURES
OTHER THAN THE ONE SPECIFIED PER SECTION IV-D? WOULD WHP
TRAINING TOWERS (SEE INFORMATION BELOW) BE CONSIDERED AN "OR
EQUAL" TO THE SOLE SOURCED MANUFACTURE CURRENTLY LISTED?
WHP TRAINING TOWERS
9121 BOND
OVERLAND PARK, KS 66214
PHONE: (800) 351-2525
www. trainin-qtowers. com
WHP REP: JOHN LOUDERMILK
P.O. BOX 1519
LONGWOOD, FL 32750
PHONE: (407) 834-0561
Response: Based on the information provided to the City from the manufacturer, it
was determined that the only building from this manufacturer that would be
evaluated as an "or equal" item was the Fifth Alarm Series Five Story
Tower with the following dimensions:
Tower: 21'-11" x 21'-11" x 50'-0"
Residential: 21'-11"x35'-0"x24--0--
Annex: 21'-11" x 14'-6" x 10'-0"
Addendurn No.6-Fire Training Facilities at Fire Station 48_061807.doc Page 1
The evaluation on this WHP Training Tower as an "or equal" item has not
been completed, but the City will continue to review the information
provided by the manufacturer and make a final determination after the bids
have been opened. Therefore, the WHP Fifth Alarm Series Five Story Tower
with the dimensions listed above has been added as a Bid Alternative Item,
and a revised Bidder's Proposal Page 16 has been included along with the
generic plans and specifications provided by the manufacturer.
END OF ADDENDUM #6
THE CITY OF CLEARWATER
PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA
By: /s/William B. Horne, II
City Manager
•
Addendum No.6-Fire Training Facilities at Fire Station 48_061807.doc Page 2
Division 13 - Special Construction Section 13144 - Fire Fighting Simulator
•
Section 13144 - FIRE FIGHTING SIMULATOR
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 Work Included
A. The work under this section shall include the furnishing of all items shown as
specified including:
1. Steel building system.
2. Prefabricated and custom metal stair systems.
3. Railing, anchors, supports, and other accessories.
4. Steel closures, doors, door hardware, and hollow metal door frames.
5. Burn room insulating system.
1.2 Related Sections
A. Division 3 - Supply and setting of anchor bolts
B. Division 3 -Grouting
C. Division 3 - Concrete foundations, grade beams, and floor slabs
• D. Division 3 - Concrete fill on elevated decks
1.3 Definition
A. This simulator shall be used to provide training for firefighters in a controlled
simulated environment, which is commensurate with actual fire conditions.
These specifications shall be used in conjunction with the drawings for
dimensions, features, and exact configuration of the training structure.
1.4 References
A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
1. NFPA 1402 - Guide to Building Fire Training Centers
2. NFPA 1403 - Standard on Live Fire Training Evolutions
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
C. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel
D. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), Manual of Steel
Construction, latest edition
E. Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHA)
1. 29 CFR 1910.23 - Guarding Wall and Floor Openings
2. 29 CFR 1910.24 - Fixed Industrial Stairs
3. 29 CFR 1910.27 - Fixed Ladders
is
WHP22SOD 6/18/2007 Page I of 15
•
Division 13 - Special Construction Section 13144 - Fire Fighting Simulator
F. Steel Deck Institute (SDI), SDI 30 - Design Manual for Composite Decks,
Form Decks, Roof Decks; Steel Deck Institute, Inc.
1.5 Design Requirements
A. Structural Requirements
1. Provide metal building system capable of withstanding the effects of
gravity loads and the following loads & stresses within the limits and
under conditions indicated.
•
a. Live Loads:
1) Floor: 100 PSF
2) Attic: 100 PSF
3) Flat Roof: 100 PSF
4) Sloped/Gabled Roof: 100 PSF
b. Wind Loads: [ MPH] (local code)
c. Wind Exposure: [_] (local code)
d. Seismic Requirements: [ ] (local code)
e. Deflection Limits: Engineer primary & secondary framing
components, floor systems, and wall assemblies to withstand
design loads with deflections no greater than 1/240 of the span.
f. Exterior Wall Panel System:
1) The building shall be capable of supporting a 1500 pound point
load at any point on the exterior wall of the structure.
g. Handrails and Guardrails:
1) Uniform load of 50 lb/ft applied in any direction
2) Concentrated load of 200 lbs applied in any direction
3) Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act
concurrently.
B. Code Requirements
1. Structural design shall comply with the [ Code].
2. Safety design shall comply with applicable OSHA requirements.
3. Training shall comply with applicable NFPA 1403 requirements.
4. Due to the nature of the intended use, egress and fire code requirements
are not expected to satisfy the code criteria for buildings intended to
accommodate public occupancy.
a. Local codes may require the simulator to have a variance due to
the intended use and features unique to its application.
•
WHP2250D
6/18/2007
Page 2 of 15
Division 13 - Special Construction Section 13144 - Fire Fighting Simulator
• b. It is the responsibility of the owner or owner's representative to
determine the proper procedures and variances for their location
and obtain the necessary variances or requirements.
1.6 Submittals
A. Shop Drawings
1. Submit steel building drawings showing structural panel layouts, structural
frame layouts, joist layouts, locations of openings, building attachment
details, and other details as may be required for a weather-tight
installation.
a. Furnish [_] sets of steel building shop drawings bearing the stamp
and signature of a professional engineer registered in the [suite of
].
2. Submit miscellaneous metal drawings showing stairs, railing, ladders,
window closures, and any other shop fabricated items.
a. Show member sizes, weld symbols; and attachment details.
b. Furnish " sets of shop drawings with a letter of structural
conformance bearing the stamp and signature of a professional
engineer registered in the [stato of ].
B. Calculations
• 1. Furnish [_ I sets of steel building calculations bearing the stamp and
signature of a professional engineer registered in the [state of
C. Burn Room Liner
1. Submit [] sets of cut sheet information on the burn room liner.
2. Submit [`_] sets of MSDS reports on all applicable materials to be used as
burn room liner.
3. Submit [_] 2"x2" samples of burn room liner material.
4. Submit [_] sets of burn room layout drawings including ceiling layouts,
wall layouts, and any necessary details.
D. Doors, Frames, and Hardware
1. Submit [_] sets of cut sheet information on all applicable door, frame,
and hardware information.
E. Miscellaneous Submittals
1. Submit [_] sets of cut sheet information on all applicable additional
materials including rappelling anchors, shutter slam latches and handles,
temperature sensing and indicating system, shingles, felt, plywood, color
charts, and any other materials included as options.
• 1.7 Quality Assurance
WHP2250D 6/18/2007 Page 3 of 15
Division 13 - Special Construction Section 13144 - Fire Fighting Simulator
•
A. Supplier shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the design,
engineering, and fabrication of fire training simulators and must offer these
turn-key services to complete this section of work.
B. Erector shall be qualified by the supplier and have a minimum of 5 years
experience installing pre-engineered metal building projects and a minimum
of 5 completed projects of similar size and scope.
1.8 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. All components and accessories necessary for the assembly of the simulator
including interior stairs, decks, and insulating material for burn rooms shall
arrive at the project site by over-the-road trailer. Other small items including,
fasteners, instruments, and instrumentation shall be delivered separately.
B. Store all building components according to building storage instructions
above ground, separated, and protected from exposure to the elements &. from
physical damage caused by other activities.
C. During storage, space surfaces of materials to permit free circulation of air.
D. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation)
within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not
install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's
absolute limits.
•
1.9 Warranty
A. Supplier shall provide a one (1) year warranty from the date of Substantial
Completion warranting all components to be free from defects in materials
and workmanship under normal use and service.
B. Supplier shall provide a five (5) year extended materials and workmanship
warranty from the date of structure delivery warranting all components
included in the "Steel Building System" to be free from defects in materials
and workmanship under normal use and service.
C. Suppler shall provide a twenty (20) year extended life warranty from the date
of structure delivery warranting all wall and roof panel paint finishes.
D INSERT'SUP9R PADGL'NITE OR DURALINER SPECIFICATION (IF
APTLKAR.M
n
U
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 Suppliers
A. Acceptable Suppliers: WHP Trainingtowers; 9121 Bond, Overland Park, KS
66214. TEL: (800) 351-2525 or (913) 385-3663. FAX: (913) 385-7078.
Email: info cgtrainingtowers.com Website:www.trainingttowers.com
B. Substitutions: As approved per Owner/Architect. Must be submitted [_]
calendar days prior to bid date.
1. Include full set of drawings with submittal prior to bid.
W11P2250D 6/18/2007 Page 4 of' 15
Division 13 - Special Construction Section 13144 - Fire Fighting Simulator
2. Include cut sheets and/or samples of all products included in the package
including but not limited to doors, door frames, hardware, shutters, burn
room liner, and paint prior to bid.
3. Provide an itemized list, specifically referencing each item of this
specification section where the proposed substitution deviates from the
specified product.
2.2 Materials
1. Conform to applicable ASTM specifications.
2. Galvanize all structural and non-structural materials used, less than '/" in
thickness, whether or not exposed to the elements.
2.3 Fasteners
A. Provide pre-drilled/pre-punched holes prior to painting/galvanizing for bolted
attachment of material during erection.
B. Field bolt wall panel system with 3/8" electro-galvanized, powder coated bolts
at 6" on center.
U
C. Furnish wall panel system fasteners with a nylon washer to complete the
weather-tight seal.
D. Provide fasteners of sufficient strength to support connected members and
loads, and to develop full strength of parts fastened or connected.
E. Anchor bolts shall meet the diameter specified on the anchor bolt plan.
1. Anchor bolts are not included in this section.
2.4 Shop Finish Painting/Coating
A. Clean, prepare surfaces and shop prime structural steel except where members
are zinc or aluminum-zinc alloy coated, or are to be incased in concrete.
B. Paint system for roof panel and wall panel steel exposed to the exterior.
Factory electrostatic-applied polyester powder coating in accordance with
manufacturer's standard procedures. Minimum dry film thickness 1.5 mils.
Color to be [Bone White Carlabrtd& White, White White Regent Grey. Store
Grey Charcoal Sandstone Bronze Heron Me Slate Bltae Melcher's Green.
Durk Reel, or Btaek] from manufacturer's thirteen (13) standard colors.
•
C. Paint system for corner steel trim exposed to the exterior. Factory
electrostatic-applied polyester powder coating in accordance with
manufacturer's standard procedures. Minimum dry film thickness 1.5 mils.
Color to be [Berne White,, C'aMbri g Whit?, White White Reyent Grey Stoll
Grey, Charcoal Sa tone Bronze Reran Blue Slate Blue Melcher's Green,
Dark lied; or Btaok] from manufacturer's thirteen (13) standard colors.
D. Paint system for flat roof and gabled roof steel trim exposed to the exterior.
Factory electrostatic-applied polyester powder coating in accordance with
manufacturer's standard procedures. Minimum dry film thickness 1.5 mils.
Color to be [Bone White Cambridge White White White &gent Grey. Ston
WHP22501) 6/18/2007 Page 5 of 15
Division 13 - Special Construction Section 13144 - Fire Fighting Simulator
•
•
Grev. Charcoal Sandstone Broaaae heron Blue Slate Blue Aleleher's Greeti,
Dark Red, or Black] from manufacturer's thirteen (13) standard colors.
E. Paint system for all window shutters, headers, jambs, and sills exposed to the
exterior. Factory electrostatic-applied polyester powder coating in accordance
with manufacturer's standard procedures. Minimum dry film thickness 1.5
mils. Color to be [Brine White Ccirrtbri lge lute White l site .Regent Grey,
Stone Grey Charcoal, Stand t ny Hrojijge heron Blue Slate Stye,l eleher s
Green Dark Reel or Black] from manufacturer's thirteen (13) standard colors.
F. Paint system for all protective ladder panels exposed to the exterior. Factory
electrostatic-applied polyester powder coating in accordance with
manufacturer's standard procedures. Minimum dry film thickness 1.5 mils.
Color to be [Bone White Cambridge White White White -,regent Orm Stone
Grey, Charcoal, Sandstone Bronze Heron Blase Slate Blue Melcher's Green,
Durk Red, or Black] from manufacturer's thirteen (13) standard colors.
G. Paint system for all doors and door frames. Factory metal finishing enamel
catalyzed at an 8 to 1 ratio with hardener in accordance with manufacturer's
standard procedures. Minimum dry film thickness 1.2 mils. Color to be [.bone
White, Cam r dae 1,14tite bite N dent Cxey Stone Grev Charcoal,
We- Mtge Melcher's Green, Dark Red, Qr
Sandstatae, 'i wz?r Herora.Bl v, S
Black] from manufacturer's thirteen (13) standard colors.
H. Shop finish for all stair stringers, stair rails, guardrail, bar grate treads, bar
grate roof surfaces, steel balconies, steel landings, ladders, and rappelling
anchors. Steel shall be hot-dipped galvanized to conform to ASTM A1.23
after drilling, punching, cutting, bending and welding.
1. Shop finish for all other miscellaneous items including but not limited to
access hatches, studs, sheeting, hat channels, and decking. Steel shall be
galvanized to conform to ASTM A 123.
J. Factory finish for roof hatches. Roof hatches shall be provided with factory
prime paint.
K. Factory treatment of burn room liner. Burn room liner shall be pre-treated
with a two (2) part chemical system to be water resistant/repellent.
2.5 Standard Fire Fighting Simulator System
A. Weather Sealing
•
1. The footing channel for the building shall be placed over two sponge
rubber strips, which shall seal the footing channel to the concrete
foundation.
2. All exterior wall panels and vertical seams, which are metal-to-metal laps,
shall be sealed with a continuous strip of sealer. The sealer shall not run,
separate, or deteriorate with age.
3. All sealer shall be applied according to assembly drawings to form a
weather tight structure.
WHP2250D
6/18/2007
Page 6 of 15
Division 13 - Special Construction Section 13144 - Fire Fighting Simulator
• 4. The structural panel walls and structural panel roof system shall be
weather tight upon completion.
B. Roof Systems
1. Structural Roof System
a. The flat roof structure shall be a structural single panel roof system
and shall consist of all metal panels, which are prefabricated,
marked, and ready for assembly. The roof shall be constructed of
not less than 13-gauge galvanized steel, roll formed into 7 1/2"
deep compound corrugations, sealed with approved sealer, and
connected together with 3/8" diameter bolts, spaced not more than
6" apart for a weather tight seal, which forms a continuous
draining system. Splices shall be completely capable of
developing the entire bending moment capability of the panel.
2. "Safe Deck" Roof System
a. Flat roof surfaces designated as working decks shall be a
galvanized bar grate system. When specified, 19W-4, 1" x
galvanized bar grate shall be provided with a 14-gauge galvanized
support channel system and all required fasteners and anchoring
devices. "Safe Deck" shall be applied over the structural panel
system, which forms a continuous draining roof system.
• 3. Parapet Roof System
a. Flat roof surfaces designated as a parapet roof shall be a concrete
working deck. The decks shall be a composite metal deck
designed for concrete fill. The deck shall be supported on 14-
gauge minimum structural "C's" placed 12" on center. The deck
gauge shall be as designated by the deck manufacturer, G60
galvanized, to achieve the design loads. A minimum of 4" of
concrete shall be installed over the deck to provide a smooth
working surface. The concrete shall be reinforced with chopped
strands of fiberglass to form a matrix to reinforce the concrete and
protect from shrinkage and temperature cracking. The concrete
shall be pitched toward roof scuppers though the parapet walls.
The concrete mix design and installation is not covered in this
section.
4. Gabled Roof System
a. Gabled roof structures shall be constructed utilizing structural steel
trusses, structural plywood deck, and composition shingle roof
covering. The composition shingles shall be 25-year single tab
seal down as manufactured by Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.,
Tamko Roofing Products, Inc., Certain-Teed Corp., or similar
quality shingles. The granular surface shall meet OSHA
requirements for slip resistance. The deck shall be minimum '/"
• nominal T & G plywood with exterior glued laminates. 15 lb. felt
WHP2250D 6/18/2007 Pagel of 15
Division 13 - Special Construction Section 13144 - Fire Fighting Simulator
• underlayment shall be installed on the deck. Roof chop-outs shall
be replaceable and flush with roof to prevent a tripping hazard.
Roof shall have minimum I 8-gauge painted fascia and soffit trim.
5. Sloped Roof System
a. Single sloped roof structures shall be constructed utilizing 14-
gauge minimum structural steel "C's" placed 12" on center,
structural plywood deck, and composition shingle roof covering.
The composition shingles shall be 25-year single tab seal down as
manufactured by Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp., Tamko Roofing
Products, Inc., Certain-Teed Corp., or similar quality shingles.
The granular surface shall meet OSHA requirements for slip
resistance. The deck shall be minimum V nominal T & G
plywood with exterior glued laminates. 15 lb. felt underlayment
shall be installed on the deck. Roof chop-outs shall be replaceable
and flush with roof to prevent a tripping hazard. Roof shall have
minimum 18-gauge painted fascia and soffit trim.
C. Wall Systems
1. The structural steel panel shall be G90 hot-dipped galvanized, painted one
side, steel, and conforming to the appropriate ASTM specification. The
panels shall be roll formed from flat steel and shall have a minimum
• corrugation depth of 4 1/2". Panels shall be joined at their seams, which
shall lap a minimum of 1/2", and shall be held together with 3/8" bolts
spaced not more than 6" center-to-center. All connection holes in the
panels shall be pre-punched prior to painting. Self-tapping fasteners are
not acceptable. The vertical seams shall be sealed with a sealer. The wall
panels of the building shall have sufficient shear resisting capabilities to
give the building structural stability when vertical and horizontal loads are
applied.
2. Framing for load bearing walls shall be a minimum of 12-gauge, hot-
dipped, G90 galvanized "C's" placed 3'-5" center-to-center or 3"x 4"x
1/4" prime painted structural tubing. All mounting plates at the bottom of
each vertical shall be attached to the building foundation using the
foundation anchor bolts.
3. Framing for interior non-load bearing walls shall be framed with 4 1/2",
18-gauge minimum, galvanized studs spaced a minimum of 24" on center.
The face of the wall shall be minimum 18-gauge galvanized sheeting on
both faces of wall to conceal stud framing.
D. Floor Systems
1. Floor shall be supported on structural "C's" placed 12" on center. The
"C's" shall be a minimum of 14-gauge or heavier as designed by the
building engineer. "C's" shall be a minimum of 10" in depth nominally
and G90 hot-dipped galvanized. There shall be weeps in the bottom of the
• "C's" for drainage of water. Headroom shall not be reduced with the use
WHP2250D 6/18/2007 Page 8 of 15
Division 13 - Special Construction Section 13144 - Fire Fighting Simulator
of structural beams and shall have a minimum floor to ceiling height of 8'-
9" across the entire floor area.
a. All floor surfaces shall be a concrete working deck. The decks
shall be a composite metal deck designed for concrete fill. The
deck shall be supported on 14-gauge minimum structural "C's"
placed 12" on center. The deck gauge shall be as designated by the
deck manufacturer, G60 galvanized, to achieve the design loads.
A minimum of 4" of concrete shall be installed over the deck to
provide a smooth working surface. The concrete shall be
reinforced with chopped strands of fiberglass to form a matrix to
reinforce the concrete and protect from shrinkage and temperature
cracking. The concrete shall be pitched toward doors and exterior
walls. The concrete mix design and installation is not covered in
this section.
E. Access Openings
1. Steel Doors
a. Materials
1) Sheets are to be made of commercial quality 18 gauge hot dipped
zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A924 A60.
2) Vertical edges will join the face sheets by a continuous weld
• extending the full height of the door. Welds are to be ground,
filled to make them invisible and provide a smooth flush surface.
3) Hinge reinforcement to be not less than 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-
1 /4" X 9"•
4) Reinforce tops and bottoms of all doors with a continuous steel
channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the
door and welded to the face sheet. Doors with an inverted top
channel shall have a steel closure channel screwed or welded in
place so the web of the channel is flush with the top of the face
sheets of the door. Plastic fillers are NOT acceptable. Seams
around the perimeter of the top channel shall be caulked water
tight with a paintable urethane caulk.
5) Door Cores
a) Insulated doors to have 20 gauge vertical steel stiffeners
spanning the full thickness of the interior space between door
faces. Stiffeners are spaced not more than 6" a part, and
attached by spot welds spaced not more than 5" on centers.
Spaces between stiffeners are to be filled with fiberglass
insulation (Min. density 0.8#/cubic ft.)
2. Steel Door Frames
•
a. Materials
WHP2250D 6/18/2007 Page 9 of 15
Division 13 - Special Construction Section 13144 - Fire Fighting Simulator
• 1) To be 16 gauge hot dipped zinc coated steel that complies with
ASTM designations A924 A60.
2) All frames to be knock-down type and are to be assembled so
that the face miter seam is "closed and tight".
3) Hinge reinforcement to be not less than 7 gauge (3/16") plate I-
1/4" X 9".
4) Anchors shall be tube and strap type. Vertical jambs shall be
punched and dimpled to receive three 3/8" flat head machine
screws (six per frame) of suitable length to accommodate the
jamb profile and wall construction. Machine screws shall be
fastened with 3/8" locking nuts to prevent jambs from working
loose.
5) Each framed opening shall be provided with drip lip header.
3. Door Hardware
a. Stainless steel, ball bearing door hinges conform to ANSI A5111
b. Locksets conform to ANSI A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 2
1) All Locksets shall be keyed alike.
c. Passage latches conform to ANSI A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 2
• d. Strikes conform to ANSI A156.2
e. Dual adjustable ball catches conform to ANSI A156.2 B23013
f. 4'/z" door pulls conform to ANSI A156.2
g. Auxiliary Springs conform to ANSI K87454
h. High-temperature door sweep supplied on all doors except control
room doors and elevator shaft doors, if any, that do not rest on a
stem wall.
4. Window Shutters
a. All framed window openings shall receive 12-gauge hot-dipped
galvanized coated steel, single leaf closure.
b. Window closures shall be constructed with a recessed lip perimeter
and welded construction. The windows shall be designed to
provide an overlap to the interior or exterior to minimize outside
light.
c. All shutters shall have an operating lever latch with handles on the
inside and outside of the shutter. All shutters accessible from the
ground shall have a key lock lever and shall be keyed alike.
d. All burn room shutters shall have 1" of Padgenite material and
mounting channels in addition to the standard shutter including the
• operating lever latch.
WHP2250D 6/18/2007 Page 10 of 15
Division 13 - Special Construction Section 13144 - Fire Fighting Simulator
•
e. Continuous stainless steel hinges shall be welded to the shutters
and field-drilled for mounting.
f. Each framed opening shall be provided with drip lip header.
F. Stair Systems
1. Stringers shall be 1 ''h" wide channel, minimum MC 10x8.4. Drill all
required holes prior to hot-dip galvanizing.
2. Stair top rails and midrails shall be minimum 1 1/2."x 1 1/2"x 1 l gauge
square tubing. Distance between rails shall be a maximum of 12". Rails
shall be a three-line design and shall be a completely welded assembly
welded to the posts with all welds ground smooth, prior to hot-dip
galvanizing.
3. Stair end posts and intermediate posts shall be minimum 1 ''/2"x 1 '/2"x 1/4"
structural square tubing. Posts shall be a completely welded assembly
welded to the stair stringer and rails with all welds ground smooth, prior to
hot-dip galvanizing.
4. Stair treads shall be constructed of 19W-4, l" x 3/16" bar grate, hot-
dipped galvanized steel with checker plate nosing. Intermediate stair
landings, where used, are to be identical to stair treads in design. The stair
treads shall be bolted to the stringer to allow for ease of replacement of
• damaged treads.
G. Rail Systems
1. Top edge height of top rails shall be 42" plus or minus 3" above the
walking/working level.
2. Top rails and midrails shall be minimum 1 1/2"x 1 '/2"x 11 gauge square
tubing. Distance between rails shall be a maximum of 12". Rails shall be
a three-line design and shall be a completely welded assembly welded to
the posts with all welds ground smooth, prior to hot-dip galvanizing.
3. End posts and intermediate posts shall be minimum 1 `/2"x 1 '/z "x '/"
structural square tubing. Posts shall be a completely welded assembly
welded to the toe board and rails with all welds ground smooth, prior to
hot-dip galvanizing.
4. Toe board and kick plates shall be structural steel angle 4" x 6" x '/"
welded to the railings prior to hot-dip galvanizing and bolted through the
deck and structural "C's."
H. Burn Room Lining System
1. High temperature insulating panels and attachment materials shall be
provided for the interior walls, ceiling, doors, and windows of the burn
rooms as specified.
2. Panels in burn rooms shall be supported by a system of 18-gauge
galvanized mounting channels mounted both horizontally and vertically
•
WHP2250D 6/18/2007 Page I I of 15
Division 13 - Special Construction Section 13144 - Fire Fighting Simulator
• and fastened to the building steel wall verticals using proper Tek screws.
The horizontal mounting channels shall be 48" center-to-center and the
vertical mounting channels shall be 24 inches center-to-center. Mounting
channels shall be a nominal 6" in width and 1" in depth.
3. Panels shall be pre-cut to size and shall be 1" thick. Panels shall be pre-
treated with a two part chemical system to be water resistant/repellent.
Panels shall allow for live fires in temperature ranges of 1200 to 2000
degree F maximum depending on type of panel specified. Seams and
joints shall be backed with 1" thick battens of similar material. Panels
shall be fastened by 3" Tek screws with '/" x 1 '/" washers through
oversized 5/16"diameter field drilled holes, six per 2' x 4' panel. Use of
"speed clips," insulating clips or building insulation washers is prohibited.
Panels shall be installed with a''/z" gap between panels and the panel
perimeter shall be screwed to the channels. Fasteners shall be left with the
washers being able to be turned with moderate pressure on the board.
4. Padgenite I insulating panels and accessories shall be capable of protecting
the wall and ceiling surfaces of masonry, concrete or steel room, inclusive
of windows, closures and doors from damage due to enclosed fires.
Insulating materials shall be a minimum of. 1" thick, 46 PCF density, 800
PSI flex strength, possess a "K" factor of .81 or less at a mean temperature
of 800 degrees F., and shall be capable of continuous service at
is temperature ranges to 1200 degrees F. Maximum temperature rating is
1800 degrees F. This maximum temperature is acceptable for a short
period of time, but will decrease the panel's life if repeated regularly.
System shall withstand repeated exposure to heat and the application of
water to heated surfaces without the breakdown of insulating properties.
Insulating materials shall not require "drying out' periods following the
application of water nor be subject to "spalling" due to heat/moisture
conditions. There shall be no restrictions placed upon use due to
atmospheric conditions or ambient temperatures. There shall be no
restrictions imposed upon the nature of the Class A fuel source, the fire
location within neither the room nor any requirement of "special"
precautions prior to ignition. A full set of engineered installation drawings
shall be prepared by the panel supplier, which clearly shows the panel
layout, sub-framing system and attachment layout. Materials proposed as
equal to the "Padgenite" panels shall be approved seven (7) days prior to
bid due date. The contractor shall provide a sample of the material,
written specifications, drawing showing a typical installation with
hardware clearly shown, and a MSDS.
5. Accessories shall be furnished and installed for temperature sensing and
indicating system and shall include two thermocouples for each burn room
with high temperature wire to a pyrometer. A weatherproof box shall be
mounted to building. One portable pyrometer for temperature monitoring
(ranges of -199 to +1999 degree F with, LED display with battery power),
• a minimum of ten receptacles with male plugs, and a selector switch for
WHP2250D 6/18/2007 Page 12 of 15
•
.7
Division 13 - Special Construction Section 13144 - Fire Fighting Simulator
ten circuit monitoring shall be included. Thermocouples shall be mounted
at two different elevations within the burn rooms with wire from each run
to box location. Boxes shall be mounted per the direction of the owner.
6. Complete layout drawings shall show all elevations, views, and details the
location of the mounting channels, battens, and cut pieces of panels.
2.6 Building Description
A. The simulator consists of a structure which has out to out dimensions of
approximately 21'-11" wide x 71'-5" long overall with varying roof heights.
The simulator will have three sections; a 5-story tower, a 2-story
residential/industrial section, and a one-story annex section. Each section will
be outlined in this specification and the sections are referred to as Sections A,
B, and C. Section A is connected to section B and section C is connected to
the opposite side of section B from section A. Each of these sections is
outlined below.
1. Section A will be a five-story tower approximately 21'-11" W x 21'-11" L
x 54'-0" H.
a. Five (5) interior decks
b. One (1) parapet roof system
c. Four (4) 3'-0" chain gates, two (2) openings on front and rear of
the tower
d. Four (4) rappelling anchors on the roof
e. One (1) 2'-6" x 3'-0" Bilco roof hatch
f. One (1) vertical ladder from the 5th floor up to the roof hatch
g. One (1) five-story interior stair with welded stair railing
h. One (1) Y x 7' exterior door with hollow metal door frame and
hardware
i. Five (5) 3' x 4' window openings with latching shutters
j. One (1) 3' x 4' access hatch to residential attic
2. Section B will be a residential/industrial section approximately 21'-11" W
x 35'-0" L x 24'-0" H.
a. One (1) gable roof, 5/12 and 9/12 un-equal pitch with perimeter
welded guardrail
b. Two (2) 8'-0" chain gates, one (1) on each 35'-0" face of the
residential/industrial
c. Two (2) chop outs on gabled roof, one (1) 48" x 48" chop out and
one (1) 48" x 96" chop out
d. One (1) attic space provided between the roof and the second floor
•
WHP2250D
6/18/2007
Page 13 of 15
•
Division 13 - Special Construction Section 13144 - Fire Fighting Simulator
e. One (1) 3' x 3' framed window opening with latching shutter at
exterior gabled end of the attic
f. Eight (8) 3' x 4' framed window openings with latching shutters
g. One (1) 6'. x 4' double window with latching shutters
h. One (1) U x T exterior door with hollow metal frame and hardware
i. One (1) 3' x 7' exterior door with hollow metal frame and hardware
j. Two (2) 3' x 7' interior burn room doors with hollow metal frames
and hardware
k. One (1) two-story interior stair with welded stair railing
1. One (1) 12' x 12' burn room protected with a Padgenite liner
system
3. Section C will be a one-story annex approximately 21'-11" W x 14'-6" L x
10'-0" H.
a. Two (2) 3' x 4' framed window openings with latching shutters
b. One (1) Y x T exterior burn room door with hollow metal frame
and hardware
c. Entire room shall be protected with a Padgenite liner system
•
2.7 Additional Items
A.
2.8 Items to be Included as Options
A.
r?
u
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 Examination
A. Verify that concrete work has cured a minimum of 14 days. Verify that
anchor bolts are at the proper spacing and protrude the proper amount above
the concrete. Report any variances to the owner's representative prior to
proceeding with erection.
1. Concrete stem wall elevation must be within tolerance of +/- '/".
2. 'Anchor bolts placement must be within tolerance of +/- 1/8".
3.2 Installation
A. Comply with the respective manufacturer's recommendations for preparation
of building components.
B. Comply with respective manufacturer's instructions and approved shop
drawings.
3.3 Adjusting and Cleaning
WHP2250D
6/18/2007
Page 14 of 15
Division 13 - Special Construction Section 13144 - Fire Fighting Simulator
• A. Repair or replace damaged components.
B. Contractor shall properly maintain the site, collect all waste material, place all
debris and waste in containers and remove from the site.
•
•
WHP2250D 6/18/2007 Pagc 15 of 15
.
.
D'ttADI I'.RAIE
.
r i i i
J-------~------t--------~--~r~~~!~:-t---~~----l
I
I
@
@
-----, r---
I I
_w~._~._ Ii i
/~~~l::sr~=w=s, I I
SECTION 'A' I I
I I
I I
I 11
I -rr-ll
I I 3"D~r~
~ L________________
~~
-----,
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
,
1
---~
lIP IF Sl.AI ON ___ EUV. . ".-.;' /
/ I'lTOt Sl.AI TDVMDS IlIIlIR _ SClI'l'DIS ./
CF1UIDo1lTllJl IlESlGNllNSTMJ.A1IIJI IY lJ1I€RS)
SECTION 'B'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I' IlIA. STEM VALL
SQPPER(TYP')
r x 84" X ... DOOR PAD
[LEV. . 99'-6"
3' IlIA. STEM VALL
SQI'PER <T
L__________
-r.::r~
x w X 4" IlDDR PAl
El.EV. . "'-6'
CONCEPTUAL FOUNDATION LAYOUT
HilT Tll SCALE:
--I
I
I I r
: l-w~.- :1
: :~~js~ I
I SECTION 'c' \ I
11
frll
I I
L______-.J
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-______--.J
r x w x ... III:R "AD
ELEV. . ".-v
~ IS THE TYPICAl.. DDmCSUJN f'tIt THE: STDI YlIIU.
IlD"DlEICI: I"11NDItTDl DaCON 0MiVDC5S nil ACn.w.. DIJPI$Dl
.voI:R ...., IXMCO
....... "'1/IIlllS
Y~IO.I'PD:<AI>>cMO
fUel: AVA., FlOI NCHJII ....n
Ml(HJM $PoIIC1JrG .. 10'
[lCrtJtIDIt IJItADt
ANCHOR BOLT DETAIL (TYP.)
I'IlT TO Stl\LE
'viALL SCUPPER DETAIL (TYP.)
~T TO SCALE
FOUND A nON CHANNEL DETAIL <TYP,)
MJT TO SCALE
'viALL PANEL DETAIL (TYP.)
HOr TO SCH..E
..... aRUiATED
VM...L ~NCl.;
GENERAL NOTES
I> THI$ INFtIAMATION Cll'lFllAlCS TO ALL N'PUCAJLE STNlDNlDS FIll F'IRE TRAIHING
SIIIJLATIJRS AT THE TIllE llF' PIlEPARATIllK
2) THE ERECTIIrl Cll'lTRACTIIl IlSSUII:S RESl'IIISDILITY FIll ALL MATElWlLS. liT THE:
TIllE llF' DEUVEIlY. TIllS Cll'lTRACTIIl IS ALSll RESPllNSIlILE: TO ACClIlNT F'1Il
ALL MATERIAL. liT Till[ llF' DELIVERY. IF' THERE: IS II DISCREPANCY IN THE:
MATERIAL DELIVERE:D, Cll'lTACT \/HI' TRAININGTllVERS IMNtDIATELY IN IIRDER TO
MAKE PRII'ER IIRRNaMENTS TO PAIIVIDE THE NECESSIIIlY MATERIAL.
3) THI$ SET llF' IRAVINGS IS INT[NJD AS II ClINCEPTUAL SET, PRIIVIDEll FIll
SECOGII\IIY RUERENCE lIN. Y. REFER TO IEK..EN INllUSTRIES CIIIlSTRIJCTIIIN
IRAVINGS NlD THE: N1SCELLHlEIIUS NETALS IlRIIVNiS liS PRII1I\RY REF'ERDlCE FIll
EXACT NIlTERIAL DIMENSIIINS, ERECTIIJN, IIND PRllCEIJURES.
4) THESE _VINGS, SPE!;IF1CI\TIIINS, IXAS, DESIGNS, AND -.aIIENTS ARE AND
SHALL REIlAIN TII: PAllPERTY llF' VHP TRI\ININGTDVERS AND NO PIIRT THERE llF'
SHALL II: CllPlED, REPRIIDUCED. III USED IN CDNNE:CTIIIN VITH ANY VDRK DR
PAII.ECT OTHER TIMN THE: SPECIFlC PAIJ.ECT F'1Il VHIOt Tlt!Y MAY[ IEEN
PREPARED vlTHIlUT VRITTEN CDHSENT rJlII( _ 11UoININGTOVERS.
~) WRITTEN DINENSIIINS III Tlt!SE DRAvINGS SHALL TAlCE PIlECEIlENCE llVER SCALED
DlNENSIIINS. INSTALLING CONTRACTORS OR D\/NERS SHALL VERIF'Y _ IE
RESPllNSIJLE f1IR ALL DINENSIIINS AND ClJlDITIIJIS III THE .m AND \/HI'
TRAININGTII\/ERS SMALL IE IIIT1F'IEJ IIlMEDJATELY IIf' NlY VIIRIIITIIINS III
DISCREPIINCIES F'_ THE DINDlSlllNS AND Cll'lDITIONS SHINN BY THE:SE 1lR1IVJNGS.
ANY F'lELD OtNlCiES IR IIIDIrICATIIJIS TO EITHER THE STRU:TURE: III ADDITIVE
CJIIlPIJI[N1'S NUST IE REPIJllTED AND I\PPAllVED IY VHP TRIIINll<<iTmlERS PRIIIIt
TO PERF'IlRMING NlY VIJlK.
,) NISCELlANElJUS FELD CUTTING NlD mTING llF' 10TH STRUCTURAL liS \/ELL AS
LIlJlT GAUGE F'RNlING ClINPIJN[HTS vlLL II: I€a:SSNlY TO BE I\JLE TO PERFIIlM
THE INSTALLATIIIN PRlJCEDUR[S RtQUJR[J AlII vaL IE CONSIDERED liS II
ST_D CDNDITmN NfD REClUIRENl:NT F'lIl ERECTIIII OF' THIS LIVE F'IRE
TRAINING SJIIILATIR IIND ITS Clllf'lKNTs.
7) JIIIJRS SHALL IE PAINTED 18 GA lilT-DIPPED GALVI\IlIZED HILLDII NETAL SLIIIS
VITH CDNTIIIUIlUS1.. Y VELIlED SENts. DIIIlR flWIES SHALl. IE I' PAINTI:D 16 GI\
lilT-DIPPED GALVNlIZED F'RNlEs. ElICH EXTERlIR __DURN RIIJM IIlIlIl SHALL IE
PAIIVIIlED vlTH (3) HEAVY-DUTT STIIINLESS STEEL BI\LL DEARING HINIlES. Q)
ClJll€RCIAL GRADE KEYED LlJCl(SET. AND (2) DlIIIR NUTES. ElICH INTERIIR
_-JI.ftN ROIJI DlllIl SHALL IE PROVIDED vlTH (3) HEAVY-DUTY STIIINLl:SS
STEEL IALL IENlING HINGES. Q) CONNERCIAL GRADE PASSAGE: SET. IIND (2) IlIIIR
MUTES. ElICH IIURN RIIJM IIIIIl SHALL BE PAIIVIDED vlTH (3) HEAVY-DUTY
STIIINLESS STEEL BI\U. IEl\RING HINGES. (2) SPRING-TYPE a..DS1NG DEVICES. <Il
DIIJR PIA.L, Q) AD.AlSTI\JLE BI\LL CATCH. ANI (1) 8" LIICKI\BlE BARREL BDLT F'lIR
USE IN SEClRING TII: IlUD..DING VII:N lilT IN USE. ANY IDJJLE IIlIlIlS SHIILL IE
PAllVIIlED VITH Q) Nl:TAL IISTRIGAL. ALL DIIIlR F'RI\II:S THAT DO NOT SIT III THE
CIJICRET[ STEN VALL SMALL EXTEND " F'RlJl TII: JDTTDN llF' IlIIIR SlAJ. ALL
IUIRS SHALl. HAVE Q) HIliH-TEIf' DlIIIR $VEEP INSTALLED ON TIt! DllTSVING SJJJ[
llF' THE: 1IlllIR. TII: IlIIIR SVEEP SMALL DRAG _ST TII: F'INlSII:D FUIJR
LEVEL..
8) V1N1IlIV ClOSURES SHALL IE PAINTED 12 GA HDT-JlIPPED GALVNfIZED SIMLE
LEAVES VITH A I' DEEP PIIN F'RHIE DESlGN. EACH NON-BIIlN AIJIJI CLOSURE
ACCESSJILE f'lllIIl THE GRllUND SHALl. IE PRDVIDED VITH m STAINLl:SS STEEL
CONTINUlIS HINGE:, Q) SLNl LATCH. <ll KEYED LEVER III TIt! EXTERIIR SIDE llF'
THE a..DSURE. AND Q) PIISSI\GI: LEVI:R ON THE IHTERIIR SIDE llF' TII: CLOSURE.
EACH IllIN-BUIlN RIIJM CLIIS\Il[ NOT IICCESSla.E F'R1Il THE GRllUND SHALL IE
PROVIIlED VITH Q) STI\INL[SS STEEL Cll'lTINUIS HINGE. Q) SlAIlLATCH. m
PASSAGE LEVER III THE EXTERIIR SIDE IIf' THE Q.IISURE.. AND (J) PIISSAGE LEVER
ON THE: INTERllIR SIDE llF' TIt! Q.OSURE. EAOt BURN RDIIN CLOSURE SIlALL BE
PAIIVIDED VITH DNI: OF' THE I\JDVE HNlDI/ARE SETS NfD SHALL INCLUDE (3)
"PI\DGENITE:' IIlUlTING OtNlNELS WELDED III THE: INTERllIR SIDE DF' THE CLlISI.ft[.
ALL a..DSURES S!fALL IE INSTALLED VITH EQUAL SPACING BET\lEEN THE: F'RI\II:D
lIPENING NlD TIE a.DSURE PAN. ALL SILL ELEVATIIJIS SHIILL IE 42" I\JllVE
F'INIS11:D F'LIIIR ELI:VATIIIM
9) F'UJlIl DEDCS ADDVI: GRI\IJE: SHALL IE Cll'lCRETI: OVER GAL VIINIZED L~ 'e- DECK
F'ASTEll:D DIRECTLY TO F'LDlIR JmSTS USING SELF'-DRILLJIlGISELF'-THREI\DJNG TEK
~1i.\I C"A~T~~ AT ~. I'll". !f<<:'~"fT~ ...._._ ,"-!:':ID !E~C' !UAI_!. ~J!~
rlELD aJTTING AIm F'lTTING AS RElIUlRED TO IIlXOlIIIDl\TE TII: BUILDING
CIJIF1GlRIITIIIN. ClINCRETE F'ILL SHALL IE 4' IN DEPTH. CIJlCRETE SHALL IE II
SIlAlL IltiGREGATE ClJ'CRETE VITH F'l1ER MESH REINFIIlCING. Cll'lCRETE SHALL IE
PITCII:D TO EXTERllIR VALLS NfD DIIIlR OPENING$. F'INISH SHALL IE A LIGHT
ilRIDl F'lNISH. <lXJHCRETE F'ILL IY DTII:1l$)
10) ALL CORRUGATED RIXF NlD VALL PNfELS ARE T1I IE PREF'IIIISII:D IN lINE OF' 13
STIINJII\RD aJLIJRS. CllNPIIlIID CORRUGATED VALL PNlELS ARE 3'-~' VIJIE AND 4-'"
DEEP. CDIPIlJND CllRRUGATED RDllF' PNlELS ME TO IE 3'-5' VIDE AND 7-'"
DEEP. ALL VALL AND RIXF PANELS ME TO It DDL TED AT ,. Be. INCRENI:NTS
UTLIZlNG IV DIIlNETER BI1 T F'IISTENERS PRDVIDED IN A CDLIIl TO MATCH TIt!
VALL III RIIF PANEL CILIIl.
Ul ALL INTERIIlR VALL PARTlTIIINS SHALL IE CDHSTRUCTED llF' 4-'" X 18 GA
GALVIINIZED I€TAL STUDS AT 24' Be. AND 4'" X 18 GA GALVI\NIZED NETAL
TRACK. IILL SII1ES llF' I!lTERJIIR PlIIlTlTmNS NOT RD:EIVING JUIN RlIIIM PANELS
SHALL RtcDVE 18 GA GAL VAIlIZED Sll:l:TING F'IISTEll:D VITH 18 X ", LDV
PRlJF"R.E TEk $CREVS A1' :!- D.C.
DESIGN LOADS
RlIIIF' LOAD -- 100 PS,
F'LlIIIR LDI\D -- 100 PS,
ATTIC LOAD -- 100 PS,
V1ND LDI\D -- HPH
V1ND I:XPDSURE -. --
~
~~~
~. . . . ~ .t
~~~ fI
Sill[ nJJTlfG DWf'El
ERECTION NOTE - STAGGER CHANNEL AS SHO'vlN
NflT TD SCALE:
!
"
..
~
t
i
a
~
>-~
~O
O~
~:5
U):J
W:::iE
>-
-U)
L1;-C)
:::iE~
~Z
:5<c
<C~
:J:W
~~
1.1)-
LL
6
i:l
~ J, !
11! ~; .
~ ~ 0.: B
~iilij
I~f
_ J, I:f
5 CD f
~~
cr:
o
~
:>
~
ii)
C>
~
z
~
l-
I-
Z
w
:!:
~
cf
w
o
w
cr:
u:
:z:
~
~
~
o
:z:
~
1
.
i
@
,.
'"
/
I
I
@
.
i
@
","
/
I
t
t
.
@
I'-U.
-
,
,
@\
SECTION 'A'
i
!
IZ'
","
/
I
I
BURN ROOM 112
p_n: UIER III AU. VALLS.
1IlIIIRS. YINIlIIYS. AND CELDIi
sa: llDEIlAl.
MIln: u
I@
\
,
'-
@t
I
/
,.'"
71'-5"
~:S'
-,
,
8\
· Si
J !
L7-,14
sa:
]
:tiN
..,
~ .
I
\
,
,
--
'"
/
I
I
SECTION 'B'
@t
I
/
-'"
,
....
,
@\
TO~ER AND RESIDENTIAL 2ND FLOOR PLAN AND ANNEX ROOF PLAN
I'IIT TO SCALE
1'-11-
-
,
,
@\
SECTION 'A'
@t
I
/
,.....
i
f
I
\
,
....
'-
,.
'"
/
I
t
@II@
I \
/ ,
..../ .....-
71'-5
3S
-,
,
@\
..
t=:;~ "
I
I
/
-'"
..
.
-...... /-
, /
8 \,'
\@
\
,
"
SECTION 'B'
t
I
/
'"
-,.
-
,
,
@\
TO~ER. RESIDENTIAL. AND ANNEX 1ST FLOOR PLAN
NDT TD SCALE
i
i
I
-,
,
@ \
I
/
./
-....
14'-6-
ECHON 'c' ROOF"
4'-6
","
/
,'@
--
,
,
\
\
SECTION 'C'
BURN ROOM III
PAIllEMTE LINER III ALL VAlJ..S
IIIIRS. VINJJOW'S, Nm CELlNG
/....~
I
\@
\
,
....,
t
I
/
'"
--
i
I
I:
"
~
~
J
i
!
Ii
z
i
>0:::
0:::0
01-
1-:5
en:)
W:E
>-
-en
U;-e>
:E~
O:::Z
:5c(
c(~
J:W
1-0:::
10 -
lL
8 /
/
,.'"
.--.......
--.---...
.-
------
11.-...... __
:.:.,~=r:=--:-..
------
-...-----
-----.
....-.-..-.
I\:r':'-=--='.~
-...-....-
-----.
-
-=---====::.
--..-.-.-
--...--.
..---....-.
-------
-.--
i
... ~ I
i Ii? 0
D _ t
t! J. !
~ ~; !
~ ~ '" a
~ i i Ii
g . ,
"J.~
'" lii ~
& ~ ~
0:::
o
~
:>
::?:
en
c.?
z
~
C?
l-
I-
Z
w
::?:
Ii:
~
w
o
W
0:::
u::
a;
o~
~
~~
~=
~i!5
~~
2
.
i
I
ft'-U.
@
-.J.-,6.-2---J.
3'-2' CIlA~J
lJ'EN1NG
PAllAPETVM.L,
(4) 10.0001 RATED
R"'PPELLING ANCHORS
@
I~
SEE~
.J.-,t3'-2'-J.
3'-2- tHA~~J
OPENING
ROOF HATCH 'WITH
LADDER TO F'UJ1lR BElDV'
.
@
i
I
-
"
,
8\
e:l'-U.
/-
I'
I
I
<1'-:::::1
a'-~I
.
@
SECTION 'A'
i
~-"
I ~.~-~_.~.)
8'-0" CHAIN D"ENIN~
1
p....,.\~111 PAI.I I
<l5
~ YEAR ASPHAl.. T SHINGLES
OVER 1\' rLG PI.. YV~t\
WITH 151 FELT OVERLAY \
i
~ 11111111 /11111
'1 1111 " 11/1
II l ~'ru.1'r
LI "
ill II 1111
I ILJrl,I,l
~ rr
III
II
II
III
111
II II
11111
/I 1111
II
II III II
T 11/1
.J, ILJ I
1;:(11111
/I
11
I
I
1111
3-lINE OSHA "'OR""A'!;)
ON THREE SIDES [F ROOF
TO~ER 3RD FLOOR PLAN AND RESIDENTIAL ATTIC PLAN
NOT TO SCALE
11/1 III 1]: II n II II~ I
1111 II l "1111 1111\11
II 111111 III ~ II II
111111 ~IIIIIIII lll'r'llllllllll,,:1
II I 11111 ~ 1111111
II I /t II It'~ Il:ijD
II
I [1/1 I
II " II III 111111
11
'fr-6
"-2"
III I
'1);
/
8'-0' CHAIN D"ENIN z-/ /
48. X 48' PLYVOOD otlP OUyJ
r\ II I~
:m
..
,
[II
III
III
I
II
I I
I UU
II
~
I
TO~ER AND RESIDENTIAL ROOF PLAN
NOT TO SCALE
i
I
56'-11'
a5'
SECTION 'B' ATTIC
I
"
/II
II I
II
i
I
-,
,
@ \
I
I
-_/
@
~
;.,
@
@
@
i
/-- ............
I' ,
" 8 \
1'-11'
SECTION 'A'
r--l
I 1
I I
TO~ER 5TH FLOOR PLAN
NOT TD SCALE
i
,,-- -,
I' ,
" 8 \
a' -::.::::1
3'-~1
~
SECTION 'A'
1'-11"
TO~ER 4TH FLOOR PLAN
NOT TO SCALE
i
I
i
I
>cr::
cr::O
01-
1-:5
C/)::J
w:E
>-
-C/)
U;-C)
:E~
cr::Z
:5-
c(g
:I:W
I-cr::
II) -
LL
i
o
~
~
I
f
l
~
fi
i~J
12 ,J, !
Iii .
~ ~ E
lL IL
~~f
I. ~
_ ,J, 1:1
.. Iii II:
lit iii g
a:
~
::>
:!:
(i)
G
z
~
~
l-
I-
Z
w
:!:
Ii:
~
w
o
w
Q;
u..
---......
--.---...
.-
-------
a__.._ __
'-":;'I.-::=-~.
~-=--:r,.-:=..
.-----
..._'_81--
r.=:.-=--...:t."I
-...-....-
.----.
-
-=-tli~==r
--..---.-
---..--.-
..---....-..
-------
-..-
~'"
~:z:
E~
c;:: .......
-8
-8 a::
~~~
FEf2
~a:::c::t
~~~
3
.
.
.
@
zd
~!i!
~r 1'''
~~
....fTl "'0
i:l" BZ
z:;:
..-; ....
...~
~ oS!
f;;'-" ...,
iii
...... ll:
t::l
fTl
fTl
r
fTl
<
J>
-;
......
0
2
@)
1) ~ f l 1 f , e
51'"
=i
i;
!l~
o@
j " 1.'11,
"
"
'"
"
@)
i!5"
....;u
i:lO
..2
~-;
...
(/.)
......
Cl
fTl
fTl
r
r'1
<
J>
-;
......
o
2
,1- ,
'iJ I
"
"
"
,/
"
,
"
,
,
,
"
. '"
.,t
"
"
"
"
.
I'd ~ J
@
.
.
.
.
iii
=
=
.
~J
@
FRONT 51 DE
AND LEFT SlOE
[l[VA nONS
II!,II- 1111;1 ill=i.II.I-
;1111 I I .1. Ijlllll .1
.~J ~ h,I~~11
III!!! 11::1 I Ill. =
5TH ALARM - FIVE STORY
FIRE TRAINING SIMULATOR
FIRE DEPARTMENT TRAINING SIMULATOR
____ t,..............."...a...1
A lllV. t:1F oI.s.c. NC
8121 IICND OWR.AND P-. ICS lI821+
1U. 81J-.__Je83 fAX: 813-__7078
TlIU. "- 1-__.11I1-= ....lraInlngto.....-.
~
.
.
.
@)
I :II :II
I
~;o I II II
............ I
....C1 I . .
cI I
~-i I
I . .
r-
"'C/l I
........ I :II
t::::l r' ·
f'Tl "', .
rT'f ;1 : . .
r
f'Tl ;i l · .
< .
J> ~~ , Jill'"
,
-i ,
,
........ ,
0 I
Z I II .
I
I = .
~
l' @
= :II
iii II
.
Si . .
. A'a \ j 1 t
:1 II
~~ I :II =
...,
I . .
@)
\~ I
I ..
I
I .
: .
I
I .
~;o
....rT'f
clJ>
..;0
SC/l
........
t:;
rT'f
f'Tl
r
f'Tl
<
J>
-i
.......
o
z
iii
.
..
.
@)
~} ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ e
II!'.'I l'lill illli-. ill 5TH ALARM - FIVE STORY ____ tnwM__~~om I
dldU I ,. pJlJ11 .1
<..n 'iiiljll .IIrI ~ij!l II FIRE TRAINING SIMULATOR A IllY. OF J.s.c. tiC
REAR SIDE 1121 BOND 0-'- P-. KS lIlI214
AND RIGHT SIDE FIRE DEPARTMENT TRAINING SIMULATOR 1U. .,3--...JlI0J fAX: 913--...70711
ElEVAll0NS II..'! ,..al I Ell · Tllt.l. PME 1-__;001-_ ...."'*'lnV'............
.'.. .1 ~~
.
SLAM LATC\
STRIKE PLATE ~ \
".
INTERIDR HANDLE
FIT CONTINUOUS HINGE
BETIofEEN VERTICAL
AND CORRUGATED PANEL-......, i.
,
\'7XTERIOR
4i~NDLE
TOP
FIELD DRILL HINGEJt
AND USE PANEL
BOL TS TO SECURE
VIE'v/
NOTE' CUT 'lf6' SHANK FOR CORRECT FIT ON
ALL BURN ROOM AND NON-BURN ROOM LEVERS
I
I
I
I
.
I I
INTERIOR ::
VERTICAL ~ . ,
,
PANEL Y.
BOL ~Ji
,.
I
,
,
"
I
I
I
,. .
,
I
i.
,
I
i.
,
I
,
I.
,
,
: .
I
, ,
, ,
I.,
, ,
, I
4-
-k
, ,
, I
,.,
o
,
,
I
,
,
,
I
,
I
I
I
,
I
,
I
I
I
,
,
,
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
,
I
I
,
STAINLESS STEEL /i I
CONTINUOUS HINGEJ i . I
, ,
I ,
-+
-k
, ,
I I
,.,
rDRIP LIP HEADER
,
.....
.....
'.....
,
.....,
..........
.....
.....
.....,
,
'.....
.....
'.....
.....
..........
,
.....
.....
.....
'"
'"
'"
'"
'"
'"
'"
'"
",'"
'"
..-
..-
'"
'"
..-
'"
'"
'"
..-
'"
'"
'"
'"
..-
..-
'"
EXTERIOR VIE'v/
CLOSURE INSTALLATION DETAIL
NOT TO SCALE
O,OOOtl RAPPELLING ANCHOR
I
'6
~
I
(
'I
.
L4X4X~' SPANNIN
ACROSS (3) JOIST
MEMBERS ATTACHED
WITH (2) ~' BOLTS
A T EACH JOIST
RAPPELLING ANCHOR INST ALLA nON DETAILS
NOT TO SCALE
&
W
I--
I--
::J
:r
'"
u
~
~~
D",
I--z
3<1:
. '"
-~
1<1:
~~
gj~
'"
:-'z
" W
M~
I--
W
""
'"
W
01
<I:
~
<L
>-
I--
>- .
I--u..
....:
I....;<i.
u, .
<[M
~d
-,'"
-'u
tt
DRIP LIP
HEADER
tr~
z~
<l:W
t1~o
::J,I
z:r..-
w'"
W ~
~8D
tJ::o -
""<1:1
i~L
~ -
~
c
" TOP ANGLE
- '-SHUTTER STOP
SHUTTER
SILL
<=l
).~
I--<=l~
::Jz~
D<l:W
1--1--1--
a""~
~~~
IW
.>8
1--1--
~WI--
D""<I:
7~~
M~<[
~
CLOSURE SECTION DETAIL
NOT TO SCALE
I
1
1=1
l::I
=:I
I
JAMB @1 INTERIOR 'WALL
O,OOOtl RAPPEL LING ANCHOR
NOT TO SCALE
1=1
l::I
11
1,
;=J
~
JAMB @ TUBE STEEL VERTICAL
NOT TO SCA LE
, 170 KSI THREADED SHAFT
u
n
a~
1=1
,tj
1
, ~ /:' CONCRETE FILL
" , ,.' .-}
~ 'X~' BARGRATE :~~:;. K-.:'A. j:
\( V 14 GAUGE CHANNE~ L7 ~'C DECK
I 7~' ROOF JOIST r ~
~ 3' ROUND IofASHER r--m ~ I 0' ROOF JOIST
~~UBLE NUT L4X4X~' SPANNING~' ~;
ACROSS (3) JOIST 3' ROUND WASHER
MEMBERS ATTACHED OUBLE NUT
WITH (2) ~' BOLTS
AT EACH JOIST
, 170 KSI THREADED SHAFT
~l
--.:JJ
JAMB @ 12 GA CEE VERTICAL
NOT TO SCALE
~] HARDI'ARE HARDIofARE SETS
HI H2 H3 H4 HS H6 H7 He H9 HID HlI HI2
ss ..n _ 3 3 3 3 3 3 6 ,
IS CDNTINUlllS HINliE I I I I
LJICICUT I , ,
PASSAGE SET , I
IIIIl PII..L , I I
MU. CATOI 1 I I
L _ CUISE 2 2 4
_L XLT I I 2
1Wq~JO'ES ASlllJGN.. , I
IIIIl S\IEEP , , I I 2 2
SUlII UlTOl I , , ,
SUlII UlTOl s_ , , , ,
IIl1DIIIA ~-ST_ , ,
INTEllJIIIl ~-IURN IlIDl , ,
LlICICING -..: , I
MM-LlDCIIG ~ I ,
"'INDO'" SHUTTER SCHEDULE
6 , ~ II s B e
I .. I
U S~ I! ! ... i i
~ i1 J i
\II LlICICING _-1lJIN IlIDl SIIlTTER 3'-3' 0'-0' 3'-2' 4'-J,. 42- Ie G90 l'lMIEIl alAT '"
V2 UICICIIG .... IlIDl SIIITTEJl 3'-3' 4'-0' 3'-2' 4'-1. 42" Ie G90 PlMlEIl alAT IGl ""1IGENnE INTEllJIIIl F'N:E
V3 LlICICING AnlC SIIITTEJl 3'-3' 3'-0' 3'-2' 3'-1. 3' 12 G90 PlMlEIl alAT '"
V4 IDH.lDCIIG __.... IlIDl SHlIT'I'D 3'-3' 4'-0' 3'-2" 4',.,' 42" Ie G90 PlMlEIl alAT HIlI
\IS IDH.lDCIIG IlJIN IlIDl SIIlTTER 3'-3' 4'-0' 3'-2" 4"-1' 42" 12 G90 PlMlEIl COAT IU2 PADGENm: INTEllJIIIl FN:E
V6 IDH.lDCIIG ATTIC SlIITTER 3'-3' 3'-0' 3'-2' 3'-1' 3' 12 G90 PlMlEIl COAT HIlI
~"'~ Ii I ; I
,~~ 101 EXlIRIIIR F' SECTDIN A
'02 EXlIRIIIR F' SECTDIN .
103 EX1IJUIR F' SECTDIN .
104 SECTIIl . F' SECTDI C
105 EXlIRIIIR F' SECTIIIN C
~' 201 SECTDIN . F' .... RIDI 12
.....V
FRAME ANCHOR ISO
NDT TO SCALE
~D"~l
J
F
r-"D'1
. J
FF
~
~
I
· ~ i
i j.t
~ i:! J. !
I ~~;E
T.Do s~ i ~:; 0.; II
I--....J Tn S.D.G. l ; ~ II
\.1 ~-6. ~ ~ ~ 1
1 IV ~~DF' F'RNE /IIP :: i
~~if"f I I ;~~
I' I' I'
r.('r---.('~r.('
1'--3'-
. .
I I
lI-F" VALL L t "" _llll~sg.~.,
W-lP" '-1IITTIIIl OF' FlW€
I ON STEM VALL
r~<r"
.... ....
f f
~-
..s .('1'
J
j
..(, 1'. I' I'
~r'f---.('~
1'--3'---,
.
.,
IIITTIIN IF. F'RIlflI;.. L'"
ON STEM VALL '\ ,,"_
II
III
~1~"
....
f
~
v
VI
VII
VIII
~~YPES
UJCA TION
HOLLD'" METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SCHEDULE
GENERAL FRAME
DDD~
f i ~~I~ i
Ii ! .~.IJ~
I - 3'-0" 7'-0' LlIl HI , 16 jA6l 4-314' 3-314' I' I' ED F' II /Ml
, PR 3'-0" 7'-0' RItA H7 D 16 i'6C 4-314 ~314 .' I' ED F' II A6I
I 3'-0" 7'-0" _ HI , 16 Me 4-3/4 3-310'.' I' ED F' IIIl6ll
. - 3'-0' 7'-0" LH NO , 16 Iro6l 4-314'3-314'" " ED F' II Il6ll PAllGENITE IITDl1D1l F'N:E
, 3'-0" 7'-0" LH H3 , 16 Me 4-3/4' 0-314 " I' ED F' II Il6ll PAIIlDDTE INTDlIDIl F'ACE
I 3'-0" 7'-0' LH H4 V 16 Me 4-3/0' -314 I' I' ED F II Il6ll PAIUJIITE INTERIIIl F'ACE
Il~11
~
Iii ~ ..
I, J !
!
>0::
0::0
01-
I-~
UJ:J
W:E
>-
-UJ
~C)
:E~
O::Z
~<C
<C~
Zw
1-0::
It) -
LL
c::
f?
:5
::l
~
en
"
~
~
~
f-
f-
Z
W
~
!r
~
w
o
w
c::
u:
---..- !
:=:a----... I
-----../
.11._..... __
._~._... .
..-. '.I.__-:\:
-----
~._.-...-
.----.
...-.-..-.
11____.. _
.----..
-...-....-
-----.
-
~_:a.:._===r
--..---.-
---..--.,
..-------..
-------
~..-
-'
~
It.. .. ~~~
!ill:!~~~
LUO<.:>
[Ii~~~
d~c..
. . ~~51e
ga:::O:::
2:8=
lE=~
6
0 City of Clearwater, Florida
CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS
AND
STANDARDS
PART A CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS
SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION IVa SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION IVb FIRE SUPPLY AND STORAGE BUILDING
SECTION IVc PROPOSED TRAINING FACILITY AT FIRE STATION NO. 48
SECTION IVd BURN TOWER SPECIFICATION
SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
PART B CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS (INCORPORATED BY
REFERENCE)
100 SERIES STREET SECTIONS AND DETAILS
200 SERIES STORM DETAILS
300 SERIES SANITARY SEWER DETAILS
400 SERIES WATER DETAILS
500 SERIES RECLAIMED WATER DETAILS
600 SERIES EROSION & SILTATION CONTROL DETAILS
700 SERIES MISCELLANEOUS (DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE)
900 SERIES LANDSCAPE DETAILS
PART C STORMWATER MANAGEMENT DESIGN CRITERIA
(INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE)
APPENDIX
MINIMUM TESTING FREQUENCY REQUIREMENTS (SITE WORK)
REPORT OF GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATION
OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP)
EXISTING TRAINING FACILITIES AND BURN TOWER ASBESTOS REPORT
Prepared in the Office of the City Engineer
SECTION I
ADVERTISEMENT
OF
BID
•
SECTION I
ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
FIRE TRAINING FACIIdTES AT FIRE STATION No. 48
CONTRACT #05-0002-FD
CLEARWATER, FLORIDA
•
Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this project are available for inspection and/or
purchase by prospective bidders at the Municipal Services Bldg., Engineering Department Office,
2nd Floor, 100 So. Myrtle Ave., Clearwater, Florida, between the hours of 8:30 a.m. and 4:30 p.m.
Monday thru Friday, ON Friday, May 4, 2007, until no later than close of business three days
preceding the bid opening. A charge of $100, none of which will be refunded, will be made for each
set.
The work for which proposals are invited consists of: construction of a 8,967 SF train
facility building and renovation to the existing training building; construction of a 4,400 I
pre-engineered metal storagelsupply building; construction of a 1,934 SF pre-manufactur
'training burn tower; installation of approximately 8,000 SY of asphalt paving; expansion
the existing stormwater pond; and related utilities.
A Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference will be held on Thursday, May 10, 2007, in Room 130 at 1
Municipal Services Bldg., 100 So. Myrtle Ave., 1" Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520, at
AM. All prospective bidders MUST attend this Pre-Bid Conference in order to be eligible
submit sealed proposals for this project.
Sealed proposals will be received by the
at the Municiaal Services Bldg.. 100
at the Purchasing Office,
5520, until 1:30 P.M. on Thursday, May 31, 2007, and publicly opened and read at that hour
place for the FIRE TRAINING FACILITIES AT FIRE STATION No. 48 (05-0002-FD).
A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affida,
and proposal form is available only to City pre-qualified contractors in the construct
category of COMMERCIAL BUILDINGS with a minimum pre-qualification amount
Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified but who may be interested as a possible
subcontractor, supplier, etc., may purchase a "Subcontractor" package consisting of plans,
specifications, and pay items worksheet.
JA 10% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects.
right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids.
City of Clearwater, Florida
iam B. Horne, II, City Man
•
Fire Station 48 Revised Section 1_041807.doc Page 1 of 1
Revised. 4/29/2007
SECTION II
INSTRUCTION
TO
BIDDERS
•
•
•
SECTION II
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Table of Contents:
SECTION H '
...............................................................................................................
1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS ........................
..
. 1
.
...................................
...........
2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS ................................
.. 1
.
...............................................
3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE ................................. 1
4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA ....................... 2
................................................
5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND ................................ 3
....................................................
6 CONTRACT TIlVIE ........................................
. 3
.......................................................
..........
7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES .......................................... 3
...................................................
8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT ...............
. 3
...
......................................
9 SUBCONTRACTORS ..................................................
. 3
...
................................................
10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM... ....... 00 ....... ........ 0 ........... 4
. ....................................................
11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS .........................»............................. 4
..........................................
12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS .................................................... 5
13 REJECTION OF BIDS ................................................ 5
....................................................
14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER ................................
. 5
.
............................................
15 OPENING OF BIDS ..........................................
.
. 5
.
...................
.........................................
16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES ........................................... 5
17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE ............................. 6
18 AWARD OF CONTRACT, ... o ........ ooo ..... . ...... 0 ..... 0000 .... 0.0.0 ....... 7
........................................
19 BID PROTEST ...................................................... 7
............................................................
20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT ................................................................................................. 8
Sectionll.doc
Revised: 4/29/2007
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
1.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are available for the sum stated in the
Advertisement for Bid from the Office of the Purchasing Manager. This amount represents
reproduction costs and is non-refundable. A complete bidders package containing plans,
specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and bid/proposal form is available only
to pre-qualified bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified but who
may be a possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a
"Subcontractor" package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items.
1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor
the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of
incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub-bidders or others.
1.3 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so
only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant
any other permission to use the documents for any other purpose.
2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS
2.1 Each prospective Bidder must pre-qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the
City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial
resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining
drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre-
qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering
Department, Engineering Services Division at P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758-
4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street
address only) or by phone at (727) 562-4750. All qualification data must be completed and
delivered to the Director of Engineering at the above address not later than fourteen (14)
days prior to the time set for the receipt of bids. Bidders currently pre-qualified by the City
do not have to make reapplication.
3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE
3.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract
Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in
any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and
abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and
(d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and
notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents.
3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification
of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have
been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely
upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports but not upon non-technical
data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof for the
purposes of bidding or construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical
conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities)
which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in
preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical
SectionII.doc 1 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of
bidding or construction.
3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground
Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the
City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not.
assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in
the Contract Documents.
3.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective
Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions,
possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing
conditions appear in the General Conditions.
3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any
additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any
additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface
and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost,
progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other
terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such
explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for
submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former
condition upon completion of such explorations and tests.
3.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access
thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are
identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for
temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by
the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing
structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the
Contract Documents.
3.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the
Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that,
without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required
by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures
of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the
Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding
of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work.
4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
4.1 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the
Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response
to such questions will be issued by Addenda, either by mail or facsimile transmission, to all
parties recorded by the Purchasing Manager as having received the Bidding Documents.
Questions received less than ten (10) days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be
answered Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and
other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect.
SectionlI.doc 2 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
4.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the
City or Engineer.
5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND
5.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in
an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of
a certified or cashiers check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting the
requirements of the General Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted
5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed
the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the
Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the
Agreement and famish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract
by the City Commission, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will
be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable
chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of
the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid
opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after
the Bid opening.
5.3 The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company
qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida.
6 CONTRACT TIME
6.1 The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set
forth in the Technical Specifications.
7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
7.1 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement
8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
8.1 The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the
Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or
"or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications
that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance
will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract
Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General
Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications.
9 SUBCONTRACTORS
9.1 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so
requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer
an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence
of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the
Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed
fifty percent (50%) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If
the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed
SectionII.doc 3 Revised: 4/29/2007
•
•
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award
of the Contract.
Agreement to the City Commission, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable
substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder
declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest
and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and
other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not
constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City of any Bidder. Any
Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom
the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the
City Commission will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such
acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General
Conditions.
9.2 No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or
organization against whom he has reasonable objection.
10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM
10.1 The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in
ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. The Bidder
must state in the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations
or erasures, the price for which he will perform the work as required by the Contract
40 Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump
sum for each section or item shall be for famishing all equipment, materials, and labor for
completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be
found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the
work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the
work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct
proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items.
10.2 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-
president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the
corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be
shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or
partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind
the corporation or partnership.
10.3 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general
partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the
partnership shall be shown below the signature.
10.4 All names shall be typed or printed below the signature.
11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS
11.1 Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the
Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in the bid envelope provided with the bid
documents. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope with the
notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and addressed to the City of Clearwater,
attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the
SectionH.doc 4 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
Advertisement until the time and date specified. Telegraphic or facsimile bids received by
the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted
12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
12.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the
manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of
Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person
duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to
submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for
receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified.
12.2 After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for
typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a
typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the
requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction
is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or
modify any bid.
13 REJECTION OF BIDS
13.1 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City
reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds
for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized
alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or
irregularities of any kind Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City
believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that
Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful
financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the
City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in
the interest of the public.
14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER
14.1 Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists
among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future
proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non-Collusion Affidavit
contained in the Contract Documents.
15 OPENING OF BIDS
15.1 Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement
for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids.
16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES
16.1 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as
specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply
with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which
in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees
SectionII.doc 5 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical
Specifications.
16.2 The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any
construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically
stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be
stated by the Contractor.
16.3 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law.
The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales
tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements.
17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE
17.1 In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor
Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders
with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with
respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of
commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has
implemented a drug-free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process.
Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied
bidders have a drug-free workplace program. In order to have a drug-free workplace
program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six
statements and the accompanying certification statement:
(1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution,
dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and
specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such
prohibition.
(2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy
of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and
employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for
drug abuse violations.
(3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that
are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1).
(4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of
working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will
abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or
plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled
substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the
workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction.
(5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance
or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee
who is so convicted
(6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through
implementation of this section.
I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above
requirements.
SectionII.doc 6 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section R - Instructions to Bidders
18 AWARD OF CONTRACT
18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words.
Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in
favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of
figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum.
18.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or
not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may
be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and
experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by
the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City
deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility,
qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and
other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time.
18.3 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive
Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the
best interest of the City.
18.4 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items
in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will
be awarded to only one Contractor.
19 BID PROTEST
19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the
solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with
the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with
protest procedures set forth in this section.
19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE:
A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for
proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the
opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposal. Opening dates for bids or
due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/request document itself.
B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of
five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each
bidder, which ever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders
upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite
specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly
been violated.
C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be
granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have
knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of
intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions
should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception.
D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five
business days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully
Sectionl1doc 7 Revised: 4/29!2007
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
coordinated with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City
Manager.
E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager,
he/she may then submit in writing within five business days of receipt of that
response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original
formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City
Manager.
F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the
matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten work
days of receipt of the appeal.
19.3 STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the
Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all
administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written
determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best
interest of the City.
20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT
20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections
553.60-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and
Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650
Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws.
•
•
SectionII.doc 8 Revised: 4/29/2007
SECTION III
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
SECTION III
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Table of Contents:
SECTION III ..................................................................................:........................................... .... i
GENERAL CONDITIONS ..................................................................................................... .... i
1 DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................. 1
2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS ........................................................................................... 4
2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE .......................... .. 4
2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS .......................................................................................... .. 4
2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING
THE PROJECT .............................................................................................................. .. 4
2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION .................................................................... .. 5
2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ................................. ..................................... .. 5
3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT ....................................................................... .. 5
3.1 INTENT ......................................................................................................................... .. 5
3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES ................................................ .. 6
4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;
REFERENCE POINTS .................................................................................................. .. 6
• 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS ....................................................................................... .. 6
4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS .......................................................................... .. 6
4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES ................................... .. 7
4.4 REFERENCE POINTS ....................................................................•............................. .. 7
5 BONDS AND INSURANCE ............................................................................................ 7
5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND ............................. .. 7
5.2 INSURANCE ................................................................................................................... . 8
5. 2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATIONINSURANCE .......................................................... . 9 "
5. 2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMA GE COVERAGE ............................. . 9
5. 2.3 COMPREHENSIVEAUTOMOBILELIABILITY .................................................... 10
5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS .................................................................................................. 10
6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES ..................................................................... 11
6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE ............................................................. 11
6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................... 11
6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS .............................................................. 12
6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS........ 12
6.5 USE OF PREMISES ...................................................................................................... 13
6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES ................................... 14
6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS ...................................................................................... 14
6.8 PERMITS ....................................................................................................................... 14
6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION ..................................................................................... 15
6.10 EMERGENCIES ............................................................................................................ 15
• 6.11 DRAWINGS .................................................................................................................. 16
Revised S ection lll.doc i Revised: 5/09/2007
Section DI - General Conditions
611.1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES ...................................................................... . 16 •
611.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS ........................................................................................... . 17
611.3 CAD STANDARDS .................................................................................................. . 19
611.4 DELIVERABLES :................................................................................................... .20
6.1 2 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE .......................... . 20
6.1 3 CONTINUING THE WORK ....................................................................................... . 21
6.1 4 INDEMNIFICATION ................................................................................................... . 21
7 OTHER WORK ............................................................................................................. . 22
7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE ....................................................................................... . 22
7.2 COORDINATION ........................................................................................................ .22
8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY ..................................................................................... . 23
9 ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION .............................................. 23
9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE .................................................................................. . 23
9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS ....................................................... . 23
9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK ........................................................................ 23
9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS .................................. 24
9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES ........................................................................................ 24
9.6 LIMITATIONS ON ENGINEER'S RESPONSIBILITIES ........................................... 25
10 CHANGES IN THE WORK .......................................................................................... 25
11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE ................................................................... 26
11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE .................................................................... 26
11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT ....................... 26
11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK .................................................................................................... 27
12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME .................................................................... 27
13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE
OF DEFECTIVE WORK ...................................................................................... .. 28
13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION ........................................................................................... 28
13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK ....................................................................................... 29
13.3 ENGINEER MAY STOP THE WORK ........................................................................ 29
13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK ......................................... 29
13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD ...................................................................... 29
13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ................................................................... 30
13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK ....................................................... 30
14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION ......................................... 31
14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT ........................................................... 31
14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE ............................................................... 31
14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS ................................ 32
14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION ............................................................................................ 32
14.5 FINAL INSPECTION ................................................................................................... 33
14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT ................................................................... 33
14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE ................................................................... 33
14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS ................................................................................................. 34
Revised Section Ill.doc ii Revised: 5/09/2007
Section BI - General Conditions
15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION .................................................... 34
15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK ...................................................................... 34
15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE ...................................................................................... 34
15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE ........................................... 36
16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION ............................................................................................. 36
17 MISCELLANEOUS .........................................................................................................36
17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS ................................................................. 36
17.2 GIVING NOTICE .......................................................................................................... 36
17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM ..................................................................................................... 36
17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED ..................................... 37
17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT ................................................................................. 37
17.6 RENEWAL OPTION .................................................................................................... 37
0
•
Revised Section Ill.doc iii Revised: 5/09/2007
DEFINITIONS
Section 111- General Conditions
Addenda
Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct
or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents.
Agreement
The written contract between OWNER and CONTRACTOR covering the Work to be
performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part
thereof as provided therein.
Application for Payment
The form accepted by ENGINEER which is to be used by CONTRACTOR in requesting
progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting
documentation -as is required by the Contract Documents.
Approve
The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or
methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given
in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer
to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications.
Bid
The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the
prices for the work to be performed.
Bidding Documents •
The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the
proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids).
Bonds
Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security.
Change Order
A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition,
deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract
Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement.
City
The City of Clearwater, Florida.
Contract Documents
The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid
(including documentation accompanying the bid and any post-Bid documentation
submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the
Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any
Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits
identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of
the Agreement.
Contract Price
The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments)
payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work. •
Revised Section Ill.doc 1 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section III - General Conditions
• Contract Time
The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work.
Contractor
Day
The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement.
A calendar day of twenty-four hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.
Defective
An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory,
faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the
requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the
Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final
payment.
Drawings
The drawings, which will be identified'in Technical Specifications or the Agreement,
which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been
prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop
drawings are not Drawings as so defined.
Engineer
The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the
purposes of this contract, the City Engineer or his duly appointed representative.
Engineer's Consultant
• A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent
professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as
such in the Supplementary Conditions.
Furnish
The words "furnish "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar
meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and
install complete in place and ready for service".
Inspection
The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to
ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and
Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or
overseeing.
Laws and Regulations
Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind
of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction.
Liens
Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal
property.
Milestone
A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate
completion date or time prior to the final completion date.
•
Revised Section Ill.doc 2 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section III - General Conditions
Notice to Proceed •
A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the
Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his
obligations under the Contract Documents.
Owner
The City of Clearwater, Florida
Person
A natural person or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial
entity.
Project
The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents
may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
Partial Utilization
Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is
intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work.
Shop Drawing
All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by
or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard
schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a
supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the
Work.
Specifications
Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of
materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the
Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto.
Subcontractor
A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the
performance of a part of the Work at the site.
Substantial Completion
The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the
opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial
Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so
that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended;
or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment
as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms
"substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the
Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.
Supplementary Conditions
The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions.
Supplier
A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman or vendor having a direct
contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to
be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor.
Revised Section lll.doc 3 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section III - General Conditions
• Surety Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be
responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid,
Performance or Payment Bond.
Underground Facilities
All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such
facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been
installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity,
gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable
television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or
water.
Unit Price Work
Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.
Work
The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof
required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result
of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the
construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as
required by the Contract Documents.
Work Change Directive
A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement
and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or
• responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be
performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or
Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or
documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued
Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract
Price or Contract Times.
2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE
When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to
Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by this
contract.
2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS
Engineer shall furnish to Contractor, four copies of Contract Documents for execution.
Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction.
2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO
PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT
The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor
• shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall
be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run.
Revised Section Ill.doc 4 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section III - General Conditions
2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION
Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the
Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable
field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or
discrepancy _ which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or
clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however,
Contractor shall not be liable to Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in
the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should
reasonably have known thereof.
No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of Owner or Engineer,
either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or
obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without
approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be
the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
Within twenty days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Engineer may
schedule a conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer and others as appropriate to
establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule
of the Work and general Contract procedures.
3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT •
3.1 INTENT
The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor
concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents
are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of
the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be
constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment
which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or
from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will. be furnished and
performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well-
known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials
or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning.
Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Engineer.
Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or
association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such
reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or
code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise
specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard
specification, manual or code (whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the
responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents) shall change the
duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor or Engineer, or any of their agents or employees
from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract
shall be issued by Engineer. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be
insetted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be 40
Revised Section Ill.doc 5 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section III - General Conditions
• read and enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any
such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either
party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion.
The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or
discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary
Conditions, General Conditions, Drawings, Technical Specifications. In a series of Modifications
or Addenda the latest will govern.
3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES
If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or
discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any
provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable. to the performance of the Work or of any
such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor
shall.report it to the Engineer in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work
affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract
Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications,
provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report
any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should
have known thereof.
4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL
CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS
0 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS
Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is
to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are
designated for the use of contractor. Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of
general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which contractor
will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent
changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by Owner, unless otherwise provided
in the Contract Documents.
4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS
Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for
identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical
conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which
have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such
reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract
Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify Engineer in writing of any subsurface or latent
physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those
indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those
conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall
obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and
Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are
subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the
•
Revised Section Ill.doc 6 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section III - General Conditions
contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a •
work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions.
4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES
The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing
Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to
Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise
expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for
the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following
will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i)
reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities
shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of
such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such
Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The
Contractor is required to call the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER
prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a
member of the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER, prior to any
excavation. The LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER is an agency for the
protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in
local telephone directory.
4.4 REFERENCE POINTS
Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which
in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor
shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference
points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner.
Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires
relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the
accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by professionally qualified personnel.
The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information
regarding the provision of construction surveys. Excessive stake replacement caused by
negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the
Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per. hour. Time shall be
computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments with
a minimum charge of one hour.
5 BONDS AND INSURANCE
5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND
Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond and Payment Bond, each in an amount at least
equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all
Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These bonds shall remain in effect at
least one year after the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is
prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish
such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the
form prescribed by the Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named •
in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on
Revised Section lll.doc 7 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section III - General Conditions
Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570
(amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury
Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such
agents' authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section
255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the
Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. The Owner reserves
the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared
bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any
part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents,
the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both
of which must be acceptable to the Owner.
5.2 INSURANCE
Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the
Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below
which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work and
Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or
furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts
any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation, disability
benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily
injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for
damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than
• Contractor's employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary personal injury liability
coverage which are sustained by any person as•a result of an offense directly or indirectly related
to the employment of such person by Contractor, or by any other person for any other reason; (v)
Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible
property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for
damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the
ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with
copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of
insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Owner or any other additional insured)
which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with this paragraph. The
policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased and maintained shall: (i)
include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional
liability) City of Clearwater and any other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary
Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insured, and include coverage for the
respective officers and employees of all such additional insures; (ii) include completed
operations insurance; (iii) include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity
obligations in Article for Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or endorsement
that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at
least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor and to each
other additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a certificate of
insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor as
described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times
thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in
• accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with respect to completed
operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, shall remain in
Revised Section Ill.doc 8 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section III - General Conditions
effect for at least two years after final payment. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other i
additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance
has been issued evidence satisfactory to Owner and any such additional insured, of continuation
of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and telephone number
of the authorized insurance agent for the Insurer.
The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the
following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations:
5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE
Contract Award Amount
Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount
$1,000,000. and Over
(1) Workers' Compensation Statutory Statutory
(2) Employer's Liability $500,000. $1,000,000.
5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE
Comprehensive General Liability including Premise/Operations; Explosion, Collapse and
Underground Property Damage; Products/Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual,
Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities:
Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount
Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over
(1) Bodily Injury: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each
Occurrence Occurrence
$1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual
Aggregate Aggregate
(2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each
Occurrence Occurrence
$1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual
Aggregate Aggregate
(3) Personal Injury, with $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual
employment exclusion deleted Aggregate Aggregate
•
•
Revised Section Ill.doc 9 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section III - General Conditions
•
5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
including all owned (private and others), hired and non-owned vehicles:
Contract Award Amount
Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount
$1,000,000. and Over
(1) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $1,000,000. Each Person
$500,000. Each Accident $1,000,000. Each Accident
(2) Property Damage $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each
Occurrence Occurrence
Receipt and acceptance by the Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other
similar document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages,
which may be less than required by these Contract Documents. Owner shall not be responsible
for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor,
Subcontractors or others in the Work. The Owner may at its option require a copy of the
.Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document
shall provide full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No
deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from the Owner.
• LonQshore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932,
requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of
benefits under the Act either by insuring with an - insurance carrier authorized by the U.S.
Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self-insurer.
For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable
for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7,
8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor
fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to
secure the payment of compensation.
5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS
Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on Insurance
will protect Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other
persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or
additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages
caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that
in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against
any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, Owner and Contractor waive all rights
against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and
damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies
and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights
against Sub-contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities
• identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under
such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the
Revised Section Ill.doc 10 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section III - General Conditions
rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise •
payable under any policy so issued. In addition, Owner waives all rights against Contractor,
Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and
agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential
loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner's property or the Work caused
by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by Owner and; (ii)
loss. or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting
from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed
Project or part thereof by Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after
final payment.
6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES
6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE -
Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting
such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the
means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction, but Contractor shall not
be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means,
method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and
expressly required by the Contract Documents.
Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the
Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a
competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to Owner and
Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's
representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All
communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor.
Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever Engineer shall
notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful,
disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed from the project and shall
not again be employed on it except with the written consent of Engineer.
Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as
a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner's normally
approved holidays. At Owner's option, overtime costs may either be deducted from the
Contractor's monthly payment request or deducted from the Contractor's retention prior to
release of final payment or the Engineer may elect to receive a monthly check from the
Contractor in the amount of the overtime costs. Minimum number of chargeable hours for
inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per
hour shall be $40.00 per hour.
Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary
accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the
requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer.
6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct
the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good
Revised Section Ill.doc I 1 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section III - General Conditions
so discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of
persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated
in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours
and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday,
or any legal holiday without Owner's consent given after prior notice to Engineer.
Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full
responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and
machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities,
temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing,
performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work.
All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish
satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and
equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used
in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly
stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing.
All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and
conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator,
supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS
• Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents
by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or
description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the
specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or
"or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material
or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an
item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and
sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by
Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment
proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a
proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the
Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is
essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review
of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other
than Contractor.
Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to
Engineer and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination.
All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or equal" item will be
at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or
submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability.
6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND
OTHERS
• Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the
Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a
Revised Section Ill.doc 12 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section Ill General Conditions
direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own
acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such
Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer
and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of
Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor,
Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating
the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the
work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all
Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to
communicate with the Engineer through Contractor.
The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not
control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the
work to be performed by any specific trade.
All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an
appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically
binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer.
Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization
whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable
objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person
or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable
objection.
Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his
Subcontractors or between Subcontractors.
6.5 USE OF PREMISES
Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the
operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract
Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and
easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or
other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any
such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting
from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant
because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party
by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in
or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify
and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors,
employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or
resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant
against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or
based upon Contractor's performance of the Work.
During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of
waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the
Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials,
rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction
r?
U
•
Revised Section IIl.doc 13 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section Ill - General Conditions
is equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all
property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.
6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES
Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the
performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process,
product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular
invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in
the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is
subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to
others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents.
To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents
and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and
damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident
to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any
invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall
defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights.
Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in
accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental
agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work.
• 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS
Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to
furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by
applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for
monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any
work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or. Regulations, Contractor
shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however,
it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and
Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of
Contractor's obligations to Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above.
6.8 PERMITS
Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for
all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining
such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees
necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids.
Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and Owner shall
pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment
fees.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, City of Clearwater Building Permit Fees will
be waived.
•
Revised Section Ill.doc 14 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section 10 - General Conditions
6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION
Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions
and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for
the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i)
all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials
and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site;, and (iii) other
property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns,. walks, pavements,
roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation
or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work,
or during inclement weather, or whenever Engineer may direct; Contractor shall, and shall cause
Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury from the
weather. If, in the opinion of Engineer, any portion of Work or materials shall have been
damaged or injured by.reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to so
protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of
Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which
shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the
education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe
conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his employees.
The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program
and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases of
construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal
protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions. The
Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to Owner's employees,
equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of
loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to the Owner, and the Contractor shall
remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all
persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his
employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their
safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians
and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity.
Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having
jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss;
and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor
shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when
prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection,
removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property
caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any
other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish
any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable; shall be remedied by
Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall
continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner
and Contractor that the Work is acceptable.
6.10 EMERGENCIES
In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or
adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or is
Engineer, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer
Revised Section lll.doc 15 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section nl - General Conditions
• prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or
variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If Engineer determines that a
change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in
response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to
document the consequences of such action.
6.11 DRAWINGS
6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the
Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will
be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria,
materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to
provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples
to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample,
Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions,
specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar
information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication,
shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work,
and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means,
methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and
programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop
Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work
• and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that
Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to
Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall
give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample
submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a
written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific
notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and
approval of each such variation.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the
items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to
the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of
the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's
review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of
construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety
precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will
not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make
corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of
Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall
direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer
on previous submittals.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from
responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless
• Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of
Revised Section Ill.doc 16 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section III - General Conditions
submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written •
notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor
will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with
the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor.
6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As-Built Drawings, in good order
and legible condition to be continuously marked-up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and
annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes
or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans,
including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the
construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the
plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not
indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which
are revealed during the construction period.
The As-Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer at all times during the
progress of the Project.
The As-Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the City Inspector for accuracy and compliance
with the requirements of "As-Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests.
The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked-up blueline prints do not conform to the "As-
Built Drawings" requirements. As-Built Drawings shall be submitted to the City Inspector for
approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay request.
Prior to placing new. potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer i
intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains.
The City's acceptance of the "As-Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole
responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As-Built Drawings.
6.11.2.1 General
The Contractor shall prepare an "AS-BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 61G17-6, Florida
Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land
surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the City two hard copies of signed and sealed As-Built
Drawings and an AutoCAD file.
61G17-6.002 Definition: (10)(a) As-Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal
and/or vertical dimensional data so. that constructed improvements may be located and
delineated: also know as Record Survey.
This survey shall be clearly titled "As-Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida
registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the City of Clearwater Construction
Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the City will
procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and
will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the City
with the required As-Built Survey.
6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems
1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) .
based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the
Revised Section III.doc 17 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section III - General Conditions
. construction plans. New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service
connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes,
cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions,
pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if
one exists.
2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted.
6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain)
All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the
approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction
plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new
and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described
above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear
type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points.
6.11.2.4 Electrical and Control Wiring
The as-built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as-built
drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where
this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall
prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional
conduit runs, 1-line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic
diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder
• diagram.
6.11.2.5 Horizontal and Vertical Control
The As-Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans
or if required by the City the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90
(horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be
the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical),
must be approved by the City of Clearwater Engineering Department.
6.11.2.6 Standards
The As-Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 61 G 17 and the
Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that
pertain to the as-built survey it is the requirement of the City to have minimum location points at
every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes.
6.11.2.7 Other
The As-Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same
level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans.
•
Revised Section lll.doc 18 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section UI- General Conditions
6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS
6.11.3.1 Layer Naming
6.11.3.1.1 Prefixes and Suffixes
DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities
EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected
EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols
PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols
FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line
work and symbols
TX suffix denotes text - use for all text, no matter the prefix
..... w...A6 %-" W6 IMM11111L U15rnUU110.
GAS gas lines and appurtenances
ELEC power lines and appurtenances
PRONE telephone lines and appurtenances
CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances
BOC curbs
WALK sidewalk
WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers
STORM storm lines and appurtenances
TREES trees, bushes, planters
SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances
FENCE all fences
BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation.
DRIVE driveways
EOP edge of pavement without curbs
TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes
TOPBANK top of bank
TOESLOPE toe of slope
TOPBERM top of berm
TOEBERM toe of berm
SEAWALL seawall
CONCSLAB concrete slabs
•
•
Revised Section Ill.doc 19 Revised: 5/09/2007
•
Section III - General Conditions
WALL walls, except seawall
SHORE shoreline, water elevation
CL centerline of road
CLD centerline of ditch
CLS centerline of swale
CORNER property comers, monumentation
BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks
Other layers may be created as required, using above format.
6.11.3.2 Layer Properties
All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer.
All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer.
All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts.
6.11.3.3 Text Styles
Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0°, and a text height of .008
times the plot scale.
Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.5°, and a text
height of .010 times the plot scale.
6.11.4 DELIVERABLES:
The as-built survey shall be produced on vellum or bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1 "=20'
unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital format.
Acceptable file formats include: DWG, DXF of a shape file.
Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562-4762 or e-mail
address Tom.Mahony(a.myClearwater.com.
6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE
Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work
will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's
warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism,
modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until
the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the
Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part
thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution
or non-execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own
expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its
completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any
defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom
which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance".
Revised Section lll.doc 20 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section III - General Conditions
Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by
Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work,
which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the
Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform .and complete the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of
Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's
obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (1) observations by
Engineer, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Engineer, (iii) the issuance of
a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by Owner to contractor under the
Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any
acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or
Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer.
6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK
Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or
disagreements with Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any
disputes or disagreements, except as Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.
6.14 INDEMNIFICATION
Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the
officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and
against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other •
dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work,
provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness,
disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itself),
including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any
negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or
indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose
acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or
omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such
indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person.
If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor
shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or
Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so
settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against Owner on such
account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, Owner shall notify Contractor, who shall
indemnify and save harmless Owner against any such claim. In any and all claims against Owner
or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, or employees by
any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any
Subcontractor, any
Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of
the work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be.liable, the indemnification obligation
under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of
damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Sub-contractor,
Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts •
or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under this
Revised Section III.doc 21 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section III - General Conditions
• paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers,
directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any
of them.
7 OTHER WORK
7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE
Owner may perform other work related to the Project at the site by Owner's own forces, or let
other direct contracts therefore which shall contain General Conditions similar to these, or have
other work performed by utility owners. If the fact that such other work is to be performed was
not noted in the Contract Documents, then: (i) written notice thereof will be given to Contractor
prior to starting any such other work, and (ii) Contractor may make a claim therefore if
Contractor believes that such performance will involve additional expense to Contractor or
requires additional time and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof.
Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract and each
utility owner (and Owner, if Owner is performing the additional work with Owner's employees)
proper and safe access to the site and a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of
materials and equipment and the execution of such other work and shall properly connect and
coordinate the work with theirs. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,
Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting and patching of the work that may be required to make its
several parts come together properly and integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not
endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering their work and will
• only cut or alter their work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will
be affected. The duties and responsibilities of Contractor under this paragraph are for the benefit
of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for
the benefit of Contractor in said direct contracts between Owner and such utility owners and
other contractors. Should the Contractor cause damage to any other contractor on the Project, the
contractor agrees, upon due notice, to settle with such contractor by agreement or arbitration, if
he will so settle. If such other contractor sues the Owner on account of any damage alleged to
have been so sustained, the Owner shall notify the Contractor, who shall defend such
proceedings at his own expense, and if any judgment against the Owner arises therefrom the
Contractor shall pay or satisfy the judgment and pay all costs incurred by the Owner.
If the proper` execution or results of any part of Contractor's work depends upon work performed
by others under this Article. Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to
Engineer in writing any delays, defects or deficiencies in such other work that render it
unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor's work. Contractor's
failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for
integration with Contractor's work except for latent or nonapparent defects and deficiencies in
such other work.
7.2 COORDINATION
If Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the
following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (1) the person who will have authority and
responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be
identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be
• itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless
Revised Section Ill.doc 22 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section H1- General Conditions
otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and •
responsibility in respect of such coordination.
8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY
Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications
to Contractor through Engineer.
Owner shall furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and
shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General
Conditions.
Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The
Work.
Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the
Article on Tests and Inspections.
In connection with Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer may
Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with Owner's right to
terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances.
The Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for,
Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws
and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. Owner will not be
responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the •
Contract Documents.
9 ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE
Engineer will be Owner's representative during the construction period. The duties and the
responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner's representative during
construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written
consent of Owner and Engineer.
9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS
Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of
the requirements of the Contract Documents (in the form of Drawings or otherwise) as Engineer
may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable
from Contract Documents. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on
Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies
an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to
the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided
in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time.
9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK
Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Engineer believes to be •
defective, or that Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the
Revised Section lll.doc 23 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section III - General Conditions
• Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed
Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Engineer will also have
authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is
fabricated, installed or completed.
9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS
In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop
Drawings and Samples. In connection with Engineer's authority as to Change Orders, see the
articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection with Engineer's
authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and
Completion.
9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES
Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge
of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the
acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents
pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for
Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will be referred
initially to Engineer in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this
paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the
claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Agreement promptly (but in no event later than
thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting
• data will be submitted to Engineer and the other party within sixty days after the start of such
occurrence or event unless Engineer allows an additional period of time for the submission of
additional or more accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing
party shall submit any response to Engineer and the claimant within thirty days after receipt of
the claimant's last submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time). Engineer will render a
formal decision in writing within thirty days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if
any, in accordance with this paragraph. Engineer's written decision on such claim, dispute or
other matter will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from
Engineer's decision is taken within thirty days of the Engineers decision, or the appeal time
which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between the Owner and Contractor for
the settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into,
a written notice of intention to appeal from Engineer's written decision is delivered by Owner or
Contractor to the other and to Engineer within thirty days after the date of such decision and a
formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to
exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim,
dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty days of
the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by Owner and Contractor.
When functioning as interpreter and judge, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or
Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in
good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Engineer with respect to any such
claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise by Owner or
Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract
Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter
• pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution.
Revised Section lll.doc 24 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section U1- General Conditions
9.6 LIMITATIONS ON ENGINEER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
Neither Engineer's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other provision
of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or
not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise or performance of any
authority or responsibility by Engineer shall create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by
Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to
any surety for or employee or agent of any of them.
Engineer will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for
Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws
and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Engineer will not be
responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or famish the work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor,
any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work.
Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all
maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of
inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the
Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements
of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that
the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents.
The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to
Engineer's Consultants and assistants. 0
10 CHANGES IN THE WORK
Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or
from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions
or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change
Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work
involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents
(except as may otherwise be specifically provided).
If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the
Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a
Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions.
Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract
Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions
except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in
article for Uncovering Work.
Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments
recommended by Engineer covering:
changes in the work which are (i) ordered by Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of
defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective •
Revised Section lll.doc 25 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section III- General Conditions
• Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the
parties;
changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and
changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written
decision rendered by Engineer pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes;
provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any
such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable
Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and
adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work.
If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the
provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's
responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly.
11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
11.1 CHANGES IN THE. CONTRACT PRICE
The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments)
payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations
assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the
Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written
• Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice
of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to
the other party and to Engineer promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of
the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with
supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after the start of such occurrence or event
(unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data
in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the
claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said
occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not
submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order
or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i) where
the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application
of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not
covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum
(which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered
by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit
prices for the Work.
11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT
It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the
Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such
sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (1) the allowances
include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment
• required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii)
Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead,
Revised Section lll.doc 26 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section III - General Conditions
profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract
Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the
foregoing will be valid.
Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer
to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the
Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly
adjusted.
11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK
Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work,
initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to
the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times
the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of
items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of
Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and
classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Engineer. Each unit
price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover
Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. Owner or Contractor may
make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if. (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price
Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of
such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no corresponding adjustment
with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled
to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or Owner
believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree
as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price contracts, the Owner endeavors
to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the construction of the project. It is
expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion that not all unit
quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change order which adjusts contract
unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result
in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract
Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid.
12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME
The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written
Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on
written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Engineer
promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to
the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with
supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after such occurrence (unless Engineer
allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim) and
shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire
adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence
of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be determined
by Engineer. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not
submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph.
All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement.
Revised Section lll.doc 27 Revised: 5109/2007
Section III - General Conditions
• Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time
(or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones)
may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made
therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the
Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by
Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the
article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God.
Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be
delays within the control of Contractor.
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times
(or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both Owner and Contractor, an extension of
the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be
Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall Owner be liable to
Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee
or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or
within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but
not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility
owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other
Work.
13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR
ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION
Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required
inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to
facilitate required inspections or tests.
Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform
all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these
inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in
the Contract Documents.
If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof)
specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such
public body including all City Building Departments and City Utility Departments, Contractor
shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals,
pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection
or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, City permit and impact fees will
be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all
costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's
acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix
designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for
incorporation of the Work.
If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by
Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be
• uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this paragraph shall be at
Revised Section lll.doc 28 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section III - General Conditions
Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention r
to cover the same and Engineer has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such
notice.
13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK
If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, it must, if requested by
Engineer, be uncovered for Engineer's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense.
If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or
inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineer's request, shall uncover; expose or
otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as Engineer may require, that
portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is
found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages
caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection
and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all
costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate
decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to
agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change
in Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be
allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones),
or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing,
replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent
thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract
Price and Change of Contract Time.
13.3 ENGINEER MAY STOP THE WORK
If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable
materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed
Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer may order Contractor to stop the Work,
or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of
Engineer to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Engineer or Owner to
exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Engineer stops
Work under this paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or
increase in Contract Price.
13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If required by Engineer, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work,
whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer,
remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all
claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such correction or removal
(including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others).
13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD
If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may
be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee
required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any
Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in
Revised Section Ill.doc 29 Revised; 5/09/2007
Section III - General Conditions
• accordance with Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been
rejected by Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii)
satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others
resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions,
or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the
defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs,
losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not
limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor.
In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service
before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from
an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written
Amendment.
Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected,
removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such
Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and
replacement has been satisfactorily completed.
13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner prefers
to accept it, Owner may do so.
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to Owner's evaluation of
and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to
• reasonableness). If any such acceptance occurs prior to Engineer's recommendation of final
payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract
Documents with respect to the Work; and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in
the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may
make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance
occurs after the Engineer's recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid
by Contractor to Owner.
13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK
If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct
defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer in accordance
with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform
the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any
other provision of the Contract Documents, Owner may, after seven days' written notice to
Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under
this paragraph Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and
remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take possession of all
or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, take possession of
Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site, and incorporate
in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which Owner has paid
Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's
representatives, agents and employees, Owner's other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer's
Consultants access to the site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this
• paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising
Revised Section III.doc 30 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section IlI General Conditions
such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued
incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and
Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are
unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the
article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not
be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by
correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be
allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the
performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner's rights and remedies
hereunder.
14 ' PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR" AND COMPLETION
Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units
completed.
14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT
Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Engineer for review an
Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of
the 25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the
Engineer and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,
payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment
will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials,
labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of the amount of each Application
for Payment for the total of all Work completed to date will be held until final completion and
acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be
construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract.
In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Engineer may require the
Contractor to produce for the Owner, within fifteen days of the approval of any progress
payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid
any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required
herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is
provided.
14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE
Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by
any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to Owner no
later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall
be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a
conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller.
Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work,
free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner
harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers,
workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment,
power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract.
Contractor shall at Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the
nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do
so, then Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid
Revised Section lil.doc 31 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section III - General Conditions
bills, of which Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation
a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until
satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon
payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no
event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon Owner to
the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, Owner shall be
deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by Owner shall be considered as
payment made under the Contract by Owner to Contractor, and Owner shall not be liable to
Contractor for any such payment made in good faith.
14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS
Engineer will within twenty days after receipt of each Application for payment, either indicate a
recommendation of payment and present Application to Owner, or return the Application to
Contractor indicating Engineer's reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case,
Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. Engineer may
refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to the Owner. Engineer may also
refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the
results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to
such extent as may be necessary in Engineer's opinion to protect Owner from loss because: (i)
the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or
replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii)
Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Engineer has
actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension
of Work and Termination.
Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Engineer because:
(i) claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing
of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has
delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such
Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended, or
(iv) Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described in this paragraph. The Owner
shall give Contractor immediate notice of refusal to pay with a copy to the Engineer, stating the
reasons for such actions, and the Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld,
or any adjustment thereto agreed, to by Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to
Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action.
14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION
Use by Owner at Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (1) has
specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer and Contractor
agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner
for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the
remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final Completion of all the Work subject
to the following:
Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit Owner to use any such part of the
Work which Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If
Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to
• Owner and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Engineer to
issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time
Revised Section Ill.doc 32 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section III - General Conditions
may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work
ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate
of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such
request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to
determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be
substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons
therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions
of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to
certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility
in respect thereof and access thereto.
14.5 FINAL INSPECTION
Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is
complete, Engineer will make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify
Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is
incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to
complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.
14.5 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Engineer and has
delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions,
schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by the
paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, marked-up record documents as
may be required in the Contract Documents and other documents, Contractor may make
application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final
Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (I) all
documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of
insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii) consent of the surety, if any or if
necessary, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers
(satisfactory to Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu of
such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or
releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor,
services, material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material
and equipment bills and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner or
Owner's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any
Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish
a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien.
Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all
surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an
acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the
prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition.
14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE
If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if
Engineer so confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for payment
and recommendation of Engineer, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the
balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance
Revised Section lll.doc 33 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section III - General Conditions
• to be held by Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage
stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph for
Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that
portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Engineer
with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and
conditions governing final payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of
claims.
If on the basis of Engineer's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection,
and Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation,
all as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been
completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled,
Engineer will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to
Owner for payment. Thereupon Engineer will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that
the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Engineer will return
the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final
payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the
Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and
substance, Owner shall, within sixty-five days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount
recommended by Engineer.
14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS
The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by Owner
• against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing
after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any
special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the
Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against Owner other than those
previously made in writing and still unsettled.
15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK
At any time and without cause, Engineer may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a
period of not more than ninety days by notice in writing to Contractor, which will fix the date on
which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor
shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or
both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim
therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of Contract Time.
15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE
Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails
to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to,
failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere
to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time);
if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction;
• if Contractor disregards the authority of Engineer;
Revised Section lll.doc 34 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section III - General Conditions
if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract •
Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this
Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of Owner, or
if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as
herein specified, or at any .time Engineer certifies in writing to Owner that the rate of
progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or any part
thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed.
Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to the
extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude
Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools,
appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use, the same to the full extent
they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion),
incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which Owner has
paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as Owner may deem
expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the
Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and
damages sustained by Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess
will be paid to Contractor.
If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the
difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed
by Engineer as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Engineer incorporated in a
Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph Owner
shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed.
Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect
any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue.
Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from
liability.
Upon seven days' written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and
without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In
such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items):
for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract
Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable
sums for overhead and profit on such Work;
for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services
and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in
connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and
profit on such expenses;
for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts
with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly
attributable to termination.
Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other
economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.
U
Revised Section Ill.doc 35 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section III - General Conditions
15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE
If, through, no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety
days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or Engineer fails to act on
any Application for Payment within sixty days after it is submitted or Owner fails for sixty days
to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven days'
written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such
suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from Owner
payment on the same terms as provided in the article for Owner May Terminate. However, if the
Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of the Owner, the Contractor shall
not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement
and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an
Application for Payment within thirty days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for thirty
days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven day's
written notice to Owner and Engineer stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due
Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to preclude Contractor from making
claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise
for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this
article.
16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION
If and to the extent that Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for
resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution
• method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for
resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on
Disputes, Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise
have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute
provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding
arbitration.
17 MISCELLANEOUS
17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS
The form of all submittals, notices, change orders and other documents permitted or required to
be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Engineer
subject to the approval of the Owner.
17.2 GIVING NOTICE
Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice
will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member
of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by
registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of
the notice.
17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM
Should Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error,
omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents
Revised Section Ill.doc 36 Revised: 5/09/2007
Section 01- General Conditions
or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the
other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The
provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the
provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose.
17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED
Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in
each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other
professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs.
17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT
The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without
the approval of the Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its
rights to notice of assignment.
17.6 RENEWAL OPTION
Annual Contracts issued through Public Works Administration may be renewed for up to two (2)
years, upon mutual consent of both the City and the ContractorNendor. All terms, conditions
and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or
in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the City, and must be
agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds,
and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by Public Works
Administration.
•
Revised Section lll.doc 37 Revised: 5/09/2007
SECTION IV
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION IV
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Table of Contents:
SECTION IV .................................................................................................................................. i
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................... i
1 SCOPE OF WORK ...........................................................................................................1
1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION.. ..................... 0 .... 0 ....... 0 .......... 0 ................................................. 1
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST ................................................................................ 12
2 LINE, GRADE AND RECORD DRAWINGS .............................................................. 14
2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR ............. 14
2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY ............................... 14
3 DEFINITION OF TERMS ............................................................................................. 14
4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK .............................................................. 15
5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK ........................................................ 15
6 CONCRETE .................................................................................................................... 16
7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK ........................................ 17
7.1 EXCAVATION .............................................................................................................. 17
7.2 FORMS ......................................................................................................................... 17
8 REINFORCEMENT ....................................................................................................... 17
8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 17
9 OBSTRUCTIONS ........................................................................................................... 17
10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS
AND STREET PAVEMENT .......................................................................................... 18
11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS ................................................................ 18
12 DEWATERING ............................................................................................................... 19
13 SANITARY MANHOLES .............................................................................................. 19
13.1 BUILT UP TYPE .......................................................................................................... 19
13.2 PRECAST TYPE .......................................................................................................... 20
13.2.1 MANHOLE AD.IUSYAffNT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) ........................................ 20
13.3 DROP MANHOLES ..................................................................................................... 21
13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS ............................................................................................ 21
13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS .............................................................................................. 21
13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES ............................................................................. 21
14 BACKFILL .................................................................................................................:....21
15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC ........................................................................................ 22
16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE
STRUCTURES ................................................................................................................ 22
SectionIV.doc i Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 22
17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL ..................................................................... 22
17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 22
17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 22
18 UNDERDRAINS ............................................................................................................. 22
18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 23
18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 23
19 STORM SEWERS .......................................................................................................... 23
19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION ......................................................................................... 23
19.2 TESTING ......................................................................................................................24
19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 24
20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS .............................................................. 24
20.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 24
20.1.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ........................................................................................ 24
20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ............................................................................................. 24
20.2 INSTALLATION .......................................................................................................... 25
20.2.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ........................................................................................ 25
20.2.2 FORCEMAINPIPE .............................................................................................25
20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS ............................................................................................... 25
20.4 TESTING ......................................................................................................................25
20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITYSEWERS ...................................................................... 25
20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS .............................................................................. 26
20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 26
20.5.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ........................................................................................ 26
20.5.2 FORCE AM17V PIPE ............................................................................................. 26
21 DRAINAGE .....................................................................................................................26
22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE .......................................................................... 26
22.1 BASE ............................................................................................................................ 26
22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ................... 28
22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ............................... 28
22.2 SUBGRADE .................................................................................................................28
22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ................................................................................ 29
22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................ 29
23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS ................................................................... 29
23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE ........................................................................................... 29
23.1.1 AGGREGATE ........................................................................................................29
23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS ................................................................................. 29
23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT &
QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................ 29
23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES ..................................................................... 30
23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS ............................... 30
23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 31
23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION .............................................................. 31
SectionlV.doc ii Revised: 4/29/2007
•
•
C:
Section N - Technical Specifications
23.61 CRACKS ............................................................................................................... 31
23.6.2 POTHOLES ...........................................................................................................32
23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES ............................................................................... 32
23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ 32
23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE .................................................................... 33
23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 33
23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 34
24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT .................................. 34
25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................. 34
25.1 IRRIGATION ................................................................................................................ 34
25. 1.1 DESCRIPTION .....................................................................................................34
25.1.2 PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................... 36
25.1.3 EXECUTION .........................................................................................................40
25.2 LANDSCAPE ...............................................................................................................43
25.2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 43
25.2.2 PRODUCTS ..........................................................................................................48
25.2.3 EXECUTION .........................................................................................................51
26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING ................................................... 58
26.1 INTENT ........................................................................................................................ 58
26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ........................ 58
26.3 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 58
26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ................................................................... 59
26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION ....................................................................................... 59
26.6 LINER INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 60
26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION ..................................................................................... 60
26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................... 60
26.9 PAYMENT ....................................................................................................................60
27 PLANT NUX DRIVEWAYS ........................................................................................... 60
27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 61
27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 61
28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS ................................ 61
29 CONCRETE CURBS ..................................................................................................... 61
29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 61
29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 61
30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS ......................................................... 62
30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS .......................................................................................... 62
30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS .................................................................. .................. 62
30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 62
30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 62
31 SODDING ........................................................................................................................62
32 SEEDING .........................................................................................................................63
SectionIV.doc iii Revised: 4/29/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM
STRUCTURES ................................................................................................................ 63
33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES ................................................................................ 63
33.2 PRECAST TYPE .......................................................................................................... 64
33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 64
34 MATERIAL USED ......................................................................................................... 64
35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ...................................... 64
36 STREET SIGNS .............................................................................................................. 64
37 AUDIO/VIDEO TAPE OF WORK AREAS ................................................................. 65
37.1 AUDIONIDEO TAPE OF WORK AREA SHALL BE PREPARED BY THE CITY 65
37.2 AUDIO/VIDEO TAPE OF ALL WORK AREAS SHALL BE PREPARED BY THE
CONTRACTOR ........................................................................................................... 65
37.2.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AVDIO/VIDEO TAPE ......................................... 65
37.2.2 SCHEDULING OFAVDIO/VIDEO TAPE ........................................................... 65
37.2.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS ................................................................. 65
37.2.4 EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................................ 65
37.2.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO ................................................................ 65
37.2.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO ................................................................. 65
37.2.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION ...................................................................................... 66
37.2.8 LIGHTING ............................................................................................................ 66
37.2.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL ............................................................................................. 66
37.2.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX ............................................................................................. 66
37.2.11 AREA OF COVERAGE ......................................................................................... 66
37.2.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES ............................................................................. 67
38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL ................................................................... 67
38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS ................................................................. 67
38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES ............................. 67
38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS .................................... 67
38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES ........................................................................ 67
38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS ....................................................................................... 67
38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES ...................... 68
38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS .................................................................... 68
38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION ....................................................... 68
38.9 MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................................... 68
38.10 COMPLIANCE ............................................................................................................. 68
39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARIONG ................................................................. 72
40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE .................... 72
41 WATER MAINS AND APPURTENANCES .......................................... 73
......................
41.1 SCOPE ..........................................................................................................................73
41.2 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 73
41.2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 73
41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALSAND FITTINGS ..................................................................... 73
41.2.3 GATE VALVES ...................................................................................................... 75
•
•
•
SectionIV.doc iv Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
41.2.4
41.2.5 VALVE BOXES ......................................................................................................
HYDRANTS .......................................................................................................... 75
75
41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES ............................................................................................. 76
41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTIONAND REPAIRS .................................................................. 77
41.2.8 BACKFLOWPREVENTERS ................................................................................ 77
41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES ............................................................................................. 78
41.2.10 BLOW OFFHYDRANTS ...................................................................................... 78
41.3 CONSTRUCTION ........................................................................................................ 78
41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING ....................................................................................... 78
41.3.2 PIPE LAYING ....................................................................................................... 78
41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS ......................................... 80
41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING L17VES ............................................................... 80
41.4 TESTS ........................................................................................................................... 81
41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS ......................................................................................... 81
41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST ................................................................................................ 81
41.5 STERILIZATION ......................................................................................................... 81
41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT .......................................................................................... 81
41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM ............................................................................................ 81
41.5.3 STERILMTIONPROCEDURE .......................................................................... 81
41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS ............................................................................ 81
41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS .............................................................................................. 82
41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ........................................................................... 82
41.61 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 82
41.6.2 FURNISHAND INSTALL WATER MAINS ........................................................... 83
41.6.3 FURNISHAND INSTALL FITTINGS ...........................................
........................ 83
41.64 FURNISHAND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITHBOXESAND
COVERS ................................................................................................................ 83
41.65 FURNISHAND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS ....................................................... 83
42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 84
43 TENNIS COURTS .......................................................................................................... 84
43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS .......................................................................................... 84
43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS ............................................................................................. 84
43.1.2 BASE COURSE ..................................................................................................... 84
43.1.3 PRIME COAT ....................................................................................................... 84
43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE ............................................................................................ 84
43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE ............................................................................................. 84
43.1.6 COLOR COAT ...................................................................................................... 85
43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS ............................................................................................ 86
43.2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 86
43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION ............................................................................................ 87
43.2.3 SLOPE ................................................................................................................... 87
43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................... 88
43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING ....................................................................................... 88
43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE
........................
.......................
.
.
...
...
........ 88
43.2.7 .................
....
..
...
.
..
.
ROOT BARRIER ................................................................................................... 88
43.2.8 FENCIIVG ............................................................................................................. 89
43.2.9 WINDSCREENS ................................................................................................... 89
SectionTV.doc v Revised: 4/29/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
43.2.10 COURTEQUIPMENT ..........................................................................................89
43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE ........................................................................................... 91
43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) .................................................................................. 91
43.2.13 CONCRETE ..........................................................................................................91
43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING ................................................. 91
43.2:15 WATER COOLER ...........................................................:..:................................... 92
43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION ..............................................................................................92
43.2.17 WARRANTY ...........................................................................................................92
44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ......................................................................... 93
44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ......... 93
44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN .............................................................. 93
44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY ......................................................................................... 93
44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES ....................................................................... 94
44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS ................................................................................................... 94
44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERLALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS ................. 94
44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERLILS ......................................................... 94
44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS ............................................................................................. 94
44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN ................................... 95
44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION .................... 95
44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ............................................. 95
44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR............ 95
45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING .............................................................................. 96
45.1 INTENT ........................................................................................................................ 96
45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTORII NSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ........................ 96
45.3 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 96
45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ................................................................... 96
45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION ....................................................................................... 97
45.6 LINER INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 97
45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION ..................................................................................... 97
45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................... 97
45.9 PAYMENT ............. ................................................................................................... 98
46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING ..................................... 98
46.1 MATERIALS ...............................................................................
461.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS ..........................................................
461.2 QUALITY CONTROL ..........................................................
461.3 SAMPLES ............................................................................
461.4 REJECTION .........................................................................
46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS ....................................................................
46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES ................................................
46 3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE ..........................................................
463.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS ...................................
463.3 PIPE JOINING ....................................................................
463.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE ............................................
46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE .......................................................
464.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTSAND DIMENSIONS ......................
46 4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION ..........................................
.... ........................ 98
................................ 98
............................. 98
................................ 98
................................ 99
................................ 99
................................ 99
........... ................. 99
................................ 99
................................ 99
........... ................. 99
................................ 99
............................ 99
.............................. 100
•
•
•
SectionIV.doc A Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
464.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS ........................................................ 100
46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER ..............................................................................100
46.4. 5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES ....................................................................101
46.4.6 UNDERDRAIIV CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED .............................................. 101
46.4.7 BACK-FILLING ...................................................................................................101
46.4.8 POINTREPAIR ...................................................................................................101
46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS ................................................................................. 101
47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE ....................101
47.1 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................101
47.2 MATERIALS .............................................................................................................. 102
47.3 PIPE ............................................................................................................................ 102
47.4 JOINING SYSTEM .................................................................................................... 102
47.5 FITTINGS ...................................................................................................................102
48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................102
48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT .............................................................................. 102
.48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE ............... 102
48.3 COMPOSITION ............................................................................................... .... 103
48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................ 103
48.5 MATERIALS .............................................................................................................. 103
48.6 WATER ....................................................................................................................... 103
48.7 REINFORCEMENT ................................................................................................... 103
48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS ..................................................................................... 104
48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION ....................................................................................... 104
48.10 PROPORTIONING ..................................................................................................... 104
48.11 MIXING ...................................................................................................................... 104
48.12 APPLICATION ........................................................................................................... 105
48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ....................................................................................... 105
48.14 SURFACE FINISH ..................................................................................................... 105
48.15 CURING ..................................................................................................................... 106
48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION ................................................................... 106
48.17 INSPECTION ............................................................................................................. 106
48.18 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................. 106
49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION ......................... 107
49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT ............................................................................................... 107
49.2 PAYMENT .................................................................................................................. 107
49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS .......................................................................... 107
49.3.1 AIATERI LS ........................................................................................................ 107
49.3.2 INSTALLATIONAND EXECUTION .................................................................. 108
49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM .............................................. 108
49.4.1 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................ 109
49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL ...................................................................................... 109
49.6 GROUTING MIX ....................................................................................................... 109
49.7 LINER MIX ................................................................................................................ 109
49.8 WATER ........................................................................................................................ 110
49.9 OTHER MATERIALS ................................................................................................. 110
49.10 EQUIPMENT .............................................................................................................. 110
SectionIV.doc vii Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION ........................................................................ 111
49.11.1 PREPARATION .................................................................................................... 111
49.11.2 MLU7VG ................................................................................................................ 111
49.11.3 SPRAYING ........................................... ............................................................ 111
49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING .......................................................................................... 112
49.11.5 CURING ............................................................................................................... 112
49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE ....................................................... 112
49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM ........ 112
49.12.1 SCOPE ................................................................................................................. 112
49.12.2 AIATERLILS ......................................................................................................... 112
49.12.3 INSTALLATIONAND EXECUTION ................................................................... 115
50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS ...........................................................................117
50.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE .............................................................................................117
50.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE ................................................ 117
50.3 FIXED SIGN ............................................................................................................... 117
50.4 PORTABLE SIGNS ..................................................................................................... 117
50.5 SIGN COLORING ....................................................................................................... 117
50.6 SIGN PLACEMENT ................................................................................................... 118
50.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE ..............................................................................................118
50.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN ......................................................................................... 118
51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM ............................................................. 118
51.1 SCOPE ...........................................................
.
. 118
51.2 .
.
..........................................................
SURFACE PREPARATIONS ...................................................................................... 119
51.2.1 ASPHALT ............................................................................................................. 119
51 .2.2 CONCRETE ......................................................................................................... 119
51 .2.3 COURTPATCHBINDER MIX ............................................................................ 119
51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT .......................................................... 119
51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE ........................................................... 119
51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION .................................................................................... 120
51.6 PLAYING LINES ....................................................................................................... 120
51.7 GENERAL .................................................................................................................. 120
51.8 LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................................ 120
52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION .........................121
52.1 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION PERFORMED BY CITY ........................................... 121
52.2 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION PERFORMED BY CONTRACTOR .........................121
53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES .................................................................................122
53.1 MATERIAL ................................................................................................................ 122
53.1.1 GABIONAND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL .................................................. 122
53.1.2 GABIONAND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL :.............................................. 125
53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE ............................................................................................... 125
53.1.4 GEOTEA71LE FABRIC ....................................................................................... 125
53.2 PERFORMANCE ........................................................................ ..... ...............:..125
54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS ..........................................................126
54.1 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................126
SectionIV.doc viii Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
54.2
54.3 SCHEDULING OF WORK ........................................................................................
WORK METHODS .................................................................................................... 127
127
54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING ....................................................................... 127
54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT ........................................................................... 127
54.4 LITTER ....................................................................................................................... 127
54.5 VISUAL CHECK ....................................................................................................... 127
54.6 PLANT TRUVIMING AND PALM PRUNING .......................................................... 127
54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.)..... 128
54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL .................................................................................................. 128
54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL ................................................................................................ 128
54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY ............................................................................................ 128
54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION .......................................................................................... 128
54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA ......................................................... 128
54.13 MULCH CONDITION ..............................................................................................: 128
54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR .................................................................... 129
54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL ..................................................... 129
54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION ............................................................................................ 129
54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION ............................................................................................ 129
54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE ................................................................................................. 129
54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK ....................................................................................... 129
54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL .............................................................................. 130
54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS ........................................................................................... 130
55 MILLING OPERATIONS .................................................................................:.........130
55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE ...................................... 130
55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS .......................................................... 130
55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS ................................................................................. 131
55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS ..................................................................................... 131
55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES .................. 131
55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES ............................................................ 132
55.7 TYPES OF MILLING ................................................................................................ 132
55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS .............................................................................. 132
55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...............................................................:.................... 132
55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT .............................................................................................. 132
56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING ................................................................................... 132
56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 133
56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 133
57 RIPRAP ......................................................................................................................... 133
57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 133
57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 133
58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY ................................................................................133
58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL ............................................................................................. 133
58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING ................................................................ 134
59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS ...........................................134
59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 134
SectionN.doc ix Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
60 SIGNING AND MARKING .........................................................................................134
60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 135
61
61.1
62
62.1
62.2
62.3
63
63.1
63.2
63.3
63.4
63.5
63.6
63.7
ROADWAY LIGHTING ..............................................................................................135
BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 135
TREE PROTECTION ..................................................................................................135
TREE BARRICADES ................................................................................................135
ROOT PRUNING ................... .......................................... ........................................... 136
PROPER TREE PRUNING ........................................................................................ 137
PROJECT WEB PAGES ..............................................................................................137
WEB PAGES DESIGN ............................................................................................. 137
WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES ..................................................................... 138
THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE ....................................................... 138
MAPS AND GRAPHICS ........................................................................................... 138
INTERACTIVE FORMS ...........................................................................................138
POSTING ....................................................................................................................138
WEB PAGES UPDATES ............................................................................................ 138
•a
•
SectionN.doc x Revised: 4/29/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
•
•
•
1 SCOPE OF WORK
1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION
Project Name: FIRE TRAINING FACILITIES AT FIRE STATION 48
Project Number: 05-0002-FD
Scope of Work:
PROJECT SCOPE: The primary work contemplated under this contract is for the design and
construction of one (1) 4,400 square foot pre-manufactured, pre-engineered, metal fire rescue
supply/storage building; construction of one (1) 1,934 square foot pre-manufactured, pre-
engineered steel fire training burn tower; construction of one (1) 8,967 square foot architecturally
design training facility building; and construction of all associated site improvements as shown
on the attached plans numbered 712T, 2006046, 3838, and 2006047 as prepared by the Cumbey
& Fair, Inc., the City of Clearwater Engineering Department, Fire Facilities, Inc., and Plisko
Architectural, P.A. The site is located within the City of Clearwater at Fire Station 48, 1700
North Belcher Road, Clearwater, Florida.
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ALL WORK:
PAY ITEMS - The pay items for the buildings and foundations is to be lump sum including all
design, labor, equipment, plant and materials to complete the work. Additional payment items
are contained in the proposal for the site improvements. Work for which a specific pay item is
not provided should be included in the most appropriate pay item given.
AWARD OF CONTRACT - The award 'of contract will be made to the Contractor with the
lowest overall price combination to accomplish all of the proposed work in the best interest of
the City of Clearwater.
SURVEY STAKE OUT - Survey Stake out shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
OVERTIME INSPECTION - Contractor shall note that City's Construction Services does not
have sufficient funding to allow for normal overtime inspection. If required, the Contractor will
be charged $40.00 per hour for construction inspection. Contractor is encouraged to accomplish
work which requires immediate inspection during normal work hours. Contractor may work on
items, which do not require immediate inspection at his discretion.
CITY CONTACT PERSON - For any needed technical information prior to construction, contact
Mr. Rob Maue, P. E., Senior Professional Engineer, (727) 562-4827.
PROTECTION OF EXISTING PROPERTY: If adjacent property is affected or endangered by
any work done under this contract, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to take
whatever steps are necessary to protect the adjacent property and notify the Construction
Inspector.
UTILITY LOCATIONS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS: All underground utilities shall be
located by the Contractor prior to construction. Relocation of utilities, if necessary, will be by
others. It shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to verify existing dimensions,
elevations, site utilities and conditions at the site before proceeding with building construction.
Revised SectionIV 050107.doc
Page 1
Revised: 5/l/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
NOTICE TO PROCEED: Notice to proceed will be given as soon as posgiblt after the award of
contract and the scheduling of a pre construction conference.
PROGRESS MEETINGS: The Contractor shall note that the Construction Manager may
conduct weekly progress meetings during construction operations. The Contractor is cautioned
to accept direction only from the Construction Manager, particularly where the Contractor may
expect additional contract costs.
PAVEMENT DAMAGE: Any asphaltic concrete pavement that is damaged due to construction
activities shall be repaired per City Specifications at the contractor's expense.
SHOP DRAWINGS: Shop Drawing submittals for building systems and materials are required
for this project.
BUILDERS RISK: The Contractor shall note in the contract that the City of Clearwater does not
accept any builders' risk during the construction period.
STAGING AREA: A storage/staging area will be available to the Contractor adjacent to the
project site. Location of the storagelstaging area shall be coordinated with the City's
Representative. Contractor shall restore storagelstaging areas to original condition.
RECORD DRAWINGS: Prior to final payment, the Contractor shall provide a set of marked,
reproducible "record" mylar construction drawings for all site work and in particular for the
building. The City shall provide the mylar of the site plan. If the drawings are made on Auto-
CAD or other electronic drafting system then the City will require a computer disc and paper
copy of record drawing.
SAFETY - The Contractor is to take any and every step necessary to protect the work, the
workers and the public from harm during the progress of the work. This is of particular
importance in as much as the construction site is an active City of Clearwater Fleet Maintenance
Facility.
PREBID SITE INSPECTION - The Contractor is required to inspect the project site prior to
submission of contract bid.
PROJECT SIGN - Project sign is required on this project. An item is included in the proposal
form for installation and maintenance of the project sign. See technical specifications for
description and requirements of project sign. Project sign shall be a single fixed sign.
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR SITE WORK:
PERMITS AND PERMIT FEES: The contractor shall obtain "no fee" City of Clearwater
Building permits and City of Clearwater Clearing and Grubbing permit prior to construction
commencement. Applications for the various permits shall be coordinated by the Contractor and
submitted as soon as possible after the award of contract so that the permits may be obtained as
soon as possible. Necessary drawings will be provided for the Contractor's use. City
Development impact fees and permit fees where applicable, will be paid by the City of
Clearwater.
UTILITY WORK: Construct all utilities as shown on drawings numbered C4.1, C4.2 and C4.3.
SITE WORK: Bulk excavation, offsite fill, well compacted backfill to subgrade, building
foundations and site utility work. Coordinate all site utility work with the City of Clearwater's
Construction Services Division. Contractor shall obtain geophysical information as necessary to
Revised SectionIV 050107.doc Page 2. Revised: 5/1/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
provide for the Professional design of the building foundation. An item is included in the
proposal for the removal of unsuitable material and the replacement of suitable material per
cubic yard (truck measure). Item includes removal and the disposal of all necessary materials by
the Contractor in accordance with all regulatory requirements.
SOIL EROSION: The Contractor is to perform all construction activity so as to prevent soil
erosion into adjacent drainage feature in accordance with City erosion and siltation standards.
SITE MAINTENANCE: The Contractor shall perform regular site maintenance to keep the site
free of accumulated construction debris and rubbish caused by his work. The Contractor shall
perform his work so as not to create conditions that produce excessive dust. Site maintenance is
of particular importance on this project in as much as this site is an operating training facility for
the Fire Department.
REPAIR OF SPRINKLER. SYSTEMS - Any sprinkler systems damaged by the progress of the
work will be repaired by the Contractor as a part of the existing contract proposal items.
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PROPOSED FIRE RESCUE SUPPLY/STORAGE
BUELDING:
DRAWINGS FOR DESIGN BUILD CONTRACT. One (1) 4,400 square foot; pre-engineered,
pre-manufactured metal storage building as shown on drawings numbered 2006046. See Sheet
C2.1 for overall Site Plan and Sheet C5.1, Sheet C5.2, Sheet C5.3, and Sheet C5.4 for building
details.
PLANS REQUIRE PROFESSIONAL SEAL: The attached fire rescue supply/storage building
plans show the arrangement required and the successful bidder shall famish all engineering and
construction plans required to obtain a City of Clearwater Building Permit and to accomplish the
work. Plans shall be prepared and sealed by a Florida Registered Engineer or Architect.
CONCRETE: Perimeter footings. Column footings. 2nd story 4-inch thick reinforced concrete
slab, 6-inch and 8-inch thick reinforced concrete slab on grade with fibermesh additives and No.
4 reinforcing rods on 12" centers each way on two (2) coats of 6 mil vapor barrier. Concrete
slabs shall be cured with curing compound. See Fire Rescue Supply/Storage Facility Foundation
Plan (Sheet C5.2).
DOORS: See Fire Rescue Supply/Storage Facility Plan (Sheet C5.1) and Elevation sheet (Sheet
C5.3) for location and number of doors.
PAINTING: All doors to be epoxy painted, one coat of primer, one coat of wall paint. All paint
shall be delivered to job site in Manufacturers containers, unopened and of current manufacture
Colors shall be as selected by the owner. See Supplemental Specifications 14000, 08100, 08210,
08710, 09511.
ELECTRICAL: Contractor is to provide all electrical work required for the building. The
building shall be complete with all wiring required for storage bay lighting, exterior security
lighting, exit lighting, breaker panels, switches and receptacles as required. All wiring shall meet
or exceed minimum provisions of National Electric Code. All wire shall be copper. All fittings,
wiring devices and fixtures and panels shall be UL approved as required by the City of
Clearwater Building Department. Coordinate site connection with City Engineer.
PLUMBING: The Contractor shall coordinate all connections to existing utilities with the City
of Clearwater's Engineering Department.
Revised SectioniV 050107.doc Page 3 Revised: 5/1/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
FIRE PROTECTION: Contractor shall' comply with all fire safety and life safety codes
including, but not limited to fire sprinklers, fire extinguishers, smoke detectors, signage, 'etc. The
fire protection system for the existing building shall be designed by a licensed fire protection
engineer and permitted with the City of Clearwater.
HVAC - General Contractor is to furnish detailed plans and specifications for all the areas,
except the Pass Through Bay area, within the Fire Rescue Supply/Storage Facility as shown in
the plans, and the Contractor shall construct the same. The attached plans show the arrangement
required and the successful bidder shall furnish all engineering and construction plans required to
accomplish this work. Plans shall be prepared and signed and sealed by a Florida Registered
Engineer or Architect registered in the state of Florida. Design/Build drawings shall comply
with all Building Code requirements. The intent of these specifications and drawings is to
establish a minimum quality and performance level for structural design, all material,
components, durability and workmanship. The plans do not attempt to show all code
requirements for the building which may or will be required in the issue of a building permit by
the Building Official.
DESIGN BUILD: General Contractor is to furnish detailed plans and specifications for the
storage building and the Contractor shall construct the same. The attached plans show the
arrangement required and the successful bidder shall furnish all engineering and construction
plans required to accomplish this work. Plans shall be prepared and signed and sealed by a
Florida Registered Engineer or Architect registered in the state of Florida. Design/Build
drawings shall comply with all Building Code requirements. The intent of these specifications
and drawings is to establish a minimum quality and performance level for structural design, all
material, components, durability and workmanship. The plans do not attempt to show all code
requirements for the building which may or will be required in the issue of a building permit by
the Building Official.
CONFORMANCE WITH BUILDING CODES: Plans and specifications shall meet all City of
Clearwater Building Permit requirements and fire code requirements.
PROPOSAL: All bidders must conform strictly to these specifications in their bid for the Fire
Rescue Supply/Storage Facility.
MATERIALS: All materials utilized for building construction shall be new, unused, and free
from defect.
PROPOSED FIRE RESCUE SUPPLY/STORAGE METAL BUILDING:
STANDARDS: The following standards and criteria (of most recent issue) shall be used where
applicable in all phases of design of the building covered by this specification:
"Recommended Design Practices Manual"
Metal Building Manufacturers Association
"Steel Construction Manual"
American Institute of Steel Construction
"Cold Formed Steel Design Manual"
American Iron and Steel Institute
"Aluminum Construction Manual"
•
•
Revised SectionlV 050107.doc Page 4 Revised: 5/1/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
[-I
The Aluminum Association
"Code for Welding in Building Construction"
"American Welding Society"
•
Structural Steel Painting Council Standards
Federal, Military and Commercial Standards
A.S.T.M. Standards
Florida Building Code 2001 with 2001 Pinellas County Florida Technical Amendments
Florida Plumbing Code 2001
Florida Mechanical Code 2001
National Electric Code 1999
AISC - Specification for Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel
Aluminum Association Architectural Standards
ACI 301, ACI 318 - Specifications for Structural Concrete
Life Safety Code: NFPA 101 Life Safety Code 2000 with 2000 Pinellas County.
Welders must be AWS certified
OSHA, EPA and all Local, State and Federal environmental regulations
RATINGS: Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Factory Mutual System or other recognized testing
laboratories.
GENERAL DESIGN LOADS: The basic design loads shall include live and wind, in addition to
dead load. All other design loads, whether they be of static, dynamic or kinetic nature, shall be
considered as auxiliary loads.
VERTICAL LIVE LOADS: Roof covering shall be designed for either 50 PSF uniformly
distributed or a 200 pound concentrated (point) load (over a 1' X 1' area) located at center of
maximum roofing (panel) span. The most severe conditions shall govern. 2nd Story flooring
shall be designed for a minimum of 125 PSF uniformly distributed load. Purlins shall be
designed for 20 PSF uniformly distributed over the roof area which they support. Primary
framing (frames) shall be designed for 20 PSF uniformly distributed over the roof area which it
supports. All the above loads to be in addition to the applicable dead loads and shall be applied to
the horizontal projection of the roof
WIND LOADS: The building design shall be structurally rated to withstand a minimum of 123
miles per hour wind velocity.
METAL BUILDING CERTIFICATION: All bidders must submit with their bid proposal a letter
from the metal building manufacturer certifying that the building proposed will exceed all the
above design load criteria and local building codes using the most stringent criteria, and that all
structural design will be in strict conformance with that prescribed in the MBMA "Design
Practices Manual" of recent issue, or as otherwise specified. After the awarding of the contract,
complete structural analysis shall be submitted by the metal building manufacturer to the
OWNER or his AGENT upon request for same.
Revised SectionlV 050107.doc Page 5 Revised: 5/1/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
METAL BUILDING DESCRIPTION: The ' pre engineered metal building covered by this
specification is to be a rigid frame clear span structure or post and beam of steel (frames) and
rafter beams or joists. The roof slope shall be considered to be flat. Column spacing at the
exterior walls and/or at the valleys shall be the building manufacturer's standard, compatible with
placement of openings and other requirements. The minimum unobstructed clear height
throughout the interior of the building shall be as measured at the eve except where vertical
(diagonal) bracing is required to stabilize the structure and as shown on the drawings. Vertical
diagonal bracing shall be permitted only in the sidewall or valley planes. Horizontal plane
bracing shall be permitted providing it is above the building's required interior clear height. This
shall not preclude the use of portals or end wall framing with cantilevered (fixed base) columns,
where bracing is considered an obstruction. The Contractor shall note that all structural
components shall be designed and constructed to withstand wind velocities of 123 mph.
ROOF COVERING AND SUPPORTS: The roof construction shall carry an Underwriters'
Laboratories Construction (Uplift) classification of not less than Class 30.
ROOF PANELS: The exposed metal roof covering shall be 24 gage (minimum) aluminum
coated galvanized steel panels, and of such configuration to provide the specified load carrying
capabilities and deflection requirements of this specification. Roof panels shall be of "standing
seam interlocking" design and secured to the purlins with a concealed structural fastening
system. The concealed system shall provide minimal through penetration of the exposed roofing
surface and allow the roof covering to move independently of any differential thermal movement
by the structural framing system. Except at the concealed fastener, there shall be no thermal
contact of the roof panels with the supporting purlin. The standing seams shall have a factory
applied, non hardening sealant. Roof panels with lap type side (longitudinal) joints and exposed
structural fasteners shall not be considered acceptable. Roof panels shall be fastened to the
purlins with a concealed clip or backing device of steel having a protective metallic coating.
Through penetration of the roofing surface by exposed fasteners shall occur only at terminal
locations of the roof panels. Such fasteners shall be stainless steel or aluminum screws, bolts or
rivets, with weather seal washers. Carbon steel shank fasteners with vinyl or nylon heads shall be
acceptable also. Deflection of the roof panel shall not exceed L/180 of its span when supporting
the applicable vertical live loads previously described.
ROOF GUARANTEE: Durability of the roof panels due to rupture, structural failure or
perforation shall be guaranteed for a period of 20 years by the building manufacturer. A
specimen copy of the document must accompany the bid, clearly stating the conditions under
which the guarantee is valid.
PURLINS: The purlin's configuration, thickness and spacing shall be the building manufacturer's
standard provided all design criteria, including deflection, is met or exceeded. The deflection of
the purlin shall not exceed L/180 of its span when supporting the applicable vertical live loads
previously prescribed and any collateral loads required.
ROOF JACKS AND CURBS: Openings, 8 inches or smaller, may be flashed and sealed to the
roof panels by jacks, providing complete structural support and weathertightness' is maintained.
Material shall be either of metal with a protective metallic coating or of a plastic alloy with an
acrylic film laminated to the exterior surface. Openings, larger than 8 inches, round or square,
shall be framed with a welded metal base fabricated from .07 inch (minimum) thick aluminum,
16 gage (minimum) galvanized steel or fiberglass reinforced plastic laminate with gel coat of
white polyester resin. The base and its appurtenance shall be supported by the roof purlins and
'wader framing. The base shall have a minimum projection of 6 inches above the weather
Revised SectionlV 050107.doc Page 6 Revised: 5/1/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
surface of the roof, and the configuration of the flanges shall match the roof panel. 'The flange to
panel joint shall be sealed with a non-hardening sealant and fastened in such a manner to provide
complete support and weathertightness. All curbs or jacks shall be an integral component of the
roofing system, designed and supplied by the roofing manufacturer.
WALL PANELS AND SUPPORTS: Metal curtain wall panels shall be of either the exterior type
to which the thermal qualities and various interior finishes may be field applied or of the
composite insulated type (factory assembled cellular polyurethane or polyisocyanurate
sandwich) with exterior and interior metal faces. The metal faces of either type shall be supplied
with a factory applied color coating. The color finish applied to the exterior (exposed) surface of
the panel shall be of such composition as to provide 20 years of film and color life. Color shall
be selected from those standards with the building manufacturer. Color coated metal panels shall
cant' a fire hazard rating equal to a Class 1 material as classified by Factory Mutual System. The
covering width and configuration of the panel shall be the building manufacturer's standard
provided all design criteria including deflection is met or exceeded. Side seams shall be
interlocking, concealed, tongue and groove or. Lap seams are acceptable. The wall panel shall
be fastened to its supports with concealed or exposed fasteners in the shadow groove: Stainless
steel or aluminum screws, bolts and/or rivets shall be acceptable for securing trim, fascias,
gutters and miscellaneous flashings to either the wall or roof panels. -The top, bottom and
intermediate panel closures, fleshings, fascias, gutters and trim shall be the building
manufacturer's standard, compatible with the material fiunished as wall panels. All wall panels
shall be sealed sufficiently to prevent the entry of rodents, insects,,birds, etc. This system must
be approved prior to the issuance of the Building Permit.
WALL PANEL GUARANTEE: The exterior color (baked on or laminated) finish for the wall
panels shall be guaranteed by the building manufacturer for 20 (twenty) years.
Color change shall not exceed 5 N.B.S. units (per ASTM D 2244.64T) and chalking shall not be
less than a rating of 8 per ASTM D 659. A specimen copy of the guarantee must accompany the
bid, clearly stating the conditions under which the guarantee is valid.
GIRTS: The girts configuration and thickness shall be the building manufacturer's standard
provided all design criteria, including deflection and girt spacing is met. Based on a simple span,
the deflection of the girts (supporting the wall covering) shall be proportioned with due regard to
that produced by the previously prescribed design (wind) load and its effect on the type of
interior finish specified hereafter.
STRUCTURAL STEEL PRIMER: All uncoated structural steel shall be given one 0) shop coat
of rust inhibitive (primer) paint which meets or exceeds Federal Specifications TT P 664, or
certification shall be submitted that it conforms to a recognized authoritative specification, such
as from a Federal or Military authority or the Structural Steel Painting Council.
ROOF INSULATION: Providing an overall heat transfer (U) value of not more than 0. 13, the
insulation system shall be applied under the exposed metal roofing panels. The insulation of
required thickness and density should either be placed over the purlins or placed in the roof
cavity between the purlins and supported by a sloped, unpierced or pierced ceiling of
noncombustible material. The vapor membrane shall always be placed nearest the interior of the
building, whether it be exposed or non-exposed. All joints shall be lapped or folded and stapled
. in accordance with building manufacturer's standard.
Except at each concealed structural fastener, a thermal (break) spacer shall separate the roof
purlin from the roof panel. The spacer shall be of material having a density of not less than 2 pcf
Revised SectionIV 050107.doc Page 7 Revised: 5/1/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
and, if of a combustible material; shall be classified (ASTM -E, 84) as having a flame spread
rating no greater than 25. Noncombustible roof insulation shall be flexible fiberglass blankets '
with a vapor resistant membrane. The vapor resistant membrane may be laminated to the
insulation as a composite unit or added as a separate component of the insulation system. The
insulation and vapor membrane, if supplied as a laminated composite. unit, shall carry an
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., (U.L. Label) fire hazard classification indicating a flame spread
rating of 25 or less, as a tested assembly. If supplied as separate components, each (tested
separately) shall carry the previously specified fire hazard classification.
PEDESTRIAN DOORS: The standard of quality adopted for swing doors and frames shall be
that established by the Steel Door Institute and that set forth as a minimum by the U. S.
Department of Commence Standard PS 4 66, relative to the manufacture of 13/4 inch thick flush
steel doors. Doors shall have view panels unless otherwise noted. All door sizes, swing and
hand, shall be as shown on the drawings. There shall be included all required hardware and
accessories conforming to the schedule shown on the drawings in addition to the necessary;
framing and fasteners required to properly install and to replace structurally the wall panes
and/or framing displaced. All door leaves, frames, astragals and louvers specified shall be
manufactured from zinc coated steel. The door leaves, frames, louvers and astragals shall be
bonderized and given a baked on prime coat of paint, shop applied. Field burning of openings
and/or wall framing shall not be permitted.
CONCRETE - QUALITY ASSURANCE: All concrete materials shall comply with the
provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards, except as otherwise shown or
specified.
- ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings".
- ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete".
- Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1.
- Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 D.O.T. specifications Sections 901 and 902.
- Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp sand, free from loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious
substances.
- Water: Clean, fresh, drinkable.
STEEL REINFORCING MATERIALS: All steel reinforcing materials shall comply with the
provisions of the following codes specifications and standards, except as otherwise shown or
specified.
- Reinforcing Bar (ReBar): ASTM A 615, GRADE 60, deformed.
- Welded Wire Fabric (WWF): ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric.
- Supports for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters
chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars
and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI
recommendations, unless otherwise specified. Wood, brick and other devices will not be
acceptable.
- For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where wetted
base materials will not support chair legs. Provide vapor barrier under interior slabs.
Revised SectionlV 050107.doc Page 8 Revised: 5/1/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
•
•
r1
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PROPOSED STEEL FIRE TRAINING TOWER:
DRAWINGS FOR DESIGN BUILD CONTRACT. One (1) 1,934 square foot pre-engineered
steel fire training tower as shown on drawings numbered 2006046. See Sheet C2.1 for overall
Site Plan and Sheet C6.1, Sheet C6.2, and Sheet C6.3 for fire training tower details.
PLANS REQUIRE PROFESSIONAL SEAL: The attached fire tower plans show the
arrangement required and the successful bidder shall furnish all engineering and construction
plans required to obtain a City of Clearwater Building Permit and to accomplish the work. Plans
shall be prepared and sealed by a Florida Registered Engineer or Architect.
CONCRETE: Perimeter footings. Column footings. 6-inch thick reinforced concrete slab on
grade with fibermesh additives and No. 4 reinforcing rods on 12" centers each way on two (2)
coats of 6 mil vapor barrier. Concrete slabs shall be cured with curing compound. See Fire
Training Tower Foundation Plan (Sheet C6.2).
DOORS: See Fire Training Tower Plan (Sheet C6.1) for location and number of doors.
PAINTING: See Fire Training Facility - Section 13121.
ELECTRICAL: Contractor is to provide all electrical work required for the building. The
building shall be complete with all wiring required for exit lighting, breaker panels, switches and
receptacles as required. All wiring shall meet or exceed minimum provisions of National
Electric Code. All wire shall be copper. All fittings, wiring devices and fixtures and panels shall
be UL approved as required by the City of Clearwater Building Department. Coordinate site
connection with City Engineer.
DESIGN BUILD: General Contractor is to furnish detailed plans and specifications for the
storage building and the Contractor shall construct the same. The attached plans show the
arrangement required and the successful bidder shall fnmish all engineering and construction
plans required to accomplish this work. Plans shall be prepared and signed and sealed by a
Florida Registered Engineer or Architect registered in the state of Florida. Design/Build
drawings shall comply with all Building Code requirements. The intent of these specifications
and drawings is to establish a minimum quality and performance level for structural design, all
material, components, durability and workmanship. The plans do not attempt to show all code
requirements for the building which may or will be required in the issue of a building permit by
the Building Official.
CONFORMANCE WITH BUILDING CODES: Plans and specifications shall meet all City of
Clearwater Building Permit requirements and fire code requirements.
PROPOSAL: All bidders must conform strictly to the plans and specifications in their bid.
MATERIALS: All materials utilized for building construction shall be new, unused, and free
from defect.
Note to Contractor:
The City of Clearwater reserves the right to exercise the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) option
for the pre-engineered, pre-manufactured fire training burn tower component
Revised SectionlV 050107.doc Page 9 Revised: 5/1/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PROPOSED TRAINING FACILITY:
This Section includes a summary of the proposed Training Facility. See also the Bid Documents'
(plans and specifications) for the Training Facility:.
Project Identification: Training Facility at Clearwater Fire Station 48
Project Location: 1700 North Belcher Road
Clearwater, Florida
Owner: City of Clearwater
Owner's Representative: Robert Maue, P.E.
Architect: Plisko Architecture, P.A.
800 Drew Street
Clearwater, Florida 33755
The Work consists of the following:
The Work includes a one-story 8,967 square-foot training building and renovations to the
existing training building. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract to be
included with this Contract.
USE OF PREMISES
General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of
Project site, during construction period.
Use of Site: Limit use of premises to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb
portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy without any disruption of operations of Fire
Station #48.
Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to
Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for
parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.
b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and
equipment on-site.
Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout
construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its
occupants during construction period.
OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and adjacent Fire Station building during entire
10
construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts
Revised SectionIV 050107.doc Page 10 Revised: 5/1/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day
operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated.
WORK RESTRICTIONS
Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of
entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes.
Note to Contractor.
The City of Clearwater reserves the right to exercise the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) option
for the gear drying racks, generator and transfer switches.
END OF SECTION
•
•
Revised SectionIV 050107.doc Page I 1 Revised: 5/3/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
•
•
•
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST
Project Name: FIRE TRAINING FACILITIES AT FIRE STATION 48
Project Number: 05-0002-FD
The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked "X"
as shown below:
1 Scope Of Work
2.1 Line, Grade And Record Drawings - b Contractor
2.2 Line, Grade And Record Drawings - b City
3 Definition Of Terms
4 Order And Location Of The Work
5 Excavation For Unde ound Work
6 Concrete
7 Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work
8 Reinforcement
T- I Z Obstructions
10 Restoration Or Replacement Of Driveways, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement
11 Work In Easements Or Parkways
12 Dewaterin
13 Sanitary Manholes
14 Backfill
15 Street Crossings, Etc.
16 Raisin Or Lowering Of Sanitary Sewer, Storm Drainage Structures
17 Unsuitable Material Removal
18 Underdrains
19 1 1 Storm Sewers
20 Sanitary Sewers And Force Mains
21 Drains e
22 Roadway Base And Sub grade
23 Asphaltic Concrete Materials
24 Adjustment To The Unit Bid Price For Asphalt
25 General Planting Specifications
26 Hdpe Deformed - Reformed Pi Lining
27 Plant Mix Driveways
28 Reporting Of Tonnage Of Recycled Materials
29 Concrete Curbs
30 Concrete Sidewalks And Driveways
31 Sodding
32 Seeding
33 Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures
34 Material Used
35 Conflict Between Plans And Specifications
36 1 0 Street Signs
37.1 Audio/Video Tae Of Work Areas - b City
37.2 Audio/Video Tae Of Work Areas - b Contractor
38 Erosion And Siltation Control
SectionlV.doc
Page 12
Revised. 4/29/2007
•
•
Section IV - Technical Specifications
39 Utility Tie In Location Markin
40 Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee
41 Water Mains and A urtenances
42 Gas S tem S fications
43 Tennis Courts
44 Work Zone Traffic Control
45 Cured-In-Place Pipe Lining
46
R Specifications for Pol eth lene Slilimn
47 Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Ribbed Pi
48 Gunite Specifications
49 Sanitary and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration
50 Project Information Signs
51 In-Line Skating Surfacin System
52.1 Resident Notification of Start of Construction - b Ci
52.2 Resident Notification of Start of Construction - b Contractor
53 Gabions and Mattresses
54 Lawn Maintenance Specifications
55 Millie Operations
56 Ckaring and Grubbing
57 Riprap
58 Treatment Plant Safe
59 Traffic Signal Equipment and Materials
60 Signing And Markin
61 Roadway Li tin
62 Tree Protection
63 Project Web Pages
TIME: 450 DAYS
SectionIV.doc
Page 13
Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
2 LINE, GRADE AND RECORD DRAWINGS'
2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE
CONTRACTOR
Benchmarks to be used shall be those as shown on the plans. Control points (for alignment only)
shall be established by the Engineer. Contractor shall submit cut sheets for all underground work
24 hours in advance of commencement of the work for checking. Checking of cut-sheets does
not relieve the Contractor of any responsibilities for any errors or conflicts whatsoever. Cut
sheets shall be submitted in triplicate. The Contractor shall provide three complete sets of Record
construction drawings prior to final payment being made.
2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY
At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project
inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project.
Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and
grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the
rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be
computed in one-hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The City will generate the
project Record construction drawings.
3 DEFINITION OF TERMS
For the purpose of these Technical Specifications the following definition of terms shall apply:
City
City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, FL.
Engineer
The City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida, or his authorized
representative.
Contractor
The person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been made by
the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative.
Inspector
An authorized representative of the City Engineer of Clearwater, assigned to make
official inspections of the material furnished and the work performed by the Contractor.
FD. 0. T.
The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as
Specifications
issued by the Florida Department of Transportation (latest English edition).
A.A.S.H.T.O.
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials.
A. W.S.
American Welding Society
SectionN.doc Page 14 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
A.S.T.M.
American Society for Testing Materials
A.S.A.
American Standards Association
A.N.S.L
American National Standards Institute
A. W W.A.
American Water Works Association
O.S.H.A.
Occupational Safety & Health Administration
A. CL
American Concrete Institute
Representative of Contractor
The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the
construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these
persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre-construction
conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City
Engineer.
Estimated Quantities
The Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on
the Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which
the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not assume any responsibility that
the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities nor shall the
contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of quantities or
of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining
thereto.
4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK
The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to
the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the
Contractor shall work and order thereof.
5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK
The contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner
which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times
maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property.
The contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements
of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in
these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory
agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the contractor.
For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to
consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as
OSHA "Type C". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for
SectionrV.doc Page 15 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the
removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of
a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify his Competent
Person to City staff at the start of construction.
City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or
other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the contractor. City staff in conformance with
the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with
these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's
excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is
unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the contractor must
either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the
accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense.
The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain
sufficient quantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open
cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to
OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the
Contractor is required to use excavation and trench-shoring methods in compliance with all
safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work
necessary to complete the project.
Not more than one hundred (100) feet of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the
completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance
specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be six (6) inches wider on each side than
the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid
in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the
body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place,
excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling
and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without
compensation.
6 CONCRETE
Unless otherwise directed, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest
editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the
American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. All appropriate testing shall
be performed according to the American Society of Testing Materials.
Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum
compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall
conform to AASHTO M-85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C-33. All ready mix concrete
shall conform to ASTM C-94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of 3" to 5", except
when admixtures or special placement considerations are required.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all
concrete placement.
All concrete shall be tested in the following manner:
Placement of less than 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise,
for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set of 3
compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion
SectionN.doc Page 16 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as
determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and
compensation or denial thereof.
7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK
7.1 EXCAVATION
Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon
which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a
point 6" outside said concrete work before the forms are placed Concrete shall be poured "in the
dry ••.
7.2 FORMS
Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by
written permission from Engineer). They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth
equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall
be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or
springing.
8 REINFORCEMENT
When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be
deformed: ASTMA-A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel
A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete
reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Epoxy coated
reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM 775/A77 M-86 requirements.
8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the
contract unit price for the item of work specified
9 OBSTRUCTIONS
Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be
carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and
properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof.
Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains,
or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims
for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made.
Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or
obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or
benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless
otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land
surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the
nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means.
Section V.doc Page 17 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS,
CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT
Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and
shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards,
whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be
replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is
unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved
material. All replaced base shall be a minimum 8" compacted thickness, or same thickness as
base destroyed plus 2", if over 6", and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T-
180.
Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor,
materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per lineal foot of main or
square yard of base.
The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals,
shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid
for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of
replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the
pipe. All over this will be at the Contractor's expense.
The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in
the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and
shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard:
concrete - per square foot; curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4" or 6" thick - per square foot.
Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of 6" thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10 •'
welded wire mesh (also see Articles 8 and 30).
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all
driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work.
11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS
Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the
construction progress.
The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time
following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration
within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction
activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests.
Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery
removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work.
The contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on
any and all phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local
residents or businesses except as the contractor shall obtain written permission.
Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater
treatment plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for
Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre-
SectionN.doc Page 18 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory
requirements.
12 DEWATERING
Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the
dry". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the
work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity
underdrain system, or sumps with pumps.
Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the
excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain
firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and
the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of
handling large volumes of air as well as of water.
The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering
operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work,
the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in
excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to
conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer.
The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the
case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures.
13 SANITARY MANHOLES
13.1 BUILT UP TYPE
Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the
drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to
inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of
as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and
evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into
concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full
section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe.
The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed
twenty four inches.
Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be
smoothed from inside of manholes.
The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar.
Brick used may be solid only.. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a
stretcher course.
ID
SectionIV.doc Page 19 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
13.2 PRECAST TYPE
Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the.
City Engineer.
AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of 5
inches. The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be
a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "O" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum
concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days.
Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for
approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve contractor of responsibility for compliance
to these specifications unless letter from contractor requesting specific variance is approved by
the City Engineer.
Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as
numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before
being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering
system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered.
Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of
Clearwater Engineering Detail #302 Sheet 2 of 3.
Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings
are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed.
The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five (5)
inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing.
Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring`
shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade
changes without disturbing the manhole.
13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS)
1. All grade adjustments of manhole frame and cover assemblies shall be completed
utilizing the following: High Density Polyethylene Grade Adjustment Rings - Comply
with ASTM Standard D-1248 for recycled plastic.
a. Material properties shall be tested and certified for usage by the following ASTM
methods:
b. Property Test Method Acceptable Value
c. Melt Flow Index ASTM D1238 0.3 to 30 g / 10 min.
d. Density ASTM D792 0.94 to 0.98 g / cm3
e. Tensile Strength ASTM D638 2.00 to 5 x 103 lb / in 2
f. Polyethylene adjusting rings shall not be used when they are exposed to heated
hot mix asphalt pavement.
g. Tapered configuration: When used in a single configuration tapered adjusting ring
thickness will range from 0.5 inch to 3.0 inch.
h. Grade adjustment rings are to be installed on clean flat surfaces according to the
manufacturer's recommendations with the, proper Butyl Rubber sealant/adhesives.
SectionIV.doc Page 20 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
2. The inside diameter of the adjustment ring shall not be less than the inside diameter of the
manhole frame.
3. Manholes shall be constructed with at least two adjustment rings.
4. Maximum height of adjustment ring stack: 12 inches max. for new manholes and 16
inches max. on existing manholes.
13.3 DROP MANHOLES
Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as
detailed on the drawings.
13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS
Manhole fames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush
with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Detail 301.
13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS
The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two coats of bitumastic
black solution 300 M as manufactured by Koppers Company, Inc. or approved equal. Interior of
built up manholes which have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a
force main shall have the inside plastered with 1/2 inch of grout and coated as precast manholes
below.
The exterior and interior of all precast manholes shall be coated with at least 15 mils dry
thickness of PROCO EP 214 351 Epoxi Mastic as manufactured by Protective Coatings Inc.
13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES
Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a
manhole adapter coupling by Flo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling.
14 BACKFILL
Material for backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources
as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from organic matter or
debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all
fill shall be similar material.
Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand
shovels and thoroughly compacted to 12" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means.
Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 12" in thickness
unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98%
compaction as determined by the modified Proctor Density Test to the bottom of pavement.
Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a
minimum of 95% compaction ofAASHTO T 180 Standard Density Test.
The cost of backfill shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the
case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structure.
SectionIV.doc Page 21 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
15 STREET CROSSINGS. ETC.
At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, the trenches shall be
bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon
the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The
material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be
satisfactory to the Engineer.
The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation.
16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER. STORM
DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans
or as indicated by the Engineer.
16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work.
17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL
All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the
site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material oil
site at his expense. The limits of the excavation shall either be shown on the plans, or determined
in the field by the Engineer in conjunction with the City's Materials Tester.
17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material excavated
and replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation,
truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal.
17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment,
tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and
incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable
material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item.
18 UNDERDRAINS
The Contractor shall construct sub-surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of
Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe
shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT crushed aggregate, located behind the back of curb and
aggregate surface covered with a non-degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate
may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be
stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be 8"
diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F-758 "Standard Specification
For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of
46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-189
SectionN.doc Page 22 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
described in FDOT Section 948-4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 -
SDR 35.
Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe
exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C,
manufactured per ASTM F949-93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of
splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60%
flatting and with a double gasket joint.
Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non-perforated pipe
with compacted backfill. All poly-chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure
to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall
be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain
aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140-N or approved
equal) per the construction detail drawings.
18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be the number of lineal feet of 8" Sub-drain in place and accepted
18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be based upon the unit price per lineal foot for underdrain as measured above,
which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and
shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain
(specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean-outs, sod, driveway,
` road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item.
19 STORM SEWERS
All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be reinforced concrete unless
otherwise specified or approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 941
of the current FDOT Specifications.
All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent
(as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit
price for the pipe.
All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned If any difficulty
is found in the fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street
before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid No
pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and
not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that
the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout.
19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or right offsets of all manholes,
inlet structures and terminals ends of subdrains, as measured from the nearest downstream
manhole along the centerline of the sewer along with the elevations of the north edge of manhole
cover, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets. (Gutter)
SectionIV.doc Page 23 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
19.2 TESTING
The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all
conditions. At the discretion of the City Engineer or his designee, the watertightness of a sewer
which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring the infiltration.
The watertightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by
filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the
crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section of the water table outside of the sewer,
whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or
exfiltration exceed 150 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall finnish
all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the
Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive the Contractor at his own
expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer,
remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No
trench made joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be
acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation.
The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the
line.
19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted,
measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of
storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price
includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap,
labor and incidentals, etc.).
20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS
20.1 MATERIALS
20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON.
Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform with ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.-
35. The pipe shall be plainly marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints
and fittings shall have a rubber sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with
ASTM D 3212 76. The laying length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of 12.5 feet.
Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and
fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for DIP
water main except pipe shall be interior "polylined" in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline
easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral
connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets
shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in Technical Section 41.
20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless
otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile
SectionIV.doc Page 24 Revised: 4/29/2007
01
•
11
Section N - Technical Specifications
iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications
for water main pipe except that DIP shall be "polylined" in accordance with manufactures
recommendations.
All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet
radiation shall be rejected.
20.2 INSTALLATION
20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Installation of gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained
in ASTM D 2321 and Unibell UNI B 5.
The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable
width allowing working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench
boxes and movable sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and
compaction will not disturb compacted haunching material or pipe alignment.
Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow
preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without
standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to
prevent flotation or misalignment.
Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the contractor will be required to
remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (1/2" Dia. aggregate) to provide firm
support of pipe.
Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint 2 feet in length and shall use an
approved water stop around pipe joint entry.
The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The contractor is
required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction
inspector the location of all new laterals.
20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Section 41 of these Technical
Specifications for water main pipe.
20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS
The contractor shall submit to the Engineer a marked set of "As Built" construction drawings
describing both the stations and left or right offset of all lateral terminal ends as measured from
the nearest downstream manhole along the center line of the sewer main. The as built drawings
will also describe elevations of the north edge of the manhole cover rings and inverts of all main
pipes in manholes.
20.4 TESTING
20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS
The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all
conditions. The water rightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level
SectionlV.doc Page 25 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying
above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a
hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test
section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the
exfiltra- tion. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 50 gallon per inch of diameter
per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the
amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or
exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to
remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire
length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after
they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation.
The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the
line.
20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS
Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for one hour, as described
in Section 41.04 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains.
20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT
20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per lineal foot per
appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for
payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes. 10
Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per lineal foot of pipe as measured from the centerline
of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe.
Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete
the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering,
backfill and grading.
20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 41 of
these Technical Specifications for water main pipe.
21 DRAINAGE
The Contractor shall provide proper outlet for all water courses and drains interrupted during the
progress of the work and replace them in as good condition as he found them.
22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE
22.1 BASE
This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall
refer to Section IV, Article 1 "Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Specifications for additional
roadway base and subgrade items.
SectionIV.doc Page 26 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
Roadway base shall be 8" compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or
40 directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be 12" compacted minimum thickness with a
minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor
and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing
laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the
limits of the base, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract
Specifications will apply.
Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs
required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done
to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can
commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material
shall be included in the bid item for base.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all base
and subgrade placement or reworking.
The following base materials are acceptable:
1. SHELL BASE: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913
of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted
thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the
prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base.
• 2. LEWEROCK BASE: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections
200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a
minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The lmerock shall be from a
FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item
price for base.
3. CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in
accordance with Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition),
and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed
concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified
laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms
to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 185. LBR and gradation
tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a week for continuous
operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City
Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price
for base.
4. SOIL CEMENT BASE: Unless otherwise noted, soil cement base shall be constructed
in accordance with Section 270 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have
a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. An Asphalt Rubber Membrane
Interlayer (ARMI) shall be included in the pavement design per Section 341 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition) to minimize reflective cracking unless otherwise
noted in the project plans and specifications. The ARMI layer shall be overlaid with
asphalt on the same day it is placed for the Contractor to receive full compensation for
the work.
SectionN.doc Page 27 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
The soil cement base design shall be by a certified lot under the direction of a Registered
Florida Professional Engineer, and must be approved by the City Engineer. Said design
shall provide for a minimum of 300 P.S.I. in seven days. All plant mixed soil cement shall
be certified by a registered laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer.
The only approved method for spreading the cement is the use of a spreader box. The use
of a spreader bar for spreading cement will not be allowed. The applying of the cement
shall not be allowed when the wind velocity is sufficient to jeopardize material interests
(i.e. vehicles, etc.) from airborne cement particles. The density testing frequency shall be
at the discretion of the registered Florida Professional Engineer responsible for the soil
cement design.
5. ASPHALT BASE: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with
Section 280 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum
compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement and
compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in
the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item
price for asphalt or base.
6. REWORKED BASE: When the plans call for the working of the existing base, the
finished reworked base shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 8" unless
otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, and be constructed in
accordance with the applicable FDOT requirements for the type of material used. The
density requirements (except for asphalt and soil cement base) shall be per Section 200 6
of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). For asphalt, the density requirements
are per Section 330-11, and for soil cement per Section 270-5 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications.
22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as
called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (1/2"). Areas
deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if
so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be
made for such deficient areas that are left in place.
22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE
The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading,
compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item),
stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to
complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt
unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
22.2 SUBGRADE
All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of
FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall
have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by
the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition). Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of
the subgrade, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract
SectionIV.doc Page 28 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in
• accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing,
grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to
prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or
subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value
after the mixing of materials for the stabilized subgrade.
22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place
and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth
shall be per Section 161-6.4 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values
shall be per FDOT Section 160-7.2. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be
corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the
City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas
that are left in place (latest edition).
22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading,
compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all
incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in
the bid item for base.
23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS
This specification is for the preparation and application of all S-Type Marshall Mix Design
asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted
23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
23.1.1 AGGREGATE
All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections
901 through 919 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS,
EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE
The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous
materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications
(latest edition). Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance
procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications.
The Contractor shall note that the City shall have the right to have an independent testing
laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all
materials to be used. Tests to be performed by the independent testing laboratory every 1000 tons
SectionN.doc Page 29 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
include, but are not limited to, Marshall stability and flow, extraction/gradation and cores to
determine density and thickness. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along
with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable
specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and
accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent
testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract
documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of
removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the
Contractor.
Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following:
1. Density per Section 330-11 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per Section 330-13 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications.
3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of '/4" or greater shall be
corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness
for a length extending at least 25' from each end of the deficient area, or when the
Engineer allows for an overlay per Section 330-15.2.3 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (2000 edition). In addition, for excesses of 1/4" or greater, the Engineer will
determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the
pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness
specified in the contract.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the
placement of all asphalt.
23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES
All asphalt mix designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's
2000 Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer PRIOR
to the commencement of the paving operation. NO RECLAIMED ASPHALT PAVEMENT
(RAP) MATERIAL SHALL BE ALLOWED IN THE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MIXES.
23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS
All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements:
Table 1: Layer Thickness for Asphalt. (Layers Are Listed in Sequence of Construction)
COURSE
THICKNESS LAYER THICKNESS (Inches)
(Inches) Type S-I Type S-I with
Type S-III
Top Layer Type S-III FC-3 Type S-III
with FC-3
Top Layer Type S-I
with FC-3
Top Layer
1st 2nd 1st 2'd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1 st 2nd 1st 2nd
1 I I
1 '/2 1 '/2
SectionN.doc Page 30 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
•
2 1'/4 % * 1 1
2%2 1'/4 1'/4 1'/2 1 1'/2 1
3 1'/2 1'/2 2 1 2 1
* At the Engineer's discretion, 2" of S-III is acceptable for use on residential streets
Additional Notes:
1. Type S-III shall be limited to the final (top) structural layer (one layer only).
2. All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the requirements of sections 331 and 337
of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
3. All pavement designs shall include a minimum of two inches of asphalt.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible to review the project plans for complete pavement
design detail.
5. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, Type S-III per Section 331 of FDOT's 2000
Standard Specifications shall be used as final riding surface on streets with the speed
limit of less than 35 mph, streets with an average daily traffic (ADT) of less than 3000,
and all residential streets.
6. An FC-3 friction course per section 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall
be used on streets with a speed limit of 35 mph or greater, and streets with an ADT of
3000 or greater.
23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of
operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture,
surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, etc.) shall be in accordance with
Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION
23.6.1 CRACKS
Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by
the following steps:
1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method
2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as
appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the
level of the surrounding roadway surface.
3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks
are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking.
4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
SectionlV.doc Page 31 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
23.6.2 POTHOLES
Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps:
1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method.
2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole.
3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted.
4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall
be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each
item.
The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions:
The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements.
The riser shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum
requirements of A.S.T.M. A-36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel
adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or
fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per
manufacturers specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each
riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring
section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original
casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that
the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are
thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each
riser.
If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of
pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and
compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is
acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable.
All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final
asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving
operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On
arterial roadways, the rims manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period
between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve
boxes, tree aeration vents, etc. will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be
included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure
that they are not paved over, It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all
utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the
scheduled paving.
23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS
1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer or Project Inspector, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item
for asphalt.
SectionIV.doc Page 32 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the
road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans.
3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely
manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements.
4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. The Broom
Tractor way of sweeping will not be permitted. Prior to paving, all construction areas
shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that
picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water
supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off
of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site.
5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's
discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest
edition). Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost
(including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for
asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the
plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless
otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336
of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be %4" above the lip
or face of said curb per City Index 101.
23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
1. Unless otherwise noted in this section, all of the asphaltic concrete specifications in
Sections A through H above shall apply to superpave asphaltic concrete. All asphaltic
concrete pavement shall be designed and placed in accordance with the FDOT Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (latest edition).
2. All aggregate shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to
Sections 901 and 902 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition).
3. All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition). Asphaltic binder shall be Grade PG 67-22-unless otherwise
specified in the Scope of Work.
4. All superpave mix designs shall conform to Sections 320 and 334 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition).
5. All general construction requirements shall conform to Section 330 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition).
23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Is Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and
accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used.
SectionIV.doc Page 33 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and
measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack
and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching,
filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and
incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and
specifications.
24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT
When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in
accordance with the following provisions:
1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current. FDOT Asphalt Price
Index varies more than 10% from the bid price at the time of the bid opening.
2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT
shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet
site. The address is: http://wwwl l.myflorida.com. It is under the section "Doing Business
with FDOT" in the "Contrasts Administration" section under "Asphalt Index". For
additional information, call FDOT @ 850-414-4000.
3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be
used for the initial determination of the asphalt price.
4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt
will be used for payment calculation.
5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period
for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index.
6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat.
7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made
for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time.
8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt.
25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS
25.1 IRRIGATION
25.1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic
underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials,
equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the
underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or
specified. Work noted as "NIC", "existing", or "by others" is not included in this pay
item.
B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the
turf/landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be
SectionIV.doc Page 34 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of
the Engineer.
25.1.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation
subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope,
mainline, system pressure, controls, etc.
B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all
applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work
shall apply.
C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with
the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject
material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall
be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the contractor's expense.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the
Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of
three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information:
1. Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business telephone number, 24 hour
emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and
address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where
replacement equipment can be purchased
2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract.
3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment.
4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and
"hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the
Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered
a. Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and
maintenance.
b. Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and
maintenance.
25.1.1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground
improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting
requiring excavation 24 in. diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of
main lines.
B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials.
C. The Irrigation Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until
final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen,
or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the
contractor.
D. The Irrigation Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to
the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be
SectionrV.doc Page 35 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to
comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the
public.
25.1.1.3 WARRANTY
A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory
service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City
of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or
faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater or FDOT.
25.1.2 PRODUCTS
25.1.2.1 GENERAL
A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations
from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted.
25.1.2.2 PIPING
A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and
tested in accordance with these specifications.
B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40,
conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785.
C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the
mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80.
25.1.2.3 PIPE FITTINGS
A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to
the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or
trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval.
The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with
threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples.
25.1.2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER
A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as
recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end.
B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The
Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe.
25.1.2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS
A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant.
25.1.2.6 GATE VALVES
25.1.2.6.1 MANUAL GATE VALVES 2 IN. AND SMALLER ?.
A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
SectionN.doc Page 36 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
1. 200-250 psi Ball Valve
40 2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals
3. Threaded-Dual end Union Connectors
4. Non-Shock Safe-T Shear Stem
5. Safe-T Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing
Company, Sylmer, California, or approved equal.
25.1.2.6.2 GATE VALVES 2%" IN. AND LARGER
A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
1. AWWA-C-509
2. 200 lb. O.W.G
3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B
4. Deep socket joints
5. Rising stem
6. Bolted bonnet
7. Double disc
8. Equipped with 2" square operating key with tee handle
B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve 3" and larger. The "street key" shall be 5'
long with a 2" square operating nut.
25.1.2.7 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater)
25.1.2.8 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance-pressure across-the
diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25-30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a
pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating
shall not be less than 150 psi.
B. The valve body and bonnent shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic,
stainless steel and other chemical/UV resistant materials. The valve's one-piece
diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice.
C. The valve body shall have a 1" inch (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch slip by slip
inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections.
D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable
from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation.
E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora,
California, or approved equal.
F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings.
SectionIV.doc Page 37 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
25.1.2.9 VALVE BOXES
A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36
concrete value box with #36-T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal.
B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 (10") circular valve box with #181015
cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal.
C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6") economy turf box with #182002
cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal.
25.1.2.10 DRIP IRRIGATION
25.1.2.10.1 CONSTRUCTION
A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch (1/2") low-density linear
polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self-cleaning,
integral drippers at a specified spacing, (12", 18", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be
brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside
diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded
to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers
shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self-
flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper.
25.1.2.10.2 OPERATION
A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet
pressure of seven to seventy (7-70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and
with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating
pressure shall be between 15-45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9
gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure
compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The
drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be
available in 12", 18" and. 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified.
Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum
system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius
shall be 7".
B. For on-surface or under mulch installations, 6" metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be
installed 3'-5' on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction.
25.1.2.10.3 LINE FLUSHING VALVES
A. The sub-surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each
independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning
of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect
directly to the dripline.
25.1.2.10.4 AIR/VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an Air/Vacuum Relief Valve at its high
point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi.
SectionIV.doc Page 38 Revised: 4/29/2007
•
•
Section N - Technical Specifications
25.1.2.10.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds
per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressures of 25 psi. Regulating
accuracy shall be within /-6%. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high-
impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed
stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the
water passage.
25.1.2.10.6 FILTERS
A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial
size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be
constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance.
25.1.2.10.7 FITTINGS
A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings
and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the
integrity of the subsurface irrigation system.
25.1.2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER
A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate
transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from
the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type
which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function
normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall
function if submerged in water.
B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to
insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for
screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box.
C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt alkaline battery for one full year regardless
of the number of stations utilized The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either
sequentially or independently.
D. The controller shall have three independent programs with eight start times each, station
run time capability from one minute to twelve hours in one minute increments, and a
seven day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed
on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to
the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of
manual single station or manual program operation.
E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora,
California USA.
25.1.2.12 FIELD TRANSMITTER
A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field
Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an
infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS
SectionIV.doc Page 39 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall
operate on one 9V alkaline battery.
B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven-key programming pad.
A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after
one minute when not in use.
C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK
Control Modules.
D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.,
Glendora, California USA.
25.1.2.13 LATCHING SOLENOID
A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing
installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES-B, GB, of EFB series
valve.
B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.,
Glendora, California USA.
25.1.3 EXECUTION
25.1.3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general
details of the work.
B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced.r
C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary
shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed,
except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor
in his absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given
to the Contractor.
D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by
outside authorities.
E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically
mentioned in these Technical Special Provisions.
F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific
interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or
clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the
decisions. In event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall
be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost.
G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of
sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other
underground utilities. Contractor shall employ. all data contained in the contract
Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the
manner by which it relates to the installation.
SectionIV.doc Page 40 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that
obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or
specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be
brought to the attention of the Engineer.
I. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted Install all required sleeving
prior to roadway base.
25.1.3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
25.1.3.2.1 TRENCHING -GENERAL
A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches.
Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on
Drawings.
B. Maintain 6 in. horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all
lines of other trades.
C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind
D. Maintain 6 in. vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45
degrees to 90 degrees.
E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities.
25.1.3.2.2 BACKFILLING
A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have 18" of fill placed over the pipe.
B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter
larger than '/? in.
C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Specification Book, 1996 Edition.
D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil.
E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs.
F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per
AASHTO T 180 - latest edition. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed
95% of maximum density.
G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand
tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more
than six (6") inches thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall
have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to
prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities.
25.1.3.2.3 ROUTING OF PIPING:
A. Routing of pressure and non-pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on
Drawings.
B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines.
1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations.
2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated.
SectionlV.doc Page 41 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure
supply line.
D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between
site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original
Drawings, and without additional cost.
E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of
approved layout.
25.1.3.3 INSTALLATION
25.1.3.3.1 WATER SUPPLY
A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the
Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost
to the Owner.
25.1.3.3.2 ASSEMBLIES
A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install
lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings.
B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own
outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly.
C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical
{
Special Provisions.
D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the
male threads only.
25.1.3.3.3 SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER)
A. The contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway,
utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies.
25.1.3.3.4 PLASTIC PIPE
A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent.
1. Allow welded joints as least 15 minutes setup/curing time before moving or handling.
2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water
pressure is on.
3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four hours has elapsed for
solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent
manufacturer.
C. Curing
1. When 'the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least 24
hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure.
D. Flushing the system:
SectionIV.doc Page 42 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control
valves and flush out the system with a full head of water.
E. Installing piping under existing pavement:
1. Piping under existing pavement maybe installed by jacking & boring.
2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing
pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be
accomplished at no additional cost.
25.1.3.3.5 CONTROLLERS
A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans.
1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineers representative prior
to installation.
25.1.3.3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than 6 in., nor less than 4 in. cover from the
top of the valve to finish grade.
B. Install valves in a plumb position with 24 in. minimum maintenance clearance from other
equipment, 3 feet minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer
than 7 feet from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways.
C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for
each sprinkler zone.
25.1.3.3.7 GATE VALVES
A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper
maintenance.
B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill.
25.2 LANDSCAPE
25.2.1 GENERAL
25.2.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Contract Documents shall include the Plans, Details, Specifications, Bid Proposal,
Contract Agreement, including Installation Schedule, all Addenda, and Contractual and
Special Conditions when required
25.2.1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory
agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and
environmental matters.
0 B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the
contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having
SectionIV.doc Page 43 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the
Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing.
25.2.1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to
the work specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and
incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans,
Schedules, Notes and as specified herein.
B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to
prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish
grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish,
plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to
execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans.
C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to
prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will
appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the
landscape drawings.
D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document.
25.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who
shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors
under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work,
shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their
commencement of work on the project.
B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices.
C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the
Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the
Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plan shall predominate
and be considered the controlling document.
D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among
persons in his employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety
and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape
Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting
from compliance or non-compliance with these standards.
E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is
built into or affects the work in this Section.
F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to
excavation. Call "One Call" at 1-800-432-4770.
G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the
work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in
conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect.
SectionIV.doc Page 44 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
25.2.1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance
period, two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established
by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one year.
B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all
specified work.
25.2.1.6 ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS
A. If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor
must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/alternates at the time of
bidding.
B. The Owner, through his Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of
the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void.
C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any
substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without
approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk.
D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions
and warranties stated herein.
25.2.1.7 ABBREVIATIONS/DEFINITIONS
O.A. or HT.:
The over-all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of
the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
C. T.:
Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with
no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or
similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds.
C. W.:
Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf
sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms
or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the
fronds.
SPR.:
Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not
including extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
ST.TR.:
Straight trunk.
MIN..
Minimum.
GAL.:
Gallon contai
i
i
1
ll
3
7
ll
t
ll
ner s
ze,
.e.,
ga
on,
ga
on,
ga
on, e
c.
O. C..
On center, distance between plant centers.
SectionN.doc Page 45 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
DL4..
Diameter.
LYS.:
Leaves.
D.B.H.:
Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above
grade.
CAL.:
Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade,
larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade.
B&B:
Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American
Association of Nurserymen.
PPP:
Plants per pot.
FG:
Field grown.
STD.:
Standard, single, straight trunk.
Owner:
To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work
is performed.'
Owner's Representative:
Owner's on-site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of,
materials specified and execution of installation.
Contractor:
Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor.
Landscape Architect.
This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the
landscape Plans and Specifications.
25.2.1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
25.2.1.8.1 PLANT MATERIALS
A. Provide container grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune
prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark,
break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If
plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered.
B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected
from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have
been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be
pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time.
SectionN.doc Page 46 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
C. Balled and burlapped plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than
• 1 foot diameter of ball to every 1 inch caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less
than 2/3 of root ball diameter. B & B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall
have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch.
D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root
pruning to be done a minimum of 4 weeks before removal from the field and planting at
the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except
plastic shrink wrap for transport only.
E. Remove all fronds form cabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of 12 inches
of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a
minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling.
Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed Boots shall be
removed from trunk unless otherwise specified Palms shall be planted within 24 hours of
delivery.
F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant
immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs
in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots
moist.
G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof
tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.
H. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after
stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing
in a shaded area.
25.2.1.9 JOB CONDITIONS
25.2.1.9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS.
A. The Contractor shall examine the sub-grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions
under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project
Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of
conditions and full responsibility for the completed work.
B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become
available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and
following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape
Architect for adjustments to the Schedule.
C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting
procedures.
D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage
conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing
• prior to planting.
E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to the planting of lawns,
protecting lawn trees and promptly repairing damages from planting operations.
SectionN.doc Page 47 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
25.2.1.9.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK
A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon
award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy
to the Owner's Representative and/or the Landscape Architect for approval. The
Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule.
B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc. in order
to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the
progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to
the Owner.
C. The Owner's Representative's may request in writing work stoppage. Upon written
request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend
delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the
Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor with respect to any
additional costs which may result from work stoppage.
25.2.1.9.3 UTILITIES
A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities.
Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities.
Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties
concerned.
25.2.2 PRODUCTS
25.2.2.1 MATERIALS
25.2.2.1.1 PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE
A. Plant species, sizes, etc. shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material
Scheduled. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of
Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint
Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names
accepted in the nursery trade.
25.2.2.1.2 PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in
the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the
species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests or their eggs, plant
diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in
leaf and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems.
B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant
materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided
tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees
that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable.
C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality
for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II,
Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition).
SectionN.doc Page 48 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at
ID the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with
requirements for name variety, size quality, or designated area.
E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by
governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that
are applicable to landscape materials.
F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit
Landscape Architect proof of it being non-available. In such event, if the Landscape
Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source.
When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by
adjustment to Contract amount.
G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall
be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This
measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be
taken after pruning for specified. sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to
measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger
than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect; with
no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery.
H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where
symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible.
1. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter
and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the
plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen.
Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B
procedures.
J. Container-grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice-versa
provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect
approves the substitution.
K. Container grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but
not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound
condition exists.
25.2.2.1.3 GRASSES: SOD OR SEED
A. Sod or seed (as/if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of
even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious week, freshly mowed
before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than 24
hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be
installed Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation.
B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place.
Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements.
25.2.2.1.4 MULCH
A. Mulch shall be 100% Grade "B" shredded cypress bark mulch, thoroughly mixed with a
pre-emergence weed killer according to the label directions as specified on the plan.
SectionIV.doc Page 49 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
B. Install mulch to an even depth of 3" before compaction.
25.2.2.1.5 FERTILIZER
A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for
application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags
bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully
conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws.
B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the
appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein.
C. Agriform 20-10-5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for
all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling.
D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release
Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate.
E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St.
Augustine grass at the rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per one thousand (1,000) square
feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 50% of the
nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be
1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than 1/4 the
nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese,
iron, zinc, copper, etc.).
25.2.2.1.6 STAKES AND GUYS
A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree
trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used.
B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over 2" caliper.
Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees 2" caliper and under. A
minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree shall be used.
C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with
a minimum of 3 stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x 4"
by 16" wood connected with two -3/4" steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk.
D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved.
25.2.2.1.7 PLANTING SOIL
A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and
loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test,
prior to planting and at no additional cost to the Contract, any soils which may be
unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to
the Landscape Architect immediately in writing.
B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist
of 1/3 peat and 2/3 sandy loam, with no lumps over 1".
C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil.
There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 - 6.5 pH) with no excess of
calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps,
roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or
SectionIV.doc Page 50 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily
organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt.
D. Bed preparation for annual beds under 1 gallon container size shall consist of 3" of
Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width
of planting area. Rototil organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into native soil.
25.2.2.1.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Terra-Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting
soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's
recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans.
25.2.2.1.9 TREE PROTECTION
A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal
members. Space vertical members 6 feet to 8 feet on center. The barricade shall be placed
so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree
within a circle described by a radius of one foot for each inch of the tree's diameter at
breast height DBH at 4 - %Z feet above grade.
25.2.2.1.10 ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM
A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for
protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install
as directed by the manufacturer.
25.2.2.1.11 PACKAGED MATERIALS
A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of
manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the
site.
25.2.2.1.12 PESTICIDES
A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's
directions.
25.2.3 EXECUTION
25.2.3.1 PREPARATION
25.2.3.1.1 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities,
irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work.
B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation
of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a
relocated position for any materials necessary.
0 25.2.3.1.2 GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS
A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with
Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas
SectionIV.doc Page 51 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's
specifications.
B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been
achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting
bed.
C. Pre-emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round-Up" or
"Rodeo", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect.
D. Should any plant material in the same, or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals,
the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the
Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the
Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish
grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will
conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface
drainage without puddling.
F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over 1 - '/2 inches in any
dimension form individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated
material off the site.
25.2.3.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING
A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread 3 inches of
Florida peat (1/3), sandy loam (1/3), or other approved organic soil amendment over the
full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer 6 inches to 8
inches into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface
drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release
fertilizer according to product instructions and rate.
25.2.3.1.4 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS
A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with
Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas
adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's
Specifications.
B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub-
grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches.
C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth,
even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf
flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing
yard drains.
D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one (1)
pound of nitrogen per 1000 square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed
granules, with 30% - 505 of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form.
Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top 4 inches of soil.
SectionN.doc Page 52 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and
allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil
condition.
25.2.3.2 INSTALLATION
25.2.3.2.1 BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED)
A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated.
Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction.
B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper
drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect.
C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well-
drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 -
6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction.
25.2.3.2.2 LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS
A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans
by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc. as
the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent
blockage of signage, etc.
B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material
schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the
normally accepted spacing for each species.
C. Leave an 18 inch (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of
installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant
sizes.
D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the
Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as
possible to the intent of the plans.
25.2.3.2.3 PLANTING PROCEDURES
A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides
and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball.
B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after
settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground
surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain
conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root
ball about 1 inch higher than the surrounding grade.
C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20-10-5 planting tablets, or approved
equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting
tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the
middle and the bottom of the root mass.
Application rate:
SectionIV.doc Page 53 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet
3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet
5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet
7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet
Trees 3 tablets each V2" (12 millimeters) caliper
Palms 7- 21 gram tablets
D. Native soil shall be used in back-filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be
responsible for providing additionalsoil for building tree saucers.
E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the
base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the
sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 inches (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all
tie-down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of
the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the back-fill up to the proper grade
Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in
among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection.
F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of
the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball.
Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly
water-in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade.
G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each
variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to
straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant
a minimum of 18 inches from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant.
H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed-free
Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree
angles in a triangular pattern.
I. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved.
25.2.3.2.4 SODDING
A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the
soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut.
B. An application of 6-6-6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made
to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen
per 1,000 square feet. The ground shall be wet down before the sod is laid in place.
C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface
edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub
areas. Cut down soil level to 1 inch to 1-1/2 inches below top of walks prior to laying
sod.
D. Within 2 hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water
shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of 2 inches (50
millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the
application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will
prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to
keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade.
SectionIV.doc Page 54 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other
approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and
insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of
sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall
be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated
F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean
silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be
leveled, filling-in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas.
G. On slopes steeper than 2:1 and as required, the sod shall be fastened in place with suitable
wooden pins or by other approved method
25.2.3.2.5 SEEDING
A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of
Transportation. See plan for type of seed
25.2.3.2.6 TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING
A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound
nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum
of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used
Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved
plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of 4 feet height of stake
• above grade and a minimum of 30 inches of stake below grade.
B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of 3 stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be
used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2 inch x 4 inch x
16 inch wood connected with two % inch steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a
minimum of 5 feet of stake above grade.
C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months
after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work.
D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially
hazardous areas.
25.2.3.2.7 MULCHING
A. All planting beds shall be weed-free prior to mulching.
B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied
mulch.
C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a 3 inch layer (before
compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified
on the Plans or General Notes.
D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of
buildings. Maintain a minimum 3 inch clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a
minimum 6 inch clearance for the walls of buildings.
E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed
in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum 6 inches of non-mulched
clearance from the outside edge of annuals.
SectionlV.doc Page 55 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
25.2.3.2.8 PRUNING
A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape
and form of the plant.
B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches,
and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree.
25.2.3.2.9 CLEAN-UP
A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job,
keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess
soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition.
C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying,
staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications.
25.2.3.2.10 PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on,
about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational
Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards.
B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage.
C. the Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to
landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods.
D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms
as specified.
25.2.3.2.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGES
E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by his operations to other materials,
property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage.
F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by his work or employees
to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be
done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the
Contractor who is responsible for the damage.
25.2.3.3 MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the
beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance.
B. Operations:
Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds,
mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control,
replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections,
replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash-out
repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural
practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under
SectionIV.doc Page 56 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the
i University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service.
2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance
practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy,
vigorous growth of the landscape.
3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch of
water for all planted materials before leaving the site.
25.2.3.4 INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE
25.2.3.4.1 INSPECTION
A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's
Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within 15 days of notifications, the
installation will be inspected by the landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic
inspection report will be sent to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor.
25.2.3.4.2 REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT
A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any
part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set
forth in Plans and Specifications.
B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within 15 days and notify the Landscape
Architect that the correction has been made.
0 ?.
25.2.3.4.3 ACCEPTANCE
A. After replacement of rejected plant material (if any) have been made, and completion of
all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in
writing.
B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the
terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty
period.
C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the
Owner.
1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in
performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment
sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such
claim.
2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent", or
in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species
specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from his Contract
price. The final selection rests with the Owner or his representative.
3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to
request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to
compensate for the value not received from the under-specified plant materials. No
SectionN.doc Page 57 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that
exceed specifications.
25.2.3.5 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees fiunished under this contract for a
period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is
either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no
charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation
during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper
materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same
with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant
shall be given the equal amount of warranty.
26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING
26.1 INTENT
It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of 8" to 12"
sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless; continuous, fold and
form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic
sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and
functioning installation.
26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY
The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding
contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the
fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for
prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the
installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system
has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The
installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system.
The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the
liner system and the installer.
26.3 MATERIALS
Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell
classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to
ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer,
from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material
shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum
property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements:
Material Rope ASTM Method Value
HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi
Elasticity Modulus E=113,000 psi
•
a
•
SectionN.doc Page 58 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
•
Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft-lb/in
Flexure Modulus E=136,000 psi
Expansion Coeff. C=0.009 in/in/deg F
At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in
accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be
homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or
deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by
the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable
requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field
samples to the above requirements.
Liner shall be marked at 5-foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the
manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded
Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design
calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading,
water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural
strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications
of Pipe Liners, Inc. 3421 N. Causeway, Suite 321, New Orleans, LA 70002, 1-800-344-3744 or
approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal
system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system
approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving
bids.
26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for
rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean
interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior
to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of
restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local
traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation
operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the
sewer from damage.
All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal
in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to
control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the
City's treatment plants.
26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION
After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is
completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color
television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television
system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of
the entire periphery of the pipe.
SectionrV.doc Page 59 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
26.6 LINER INSTALLATION
Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the ?-
full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner
product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods
approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe,
pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately
notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation.
Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or
problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of
irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner
shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met.
26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION
Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be
reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the
original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method
and material is to be approved by the Engineer.
Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be
resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected
unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect
any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local
system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of
door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project.
26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION
Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no
time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than a eight hour
period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage
backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and
property damage costs and claims.
26.9 PAYMENT
Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation,
bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc, to provide a fully
completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center
of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems.
27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS
New driveways or existing black top driveways that must be broken back in widening the
pavement (remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street) shall be
constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the
exception that the base shall be six (6) inches. Use Section 23 G Asphaltic Concrete as specified
for the street paving. is
SectionlV.doc Page 60 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
When finished surface of existing drive is gravel, replace went shall be of like material. Payment
shall be the same as Plant Mix Driveways.
27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Plant Mix Driveways in place and accepted.
27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Plant Mix Driveways as measured above,
which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications
and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the
work.
28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS
The State of Florida has imposed strict requirements on Solid Wastes Handlers to decrease the
generation of solid waste products and in particular to increase the amount of recycle products.
In this regard, the City is required to determine the monthly total tonnage of all construction
debris which is recycled in this contract. A recycled material is any material reused in any
manner which diverts its alternative disposal to a publicly assessable landfill or by incineration.
If a material, such as clean earth, is not normally disposed to a landfill or incineration, then it is
not to be considered a recyclable material. The Contractor is required to include in each request
for payment the total tonnage of materials which were recycled by the contractor during the
contract period for which the payment request is made. Any cost to the contractor for the
development and submittal of this information is to be included in the contract items provided in
the original contract proposal.
29 CONCRETE CURBS
Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans.
Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a
minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to
exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 10 feet. In addition,
all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the
Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs.
29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be lineal feet of curb in place and accepted.
29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for
all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all
materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
•
SectionIV.doc Page 61 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS
30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS
Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans
or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh
reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise
specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete
sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4"), except at driveway crossings
where a minimum thickness of six inches (6") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh
reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be
positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the
welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not
more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. Concrete shall be
poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8
shall also apply.
30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS
Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6)
inches in thickness with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal
distance between expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any direction. The
welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No
compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be
poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8
shall also apply.:
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the
placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways.
30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of 4" concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete
sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted.
30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which price
shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the
specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where
required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
31 SODDING
Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at
the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition). The area for sod application shall be loosened and
excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and
structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform
finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be
graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod
SectionN.doc Page 62 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in
advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall
continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure,
soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract.
Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor
at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be
determined by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials,
placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these
associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly
placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor,
equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the
basis of each square foot in place and accepted No payment for sod shall be made until the
Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass.
32 SEEDING
Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The
seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to
be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic
conformance with the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982
and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used., and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used
instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye
Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required
that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured.
When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment
(including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in,
place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such
work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work.
33 STORM MANHOLES. INLETS. CATCH BASINS OR OTHER
STORM STRUCTURES
For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B Index Numbers 200 to
235.
When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans
and applicable parts of the specifications, Section Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the
Engineer. Said structures shall be protected and saved from damage by the elements or other
causes until acceptance of the work.
33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES
Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron fimnes and covers as shown on the Index
Numbers 201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constricted smooth and semi circular in shape
conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a
smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be
made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of
concrete base.
SectionN.doc Page 63 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall beN
smoothed from inside of the manholes.
The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar.
Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course.
In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a
concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer.
33.2 PRECAST TYPE
The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to
secure proper seating and bearing.
Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and
junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets
will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be
in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturers option.
Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or
outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of
precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be
provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole using O ring between precast sections will not be
acceptable for storm structures. 10
33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis
34 MATERIAL USED
All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all
materials.
35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
Whenever a conflict appears between the plans and specifications, the more stringent
requirement shall apply. If a conflict is of such a nature as to require a decision, then a written
request for clarification must be made prior to starting that phase of construction.
36 STREET SIGNS
The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is PROMBITED.
All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division
in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest
edition).
The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of 24 hours in
advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal.
SectionN.doc Page 64 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
37 AUDIO/VIDEO TAPE OF WORK AREAS
37.1 AUDIO/VIDEO TAPE OF WORK AREA SHALL BE PREPARED
BY THE CITY
This project will not require the preparation of an audio/video tape of work areas by the
Contractor.
37.2 AUDIO/VIDEO TAPE OF ALL WORK AREAS SHALL BE
PREPARED BY THE CONTRACTOR
37.2.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIOIVIDEO TAPE
Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video tape
recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets,
easements, rights-of-way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve
as a record of a pre-construction conditions.
37.2.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO TAPE
The video recordings shall not be made more than 21 days prior to construction in any area.
37.2.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS
The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio
• videotapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled'and regularly
engaged in the business of pre-construction color audio-video tape documentation.
37.2.4 EQUIPMENT
All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the
Contractor. The total audio video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with
accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection.
The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with
proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio
videotape coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles.
Such coverage shall be obtained by walking.
37.2.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO
Each tape shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general
location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each
videotape shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio
recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in
viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective
description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio
recording shall also be free from any conversations.
37.2.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO
All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the
date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time
SectionlV.doc Page 65 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be
displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name,
contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall
appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom-in and zoom
out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during
videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens
focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be
properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction documentation
shall be recorded in SP mode.
37.2.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION
The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end,
overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas
where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer,
highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly
indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used
as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the
ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the
camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture.
37.2.8 LIGHTING
All taping shall be done during time of good visibility. No taping shall be done during
precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to
properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of `t
those subjects.
37.2.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL
The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional
to the number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of
influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping
shall not exceed 44 feet per minute.
37.2.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX.
All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number
and project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall
describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of
the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video
unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the
date.
37.2.11 AREA OF COVERAGE
Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of
construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be
limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features,
mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc.
within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults,
SectionIV.doc Page 66 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or
right of way at any one time.
37.2.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES
The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items
provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work.
38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL
38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS
No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise
authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by
mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent
vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a
project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization
measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping.
38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES
Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent
erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required,
depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In
no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days.
38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS
During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by
sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and
modified as required by construction progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer
before installation.
38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES
Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative
buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment and/or prevent the transport of sediment
onto adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the
case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land alteration
process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected by the City before any other
disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not limited to berms, earth filters,
dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from drainage damage or erosion within one
week of installation.
38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS
Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive
remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans.
• During development, permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, provided
they are maintained to the satisfaction of the City.
SectionIV.doc Page 67 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during
construction of any detention area and will be required to clean out the detention area before
installing any permanent subdrain pipe. In addition, permanent detention areas must be totally
cleaned out and operating properly at final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty
period. When temporary sedimentation basins are used, they shall be capable at all times of
contain-ing at least one (1) cubic foot of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area
tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular
removal of sediment from the basin.
38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES
Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent
waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and
the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel
work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land
alteration, development and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area
are disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after
the in channel work is completed.
Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of
the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream
crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be provided by the contractor and
removed when construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a
condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity.
38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS 10
All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of
excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to
issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy.
38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION
The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance
with the following standards:
a. No more than 400 lineal feet of trench shall be open at any one time;
b. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast
to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of
any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway.
38.9 MAINTENANCE
All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall
and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required.
38.10 COMPLIANCE
Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more
stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order". 1
SectionIV.doc Page 68 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 601 607 are examples of accepted methods that
may be used or required to control erosion and siltation.
0'.
i
Sectionl V.doc Page 69 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
City of Clearwater - Erosion Control
This notice is to inform the prime contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them responsible'
for soil erosion control on their site.
The City of Clearwater Public Works Department has the responsibility to minimize the amount
of soil erosion into the City's streets, storm sewers and waterways.
The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site
creates a potential for soil erosion. These instances are usually the result of contractors and
subcontractors accessing the property with equipment or construction materials. Then rain storms
redistribute the eroded soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways.
When erosion takes place, a Planning & Development Services Inspector or a Public Works
Inspector will place a correction notice at the site. The procedure will be as follows:
I st occurrence - Warning
2nd occurrence - $30 reinspection fee
3rd occurrence - $70 reinspection fee
4th occurrence - Stop work order
Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City's Public Works Administration Department
may elect to rectify the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly.
The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractor to use as means to
support the site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on
an as needed basis. However, erosion must be held in check.
If the contractor would like to meet with a Public Works inspector on any particular site, please
contact Construction at 462-6126 or Planning & Development Services at 562-4741.
Erosion Control Required - City of Clearwater's Code of Ordinances Section 50.43 requires
erosion control on all land development projects.
Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure to do so may result
in additional costs and time delays to the permit holder.
Contact Public Works Administration with specific questions at 562-4750.
•
SectionIV.doc Page 70 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
CITY OF CLEARWATER
NOTICE OF
EROSION VIOLATION
UNDER SECTION 3-701 (DIVISION 7 - EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL) OF THE CITY OF CLEARWATER CODE OF
ORDINANCES, THIS SITE HAS BEEN FOUND IN VIOLATION. THIS SITE MUST BE RESTORED TO AN EROSION
CONTROLLED SITE PRIOR TO ANY FURTHER DEVELOPMENT TO CONTINUE.
Warning
$30.00 Reinspection Fee
$70.00 Reinspection Fee
Stop Work Order
CITY OF CLEARWATER
PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT SERVICES 727 5624741
PUBLIC SERVICES/CONSTRUCTION 727 462-6126
DATE POSTED:
Inspector's Name:
Received by:
(Signature indicates only a copy of this notice has been
received and does not in any way indicate admission of guilt
or concurrence with findings of the inspector.)
Inspector's Signature:
IT IS A VIOLATION TO REMOVE THIS NOTICE
ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON REMOVING THIS SIGN WILL BE PROSECUTED
SectionIV.doc Page 71 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING
The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on
the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb
of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals
cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to
service connection.
Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by
the American Public Works Association as follows:
SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission
Municipal Electric Systems
HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission
Oil Distribution and Transmission
Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines
SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems
Police and Fire Communications
Cable Television
SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines
SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems
Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension
perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall
be 6" x 3" and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall
be 4" X 2" and be placed on the curb face.
40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND
GUARANTEE
It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the
Engineer gives written notice to proceed, which notice shall be given as outlined in Article 14 -
General Conditions.
It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within 450
consecutive calendar days. Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. If the
Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount
stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The
work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes
necessary for the Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of
Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the opinion of the Assistant Public Services Director, will
require the presence of Inspectors, the Contractor shall pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the
amount of Three Hundred Twenty Dollars ($320.00) per eight-hour day for each Inspector given
such assignment.
C?
•
•
SectionIV.doc Page 72 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage
to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final
acceptance.
41 WATER MAINS AND APPURTENANCES
41.1 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in
connection with the construction of waxer mains and appurtenances including clearing,
excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up.
41.2 MATERIALS
41.2.1 GENERAL
Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall
be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of
workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modem design and
engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment
and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation,
except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings
and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects
during shipment and construction.
' 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS
41.2.2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSUAWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision.
Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table:
Size Class Thickness
(In.) Rated Water Working Pressure
(PSI)
4" 51 0.26 - 350
6" 50 0.25 350
8" 50 0.27 350
12" 50 0.31 350
The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to
centerline of pipe.
Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance withANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision.
Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with
approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 80 or latest
revision.
SectionIV.doc Page 73 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
41.2.2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 4" through 8" shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C900 81
or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241 and
PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784.
Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be
compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings.
Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table:
Size Dimension Ratio
(OD/Thick.) Rated Water Working Pressure
(PSI) Laying Length
(Ft)
4 18 150 20
6 18 150 20
8 18 150 20
Pipe larger than 8" shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of
ductile iron in sizes 4" through 8" when needed due to laying conditions or usage.
The bell of 4" and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross
section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869.
Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling,
storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe
material for potable water service. 0,
All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with an insulated 12 gauge A.W.G solid strand copper.
wire wound around the pipe forming one complete spiral per joint of pipe. This wire is to be
continuous with splices made only by methods approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be
secured to all valves, tees and elbows.
41.2.2.3 FITTINGS AND JOINTS
Fitting from 4" through 16" in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with
ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in
accordance with requirements ofANSI/AWWA C1 53/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall
be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with require
requirements of ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in
accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111/A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSI/AWWA
Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic
(USA) manufacture will be acceptable.
41.2.2.4 RESTRAINT
Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved
mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants
shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on
hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint
connectors. 0`
SectionN.doc Page 74 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
41.2.2.5 PIPE WITHIN CASING
All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining
gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed
41.2.3 GATE VALVES
Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with
respect to the vertical. Valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures, shall
be handwheel operated Valves three inches and larger, buried in earth shall be equipped with 2
inch square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted with joints suitable for
the pipe with which they are to be used The direction of opening for all valves shall be to the left
(counter clockwise).
Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be
rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, nonshock.
The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body.
Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines
shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves.
Smaller than two inch: Gate valves less than two inches in diameter shall be of brass and shall
conform to Federal Specification WW V 54, Type 1 or 11 with screwed joints. Valves for interior
piping shall be Type 11, wedge disc, rising stem, inside screw type.
Valves for buried service shall be Type 1, wedge disc, nonrising stem.
Four Inch to Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate Valves, 4 to 16 inch diameter, inclusive, shall be
resilient seated gate valves in conformance with ANSI/A.W.W.A. Standard Specification C509
80 or latest revision. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509-80,
full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal
parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main, corrosion resistent
bronze nonrising stem with O ring bonnet seal and internal cast iron parts coated with corrosion
resistent coating.
Larger than sixteen inch: Gate valves larger than 16" shall be suitable for the service intended
and shall be iron body, bronze mounted, double disc type with O ring seals. All valves shall be
equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, bronze or babbitt tracks
and scrapers and valved by pass.
41.2.4 VALVE BOXES
Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast
iron. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided where shown. The
valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their installation shall be included in the
bid price for valves.
41.2.5 HYDRANTS
Fire hydrants used in extension to or replacement of the City of Clearwater water system shall be
the following hydrants:
• Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant,
• Mueller Centurion Fire Hydrant Catalog Number A 423
SectionN.doc Page 75 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
• U.S. Pipe Metropolitan
No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater.
Above fire hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA Specification C
502 and include the following modifications:
1. Basic design will be the dry barrel type which prevents the operating threads from
coming in contact with the service water. It will be of the compression type, opening
against the pressure and closing with the pressure.
2. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and
bottom with an "O" ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil.
3. Hydrant barrel will be of the "Breakable Type" made in two sections with the flange or
break feature located approximately 2" above the ground line.
4. Main valve opening of the hydrant will be not less than 5 1/4".
5. Hydrant nozzles will consist of two 2 1/2" hose nozzles and one 4 1/2" pump nozzle.
Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread
Specifications.
6. The hydrant will be so designed to permit the removal of all working parts from the
hydrant up through the barrel without disturbing the earth around the hydrant or
disassembling the barrel.
7. Main valve seat will be made of bronze and threaded into a bronze retaining ring. Or it
may be threaded into a heavy bronze bushing in the hydrant base.
8. Hydrant will be designed with an anti friction bearing so located that it will reduce the
torque required to operate the hydrant.
9. There will be a minimum of two bronze or brass drain outlets.
10. Hydrants shall be painted with one coat of primer and one coat of yellow paint at the
factory and one finish coat of yellow paint after installation. All paints shall comply with
AWWA Standard C502-85 or its latest revision.
11. The main valve stem will be made in two sections with a breakable coupling.
12. Hydrants shall be left open (counter clockwise) and shall have a National Standard 11/2"
pentagon operating nut.
13. Hydrant base outlet will be 6" and will be mechanical joint with fittings.
All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502.
Constrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from
the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Constrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent
movement of the hydrant.
All fire hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant
may be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system.
41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES
Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to 4" P.V.C. water main. The largest service
connection allowable on 4" main shall be 1 1/2". Service saddles shall be used on all 2" service
SectionN.doc Page 76 Revised: 4/29/2007
•
•
•
Section IV - Technical Specifications
connections to 6" and larger mains. Service saddles shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy
i or nylon coating and shall have stainless steel straps.
41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS
1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA
Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the
tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials.
2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery;
and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or
unsatisfactory material shall be used.
3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects
shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site.
4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in
handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The
Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items.
41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery
(service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 78 or its
latest revision.
• Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, when
required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from
possible backflow of water within the customers private system. The types of devices allowed
are:
1. Double Check Valve Assembly a device composed of two single, independently acting,
approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the
assembly and suitable connections for testing the watertightness of each check valve.
2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device a device containing a minimum
of two independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically
operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit
must include rightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each
device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks.
Since installed devices must be tested annually and may be maintained by the City of Clearwater,
following are the approved models of devices allowed for installation by customers of the City of
Clearwater Water Distribution system:
DOUBLE CHECK VALVE
•
2" and Smaller Lar2er than 2"
Conbraco 40100 Conbraco 40100
Hersey Beeco Model FDC Hersey Beeco No. 2
Watts Model 709 or 007 Watts Model 709 or 007
FEBCO Model 805Y
Ames 2000 SS
SectionIV.doc Page 77 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
REDUCED PRESSURE TYPE
2" and Smaller Lar er than 2"
Ames 5000 SS
Conbraco 40200 Conbraco 40200
Hersey Beeco Model FRP 11 Hersey Beeco Model 6CM
FEBCO Model 825Y
Watts Model 909 or 009 Watts Model 909 or 009
41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES
Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412; Clow Corporation 3460; or
equal. All steel body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body,
stainless steel bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and 3/4" bronze test plug.
41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS
Blow offs shall be box hydrants having a 2" main valve, closing with the water pressure. These
flush mounted hydrants shall have a 2" FIP inlet, with the outlet being a 2 1/2" bronze male
nozzle. With all working parts also of bronze, these hydrants will open to the left and have a
removable bronze seat, which seals against a seat rubber of no less durometer than 85. All
hydrants shall be as manufactured by Kupferle Foundry, St. Louis, Mo., Model #35B or
approved equal.
41.3 CONSTRUCTION
41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING
1. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting
with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no- circumstances shall
such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded rolled against
pipe already on the ground.
2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any
part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his
expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite
or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench.
41.3.2 PIPE LAYING
41.3.2.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE
The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and
hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems
plumb.
The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of 30" and a maximum of 42" below
finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and obstructions.
•
•
Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work
and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer shall have
the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with
the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions.
SectionN.doc Page 78 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
41.3.2.2 INSTALLATION
Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used
by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves
and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick,
ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials
and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or
dumped in the trench.
If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage
shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective
repairs or rejection of the damaged items.
All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended
above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined
with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe
or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs
or rejection.
All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each
pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped
clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is
being placed in the line. If the pipelaying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place
without getting earth into it, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the
trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there
until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools,
clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe.
As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the
pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with
approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to
prevent dirt from entering the joint space.
At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a
watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer.
The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and
workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth
end at right angles to the axis of the pipe.
Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the
Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of 10 per cent or greater, the laying shall start at
bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade.
Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal
plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems; or where long radius curves are permitted, the
amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of
ANSI/AWWA C600-82 and C900 81 or latest revisions.
No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable.
SectionN.doc Page 79 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS
41.3.3.1 GENERAL 0
Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified
above for installation of pipe.
41.3.3.2 VALVES
Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended
unless shown otherwise on the plans.
The valve box shall not transmit shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb
over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished
pavement or such other level as may be directed.
41.3.3.3 HYDRANTS
Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and
minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians.
All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the
curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with
nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer.
Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a 6 inch ductile iron branch controlled by an
independent 6 inch gate valve.
41.3.3.4 ANCHORAGE 0,
Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by
attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturers
recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining
mechanical joint glands on hydrants maybe used where hydrant runout length precludes the use
of hydrant connecting swivel joints.
Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown
on the plans or specified in the field by the Engineer.
41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES
Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this
contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made
until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met
and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer.
Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be
made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the
actual conditions. All connections to existing facilities will be completed under the supervision
of the City of Clearwater Water Division.
•
SectionIV.doc Page 80 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
• 41.4 TESTS
41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS
After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service
taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds
per square inch for a period of one hour.
The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner
satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all necessary apparatus, together
with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense.
The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water
for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line.
41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST
The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater Water Division 48 hours advance notice of the
time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing.
41.5 STERILIZATION
Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new
construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized.
41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT
The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to
Federal Specification 0 S 602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or
"Perchloron".
41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM
Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing
shall continue until a clean, clear water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not
available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the closest point available to the
ends of the lines.
41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE
All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a
minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then
remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight hours before it is flushed
out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the
contact period.
41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS
After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free
residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall
be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set.
SectionrV.doc Page 81 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS
After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of j
Clearwater Water Division personnel shall take samples of water from remote points of the
distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall forward the samples to the
Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination. If tests of such samples indicate the
presence of coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests
indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before
the system is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the
sterilization as outlined above.
If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in
accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall
have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of
samples shall be secured from the Florida State Board of Health prior to sterilization and shall be
followed in all respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure final approval of the bacterial
samples from the Florida State Board of Health before the water distribution system is put into
operation.
41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
41.6.1 GENERAL
1. Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid
Form.
2. Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump
sum payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute
full compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work.
3. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall
be included in the applicable pay items of work:
a) Clearing and grubbing
b) Excavation, including necessary pavement removal
c) Shoring and/or dewatering
d) Structural fill
e) Backfill
f) Grading
g) Tracer wire
h) Refill materials
i) Joints materials
j) Tests and sterilization
k) Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system.
SectionN.doc Page 82 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS
41.6.2.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type
satisfactorily famished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line,
including the length of valves and fittings.
41.6.2.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for finishing all plant, labor,
materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains complete and ready for operation.
41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS
41.6.3.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron
fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped
on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more
than the tolerances permitted in ANSI/AWWA C110/A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case,
the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance.
41.6.3.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
ei materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings.
41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES
AND COVERS
41.6.4.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished
and installed.
41.6.4.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all
plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover.
41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS
41.6.5.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily finished and
installed.
41.6.5.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for finnishing all plant, labor,
material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant complete including necessary thrust
anchorage, 6 inch pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the
hydrant lead.
Sectionl V.doc Page 83 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
This article not applicable.
43 TENNIS COURTS
43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS
43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS
All soil under courts shall be treated with DSMA 184 at the rate of 2 pounds active ingredient per
1,000 square foot.
Materials shall be brought to the job site in tagged containers. Tags shall be retained and turned
into the Engineer's Office.
43.1.2 BASE COURSE
Base Course shall be Limerock 6" thick after compaction. Specifications for the base shall be the
same as those for Limerock in Section IV - Article 22 of the City of Clearwater Technical
Specifications. Subgrade stabilizing will not be required.
Surface shall be cut to within 1/2" of true grade in preparation of V leveling course. Prior to
applying prime coat, surface shall be approved by the Engineer.
43.1.3 PRIME COAT
The material used for prime coat shall be cut-back Asphalt Grade RC-70 or RC-250 and shall 10conform to Section 300 of the Florida State Department of Transportation's "Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction".
43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE
A.Leveling Course shall be a minimum of V of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in
Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Leveling Course shall be
constructed running East and West.
Finish surface of leveling course shall not vary more than 1/4" when checked with a 10 foot
straight edge. If a deficiency of more than 1/4" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface
should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE
Surface course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section
331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Surface Course shall be constructed
running North and South.
Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4" in 10 feet. Prior to application of color coat, surface
shall be checked for low areas by flooding the surface with water. Low areas shall be patched as
approved by the Engineer prior to application of the color coat. No areas which retain water will
be approved. If a deficiency of more than 1/4" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface
should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation..
SectionN.doc Page 84 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
43.1.6 COLOR COAT
43.1.6.1 MATERIALS
Materials used in the patching and color coating of Tennis Courts shall be manufactured
specifically for Tennis Court Application.
All materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. Request for
approval of coating materials may be submitted prior to the opening of bids. In requests for
approval, the Contractor shall present manufacturer's literature along with the name, address, and
date of three previous Tennis Court applications of the proposed material.
43.1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION
43.1.6.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
The surface to be coated must be sound, smooth, and free from loose dirt or oily materials.
Prior to the application of surfacing materials, the entire surface should be checked for minor
depressions or irregularities. If it is determined that minor corrections are necessary, the
Contractor shall make repairs using approved tack coat and/or patching mix in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations for use.
After patching the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. If a
deficiency of more than 1/8" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled
or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
In order to provide a smooth, dense underlayment of the finish course, one or more applications
of resurfacer or patch mix shall be applied to the underlaying surface as deemed necessary by the
Engineer. Asphaltic concrete Surface Course with a smooth tight mix and no ponding, will not
require the resurfacing or patching mix. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course which is course and
rough or is ponding water will require the use of the resurfacer or patch mix.
No applications shall be covered by a succeeding application until thoroughly cured
43.1.6.2.2 FINISH COLOR COURSE
The finish course shall be applied to a clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's
directions. A minimum of two applications of color coat will be required
Texture of cured color coat is to be regulated in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations to provide a medium speed surface for tennis play.
The color of application shall be dark green for the regulation double's playing area and red for
all other others.
The finished surface shall have a uniform appearance and be free from ridges and tool marks.
43.1.6.3 PLAYING LINES
Forty-eight (48) hours minimum after completion of the resurfacing, 2 inch wide playing lines
shall be accurately located, marked and painted with approved marking paint.
•
SectionN.doc Page 85 Revised' 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
43.1.6.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS
No parts of the construction involving Tennis Court surfacing or patching products shall be
conducted during rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent or unless the air temperature is at least 50
Degree's F and rising.
NOTE: The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum or 24 hours in advance of
all base and asphalt related work.
43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS
43.2.1 GENERAL
43.2.1.1 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of
clay tennis court(s) as set forth in these specifications and /or the construction drawings. The
scope of work is indicated on drawings and specified herein. Basis of design for clay courts with
sub-surface irrigation system is Hydrogrid Tennis, Inc. or prior approved equal.
43.2.1.2 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the
Bidder to perform the work and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and
data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if
the evidence submitted by, or investigations of such Bidders fail to satisfy the owner that such
Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work
contemplated herein within the time limit agreed upon. Factors to be considered in awarding the
Bid shall include the successful completion of similar sub-surface irrigation clay tennis court
installations of like value, scope, size and quality as this project, with in the last five (5) years.
The Owner desires to award this contract to firms that have been in business for a minimum of
five (5) years. The qualifications and experience of the personnel assigned to the project will be a
determining factor in the award of the Bid.
43.2.1.3 STANDARDS
The Contractor shall perform all work in a thorough, workmanlike manner and conform to
standards for tennis court construction as prescribed or approved by the United States (Lawn)
Tennis Association and the United States Tennis Court and Tract Builders Association. The
Contractor shall construct the tennis courts with laser guided equipment.
43.2.1.4 BUILDING PERMITS AND TAXES
The Contractor shall secure all construction permits required by law, the City of Clearwater will
waive all permit fees.
43.2.1.5 COURT LAYOUT
The Owner shall establish two horizontal control points and a construction bench mark. The
Contractor shall locate the four corners of each battery and shall layout the courts in
conformance with the specifications and drawings.
SectionN.doc Page 86 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
43.2.1.6 BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
The Owner shall provide and maintain reasonable access to the construction site, as well as an
area adjacent to the site for storage and preparation of materials. Adequate water outlets within
fifty (50) feet of the site shall be provided
43.2.1.7 SCHEDULE
The Owner desires to award the contract to firms who will complete this project in a reasonable
time schedule. Consideration in awarding this bid will be given to firms who may commence and
complete the project within a reasonable period of time after award of the bid. The Owner, in its
sole discretion, will determine the reasonable schedule standard as it relates to the "Notice to
Proceed."
43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION
43.2.2.1 SUITABILITY
The Contractor shall examine the site to determine its suitability for installation of the courts.
43.2.2.2 DEMOLITION
The contractor shall demo the existing tennis courts, remove the existing ten (10) foot high fence
surrounding the tennis courts and all underground utilities within the limits of the construction
area. Utilities extending outside the construction limits shall be capped and terminated The
existing tennis courts shall be ground into millings suitable to be mixed into the sub-grade at the
proposed location of the new clay tennis courts. Any sub-grade material beneath the existing
tennis courts not suitable for planting beds shall be removed and also utilized as sub-grade
material beneath the new courts. All demolition materials not utilized in construction of the new
courts shall be removed and disposed from the project site. The Contractor shall provide
documentation of any recycled materials.
43.2.2.3 SUB-GRADE
The sub-grade shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final sub-grade
elevation. The sub-grade shall be graded level. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of
the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T 180 is required The Contractor
shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner.
43.2.2.4 FINAL GRADE
The final grades outside the tennis court areas and within the construction limits shall be graded
to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final grade elevations with positive drainage
away from tennis courts and towards drainage swales or outfall structures. A compaction to a
density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T 180 is
required The contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner.
43.2.3 SLOPE
43.2.3.1 SLOPE REQUIREMENTS
Rate and direction of slope of the finished surfaces shall be one (1) inch in forty (40) feet, all in
one plane, as indicated on the drawings.
SectionIV.doc Page 87 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION
43.2.4.1 LINER &
Two layers of 6 mil construction plastic shall be installed over the sub-grade surface with a
minimum overlap of five (5) feet where pieces are joined. Use only materials that are resistant to
deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows:
a. Polyethylene sheet, Construction Grade.
43.2.4.2 BASE COURSE
The base course shall consist of six (6) inches of porous base material as supplied by Quality
Aggregate of Sarasota Florida. The surface of the base course shall be smooth and even, and it
shall be within one-quarter (1/4) inch of the established grade.
43.2.4.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
Perforated pipe shall be installed in trenches in the base course. These trenches shall be in on
four (4) foot centers and shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the court. The pipe shall be
two and one-quarter (2-1/4) inch diameter with a nylon needle punched sock surrounding the
pipe. Six (6) water control canisters shall be installed per court with each canister controlling five
(5) grid pipe trenches. Provide all required controls systems time clocks; float switches, control
wiring and solenoids, etc. for a complete sub-surface irrigation system.
43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING
43.2.5.1 CURB 0
Brick curb shall be installed around the entire perimeter of the court area with an elevation of
one-quarter (1/4) to one-half (1/2) inch above the finished screening course elevation.
43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE
43.2.6.1 COURT SURFACE
A surface course of ISP Type 11 Aquablend or Lee Hyroblend tennis court material shall be
installed over the screening course to a compacted depth of one (1) inch. The Aqua/Hydroblend
material shall be watered to its full depth immediately after leveling and then compacted by
rolling with a tandem roller weighing 600 to 1000 pounds. The finished surface shall not vary
from specified grade by more than one-eighth (1/8) inch.
43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER
Root barrier (geo-tech fabric) eighteen (18) inches height shall be placed in a trench on the
outside edge of the perimeter curbing eighteen (18) inches in depth with herbicide coating
buttons to prevent plant root systems in entering the sub-surface base course of the clay tennis
courts.
•
SectionrV.doc Page 88 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
43.2.8 FENCING
43.2.8.1 DESIGN
The contractor shall provide a total color coated fencing system as indicated on drawings and
described herein. All components: frames, fabric and fittings shall be black. Basis of Design
Ameristar HT 25 or prior approved equal subject to strict compliance with Ameristar published
specification.
43.2.8.2 POSTS
All posts shall be a minimum 2-1/2" Ameristar HT 25 pipe; top rails 1-5/8" Ameristar HT 25
pipe with manufacturers standard "Permacoat'color system.
43.2.8.3 FENCE FABRIC
Fence Fabric shall be 1-3/4" #6 gauge mesh throughout, manufactures standard galvanized wire
with PVC coating. All fabric to be knuckled on both selvages.
43.2.8.4 GATES
Provide gates at locations indicated. At service gates, provide a keeper that automatically
engages gate life and holds it in the open position until manually released. Provide gate stops for
double gates consisting of a mushroom-type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and
designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger-bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes
as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock.
Provide latch, fork type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with
padlock eye as an integral part of the latch. Gate Hinges - Size and material to suit gate size,
non-lift-off type, and offset to permit 180-degree gate opening. Provide one and one-half (1-1/2)
pair of hinges for each leaf over six (6) foot nominal height.
43.2.9 WINDSCREENS
The contractor shall provide nine (9) foot high windscreens at all ten (10) foot high fencing.
Basis of design is Durashade plus by Ball Products, Inc. or equal by Putterman. Black high-
density polyethylene, eight (8) oz. per square yard edges hemmed with grommets at twelve (12)
inch on center. Attach to chain link fencing at the top and bottom with 50 LBS plastic ties.
43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT
43.2.10.1 POST FOUNDATIONS
Post foundations shall be not less than thirty-six (36) inches in length, eighteen (18) inches in
width and thirty (30) inches in depth. Foundations shall be placed to provide an exact distance
between posts of forty-two (42) feet on a doubles court and thirty-three (33) feet on a singles
court.
43.2.10.2 NET POSTS & SLEEVES
Net posts shall be galvanized steel having an outside diameter of not less than two and seven-
eighths (2 7/8) inches with electrostatically applied enamel finish and shall be equipped with a
reel type net tightening device. Post sleeves and posts shall be set plumb and true so as to support
SectionIV.doc Page 89 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
the net a height of forty-two (42) inches above the court surface at the posts. Post sleeves shall be
Schedule 40 PVC to be set in concrete per net post manufactures recommendation.
43.2.10.3 CENTER STRAP ANCHOR
A center strap anchor shall be firmly set in accordance with the rules of the USTA.
43.2.10.4 NET
A tennis net conforming to the USTA regulations shall be installed on each court. The net shall
have black synthetic netting, a headband of white synthetic material in double thickness with the
exterior treated for resistance to mildew and sunlight, and bottom and end tapes of back synthetic
material treated to prevent deterioration from the sunlight. A vinyl coated, impregnated steel
cable, having a diameter of one quarter (1/4) inch and a length five (5) feet greater than length
between the net post shall hold the net in suspension. The net shall have tie strings of a synthetic
material at each comer. Basis of Design - Duranet DTS by Ball Products, Inc.
43.2.10.5 CENTER STRAP
Provide a center strap of white heavy duty polyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide
buckles and nickel plated double end snap. Center strap shall be placed on the net and attached to
the center strap anchor.
43.2.10.6 LINE TAPES
Line tapes shall be 100% nylon and shall be two (2) inches in width. The tapes shall be firmly
secured by aluminum nails with aluminum length of two and one-half (2 - 1/2) inches.
Positioning shall be in accordance with regulations of the USTA.
43.2.10.7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
Deliver the following equipment to the owner:
1. Ride-on Tandem Roller - Brutus AR-I Roller, automatic forward-neutral-reverse
transmission; 24 inch wide drum; 3-horse power Briggs and Stratton engine.
2. Hand drag brooms (4 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame with 4-1/2" synthetic bristles;
Proline.
3. Tow drag brooms (1 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline.
4. Deluxe Proline Line Sweeper (4 each) - friction-driven rubber sleeves; synthetic bristle
brush; with fence hook cast aluminum.
5. Scarifier/Lutes (2 each) - 30" wide all aluminum; Proline.
6. Tennis Shoe Cleaners (2 each) - steel frame construction " Scrusher" exact installation
location by Owner.
7. Tennis Two Step (2 each) - polyethylene construction with two rubber panels.
8. Court Rake (1 each) - six-foot length aluminum.
LJ
SectionlV.doc Page 90 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE
Provide shade structures as indicted on drawings. Basis of design: Suntrends, Inc. "Cabana
Bench 8" - 81ong x 6' wide gable design with standard canvas canopy, direct burial installation.
Provide concrete footing,. size and reinforcement as required by shade structure manufacture.
43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable)
The owner shall supply water line to within fifty (50) feet of the courts with 50 pounds per
square inch running pressure at its terminus. This line shall have the capacity to supply 30
gallons of water per minute for each court.
43.2.13 CONCRETE
Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33,
and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive
strength of 3,500 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., 1-inch maximum size
aggregate, 3-inch maximum slump.
43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING
43.2.14.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall provide signed and sealed electrical shop drawings by a professional
electrical engineer for approval of the relocation and re-aiming of the existing tennis court sport
lighting fixtures and electrical service to water coolers. The shop drawings shall include all
necessary information according to local electrical codes in providing a complete operating
system from the existing electrical panel. The shop drawings shall provide data showing the
maximum foot candles the existing fixtures will provide at its new locations for tournament play.
Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval.
43.2.14.2 RE-LAMP
The Contractor shall re-lamp and clean lens of all existing lighting fixtures after relocating the
light pole and fixtures to its new location. The City will provide the new lamps.
43.2.14.3 ELECTRICAL PERMIT
The Contractor shall submit electrical drawings to City of Clearwater Planning and Development
Services to obtain permits for installation of the electrical works.
43.2.14.4 POLES $ FIXTURES
The Contractor shall install three (3) new sixty foot (60') poles and fourteen (14) new fixtures.
The City will purchase and provide the new poles and fixtures for the Contractor to install, any
other miscellaneous items required to provide a complete operable system shall be provided by
the Contractor.
Attached with this specification are the photometric lumination charts for the eight-(8) tennis
courts. This information is provided by Musco Sport Lighting, 1838 East Chester Drive, Suite
#104, High Point, NC 27265, phone (336) 887-0770 fax (336) 887-0771. Contact Douglas A.
Stewart.
Contractor shall install the poles and fixtures based on the following information:
SectionIV.doc Page 91 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
Pole T 1 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5
Pole T2 existing 12 fixture pole, remove six fixtures and place on pole TS
Pole T3 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5
Pole T4 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits
Pole T5 new pole w/existing sixteen fixtures (8 on one side and 8 on the other) and 2
circuits
Pole T6 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits
Pole T7 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5
Pole T8 existing 12 fixture pole, remove four fixtures and place on pole T5
Pole T9 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5
Light levels ended up at 58+ footcandles.
Existing poles have concrete footing approximately one foot wide on all sides Contractor shall
plan relocation light poles accordingly.
43.2.14.5 ELECTRICAL CONDUITS
Existing electrical conduits are installed individually to the existing light pole, it is suggested the
Contractor place electrical junction boxes at existing pole locations and utilize existing conduits.
New conduits will be required for the three (3) new light poles and the Contractor shall include
the cost for these electrical conduits in the relocating of the new light poles.
43.2.15 WATER COOLER
43.2.15.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for the installation of water cooler in the cabana area
of the tennis courts, electrical, water and drainage submitted to the Parks and Recreation
Department for approval.
43.2.15.2 WATER FOUNTAIN
Basis for design: Halsey Taylor HOF Series - water cooler with sealed back panels, or equal.
43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION
Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of court and equipment.
43.2.17 WARRANTY
43.2.17.1 EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall supply warranty cards and operation and maintenance manuals for all
equipment to the Owner upon completion of construction of the project.
SectionIV.doc Page 92 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
43.2.17.2 WARRANTY
The Contractor shall warranty the courts, fencing, sidewalks and court accessories against
defective materials and /or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of
completion.
43.2.17.3 WARRANTY SUB-SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM
The Contractor shall warranty the sub-surface irrigation of the clay tennis courts for a period of
two years from the day of completion.
" WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC
CONTROL
The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone
traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization,
hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be
necessary at outlying points.
44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of
performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction
permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the
Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for
Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident
Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the
U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of
Transportation, or most recent addition.
44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY
The general objectives of a program of work zone safety is to protect workers, pedestrians,
bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective
may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives:
• Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones.
• Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation he will be facing as he
proceeds through or around the work zone.
• Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle.
• Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material.
• Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site).
• Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices.
• Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or
maintenance work zones.
The 2004 Design Standards (DS), Index 600
"When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone,
accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only
SectionrV.doc Page 93 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
approved temporary traffic control devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control
zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and detours marked shall
be provided by appropriate signs".
2004 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction
102-5 Traffic Control: 102-5.1 Standards: FDOT Design Standards (DS) are the minimum
standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans
44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES
Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local
Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of
requirements increase with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting
business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but
local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the
designated "Spring Break" season with prior approval by the City Engineer.
44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS
Obtain permits for Pinellas County and Florida Department of Transportation roadways.
Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards.
44.3.1.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected
by the construction process. 10
44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS
Consult with City Traffic staff for preliminary traffic control options.
Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary.
44.3.2.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Message Board Display, Minimum of 7-day notice period prior to road closure and maybe longer
for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor.
44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS
44.3.3.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
C-View Release
44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS
44.3.4.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
News Release
The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than 7 days.
i
SectionN.doc Page 94 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
"A APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a
specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the
Office of the Traffic Engineer, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue,
telephone 5624772, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic
control plan.
44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION
The Office of the Traffic Engineer may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic
control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may
make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The
Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector.
44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
Payment for work zone traffic control is a non-specific pay item to be included in the
construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise in
the Scope of Work in these Technical Specifications and a bid item(s) is included for Work Zone
Traffic Control in the proposal form.
44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
SUPERVISOR
The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on
the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control
Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic
Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of
Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or
sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the
Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted.
The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a 24-hour per day basis and shall review
the project on a day-today basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The
Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain
traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure
that routine deficiencies are corrected within a 24-hour period.
The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification
of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control
or to provide alternate traffic arrangements.
Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may
be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a
designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in
temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities
deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety.
•
SectionIV.doc Page 95 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N -Technical Specifications
45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING
45.1 INTENT 0
It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of sanitary sewer
and storm pipes by the installation if a cured in place jointless, continuous, thermosetting resin
impregnated polyester flexible felt liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand
exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a
complete, fully restored and functioning installation.
45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY
The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding
contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the
liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval
for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed
liner system(s) and satisfactoryevidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and
successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified
by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and
complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the
installer.
45.3 MATERIALS.
The liner shall be polyester fiber felt tubing saturated with a resin prior to insertion. Resin type
and qualities shall be as specified by the manufacturer to obtain a cured liner with the following
properties:
Tensile Strength ASTM D638 3,000 psi
Flexural Strength ASTM D790 4,500 psi
Flexural Modulus of Elasticity ASTM D790 300,000 psi
Long Term Modulus of Elasticity (50 Years) ASTM D2290 150,000 psi
Liner shall meet strengths as shown in ASTM F1216 unless otherwise submitted and approved
by the Engineer. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested,
complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20
traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no
structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures
specifications of Insituform of North America, Inc., 3315 Democrat Road, Post Office Box
181071, Memphis, Tennessee 38118; or InLiner USA 1900 N.W. 44th St., Pompano Beach
Florida 33064, 305-979-0802, or an approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be
approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor
prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later
than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids.
45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for
rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean
interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior
to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of
SectionN.doc Page 96 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local
40 traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and 'preparation
operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the
sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's
responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The
Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid
heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants.
45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION
After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is
completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color
television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television
system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of
the entire periphery of the pipe.
45.6 LINER INSTALLATION
Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide for a tight fit on
the interior of the existing pipe to be lined. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by
the liner manufacturer including operations for inversion, heat curing and reconnection of
laterals.
The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place
during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass
pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes
shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots,
excessive wrinkling or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be
removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION
Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be
reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 95% of the area of the
original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method
and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to
manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered
during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City.
The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a
later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be
available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information
regarding the construction project.
45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION
Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no
time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight-hour
period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage
backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and
property damage costs and claims.
SectionlV.doc Page 97 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
45.9 PAYMENT
Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation,
bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, lateral reconnection, etc, to
provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of
manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for
storm systems.
46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING
46.1 MATERIALS
46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS
The pipe supplied under this specification shall be high performance, high molecular weight,
high density polyethylene pipe (Driscopipe 1000) as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe, Inc.,
Dallas, Texas and shall conform to ASTM D 1248 (Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34) or
approved equal. Minimum cell classification values shall be 345434C as referenced in ASTM D
3350 latest edition. If fittings are required, they will be supplied under this specification and shall
be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene compound having a cell classification equal to
or exceeding the compound used in the pipe.
To insure compatibility of polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification shall
be of the same manufacture as the pipe being supplied.
46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL
The resin used for manufacturer of the pipe shall
be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer, thus
maintaining complete control of the pipe quality. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound
except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from
the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks,
holes, foreign inclusions, or other deleterious defects, and shall be identical in color, density,
melt index, and other physical properties.
The polyethylene resin used shall have all ingredients pre compound prior to extrusion of pipe, in
plant blending is not acceptable.
The Engineer may request, as part of the quality control records submittal, certification that the
pipe produced is represented by the quality assurance testing. Additionally, test results from
manufacturer's testing or random sampling by the Engineer that do not meet appropriate ASTM
standards or manufacturer's representation, may be cause for rejection of pipe represented by the
testing. These tests may include density and flow rate measurements from samples taken at
selected locations within the pipe wall and thermal stability determinations according to ASTM
D 3350, 10.1.9.
46.1.3 SAMPLES
The owner or the specifying engineer may request certified lab data to verify the physical
properties of the materials supplied under this specification or may take random samples and
have them tested by an independent laboratory.
SectionIV.doc Page 98 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
46.1.4 REJECTION
Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this
specification.
46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS
Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal IPS (Iron Pipe Size) O.D. unless
otherwise specified The SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) of the pipe supplied shall be as
specified by the Engineer, on the construction plans and/or the scope of work.
46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES
46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE
Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging of the pipe. If
the pipe must be stacked for storage, such stacking should be done in accordance with the pipe
manufacturer's recommendations. The handling of the pipe should be done in such a manner that
it is not damaged by dragging over sharp objects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment.
46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS
Segments of pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe should
be cut out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the butt
fusion joining method
•' 46.3.3 PIPE JOINING
Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above
ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by the
manufacturer's representative and in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's
recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of
meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to,
temperature requirements, alignment, and fusion pressures.
46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE
Fused segments of pipe shall be handled so to avoid damage to the pipe. When lifting fused
sections of pipe, chains or cable type chokers should be avoided. Nylon slings are preferred
Spreader bars should be used when lifting long fused sections. Care should be exercised to avoid
cutting or gouging the pipe.
46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE
46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS
The liner(s) to be slip lined into the existing storm sewer shall have the following sizes:
12-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 15-inch existing sewer.
16-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 18-inch existing sewer.
18-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 21-inch existing sewer.
211/2-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 24-inch existing sewer.
SectionN.doc Page 99 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
28-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 30-inch existing sewer.
34-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 36-inch existing sewer.
42-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 48-inch existing sewer.
46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION
The existing line shall be cleaned of debris and other obstructions prior to TV inspections or
insertion of the polyethylene liner. Cleaning can be accomplished with a high velocity cleaner, a
bucket and scrapper, root saws, corkscrews, and rodding or balling units. The method used will
be determined by the condition of the existing line. Final cleaning may be required prior to
inserting the liner.
46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS
All excavations shall conform to OSHA requirements and any additional requirements as set by
the specifying engineer or his representative.
Insertion shaft excavations shall coincide with points requiring removal of obstructions or shall
be determined by the engineer.
An entry slope grade of 2 1/2:1 maximum shall be used to provide a safe bending radius for the
polyethylene. The bottom of the entry pit should provide a straight section for ease of entry of
the liner into the existing pipe. The length of the level excavation should be at least twelve times
the diameter of the liner being inserted. The width of the shaft should be as narrow as possible.
The required width will depend on the location, type of soil, depth of the existing sewer line and
the water table.
46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER
After completion of the access shaft, the top half of the existing sewer shall be broken or cut and
removed for the full length of the access shaft.
A fabricated pulling head shall be connected to the leading end of the liner pipe. A cable shall be
connected to the pulling head so that the liner pipe can be pulled into the existing sewer.
Power winches used for pulling in long lengths of polyethylene liner pipe shall be rated equal to
the project requirements.
Once started, the pulling operation should continue to completion.
Insertion is normally done at about a slow walking speed. After insertion, a minimum of 12 hours
shall be allowed for the liner pipe to reach equilibrium with the sewer temperature and to allow
the liner pipe to stress relieve itself.
The polyethylene liner pipe should protrude at least 6 inches into the manhole where it
terminates.
After the 12-hour equilibrium period, the annular space between the original pipe and the liner
shall be pressure grouted. Said grouting must be from the bottom up to prevent air pockets from
forming. Also the grout must be recommended for underwater application and have elastomeric
properties. Products used shall be approved by the engineer.
The liner shall not be displaced when the annular space is being filled. Spacers, inflatable plugs 0
or other methods approved by the Engineer must be used to prevent displacement.
SectionIV.doc Page 100 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
The length of fused pipe that can be pulled will vary depending on field conditions, the ease of
access to the area, and the working space available.
46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES
The Contractor shall be solely responsible to confirm all pipe sizes prior to ordering, fusing and
installation of the liner.
46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED
After the liner has been pulled into place, allowed to recover and sealed at the manholes, pipe
connections okayed by the engineer shall be reconnected to the liner pipe.
Pipe connections shall be connected by the use of a pre-fabricated polyethylene saddle. A
neoprene gasket shall be installed between the saddle and the liner pipe so that a complete water
seal is accomplished when the saddle is placed on the liner pipe and secured with stainless steel
bands.
46.4.7 BACKFILLING
All excavations shall be backfilled using on site materials or as specified by the engineer. Cost
for backfilling of access shafts and underdrain connections shall be including in the unit price bid
for sliplining and reconnection of service laterals. Before any excavation is done for any purpose,
it will be the responsibility of the contractor to contact the various utility companies and to
determine the locations of their facilities. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to provide
adequate protection for utility facilities. Any temporary construction right of way and/or storage
areas will be arranged for by the contractor.
46.4.8 POINT REPAIR
The engineer or his representative will determine if a point repair is necessary only after it has
been demonstrated that a liner pipe cannot be pulled through the existing pipe. Payment will be
made for each repair.
The contractor will be expected to remove the obstruction and clear the pipe. If removing the top
of the existing pipe will accomplish the removal of the obstruction, the bottom of the existing
pipe should remain in place to form a cradle for the liner.
46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS
All materials not used in the backfilling operation shall be disposed of off site by the contractor.
Finish grading shall be required. In locations other than street right-of-ways, the surface shall be
graded smooth and sodded with the same kind of grass as the existing lawn. Excavation points in
street right-of-ways shall be repaired as specified by the engineer.
47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE
47.1 SCOPE
This specification designates general requirements for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
plastic (spiral wound) pipe with integral wall bell and spigot joints for the conveyance of storm
water.
SectionIV.doc Page 101 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
47.2 MATERIALS
All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with specification for "Poly
(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on
Controlled Inside Diameter".
The pipe and fittings shall be made of PVC plastic.
47.3 PIPE
The bell shall consist of an integral wall section. The solid cross section fiber ring shall be
factory assembled on the spigot. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in this specification.
Standard laying lengths shall be 13 ft. + 1 inch. At manufacturer's option, random lengths of not
more than 15% of total footage may be shipped in lieu of standard lengths.
47.4 JOINING SYSTEM
Joints shall be either an integral bell gasketed joint. When the joint is assembled according to
manufactures recommendation it will prevent misalignment of adjacent pipes and form a silt
tight joint.
47.5 FITTINGS
All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or
approved equal and have bell and/or spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe.
48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS
48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT
Pressure injected grout shall be of cement and water and shall be proportioned generally in the
ratio of 1.5 (one and one half) cubic foot (one and one half bags) of cement to 1 (one) cubic foot
(7.50 gal.) of water. This mix shall be varied as the grouting proceeds as is necessary to provide
penetration in the operator's judgment.
Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society
for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, latest edition serial designation C150 for Portland
Cement, Type I. Portland Cement shall weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot.
Water used in the grout shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali,
vegetable, sewage and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per
gallon.
Grout pump shall be of the positive displacement type and shall be capable of producing
adequate pressure to penetrate the area.
All pressure grouting will be at the direction of the Engineer.
48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH
GUNITE
Guniting shall conform to all requirements of "Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and
Application of Shotcrete (ACI 506.2 77)" published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit,
Michigan, except as modified by those specifications.
SectionIV.doc Page 102 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
Steel reinforcement shall be incorporated in the Gunite as required and shall be furnished, bent,
set and placed in accordance with the provisions of these specifications.
The purpose of this specification is to obtain a dense and durable concrete having the specified
strength.
48.3 COMPOSITION
Gunite shall be composed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to
produce a concrete suitable for pneumatic application.
48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS
Concrete ingredients shall be selected, proportioned in such a manner as will produce concrete
which will be extremely strong, dense and resistant to weathering, and abrasion. Concrete shall
have a minimum 28-day strength of 4,000 psi.
48.5 MATERIALS
Portland Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to all of the requirements of the
American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C150
for Portland Cement, Type I. A bag of cement shall be deemed to weigh not less than 94 pounds
per cubic foot.
Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be natural siliceous sand consisting of hard, clean, strong,
durable and uncoated particles, conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing
Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C33 for Concrete Aggregates.
Fine aggregate shall not contain less than 3% nor more than 6% of moisture.
Fine aggregate shall be evenly graded from fine to coarse and shall be within the following
limits:
Passing No. 3/8 Sieve 100%
Passing No. 4 Sieve 95% to 100%
Passing No. 8 Sieve 80% to 100%
Passing No. 16 Sieve 50% to 85%
Passing No. 30 Sieve 25% to 60%
Passing No. 50 Sieve 10% to 30%
Passing No. 100 Sieve 2% to 10%
48.6 WATER
Water used in mixing, at the nozzle shall be fresh, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil,
acid, alkali, vegetable, sewage, and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing
8.33 pounds per gallon.
48.7 REINFORCEMENT
Steel mesh reinforcement shall be electrically welded, cold drawn, mild steel fabric conforming
to the latest requirements of ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 185 for
SectionIV.doc Page 103 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. Mesh can be fabricated from cold drawn
steel wire conforming to the requirements of the latest ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial
Designation A 82 and sized as shown on Plans Page 7 of 7. 0
48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
Cement shall be stored with adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. It
shall be stored in a manner that will permit easy access for inspection and identification of each
shipment.
Aggregate shall be stockpiled at points selected to provide maximum drainage and to prevent the
inclusion of any foreign material during rehandling.
48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION
Unsound materials of construction and all coated, scaly, or unsound concrete in manholes and
inlets, shall be removed by chipping with pneumatic hammers and chisels to sound surface, all
cracks and cavities shall be chipped to such formation that their sides form approximately a 45
degree angle to the exposed surface for at least one (1) inch in depth. All areas to receive
pneumatic concrete shall be cleaned by flushing or scouring with water and compressed air jets
to assure removal of all loose particles. All areas of existing surfaces that do not require chipping
shall be given a wet sandblasting with the gunite equipment and the air pressure at the cement
gun shall not be less than 50 psi.
Surface preparation of existing metal surface of a corrugated pipe shall be lightly sandblasted to
remove loose material. All sandblasted areas shall then be cleaned by a air/water blast to remove
all particles from the cleaning operation.
To insure perfect bond, the newly sandblasted surface shall be thoroughly moistened with water
prior to application of gunite. In no instance shall gunite be applied in an area where free running
water exists.
48.10 PROPORTIONING
Prior to start of guniting the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the recommended mix as a
ratio of cement to aggregate. Recommended mix shall be on the basis of test data from prior
experience. Provided data submitted is adequate no further testing of recommended mix will be
required.
If required, the Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary to control the actual amounts of
all materials entering into the concrete. The types of equipment and methods used for measuring
materials shall be subject to approval.
48.11 MIXING
Gunite shall be thoroughly mixed by machine and then passed through a sieve to remove all
large particles before placing in hopper of the cement gun. The mixture shall not be permitted to
become damp. Each batch should be entirely discharged before recharging is begun. The mixer
should be cleaned thoroughly enough to remove all adherent materials from the mixing vanes
and from the drum at regular intervals.
Water in any amount shall not be added to the mix before it enters the cement gun. Quantities of
water shall be controlled by a valve at the nozzle of the gun. Water content shall be adjusted as
SectionN.doc Page 104 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
required for proper placement, but shall in no case exceed four gallons of water per sack of
cement, including the water contained in the aggregate.
Remixing or tempering shall not be permitted. Mixed material that has stood 45 minutes without
being used shall be discarded. Rebound materials shall not be reused.
48.12 APPLICATION
Gunite shall not be placed on a frozen surface nor during freezing weather. Gunite shall not be
placed when it is anticipated that the temperature during the following 24 hours will drop below
32 degrees, Fahrenheit.
Sequence of application may be from bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed.
Corners shall be filled first. "Shooting" shall be from an angle as near perpendicular to the
surface as practicable, with the nozzle held approximately 3 feet from the work (except in
confined control). If the flow of material at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or
wet sloughs result, the nozzleman shall direct the nozzle away from the work until the faulty
conditions are corrected Such defects shall be replaced as the work progresses.
Guniting shall be suspended if.
1. Air velocity separates the cement from the sand at the nozzle.
2. Temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed gunite cannot be protected.
Gunite shall be applied in one or more layers to such total thickness as required to restore the
area as detailed over the original lines of the adjoining surface, unless other wise specified All
cavities, depressions, washouts and similar failures shall be rebuilt to original lines by use of
gunite reinforced with wire mesh. Where the cavity exceeds 4 inches in depth a layer of mesh
shall be used for each 3 inches of depth of gunite. In no case shall wire mesh be placed behind
existing reinforcement.
The time interval between successive layers in sloping vertical or overhanging work must be
sufficient to allow initial but not final set to develop. At the time the initial set is developing, the
surface shall be cleaned to remove the thin film of laitance in order to provide a perfect bond
with succeeding applications.
48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Construction joints or day's work joints shall be sloped off to a thin, clean, regular edge,
preferably at a 45-degree slope. Before placing the adjoining work, the slope portion and
adjacent gunite shall be thoroughly cleaned as necessary, then moistened and scoured with an air
jet.
48.14 SURFACE FINISH
Nozzleman shall bring the gunite to an even plane and to well formed corners by working up to
ground wires or other guides, using lower placing velocity than normal.
After the body coat has been placed, the surface shall be trued with a thin edge screed to remove
high areas and expose low areas. Low areas shall be properly filled with concrete to insure a true,
flat surface.
After the concrete surface has been trued, the entire surface shall be given a flashcoat finish
except where a special type finish is specified on the drawings.
SectionIV.doc Page 105 Revised: 4/29/2007
48.15 CURING
Section N - Technical Specifications
Curing shall be in accordance with either paragraph 3.7.1(d) or paragraph 3.7.5. of ACI 506.2 77
depending upon atmospheric condition.
48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION
During progress of the work, where appearance is important, adjacent areas or grounds which
may be permanently discolored, stained, or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound, shall be
adequately protected sensitive areas, when contacted, shall be cleaned by early scraping,
brushing or washing, as the surroundings permit.
48.17 INSPECTION
Because of the importance of workmanship affecting the quality of the gunite, continual
inspection during placing shall be maintained. Any imperfections discovered shall be cut out and
replaced with sound material.
48.18 EQUIPMENT
Cement Gun: The mixing and delivering equipment shall be either the vertical double chamber
type or rotary type. The upper chamber of the double chamber type shall receive and pressurize
the dry mix and deliver it to the lower chamber. The lower chamber shall force the pressurized
mix into the delivery hose by means of a feed wheel. The type of feeder utilized should be of
sufficient capacity that the lower chamber may continuously furnish all required material to the
delivery hose while the upper chamber receives the recharge. The rotary type cement gun shall
have an enlarged hopper to feed material into a rotating multiported cylinder. Material shall fall
by gravity into a port which shall then be rotated to a position in which the material is expelled
by air into a moving stream of air. All equipment must be kept in good repair. The interior of
drums, feed gearing and valves shall be cleaned as often as necessary (at least once every 8 hour.
shift) to prevent material from caking on critical parts.
Nozzle: Nozzle shall be the premixing type with perforated water feed ring inside the nozzle.
The maximum length of material hose for the application of gunite shall be approximately 150
feet although it shall be permissible to use as much as 800 feet of material hose if the supply air
pressure measured at the cement gun is increased to maintain proper velocity. The following
table gives requirements for compressor size, hose size and air pressure using 150 feet of
material hose:
Comp. Cap
Win) Max. Hose Dia.
(In.) Max. Size Nozzle
(In.) Min. Air Press.
(psi)
365 15/8 15/8 60
600 2 2 80
750 21/2 21/2 90
For each 25 feet of material hose used in excess of 150 feet, the required air pressure shall be
increased by 5 psi. 0
SectionN.doc Page 106 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Air Compressor: Any standard type of compressor shall be satisfactory if it is of sufficient
capacity to provide, without interruption, the pressures and volume of air necessary for the
longest hose delivery. The air compressor capacity determinations shall include allowances made
for the air consumed in blowing rebound, cleaning, reinforcing and for incidental uses.
Compressor equipment shall be of such capacity so as to insure air pressures at the special mixer
capable of producing the required material velocities.
Water Supply: The water pressure at the discharge nozzle should be sufficiently greater than the
operating air pressure to assure the water is intimately mixed with the other materials. If the line
water pressure is inadequate, a water pump or pressurized tank shall be introduced into the line.
The water pressure shall be uniformly steady (nonpulsating).
49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION
49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT
It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of
manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made-in-place liner systems used in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to
these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion
protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular
system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All
OSHA regulations shall be met.
•' 49.2 PAYMENT
Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the
installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate.
payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the
pay item per linear foot of liner: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation,
including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and
compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions
and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or
shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as
required for a complete and operable system.
49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS
49.3.1 MATERIALS
49.3.1.1 LINERS
Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound
vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise
stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The
contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is
solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory
certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D
3753.
SectionIV.doc Page 107 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
49.3.1.2 MORTAR
Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two and three parts
clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve.
49.3.1.3 GROUTING
Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four bags of Portland Cement Type H per cubic yard of
clean, well graded sand.
49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the
removal of the manhole ring and corbel section.
Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls.
Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole.
Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the
manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner.
If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar.
Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing
inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts.
Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout.
Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the
outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertically
as possible. Pour six inches of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular
void to insure an adequate bottom seal.
Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the
existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to
seal the area around the manhole liner and piping.
Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with
grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure.
Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed.
Observe watertightness and repair any visible leakage.
Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing
sod.
Where manholes fall in paved areas, disturbed base shall be replaced twice the original thickness
and compacted in 8" layers. Asphalt shall be replaced with 1 1/2" of Pinellas County Type II
surface.
49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM
This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious
liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong
Seal MS 2 product.
Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The
applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory
SectionIV.doc Page 108 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
training. The applicator/contractor shall finnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying
the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural
cementitious liner of a minimum 1/2" thickness using a machine specially designed for the
application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and with the following specifications which includes:
1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application.
2. The removal of any loose and unsound material.
3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a 2
coat application.
49.4.1 MATERIALS
49.4.1.1 PATCHING MIX
Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations
and shall have the following minimum requirements:
1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C-109) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi
2. Shrinkage (ASTM C-596) 28 days, 150 psi
3. Bond (ASTM C-952)
•
.7
4. Cement
28 days, 150 psi
Sulfate resistant
49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL
5. Density, when applied
105 +/- 5 pcf
Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacture's
recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements:
1. Compressive strength (ASTM C-109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs.
2. Bond (ASTM C-952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs.
49.6 GROUTING MIX
Strong-Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according
to the manufacture's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum
28 day compressive strength of 250 psi and a 1 day strength of 50 psi.
49.7 LINER MIX
Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole
surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at 28 days:
1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109)
2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496)
3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78)
4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596)
5. Bond (ASTM C 952)
3,000 psi
300 psi
600 psi
0% at 90% R.H.
130 psi
SectionIV.doc
Page 109
Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf
Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Job site. Bag weight
shall be 50 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot.
Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be 1/2" to
5/8" long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the un mixed state, have a
lead content not greater than two percent (2%) by weight.
Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according
to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide
conditions.
Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site.
Bag weight shall be 50-51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 56 pounds per
cubic foot.
Cement content must be 65%-75% of total weight of bag.
One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 108
pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of .67 cubic foot of volume.
Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than 1/2" in length nor greater
than 5/8" in height.
Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for
any heavy metal.
Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process.
A two coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough
troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray
applied to assure minimum 1/2" thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively
smooth finish.
49.8 WATER
Shall be clean and potable.
49.9 OTHER MATERIALS
No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or
recommendation from the manufacturer.
49.10 EQUIPMENT
A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of
producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles
with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete
with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered.
Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete
with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power
the hydraulic system and air compressor.
•
SectionrV.doc Page 110 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
. 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
49.11.1 PREPARATION
1. Place .boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines
and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole.
2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high
pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and
concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any
large voids with quick setting patching mix.
3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to
the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the
infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the
quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present,
drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout.
Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required.
4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting
mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations.
5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material.
49.11.2 MIXING
For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using
?'. the Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for 30 seconds to a minute after all materials have
been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another
batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption
until each application is complete.
49.11.3 SPRAYING
The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running
water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all
cracks, crevices and voids are filled, and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light
troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the
bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface
sheen which could be 15 minutes to 1 hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second
application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of 1/2 inch. The surface is then
troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the
surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel
marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than 24 hours have
elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is
sprayed such that a gradual slope is produces from the walls to the invert with the thickness at
the edge of the invert being no less than 1/2 inch. The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to
a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a
minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow.
Section[V.doc Page 111 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING
At some point during the application, at least four (4) 2 inch cubes may be prepared each day or
from every 50 bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or
Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109.
49.11.5 CURING
Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is
imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been
completed.
49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes
entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn
into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the
manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn
and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the
vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60)
seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and
ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial
test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained.
Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer.
49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT 01
SYSTEM
49.12.1 SCOPE
Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring
structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of
1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume
infiltration
2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows:
a. Hydrophilic foam-injected through wall of manhole to fill voids and/or
b. Hydrophilic gel-injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks
3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing)
4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of /2 inch
5. Epoxy coating, minimum of 30 dry mils
49.12.2 MATERIALS
49.12.2.1 REPAIRING CEMENT
A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to
instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The
Section[V.doc Page 112 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall
have the following properties:
Set Time 1-3 minutes
Tensile Strength 1 day 510 psi
ASTM C 307 3 days 745 psi
28 days 855 psi
Compressive Strength 1 day 3,125 psi
ASTM -C 109 7 days 7,808 psi
28 days 9,543 psi
Flexural Strength ASTM C 78 1 day 410 psi
3 days 855 psi
28 days 1,245 psi
49.12.2.2 HYDROPHILIC GROUTING
Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either
one or both of the following materials:
1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks in
and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows:
Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574-86
Elongation 400% ASTM D 3574-86
Bonding Strength 250-300 psi
2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole-to prevent
seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior
of manhole. Physical properties are as follows:
Density 8.75-9.171bs/gal ASTM D-3574
Tensile Strength 150 psi ASTM D- 412
Elongation 250% ASTM D-3574
Shrinkage Less than 4% ASTM D-1042
Toxicity. Non Toxic
49.12.2.3 WATERPROOFING
A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied The system
combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to
seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three
components-two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the
substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks
the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for
approximately six months. Upon completion the color will be light grey. Physical properties are
as follows:
Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement
ASTM (to be given) 1,200 1,800 psi
SectionIV.doc Page 113 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
Tensile Strength
(7 day cure)
ASTM C 190
380 psi (2.62 MPa)
325 psi (2.24 MPa)
at 100% RH
at 50% RH
•
Permeability
(3 day cure)
CRD 48 55
49.12.2.4 CEMENT LINING
8.1 x10 llcm/sec to
7.6x10 cm/sec
A self bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and
provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following
properties:
Calcium Aluminate Cement 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 7 Days 28 Days
Astm C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000
Astor C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi 1000 1500 1800 2000
Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90% Humidity - <0.04 <0.06 <0.08
Astor C 666 Freeze-Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage
Astor C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile
Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3%
Astm C 497 Porosity/Adsorption Test 4-5%
Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after 24 His moist curing at 68 F.
The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C
1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture
shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch, but no greater than two inches. It will
have a dark grey color.
49.12.2.5 EPOXY COATING
A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of 30 dry mils. This
epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including
excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be
applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its
uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the
following properties at 75 degrees F:
Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume 1:1
Color (other colors available on request) Light Gray
Pot Life, hrs I
Tensile Strength, psi, min 2,000
Tensile Elongation, % 10-20
Water Extractable Substances, mg./sq. in., max 5
Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi 1,800
•
•
SectionIV.doc Page 114 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
49.12.2.6 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE
Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (30/6), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10%), MEK,
Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3%), Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin
Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (30/o), and many others.
49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
49.12.3.1 PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW
Work shall proceed as follows:
1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client.
2. Clean manhole and remove debris.
a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris.
b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease.
c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure.
d. Remove debris from work area.
3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement.
(Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as
required by client.
4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration.
5. Apply cementitious/crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as
needed.
6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces.
7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces.
NOTE: Steps 1-5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step
6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty-four hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to
cement lining.
49.12.3.2 PREPARATION
An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the
rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to
remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from
entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines ( where feasible) or inserting protective
screens.
49.12.3.3 STRUCTURAL REPAIR
Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill
cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying
waterproofing/crystallization-
0 49.12.3.4 INFILTRATION CONTROL
Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam.
SectionIV.doc Page 115 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
1. Drill 5/8" holes through active leaking surface.
2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Inject material until water flow stops.
4. Remove fittings (if necessary).
49.12.3.5 WATERPROOFING/CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS
1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiffbrush, forming an undercoat.
2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand.
3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal
forming process.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks.
5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat.
6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining.
49.12.3.6 CEMENT LINING
1. Dampen surface.
2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application.
3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches)
has been achieved.
4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole.
5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish.
6. Allow for a 24-hour cure time prior to epoxy coating.
NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing
times.
49.12.3.7 EPOXY COATING
Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a
thickness of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6)
hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours.
49.12.3.8 CLEAN UP
The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area.
49.12.3.9 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes
entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn
into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the
manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn
and the vacuum pump shut oil With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the
vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60)
seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and
SectionIV.doc Page 116 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial
• test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained.
Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer.
49.12.3.10 WARRANTY
All materials and workmanship shall be wan-anted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years,
provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used
50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS
50.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE
The City desires to inform the general public on the City's use and expenditure of public funding
for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this purpose, the
Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during the full
course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active work.
50.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE
Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended
locations or various locations. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and
management of project sign(s) shall be lump sum for the entire project. The number of and type
of signs will be stated in the Scope of the Work section of the contract documents. Lump sum
item will be included in the bid proposal for signs. The particular wording to be used on the signs
will be determined after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the
wording to be used on sign at the preconstruction conference.
50.3 FIXED SIGN
Fixed sign shall be 4' by 6' in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood of the same
size and a minimum thickness of 1/2". Sign shall be attached to a minimum of three pressure
treated 4" by 4" below grade pressure treated wooden posts and braced as necessary for high
winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground Bottom of sign
must be a minimum of 24" above the ground Alternate mounting system or attachment to
fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval. Sign shall be painted white on
both sides with exterior rated paint.
50.4 PORTABLE SIGNS
Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24" by 30" in size and will be attached to a standard sized
portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080" or thicker, background of
white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable sign shall be two
signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade.
50.5 SIGN COLORING
Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other
lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional
to the sign itself.
Sectionlv.doc Page 117 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
50.6 SIGN PLACEMENT
Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the
project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either
pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the City's right-of-way, the
signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the City's right-of-way,
the signs will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations of
active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in
several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and
will remain in place until the request for final payment.
50.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE
The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement,
removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The
Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs
are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced.
50.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN
PROJECT NAME
A CITY OF CLEARWATER ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT PROJECT
FUNDING:
CONTRACTOR:
CONSTRUCTION COMPLETION:
CITY PROJECT MANAGER:
PHONE
51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM
51.1 SCOPE
1. These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexiflor Color Finish System over
recreational areas intended for In-Line Skating activities. The materials specified in the
site plans shall be of colors indicated and for application over the Plexipave Acrylic Latex
System.
2. The work shall consist of suitable cleaning and preparation of the surface to assure a
satisfactory bond of the system to the existing surface.
3. All coverage rates are calculated prior to dilution.
4. Plexiflor In-line Skating Surfacing System
• 1 Coat of Acrylic Resurfacer
• 2 Coats of Fortified Plexipave
• 2 Coats of Plexiflor
• Plexicolor Line Paint
•
SectionIV.doc Page 118 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
• 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS
51.2.1 ASPHALT
Allow new asphalt to cure a minimum of 6 months. The surface must be checked for birdbaths,
cracks and other irregularities and repaired with Court Patch Binder according to California
Specification Section 10.14. (Surfacing prior to six months may make the asphalt subject to
indentation).
51.2.2 CONCRETE
Concrete shall have a wood float or broom finish.
FINISH. DO NOT USE CURING AGENTS OR
concrete to cure a minimum of 30 days. Acid Etch
according to California Specification Section 10.13.
other irregularities and repair with Court Patch Bin
Section 10.14.
51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX
DO NOT PROVIDE STEEL TROWEL
CONCRETE HARDENERS. Allow the
the entire surface with Concrete Preparer
Check surface for birdbaths, cracks and
der according to California Specification
Court Patch Binder Mix: 100 Lbs. #80-100 Mesh Silica Sand (dry) 3 gallons Couth Patch. Binder
1 to 2 gallons Portland Cement. .
51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT
1. Application of the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix shall be applied to the clean, dry, level
surfaces to receive the Plexiflor Surfacing System. The mix shall be applied according to
California Specification Section 10.8 using the following mix:
Acrylic Resurfacer 55 gallons
Water (Clean and Potable) 20-40 gallons
Sand (60-80 mesh) 600-900 pounds
Liquid Yield 112-138 gallons
2. Over asphalt surfaces, apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two coats (depending
on surface porosity) at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat.
3. Non-coated concrete surfaces must be neutralized with concrete preparer and primed with
California Ti-Coat according to Specification Section 10.17. The Acrylic Resurfacer Mix
must be applied within 3 hours of the TiCoat application while the primer is dry but still
tacky to the touch. Apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two applications at a rate
of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat.
51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE
After the filler coat application has dried, apply two coats of Fortified Plexipave at an undiluted
rate of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat using the following mix:
Plexipave Color Base 30 gallons
Plexichrome 20 gallons
Water 20 gallons
SectionIV.doc Page 119
Revised: 4/29/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION
1. Plexiflor is factory premixed and ready to use from the container. The material may be
diluted with one (1 ) part water to six (6) parts Plexiflor to improve flowability and
provide uniform application.
2. Apply two coats of Plexiflor at a rate of .04-.05 gallons per square yard per coat.
3. Plexiflor is applied (in a similar manner to Plexipave) in windrows on the surface with
sufficient quantity to cover as the squeegee is pulled over the surface. Apply only light
pressure to the squeegee. Do not allow ridges to form between passes of the squeegee.
Ridges existing after material dries should require corrective action.
4. Plexiflor and its preliminary coatings should be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to
application of subsequent coats.
51.6 PLAYING LINES
Four hours minimum after completion of the color resurfacing, playing lines shall be accurately
located, marked and painted with Plexicolor Line Paint as specified by The National In-Line
Hockey Association.
51.7 GENERAL
1. The contractor shall remove all containers, surplus materials and debris upon completion
of work leaving the site in a clean, orderly condition that is acceptable to the owner.
Gates shall be secured and all containers shall be disposed of in accordance with Local,
State and Federal regulations.
2. Materials specified for the Plexiflor System shall tee delivered to the site in sealed,
property labeled arums with California Products Corporation labels that are stenciled
with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner
will not be accepted. Mixing with clear, fresh water shall only be done at the job site.
Coverage rates are based upon material prior to mixing with water as specified.
51.8 LIMITATIONS
1. Do not apply if surface temperature is less than 50°F or more than 1 40°F.
2. Do not apply when rain or high humidity is imminent.
3. Do not apply when surface is damp or has standing water.
4. Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings.
5. Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot sun.
6. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use.
7. Plexiflor will not prevent substrate cracks from occurring.
8. Plexiflor will mark slightly from normal use of some In-line Skates.
9. Coefficient of friction = 0.78
10. Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to 1 hour at 70°F with 60% relative
humidity.
SectionIV.doc Page 120 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
11. Keep court clean. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery.
In-Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NINA recommended protective gear.
52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION
52.1 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION PERFORMED BY CITY
See below for Resident Notification performed by the Contractor.
52.2 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION PERFORMED BY CONTRACTOR
The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route with a printed door hanger
notice indicating the following information about the proposed construction work and the
Contractor performing the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of
construction; the type of construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events;
possibility of water service disruption and/or colored water due to construction efforts;
Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number;
Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and/or
other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other
language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed
language shall be approved by the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be
printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4 V4 by 11 inches
in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected
by the Contractor's activities no later than 7 days prior to the start of construction activity.
Directly affected by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including
staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property,
etc. Contractor cannot start without proper 7 day notice period to residents. Contractor is
required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and
to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business
hours.
Resident notification by the Contractor is a non-specific pay item to be included in the bid items
provided in the contract proposal.
?J
SectionrV.doc Page 121 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
EXAMPLE
CITY SEAL
Of
CITY OF CLEARWATER
NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION
TODAY'S DATE:
PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE
We are the construction contractor performing (state type of contract) for the City of Clearwater
in your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property.
This notice is placed a minimum of 7 days in advance of construction to notify property owners
of the pending start of construction.
(Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners)
The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way.
Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the
contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks
will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for
the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors,
textures and/or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or
structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will
not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property
owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within
the right-of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere.
We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or
any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Superintendent
at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you.
Construction is anticipated to begin on:
Company Name
Company Address
Contractor Phone Number
53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES
53.1 MATERIAL
53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL
53.1.1.1 PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS $ MATTRESSES
Gabion & mattress basket units shall be of non-raveling construction and fabricated from a
double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of
a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.1063 inches (approx. US gauge
12). All wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall comply with or exceed Federal
Specifications QQ-W 461H, possess a maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s.i. with a Finish 5,
Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the current ASTM A-641. The weight of zinc coating
shall be determined by ASTM A-90. The grade of zinc used for coating shall be High Grade or
11
•
•
SectionIV.doc Page 122 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
Special High Grade, as prescribed in ASTM B-6, Table 1. Uniformity of coating shall equal or
exceed four 1-minute dips by the Preece test, as determined by ASTM A-239.
The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC
coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3
1/4 inches by 4'/z inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC
coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire
core, 0.1338 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 10), coated with PVC and having an overall
diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.173 inches. Lacing and connecting wire
shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in
diameter (approx. US gauge 13 1/2), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized
wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be
permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge
joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed
condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a
minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. Tiger-Tite
Interlocking Fasteners are an approved alternate joint material. The Interlocking Wire Fastener
shall meet stainless steel material specification ASTM A-313, Type 302, Class 1, or equal.
All of the above wire diameters are subject to tolerance limit of 0.004 inches in accordance with
ASTM A-641.
53.1.1.2 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING
The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not
less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist
deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show
any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to
attack from acids and resistant to abrasion.
1. Specific Gravity:
a. According to ASTM D-2287 and ASTM D- 792; in the range of 1.30 to 1.34.
2. Tensile Strength:
a. According to ASTM D-142; not less than 2980 psi.
3. Modulus of Elasticity:
a. According to ASTM D412; not less than 2700 psi at 100% strain.
4. Resistance to Abrasion:
a. According to ASTM 1242; weight loss <12% (Method B).
5. Brittleness Temperature:
a. According to ASTM D-746, Procedure A; shall be at least 8.3 degrees centigrade
below the minimum temperature at which the gabions will be handled or placed but
not lower than -9.4 degrees centigrade.
6. Hardness:
a. According to ASTM D-2240; shall be between 50 and 60 Shore D when tested.
7. Creeping Corrosion:
SectionlV.doc Page 123 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
a. Maximum corrosion penetration to the wire core from a square cut end section shall
not be more than 25mm when the specimen has been immersed for 2000 hours in a
50% SOLUTION HC1 (hydrochloric acid 12 Be).
53.1.1.3 ACCELERATED AGING TESTS
Variation of the initial properties will be allowed, as specified below, when the specimen is
submitted to the following Accelerated Aging Tests:
1. Salt Spray Test:
a. According to ASTM B-117
b. Period of test = 3000 hours.
2. Exposure to ultraviolet rays:
a. According to ASTM D-1499 and ASTM G-23 (Apparatus Type E). Period of test =
3000 hours at 63 degrees centigrade.
3. Exposure to high temperature:
a. Testing period: 240 hours at 105 degrees centigrade, when tested in accordance with
ASTM D- 1203 and ASTM D-2287.
53.1.1.4 PROPERTIES AFTER AGING TESTS
After the above Accelerated Aging Tests have been performed, the PVC compound shall exhibit
the following properties:
1. Appearance:`
a. The vinyl coating shall not crack, blister or split and shall not show any remarkable
change in color.
2. Specific Gravity:
a. Shall not show change higher than 6% of its initial value.
3. Durometer Hardness:
a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value.
4. Tensile Strength:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
5. Elongation:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
6. Modulus of Elasticity:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
7. Resistance to Abrasion:
a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value.
8. Brittleness Temperature:
a. Cold Bend Temperature - Shall not be lower than -20 degrees centigrade.
SectionIV.doc Page 124 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
b. Cold Flex Temperature -Shall not be higher than +18 degrees centigrade.
53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL:
The filler stone shall be limestone from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is
started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or
supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific
gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure.
The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote
deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be
retained in the gabion or mattress baskets.
The stone shall meet the following physical requirements:
• Absorption, maximum 5%
• Los Angeles Abrasion (FM 10T096), maximum loss 45%
• Soundness (Sodium Sulphate), (FM 1-T104), maximum loss 12%
• Flat and elongated pieces, materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest
dimension shall not exceed 5% by weight.
All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical
diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by
weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening.
53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE
Mattress wire shall conform to the same specifications as gabions except as follows:
1. The nominal diameter of the wire used in the fabrication of the netting shall be 0.0866
inches minimum, subject to diameter tolerance in accordance with the current ASTM A
641, Table 3.
2. All wire shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 641, Table 1. The minimum weight of
the zinc coating shall be 0.70 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.0866 inch wire used for mesh and
lacing and 0.80 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.106 wire used for selvedge.
3. Adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be capable of being wrapped in a close
helix at a rate not exceeding 15 turns per minute around a cylindrical steel mandrel
having a diameter 3 times the nominal wire diameter being tested. After the wrap test is
AI,,completed, the wire shall not exhibit any cracking or flaking of the zinc coatingto such
an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with bare fingers.
.,f
GVOTEXT?_E FABRIC
tapric sA " confoga to °'FDOT, Standard Index 199, Type D-2, and FDOT Standard
Specificatio ;1996 edition, Se"6tion 985.
Pk. FQRMANGE
Gti, ops and Rtn?? Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's
rac emendation W as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such
a manner that the, sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into
V
rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses
SectionIV.doc Page 125 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a
single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a
manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the
mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its horizontal width,
they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall
be famished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no
additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not
ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections
forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut.
Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The
binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single
and double loops are alternated.
A line of empty gabion shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and
binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical
reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled
line of gabion shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back.
To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended.
Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions
shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to
opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full
and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one
two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top.
Filler stone shall not be dropped more than 12" into the gabions and mattresses.
Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the
cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or
cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against
movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be
replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work
shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the
manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less.
54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
54.1 SCOPE
To rem trash and debris from landscape and paved area; ma
plant be landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and opi
ornamental pest 01; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and
at designated areas. a Contractor is to work with the City
activities and reporting i larities in the work zone.
The Contractor(s) will provi a labor and material s require t l
medians on Court Street from Hi d Avenue west to Madis
• Traffic safety and Maintenance ffic;
• Trash and debris removal from the job
and fertili
irrigation
6i; of hart
I
of
•
•
•
SectionrV.doc Page 126 1% Revised: 4/29/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
54.1 SCOPE
To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of
plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems;
ornamental pest control. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance
activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone.
The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the landscaped areas;
including:
• Trash and debris removal from the job site;
• Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces;
• Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted);
• Irrigation service and repair;
• Reporting of irregularities at the job site.
54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK
The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract
between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed
holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract
• maintenance at other hours.
All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc.,
be completed before leaving the job site
54.3 WORK METHODS
54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING
The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City. Any variations to that
schedule, requested by either party, must be approved in writing by an authorized representative
of the other party.
54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT
The contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated
location:
54.4 LITTER
Remove trash and debris from the job site. Proper disposal of collected trash and debris is a
requirement of the contractor. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes,
vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The contractor should report
such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup
from the contractor would be considered.
C
Revised Section IV-Article 54.doc Page I Revised: 5/24/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
• 54.5 VISUAL CHECK
The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or
damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within 24 hours
after providing the service.
54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PRUNING
Not Used.
54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CARNARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY
DATE, ETC.)
Not Used.
54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL
All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the
contractor. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion.
54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL
Not Used.
54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY
Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park
users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high
• pedestrian use areas.
54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION
All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20-6-12 sulfur
coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in
mid-February, early June, and mid-September. Fertilizer types and amounts will change with
requirements of maturing landscape materials.
54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA
Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable.
Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied
by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by contractor
at his/her expense.
54.13 MULCH CONDITION
Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil
moisture, usually 3 inches.
54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR
Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation and timing. Drip tubing
should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and
operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled
system running time.
Revised Section IV-Article 54.doc Page 2 Revised: 5/24/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL
Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a
less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be
replaced by the contractor at the contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on
City properties.
54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION
Not Used.
54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION
The City will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost
sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet
to be determined). Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the
sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's
directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City
will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to
protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it
to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or
remain in placed as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about
removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may
cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day
(5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site
work at the contracted rate per man-hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for
• the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate
per employee required. The City and contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations
with weather conditions. Should freeze/frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform
remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City.
54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE
Not Used.
54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK
Not Used.
54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL
Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the
following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City
shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be
given 48 hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections.
54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month
period on plants and 12 month warranty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate
irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the
landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm
40 heads/fronds as he feels appropriate.
Revised Section IV-Article 54.doc Page 3 Revised: 5/24/2007
Section N -Technical Specifications
2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates.
3. All maintenance shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with
trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature
caused by the Contractor or his/her employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing
of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option,
invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs the next
regular payment to the Contractor.
5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked
vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular
schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall
schedule to perform the required maintenance to the location as soon as the pertaining
circumstances are relieved.
0
•
Revised Section IV-Article 54.doc Page 4 Revised: 5/24/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications
• Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces;
• Pro r trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms;
• Prope ertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted);
• Irrigatio service and repair;
• Mulch ement;
• Cleaning o and surfaces; and the
• Reporting of egularities at the job site.
54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK
The Contractor(s) shal accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract
between the hours of 6: a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed
holidays. The City may t, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract
maintenance at other hours.
All work shall be completed iALa continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc.,
be completed before leaving th 'ob site.
54.3 WORK METH
54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SC DULING
The Contractor(s) will adhere to a wo schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service).
Any variations to that schedule, request by either parry, must be approved, either verbally or in
writing by an authorized representative o e other party.
54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VI T
The contractor(s) shall provide the followin ervice at each scheduled visit to the designated
location:
54.4 LITTER
Remove trash and debris from the area to be main ' ed. Proper disposal of collected trash and
debris is a requirement of the contractor. Extraor ' amounts of debris caused by hurricanes,
tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibili of the City to clean up. The contractor
should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the
extraordinary cleanup from the contractor would be cons eyed.
54.5 VISUAL CHECK
The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigate leaks, vehicle damage, dead or
damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be rep to the City within 24 hours
after providing the service.
54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING
All plant materials -should be trimmed in a manner that promotes thNna shape an d mature
size of the particular specie. Trimming should be performed at intervill maintain plants
SectionIV.doc Page 127 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section IV - Technical Specifications.
in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while
maintag height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants
shall b ept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Lirope.
Palm prug to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following
flower fo tion, according to the following specifications:
54.7 PH ENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY
DATIL ETC.)
Remove all desc ding fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to
remain in order to eave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded
heads that are enco ered in the pruning process; remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation;
such as strangler figs, razilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the
trunk. Provide the ro ed, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed
on palms.
54.8 DEBRIS REMIAVAL
All debris from pruning proc s is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the
contractor. Work sites should be ft in a clean and neat appearance upon completion..
54.9 TRAFFIC CONTRO
Proper and safe work zones in vehi al traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the
contractor, according to the attached M tenance of Traffic specifications.
54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY
Contractor is responsible for maintaining
users are present. The City reserves the
pedestrian use areas.
work zones in areas where pedestrian and park
Jo limit the hours of operation in certain high
54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION
All tree and plant material should be fertilized with a appropriate amount of 20-6-12 sulfur
coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times r N year. Applications should be made in
mid-February, early June, and mid-September, for th eVirst two years. Fertilizer types and
amounts will change with requirements of maturing landsc a materials.
54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED
Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep the from being visibly noticeable.
Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, en they are properly applied
by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material N e remedied by contractor
at his/her expense.
54.13 MULCH CONDITION
Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as
moisture, usually 3 inches.
as help retain soil
0,
01..
•
SectionIV.doc Page 128 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR
Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation and timing. Drip tubing
\hould be kept covered with m ulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and
g schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled
running time. All repairs which will be charged at $20.00 or more must be approved in
a by the city. Minor repairs, less than $20.00, should be billed to the City in addition to
v maintenance fee.
54.15 DAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL
Should be p ormed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a
less than g level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be
replaced by the ntra.ctor at the contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on
City properties.
54.16 PALM F %oagnesium LIZATION
Apply three pounds sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across
the root zone (typicthe
dripline), annually in early February.
54.17 FREEZE PRO CTION
The City will provide a freeze/best protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost
sensitive plants (Lantana and P ). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet
to be determined). Contractor will ove the covering material from storage and install over the
sensitive plants, securely fasteniz ges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's
directions. The City will furnish me ins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City
will notify the Contractor one (1) day twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to
protect plant material. After uses, the Co ctor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it
to the designated City facility. Protective c vering shall be removed the following afternoon or
remain in Ce' ed as directed by the City. The 'ty shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about
removing cov er or keeping it in place due continued freezing temperatures. The City may
cancel the freeze protection event at any time p r to the end of the scheduled installation day
(5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated the number of hours mobilization or on-site
work at the contracted rate per man-hour unit price. a Contractor shall provide a unit price for
the installation and removal of the covering fabric on er event basis, as well as an hourly rate
per employee required. The City and contractor will co dinate appropriate irrigation operations
with weather conditions. Should fieezelfrost damage cur, the Contractor shall perform
remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City.
54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE
This location is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or v sm to be made within 7
working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur o closer than six and no
further than ten calendar days apart.
54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK 1
Within 24 hours of completing work the contractor shall notify the supervisor assigned to
monitor the contract either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a
SectionN.doc Page 129 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
phone message. However, to make certain the message is received, it is advisable to call between
6:30 a.m. - 7:30 a.m. or 2:30 p.m. - 3:00 p.m.
5 20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL
Upon ceiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the
follow' business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City
shall conta the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be
given 48 ho from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been
completed succe ly then the City will pay for services billed
54.21 SPECIAMONDITIONS
1. This location will newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month
period on plants and month warranty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate
irrigation operation with a Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the
landscape materials. Ins will also be responsible for the untying of palm
heads/fronds as he feels annroD te.
2. All listed acreage or square footage es are estimates.
3. All maintenance shall be performed in a od and workmanlike manner, consistent with
trade practices and standards which prevail 1 e industry.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for dama to any plant material or site feature
caused by the Contractor or his/her employees. The tractor shall be notified in writing
of the specific nature of the damage and cost of rep ' . The City shall, at its option,
invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the ount of the repairs the next
regular payment to the Contractor.
5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged incle t weather, parked
vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceabl uring the regular
schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occ ces, and shall
schedule to perform the required maintenance to the location as soon as ertaining
circumstances are relieved.
55 MILLING OPERATIONS
55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE
Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be
performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition).
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all
milling.
55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS
1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the contractor is responsible
to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal
environmental 'regulations governing operation of this type of equipment.
2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven days from the time it was milled, unless
otherwise noted in the contract documents.
SectionIV.doc Page 130 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of
the vacuum or the mechanical type, that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt (the Broom
Tractor way of sweeping is not be permitted). The sweeper must be equipped with its
own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep
debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving
the job site.
4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled
to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the contract surface.
5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line
and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this
removal shall be included in the bid item for milling.
6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by
the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling.
7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the
road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000
Standard Specifications for S-Type resurfacing projects or Section 330 (latest edition) for
superpave resurfacing projects. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for
asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed
that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to said base that result from a
failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and
at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City
approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for
milling.
9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after
the milling operation is complete.
55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS
All surplus existing materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the.
City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the Public Services Division at (727) 562-4950 to
schedule delivery of material.
55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS
All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the property of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory
requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City.
55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
All utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their
owners at the owner's expense. The Contractor shall arrange his schedule to allow utility owners
the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility
SectionlV.doc Page 131 . Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing
operations. 0
55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances
shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 23(F) of the
City's Technical Specifications.
55.7 TYPES OF MILLING
There are two types of milling used by the City:
A. Wedge - This will consist of milling a six foot wide strip along the curb line of the
pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height
and pavement cross section.
B. Full Width - This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line/edge of
pavement to curb line/edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry
shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer.
55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS
Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to
restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend
approximately 50 to 100 feet in both directions from the low point of the existing Swale.
55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted.
55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and
stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of
radius returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's
discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals
necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications.
56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures,
appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles,
posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through
the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction.
Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the
Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off-site in
accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements.
01]
SectionN.doc Page 132 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and
grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer.
56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and
structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape
trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work.
57 RIPRAP
The work included in this specification includes the construction of either sand-cement or rubble
ripmp as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (lastest edition).
57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the volume of sand used in cubic yards for sand-
cement, or the dry weight in tons for rubble.
57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for sand-cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling,
equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand-cement and all
incidentals necessary to complete the work.
The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and
shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill,
dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work.
No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap.
58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY
This article applies to all City projects located at one of the City's Wastewater Treatment Plants
(WWTP) or Potable Water Reservoirs.
58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL
The Contractor shall be aware that hazardous materials are used at the WWTP's and the water
reservoirs. These may include sodium hypochlorite, gaseous chlorine, sulfur dioxide and
ammonia. Potential safety hazards associated with these substances include:
• An accidental spill or release can impair respiratory functions and result in severe burns
to the skin and eyes. At the pre-construction conference, the contractor will be provided
with a copy of the City of Clearwater Public Utilities Department Emergency Response
Plan, and a copy of the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets. All employees of the
contractor and sub-contractor assigned to this job shall be familiar with the content of
these documents.
0 SectionlV.doc Page 133 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING
Prior to issuance of a notice to proceed, the contractor must submit documentation regarding
employee safety training relating to the items in Section A above. The documentation must
include:
• Verification that all employees assigned to this job have received and understood training
in the proper work practices necessary to safely perform the job while working around
gaseous chlorine and sulfur dioxide gas.
• The date of the training, and
• The means used to verify that the employee understood the training.
59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
All traffic signal work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (Sections 603 through 690), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents
and plans.
This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment,
materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit,
signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power
service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors,
pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, and
removal of existing traffic signal equipment.
All mast arms signal installations shall meet the requirements of FDOT's Mast Arm Assembly
standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of
Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed and
sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm poles shall be
chestnut bronze, with the color approved by the City prior to placement.
All traffic signal indicators shall be LED's, approved by both the City and FDOT.
Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is PROHIBITED unless directed by the
City's Traffic Engineering Division.
59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to
complete the work per the plans.
60 SIGNING AND MARKING
All signing and marking work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard
Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
This specification includes the following work: RPM'S (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and
markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular
delineators/flex posts (Sections 705 and 972).
The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or
markings shall be "blacked-out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No
SectionIV.doc Page 134 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked-out" areas. Omissions in striping or
markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made.
60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the
work per the plans.
61 . ROADWAY LIGHTING
All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work
per the plans.
62 TREE PROTECTION
62.1 TREE BARRICADES
A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land
preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all
staging and/or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows:
1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms.
2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer
species.
3. At or greater than two-thirds of the dripline of all other protected species
4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand.
B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two-inch lumber for upright posts.
Upright posts are to be at least four feet in length with a minimum of one foot anchored in
the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet apart.
Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch by four-inch lumber and
shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The project City's representative
must approve any variation from the above requirements.
C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is
terminated The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during
construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall
remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor
utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative.
D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or
debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier
no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No
SectionIV.doc Page 135 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such
protective barriers.
E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any
protected tree or palm.
F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this
section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees.
62.2 ROOT PRUNING
A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical
root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society
of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce
the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to
any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean
pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be
pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand
digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment
designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is
strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by
construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of 18 inches below existing grade
or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than 18 inches from existing grade. Tim Kurtz,
Senior Landscape Architect is the City's Representative on Public Works projects for root
Pruning issues and can be reached at (727) 562-4737, or through the construction inspector
assigned to the project.
B. Root pruning shall only be preformed by or under the direct supervision of an International?
Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist.
C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted)
inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning.
D. Root pruning shall be preformed as far in advance of other construction activities as is
feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated
tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning.
E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any
root pruning activities.
F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches per one inch of the trunk diameter
from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said
root pruning.
G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be
done to a minimum depth of 18" from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less
than 18".
H. Root pruning shall be performed using a Doscocil Root Cutting Machine or equivalent.
Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to
any work adjacent to trees to be preserved.
I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any
excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected.
SectionN.doc Page 136 Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree
roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled
around to prevent damage to the root.
K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or
burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established.
L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may
require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root
pruned trees.
M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root
pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional
boring as opposed to open trenching.
62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING
A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be preformed by or
under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified
arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards
Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations - Tree, Shrub and
other Woody Plant Maintenance - Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A-300.
B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required Flush cuts
(pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree)
are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be
recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require
replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances.
C. No protected tree shall have more than 30 percent of its foliage removed.
D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion-tailed. Any protected tree that has been
improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing
condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and
Ordinances.
E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage
trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be-prohibited. Any protected tree that has been
damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy
growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and
Ordinances.
63 PROJECT WEB PAGES
63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN
If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the
current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project
information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project
Contacts.
• Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer
shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the
Project Web Pages.
SectionIV.doc
Page 137
Revised: 4/29/2007
Section N - Technical Specifications
63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES
Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section
508 guidelines whenever possible:
h=://www.w3.orp-,/TR/1999/WAI-WEBCONTENT-19990505/
htW://www.section508.gov/
In particular, use of variable-width tables, user-adjustable/relative font sizes, ALT text for
images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics.
63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE
The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic
material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles,
apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion
shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to
fit a space. The logo is approved for use by city departments, and is not to be used by outside
vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public
Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from the Public
Communications. This is for internal use only.
63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS
Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics
should be posted to the Project Web Pages.
63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS
The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow Public's input sent back
to the City regarding the Project.
63.6 POSTING
The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web
Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different than City's Web server, if approved,
should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity
issues.
63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES
Unless otherwise specified and agreed Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages
up-to-date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's
Webmaster for posting.
0;
•
SectionIV.doc Page 138 Revised: 4/29/2007
SECTION IV-A
SUPPLEMENTAL
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
•
SECTION IVa
SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
•
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Section Page
Number Title Number
01340 .............. SUBM11 TALS, SHOP DRAWING, PRODUCT DATE & SAMPLES,
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS EQUIPMENT
RECORD SHEETS ..................................................................................1 of 6
01027 ..............SCHEDULE OF VALUES ...................................................................... 1 of 2
L_J
Section Iva - Supplemental Technical Specifications
SUBMITTALS, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA & SAMPLES,
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS, EQUIPMENT RECORD
SHEETS
SECTION 01340
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. General:
1. Section Addresses:
a. Mechanics of Shop Drawing Process.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section I & V - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
0 Contract.
2. Section III - General Conditions.
3. Sections in Section IV and Supplemental Technical Specifications Identifying
submittal requirements.
1.02 SUBMITTALS: GENERAL
A. Transmit all submittals to:
Construction Services / City of Clearwater
410 North Myrtle Avenue
Clearwater, Florida 33755
Attn: Ed Burke, Construction Coordinator
B. Utilize two copies of the City Shop Drawing transmittal form to transmit all shop
drawings and samples.
C. All transmittals must be from Contractor and bear his approval stamp. Transmittals will
not be received from or returned to subcontractors.
Section Na 01340.doc Page 1 Revised: 03/20/07
Section Na - Supplemental Technical Specifications
1. Shop drawing transmittal stamp shall read "(Contractor's Name) represents that we
have determined and verified all field dimensions and measurements, field
construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data, and that we have
checked with the requirements of the Contract Documents". Transmittals will not be
received from or returned to subcontractors.
2. Operation and Maintenance Manual transmittal stamp may be Contractor's standard
approval stamp.
D. Provide submittal information defining specific equipment or materials utilized on the
project. Generalized product information not clearly defining specific equipment or
materials to be provided will be rejected. Clearly identify the major category of the
submittal (i.e. site work, burn tower, training facility, or supply building).
E. Calculations required in individual specification sections will be received for information
purposes only and will be returned stamped "Engineer's Review Not Required" to
acknowledge receipt.
F. Submittal Schedule:
1. The contractor shall submit a color construction schedule (CPM) that is only a
sequence of evens at the pre-construction meeting.
2. The contractor shall provide a submittal schedule at the pre-construction meeting.
This schedule will become the basis of the submittal log.
3. Schedule of Shop Drawings:
a. Submitted and approved within 20 days of receipt of Notice to Proceed.
4. Shop Drawings:
a. Submittal and approval prior to 50 percent completion.
5. Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Data Record Sheets:
a. Initial submittal within 60 days after date shop drawings are approved.
G, Work performed in connection with the fabrication, manufacture, shipment, purchase or
installation of material or equipment prior to approval of submittal (or re-submittal) as
specified shall be at the Contractor's sole risk and responsibility.
1.03 SUBMITTALS: SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Transmittal Mechanics:
1. Number transmittals consecutively beginning with 1.
•
•
Section Iva 01340.doc Page 2 Revised: 03/20/07
Section Iva - Supplemental Technical Specifications
2. Assure resubmitted items retain the original number but are submitted with an added
suffix letter starting with "A".
3. Restrict each letter of transmittal to only one Specification Section or portion
thereof.
4. Provide breakout of each transmittal component on transmittal form "A." Each
component thus defined will receive specific action by the Engineer. Define
manufacturer, item, tag number, and Drawing/Specification reference.
5. Do not change the scope of any resubmittal from the original transmittal scope. If
some components of the original transmittal received "A" or "B" Action and others
did not, resubmit the "A" or `B" Action components in subsequent resubmittal
packages. Provide a summary sheet containing all components of the original
transmittal at the front of each resubmittal. Indicate each component as either A or
B, "outstanding," or "submitted for action." Reference items previously not
receiving "A" or "B" Action and not yet resubmitted for re-review. Use this term
"Submitted for action" to indicate items which are included for review in the
transmittal.
6. For 8 % x 11 in size sheets, provide four copies of each page for Engineer plus the
number required by the Contractor. The number of copies required by the Contractor
will be defined at the Preconstraction Conference, but shall not exceed 10.
7. For items not covered in paragraph 6, submit one reproducible transparency and one
print of each drawing until approval is obtained. Utilize mailing tube; do not fold.
The Engineer will mark and return the reproducible to the Contractor for his
reproduction and distribution.
8. Provide clear space (3 IN SQ) for Engineer stamping of each component defined in
A.S.
9. Contractor shall not use red color for marks on transmittals. Duplicate all marks on
all copies transmitted, and ensure marks are photocopy reproducible. Outline
Contractor marks on reproducible transparencies with a rectangular box.
B. Transmittal Contents:
1. Coordinate and identify shop drawing contents so that all items can be easily
verified by the Engineer.
2. Identify equipment or material use, tag number, drawing detail reference, weight,
and other project specific information.
3. Provide sufficient information together with technical cuts and technical data to
allow an evaluation to be made to determine that the item submitted is in
compliance with the Contract Documents.
4. Submit items like equipment brochures, cuts of fixtures, product data sheets or
catalog sheets on 8 % x 11 IN pages. Indicate the exact item or model and all
proposed options.
5. Include legible scale details, sizes, dimensions, performance characteristics,
capacities, test data, anchoring details, installation instructions, storage and handling
Section Na 01340.doc Page 3 Revised: 03/20107
Section lVa- Supplemental Technical Specifications
instructions, color charts, layout drawings, parts catalogs, rough-in diagrams, wiring
diagrams, controls, weights and other pertinent data. Arrange data and performance
information in format similar to that provided in Contract Documents. Provide, at
minimum, the detail provided n the Contract Documents.
6. If proposed equipment or materials deviate from the Specifications or Drawings in
any way, clearly note the deviation and justify the said deviation in detail in a
separate letter immediately following transmittal sheet. If explanation is not given,
shop drawings will be returned without action.
1.04 SUBMITTALS: SAMPLES
A. Identify sample as to: manufacturer, item, use, type, project designation, tag " number,
specification section or drawing detail reference, color, range, texture, finish and other
pertinent data.
B. Include application specific brochures, and installation instructions.
C. Provide Contractor's stamp of approval on samples as indication of his checking and
verification of dimensions and coordination with interrelated work.
•
D. Resubmit samples of rejected items.
E. Approved samples submitted or constructed, constitute criteria for judging completed
work. Finished work or items not equal to samples will be rejected.
F. Samples may be retained for comparison purposes. Remove samples when directed.
Include in bid all costs of furnishing and removing samples.
1.05 SUBMITTALS: SHOP DRAWINGS: ENGINEER'S REVIEW ACTION
A. Items within transmittals will be reviewed for overall design intent and will receive one
of the following actions:
A - NO EXCEPTION TAKEN
B - MAKE CORRECTION NOTED
C - REJECTED
D - REVISE AND RESUBMIT
E - SUBMIT SPECIFIED ITEM
Section Iva 01340.doc Page 4 Revised: 03/20/07
Section Na - Supplemental Technical Specifications
B. Transmittals received will be initially reviewed to ascertain inclusion of Contractor's
approval stamp. Drawings not stamped by the Contractor or stamped with a stamp
containing language other than that specified in Paragraph 1.02 D will not be reviewed
for technical content and will be returned without any action.
C. Transmittals returned with Action "A" or "B" are considered ready for fabrication and
installation. If for any reason a transmittal that has an "A" or "B" Action is resubmitted,
it must be accompanied by a letter defining the changes that have been made and the
reason for the resubmittal. Destroy or conspicuously mark "SUPERSEDED" all
documents having previously received "A" or "B" Action that are superseded by a
resubmitta.
D. Transmittals with Action "A" or "B" combined with Action "D" (Revise and Resubmit)
or "C" (Rejected) will be individually analyzed giving consideration as follows:
1. The portion of the transmittal given "C" or "D" will not be distributed (unless
previously agreed to otherwise at the Preconstruction Conference). One copy or the
one transparency. of the "C" or "D" drawings will be marked up and returned to the
Contractor. Correct and resubmit items so marked.
2. Items marked "A" or "B" will be fully distributed.
3. If a portion of the items or system proposed are acceptable, however, the major part
of the individual drawings or documents are incomplete or require revision, the
entire submittal may be given "C" or "D" Action. This is the sole discretion of the
Engineer. In this case, some drawings may contain relatively few or no comments or
the statement, "Resubmit to maintain a complete package." Distribution to the
Owner and field will not be made (unless previously agreed to otherwise).
E. Failure to include any specific information specified under the submittal paragraphs of
the specifications will result in the transmittal being returned to the Contractor with "C"
or "D" Action.
END OF SECTION
•
Section lVa 01340.doc Page 5 Revised: 03/20/07
Section Na - Supplemental Technical Specifications
is
•
•
Section 1Va 01340.doc Page 6 Revised: 03/20/07
Section Iva - Supplemental Technical Specifications
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
SECTION 01027
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section addresses:
1. Procedures required of the Contractor regarding format, style and submittal of
Schedule of Values.
B. Related sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Parts I, II, III, IV, V - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of
the Contract.
1.02 SUBMITTALS: GENERAL
A. Transmit Schedule of Values to the City of Clearwater, Construction Coordinator.
B. Submit to the City a Schedule of Values allocated to the various lump sum portions of
the Work, within twenty (20) days after the official Notice to Proceed.
C. Upon request of the City, support the values with data which will substantiate their
correctness.
D. The Schedule of Values, unless objected to by the City, shall be used only as the basis
for the Contractor's Applications for Payment.
1.03 FORM AND CONTENT
A. The form and content of the Schedule of Values will be provided to the Contractor at the
Pre-Construction Meeting on a disk (or equivalent).
B. Schedule shall list the installed value of the component parts of the work in sufficient
detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments during
construction.
C. Utilize the Bid Form as a guide to establish the format for the values of each major
category. Subcategories shall be required for major categories.
D. Identify each line item with the number and title of the respective major section of the
specifications.
Section Na 01027.doc Page 1 Revised: 03/20/07
Section IVa- Supplemental Technical Specifications
E. For the various portions of the Work:
1. Each item shall include a proportional amount of the Contractor's overhead profit.
2. For items on which progress payments will be requested for stored materials, break
down the value into:
a. The cost of the materials, delivered and unloaded, with taxes paid. Paid invoices
are required for materials upon request by the Engineer.
b. The total installed value.
F. The sum of all lump sum values listed in the Schedule shall equal the total Contract
Lump Sum items.
Q Round amounts of the nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Sum.
H. Update and resubmit the Schedule of values with monthly applications for payment and
when Change Orders result in a change in the Contract Sum.
END OF SECTION
•
11
Section IVa 01027.doc Page 2 Revised: 03/20/07
SECTION lVmB
FIRE SUPPLY AND
STORAGE BUILDING
0 SECTION IVb
SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Section Page
Number Tide Number
14000 ..............FIRE SUPPLY AND STORAGE BUIL.DING........................................ 1 of 6
........................PREFERRED FLOORING GUIDELINES .............................................1 of 1
........................GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR NEW ROOF CONSTRUCTION........ 1 of 3
........................UNIFORM WIRING POLICY FOR CITY OF CLEARWATER ..........1 of 2
08100 ..............STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES ............................................................1 of 8
08210 ..............WOOD DOORS ....................................................................................... 1 of 6
08710 ..............FINISH HARDWARE ............................................................................. 1 of 7
09511 ..............ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILJNGS .......................................................1 of 10
•
40
Section IVb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
0 FIRE SUPPLY AND STORAGE BUILDING
SECTION 14000
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Technical Specification Sections, Steel Door and Frames, Wood Door
Specifications, Finish Specifications, Acoustical Ceiling Specifications apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
Building Specifications
Paint Standards
Preferred Flooring Guidelines
Roof Guidelines for New Construction
Uniform Wiring
PART II - DESCRIPTION
Building Specifications
2.1 PLUMBING
a. All domestic hot and cold water should have ball-valve shut offs only, nogate_
valves
b. Domestic water lines should have several shut offs to isolate different parts of the
building without having to shut down the entire building. Examples: 1 for men's
restrooms; 1 for ladies restrooms; 1 for kitchen area and so on. Also, if possible,
somewhere in piping system to have a drain valve.
c. All valves should be tagged with a brass tag and a valve chart be posted for
location of valves.
d. All plumbing supply lines should be in copper materials.
Section l Vb 14000.doc Page 1 Revised: 03/20/07
Section M - Supplemental Technical Specifications
e. In each restroom and kitchen areas, there should be a sewer clean out with access
panels or doors for service to clear clogs and drain lines. (If possible also a double
"Y" to allow a snake to be run in both directions.)
f. All drain lines leaving the building should have a clean out with a double "Y" just
outside of building and put into a marked box and should be ground level and not
below.
g. All sewer vent stacks above the roof should have a cap or a harden screen to
prevent vandalism from things being dropped down the stacks.
h. Hot water heaters, if they are gas, they should be Rinnai water heaters. If electric
they should be AO Smith, Rheem, or Ruud water heaters. Also we don't want any
water heater above ceilings
i. Fixtures:
i. All toilets should be "Toto" brand, floor mounted. Either tank type or flush
valve. All bowls should be elong. All toilet seats should be just the seat with
no lids.
ii. All urinals should be "Toto" or American Standard brand.
iii. All flush valves are to be "Toto" or Sloan brand.
iv. All sinks should be "Toto", "American Standard". If the sinks are to be wall
mounted without a counter, they need to have a built-in back splash.
v. All faucets should be "Toto", "Moen", or "Delta".
vi. All sinks that are not going to receive hot water should have a single handle
faucet marked "COLD WATER ONLY". If going to use a dual faucet
without hot water then the cold water should be piped over to the hot side
also.
j. If a grease trap is installed in the kitchen area if has to be installed in a way that
the top can be removed without interference for service of the grease trap. Or it
needs to be piped in with unions on either side or fittings that can be removed to
be taken outside and cleaned.
k. All refrigerators, ice machines and drinking fountains should be installed with
water filters when hooked up. All water filters should be of the same type that is
presently being used in all City buildings. See Building and Maintenance for
make and models.
2.2 ELECTRICAL
1.
m.
n.
o.
Section lVb 14000.doc
All electrical panels and disconnects prefer to be "Square D"
All panels should be a minimum of 20% capacity for future breakers and
expansion.
All receptacles and switches to be rated for 20 amps.
All exit lights should be of the new style, which uses a green lens with LED
lights inside.
Page 2
Revised: 03/20/07
•
•
•
Section IVb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
p. All florescent lightening to utilize "78" or T5 style lamps. All florescent
lightening should be cool whites, a minimum of 4100 k lumais. Fixture should
be Lithonia or Cooper brand. Each fixture should be independently fused.
q. All lightening in the gymnasiums as far as hanging light fixtures should be
mounted with a vandal proof type light fixture. With a flexible or swinging
type of hanging cable or chain.
r. All exterior lighting and security lighting should be in a vandal proof type
fixture. And should be a metal hailie light or high-pressure sodium.
S. All security lighting should be on a photo cell mounted in a location that is
serviceable or mounted on each fixture.
t. All electrical panels, disconnects should be tagged and marked to what they
control or operate.
U. All junction boxes located above ceiling or in walls should be marked with the
circuit that is running through them. Also would like to see all receptacles,
light switches or electrical devices labeled with the panel # and circuit in that
panel.
V. Would like to have spare conduits to be supplied from the main electrical room
to all secondary electrical, mechanical, phone and UPS rooms.
W. There should not be any phone equipment or UPS equipment located in any
electrical or mechanical rooms that are not conditioned. Would prefer that
phone equipment and UPS equipment be located in its own room, which should
be a conditioned space.
X. All electrical rooms should have some type of exhaust system or conditioned
air in that room to help keep equipment cool.
2.3 HVAC SYSTEMS
y. All HVAC equipment would prefer it to be Trane, American Standard for spilt
system equipment. All package or roof top units need to be AAON Equipment
or needs to be approved by Building & Maintenance Division. All HVAC
equipment 5 tons and under needs to be 14 SEER or higher and equipment over
5 tons need to be 10 SEER or higher. All units will have a minimum of 5 year
warranty on all compressors, coils and minimum of a 2 year warranty on all
other parts.
Z. All control systems is to be a DDC with an onsite computer modem and
dedicated phone line or the capability of putting it on the web network.
Acceptable manufactures prefer KMC, Trane, or Siemens. Control systems
must be expandable and have graphics for all equipment and set points.
aa. At the completion of the job there should be test and balance performed to
mechanical engineers specifications and a copy of it turned over with the as
built plans.
bb. All mechanical rooms should be well lighted and contain GFI outlets.
Section IVb 14000.doc Page 3 Revised: 03/20107
Section IVb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
cc. All mechanical rooms, mechanical yards and roof top equipment should have
hose bibs and GFI outlets.
10dd. All mechanical rooms should have floor drains.
ee. All HVAC equipment should have P-traps to meet manufacturer's
specifications with a clean out and a union to disconnect from unit.
ff. All air handlers should be double wall construction above 5 tons with no
exposed insulation and with IAQ drain pans. City of Clearwater Building &
Maintenance Division should approve all air handlers.
gg. All penetrations into air handlers should be sealed around and inside the
penetration to prevent any hot moist air entering the air handler.
hh. All air handlers should have a minimum of 4 feet of working area for servicing
or the minimum space to remove the largest of the air handler.
ii. All condensers or packaged units should be spaced apart to meet
manufacturer's specifications for proper air transfer against condenser coils.
This manufacturer's distance is from any wall, planted bushes, fences or
between equipment.
jj. All duct work should be made of metal and insulated on the exterior of duct
work. All seams should be sealed with mastic to prevent any air loss. All main
duct lines should have access doors every 10 to 20 feet for servicing duct and
inspection of duct.
kk. Flex duct with 45 degree take offs are acceptable for final runs to supply grills.
(20 feet maximum)
11. All supply grills should be insulated above the ceiling to take condensation
down on supply grills. Would like to see grid guards installed on all supply
grills.
mm. All supply and return grills should have some type of balancing damper for
adjusting air flow.
nn. All return air grills should be a filter back type of grill with a removable filter
to help maintain a clean air duct.
oo. All grills, supply should be a layer type or a louver type grill and return grills
should also be a louver type grill. (NO PERFORATED STYLE GRILLS)
pp. All package units and condensers that are mounted on a roof need to be on 18
inch tall equipment rails. All curbs for the ductwork to penetrate through roof
should be a minimum of 10 inches.
qq. All access to the roof by a ladder should be made so that it is on an angle for
easy climbing when caring tools. There should be a permanent ladder mounted
to any different roof levels.
ff. If there is any upstairs mechanical rooms should have access to the outside by
means of an overhead door. For removal of large units.
ss. Contractor Shall:
Section IVb 14000.doc Page 4 Revised: 03/20/07
•
Section IVb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
• Have at least 3 years experience installing commercial HVAC systems of a
similar or larger configuration.
• Be properly licensed and insures.
• All A/C Technicians must be EPA Certify.
• Be acceptable to Owner.
V. Refrigerant piping:
• Refrigeration pipe to be type L hard drawn copper.
• All fittings to be wrought copper, ELLS to be long radius.
• Pipes and fittings to be joined with hard solder (15 percent Silver
Solder minimum).
•
•
• Pipes being soldered are to have regulated nitrogen flowing through to
keep oxidation down, on long pipe runs pipes need to be blown clean
with the nitrogen before connecting to the equipment.
• Piping runs are to be set and secured to approved supports.
• All refrigerant suction lines to be insulated with 3/4 inch wall
'Armaflex' .
• Pressure tests all lines with nitrogen for leaks.
• Evacuate and test to EPA standards
• The contractor will furnish new vibration pads for condenser, new
vibration hanging kits and supports for air handler.
• Install new liquid line sight glasses and driers as required.
• All units needs low pressure controls, condenser fan cycling controls and
manual head pressure control.
• All units will have TXV Valves for metering devices.
END OF SECTION
Section 1Vb 14000.doc
Page 5 Revised: 03/20/07
Section Nb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
PART III - CITY CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES
SW/GS BUILDING & MAINTENANCE DIVISION
PREFERRED PAINT PRODUCTS
PAINT TYPE PAINT MANUFACTURER & PRODUCT
Interior ICI Dulux Porter
Flat "1201 Dulux Ultra" "999 Silken Touch"
Interior ICI Dulux Porter
Satin "1403 Dulux Ultra" "1119 Silken Touch"
Interior ICI Dulux Porter
Semi-Gloss "1407 Dulux Ultra" "1139 Silken Touch"
Interior ICI Dulux Porter
Gloss "3028 Dulux "900 Advantage"
Interior/Exterior"
Exterior ICI Dulux Porter
Flat "2201 Dulux Exterior" "519 Acri-Shield"
Exterior ICI Dulux Porter
Satin "2403 Dulux Exterior" "3939 Portersept"
Exterior ICI Dulux Porter
Semi-Gloss "2407 Dulux Exterior" "6029 Acri-Pro 100"
Exterior ICI_Dulux Porter
Gloss "3028 Dulux "619 Acri-Shield"
Interior/Exterior"
•
END OF SECTION
Section IVb 14000.doc Page 6 Revised: 03/20/07
Section Ivb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
SW/GS BUILDING & MAINTENANCE DIVISION
PREFERRED FLOORING GUIDELINES
CARPET TYPE CARPET MANUFACTURER & PRODUCT
Roll Carpet shall be commercial grade 28 oz. "Mohawk Properties II"
(or equivalent) - color to be specified by Owner. Installation shall
be by direct glue down method in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations and CRI Standard 104.
Modular Carpet shall be commercial grade Milliken "Quattra P/6004"
cushionback (or equivalent) - color/pattern to be specified by
Owner. Installation shall be by direct glue down method in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and CRI
Standard 104.
TII.E TYPE TILE MANUFACTURER & PRODUCT
•
Vinyl (VCT) Vinyl composition the (VCT) shall be commercial grade, 1/8"
thick, Armstrong Excelon (or equivalent) with a
manufacturer's 5-year installation integrity warranty.
Installation shall utilize the manufacturer's specified adhesive
(s) and shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
installation manual. Color/pattern to be specified by Owner.
END OF SECTION
•
Section M Flooring.doc Page 1 Revised: 03/20/07
Section Ivb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR NEW ROOF CONSTRUCTION
0 GENERAL - THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM SPECIFICATIONS ARE GENERATED
FOR THE PURPOSE OF MINIMIZING LONG-TERM ROOF MAINTENANCE COSTS
AND TO PROVIDE SERVICEABLE ROOF SYSTEMS WITH REDUCED WATER
INGRESSION AND RESULTANT DAMAGE, SAFETY RISK AND INCONVENIENCE.
IN GENERAL, A MINIMAL NUMBER OF ROOF LINES (i.e., ROOF-TO-ROOF/ROOF-
TO-WALL INTERSECTIONS, CHANGES IN PITCH AND/OR DIRECTION,
VALLEYS, OTHER NON-CONTINUOUS SURFACE INTERRUPTIONS) IS HIGHLY
DESIRABLE.
A. ROOF SYSTEM SLOPE OPTIONS
1. A "Steep" roof (greater that 3/4-inch per foot) shall be the preferred roof
system whenever possible.
2. A "Low Sloped" roof (1/4-inch per foot minimum to 3/-inch per foot
maximum) shall be the roof system of second choice.
3. A "Dead Flat" roof (zero slope) is undesirable and should be avoided
whenever possible.
Is B. STEEP ROOF PREFERENCES
1. The preferred roof system for a steep roof shall be a metal roof (e.g., standing
seam, etc.) for high profile occupied buildings and/or whenever practical for
the application.
a. The preferred metal shall be Galvalume® or Zincalume® and be a
minimum of 24-gauge thickness.
b. The preferred finish shall be Kynar® Polyvinylidene Fluoride
(PVDF).
c. Concealed fasteners are the preferred attachment method.
2. The second choice roof system for a steep roof shall be fiberglass-asphalt
shingles. As a minimum, the shingles shall be Class A fire rated, possess an
algaecide and meet or exceed current minimum wind lift requirements.
a. For laminated dimensional shingles, the minimum warranty period shall
be 30 years with consideration given for longer warranted and higher
quality shingles for high profile occupied buildings and buildings in high
wind prone areas.
b. For 3-tab shingles, the minimum warranty period shall be 25 years. These
• shingles should be considered for smaller, lower profile (unoccupied,
storage buildings, etc.) or where required to match adjacent
surfaces/buildings.
Section Ivb Roofdoc Page I Revised: 03/20107
Section IVb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
c. A self-adhesive leak barrier membrane shall be used in addition to
traditional underlayment materials whenever possible in all critical areas
(valleys, wall flashings, penetrations, etc.).
C. LOW SLOPED ROOF PREFERENCES
4. The preferred roofing system for a low sloped roof is an SBS modified roof
system with a granulated cap sheet. A Fire rated (FR) cap shall be employed
whenever possible - especially when used over a combustible deck or where
required by other code requirements. The minimum manufacturer's warranty
shall be a 12 year Limited (material) Warranty for smaller low profile, low
occupancy buildings, (storage facilities, etc.); and shall be a 15 year No Dollar
Limit (NDL) Warranty for larger, high profile, high occupancy buildings (offices,
libraries, control buildings, etc.). In all cases, the installer shall provide a
minimum 3 year workmanship and non-leakage warranty.
D. DEAD FLAT ROOF PREFERENCES
5. The preferred roofing system for a dead flat roof is a coal tar pitch built up roof
system (BUR) with a granulated cap sheet.
6. The second choice roofing system for a dead flat roof is a coal tar pitch built up
roof system (BUR) with an embedded gravel surface finish.
0
E. ROOF DRAINAGE
7. Positive drainage shall be provided on all low sloped and dead flat roof systems.
8. Drain placement and quantity shall, as a minimum, take into account:
a. Deflection and camber (both short and long term) of the roof deck under
both minimum and maximum loading conditions.
b. Local building code requirements.
c. The maximum hourly amount of rainfall that can be expected.
d. Size of area to be drained.
F. EXPANSION JOINTS
1. Expansion joints and area dividers shall be provided, as a minimum, at the
following locations:
a. Where expansion joints are provided in the structural system.
b. Where structural framing or decking changes direction.
c. Where roof structures change in direction (e.g., "T", "H", "L" and "U"
shaped buildings). is
d. Where type of decking changes (e.g., where a precast concrete deck and a
steel or poured concrete deck abut).
Section IVb Roofdoc Page 2 Revised: 03/20/07
Section IVb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
e. Where interior heating/cooling conditions change (e.g., where an occupied
office adjoins an unoccupied warehouse).
f. When movement is anticipated between walls, roof decks and other
features.
Gr MECHANICAL EOUIPMENT AND RELATED
1. Adequate space shall be provided between mechanical units, walls, penetrations
and other obstacles to permit proper installation of units, roofing materials and to
facilitate servicing of units when in operation.
2. Vibrations from roof-mounted or joist-mounted equipment shall be isolated from
the roof membrane and flashing system.
9. Water discharge from mechanical equipment shall not be directed onto roof
system.
10. Mechanical units or penetrations shall not be located in valleys, drain areas or in
any way restrict the flow of roof water.
11. Penetrations that cannot be flashed individually shall be grouped together and
flashed with a curb. The use of pitch pockets should be avoided whenever
possible.
12. The use of wood "sleepers" to support equipment, pipes, etc. is unacceptable.
i
H. ROOFING SYSTEMS AND MATERIALS
1. The choice of roofing systems shall be limited to the selections outlined in these
guidelines.
2. No roofing system component shall be utilized that has not had a successful
history of use in its intended application for a minimum of five (5) years..
I. REFERENCES
1. As a minimum, the latest edition of the following documents, as applicable to the
particular design, shall be adhered to:
a. NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.
b. ASTM Standards Volume 04.04.
c. FM Standard 4470 and Loss Prevention Data Sheets
d. UL Building Materials Directory and Fire Resistance Directory.
e. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Directory.
f. All current local, state and federal codes as applicable.
•
END OF SECTION
Section Nb Roofdoc Page 3 Revised: 03/20/07
Section IVb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
0 UNIFORM WIRING POLICY FOR THE CITY OF CLEARWATER
Policy
All new construction, remodeling, and extensions to the City of Clearwater's
telecommunicationsldata communications infrastructure will comply with the Uniform Wiring
specifications, which may be subject to revision based upon technological advances.
Maintenance of the data communications component will be the sole responsibility of Network
Services. Maintenance of the telecommunications component will be the sole responsibility of
the Telecommunication division.
Definitions
The Uniform Wiring infrastructure consists of all cabling, wiring, UPS systems and switching
equipment originating at all City buildings and terminating at the jacks in individual
rooms/offices.
Procedures
Information Technology will ensure that all new voice/data wiring installations comply with the
Uniform Wiring Policy. Network Services/Telecommunications will install all necessary
electronics (bridges, routers, switches, hubs, UPS systems, etc.) for these communications at the
expense of the project and/or department. Maintenance and replacement of all installed
communications infrastructure will be the sole responsibility of Network
Services/Telecommunications respectively with funding provided via telephone service charges
and data communications surcharges. User departments are not authorized to make
modifications/repairs to this system.
Networking Services and Telecommunications has the responsibility for planning, developing,
managing and maintaining the most effective efficient and economic communications network
system. In order to make sure that the City of Clearwater's voice and data communications needs
are met, Information Technology needs to be consulted during the initial planning of new
construction or space to be renovated
• Minimum communications room size is 10'x 10'
• Minimum of two 4" sleeves from the communications room to the horizontal
infrastructure
• Four 20amp, 110volt, circuits with isolated grounds. Each circuit will terminate in a quad
outlet. (Location to be determined)
• 3/a" fire rated plywood on 2 walls
• No ceiling is to be installed
• Non-static asphalt tile floor
• Four 2 bulb fluorescent light fixtures
• Grounding bus detail rated at 100amps with a minimum of 5 termination points and
properly attached to building ground
Section IVb Wiring.doc Page 1 Revised: 03/20/07
Section lvb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
• Entrance to be secured with a mortised combination lock.
• Tie into building fire detection / prevention system.
Uniform Wirinst Policy on New Building aroiects:
• When possible, all wiring projects should use a vendor from our City-approved vendor list.
• All new building project managers must meet with the I.T. department during the
engineering phase in order to correctly spec the wiring within the building.
• If the building project manager chooses to subcontract with a non-City approved wiring
vendor, the Information Technology department must meet with the wiring vendor to provide
the City's Uniform Wiring Policy (as listed below).
• Type of wire used - Cat 5E Teflon UL approved wire for data and for voice in a return air
facility. Cat 5E Riser should be used for non-return air facilities.
• Configuration of wiring with in the building
• Type of jack used - Quad jack
It is City policy to run voice and data wiring together in a single 1/2-inch conduit, terminating on
an quad jack, labeled as 2 voice and 2 data. All new voice and data drops are required to have 2
separate Cat 5E cables and one voice Cat 5E cable.
The voice ports will terminate of the top portion of the quad jack, data ports on the bottom. All
jacks must be labeled (not hand-written) with the jack number followed by a "V" for voice or a
"D" for data. A single 1/2-inch conduit should run to each location, accessible via the ceiling.
The communications room must be air conditioned at 72 degrees with a return-air vent. The
voice jacks must be labeled properly on the frame in the communications room. The termination
blocks used must be ATT 110 blocks. The 110 blocks must be mounted on plywood painted with
fire-retardant paint mounted eye-level (approximately 5 feet, 5 inches from the ground). Nothing
should obstruct access to the frame.
END OF SECTION
•
Section IVb Wiring.doc Page 2 Revised: 03/20/07
Section IVb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
•
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
Section 08100
PART I - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work under this section shall include the furnishing of all items shown on the
drawings and as specified, but not limited to, the following.
1. Steel Doors
2. Steel Door Frames
3. Steel Sidelight, Borrowed lite & transom frames
4. Louvers Installed in Steel Doors
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Masonry mortar
B. Steel lintels
C. Finish carpentry
D. Wood Doors and Frames
E. Finish Hardware
F. Glass and Glazing
G. Painting of steel doors and frames
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Steel Doors and Frames in this section must meet all standards as established by
the following listing.
1. Door and Hardware Preparation ANSI 115.1.
2. Life Safety Codes NFPA-101 (Latest edition).
3. Fire Doors and Windows NFPA-80 (Latest edition).
4. Steel Door Institute ANSI/SDI-100 (Latest edition)
1.04 SUBMITTAL
A. Coordinate approved shop drawings with all other trades and manufacturers
whose products are used in conjunction with the Steel Doors and Frames under
section 08100.
Section IVb 08100.doc Page 1 Revised: 03/20/07
Section Nb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
B. Finish hardware supplier is to furnish templates, template reference number
and/or physical hardware to the steel door and frame supplier in order to prepare
the doors and frames to receive the finish hardware items.
C. Each floor of the building is to be detailed separately.
D. The steel door and frame supplier will furnish to the architect (6) complete copies
of the proposed steel door and frames schedule and/or shop drawings. Using the
same reference number for details and openings as those on the contract drawings.
After receipt of the approved door schedule the steel door and frame supplier will
make any corrections submit to the architect (6) sets of corrected schedules, for
file and field use.
E. All door openings including wood, aluminum, overhead etc. must be listed on the
steel door schedule. Include details on the following list of items:
1. Frame elevations
2. Door design elevations
3. Frame sections
4. Details of construction
5. Anchorage
6. Opening conditions
7. Joints and connections
8. Hardware locations
F. If any opening is not by the steel door manufacturer only the door opening
number should be shown along with the type of material (alum, wood etc.).
G. Upon request of the architect or for any substitution to this specification, (4)
copies of the door manufacturers catalog cut sheets are to be submitted to the
architect before any material is placed on the job site.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide Steel Doors and Frames complying with the Steel Door Institute
recommended specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames ANSIISDI 100
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All steel doors and frames must be properly marked with door opening mark
number to correspond with the schedule.
B. Deliver all the steel doors in cartons and palletized to provide protection during
transit and job storage.
C. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damage is to be
repaired, provided they are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the
architect.
Section IVb 08100.doc Page 2 Revised: 03/20/07
0.1
0.,
•
Section 1Vb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
D. Store doors and frames at the building site under cover. Place units on wood sills
or on the floor in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Avoid the use of
non-vented plastic or canvas shelters, which could create a humidity chamber. If
the wrapper on the door becomes wet, remove the carton immediately. Provide a
1/4 inch space between stacked doors to promote air circulation.
PART H - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Steelcraft Manufacturing Company
B. Curries Company
C. Ceco Door Products
2.02 HARDWARE LOCATIONS AND GENERAL REINFORCEMENTS
A. Locate hardware on doors and frames in accordance with the manufactures
standard location.
B. Steel frames for use with wood doors the hardware preparation on the doors is
governed by its location on the frames. If the doors are factory mortised, the door
supplier is responsible for coordinating hardware locations.
C. Hardware reinforcements are to be in accordance with the minimum standard
gages as listed in SDI-100.
D. Doors shall be mortised, reinforced and function holes provided at the factory in
accordance with the hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware
supplier. Through bolt holes, attachment holes, drilling and tapping for surface
hardware, shall be done by others.
2.03 STEEL DOORS
A. Material - Exterior doors and as indicted on the schedule
1. Face Sheets to be made of commercial quality hot dipped zinc coated steel
that complies with ASTM A924 A60. Grade III -14ga.
2. Vertical edges are to have continuous vertical mechanical interlocking joints at
lock and hinge edges with visible edge seams. The internal portion of the
seam shall be sealed with epoxy.
3. Hinge reinforcement shall be not less than 7gage (3/16") plate 1-1/4" X 9".
Approved equal is a 12 gage continuous channel with formed holes drilled and
tapped The manufacture to provide test information that this type
reinforcement is equal to a 3/16" or 7 gage plate reinforcement.
4. Reinforce tops and bottoms of all doors with a continuous steel channel not
less than 14 gage galvanized A60, extending the full width of the door and
welded to the face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel shall have a steel
Section I1Vb 08100.doc Page 3 Revised: 03/20/07
Section IVb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
closure channel flush with the face sheets and screwed into the door. Plastic
fillers are not acceptable.
5. Doors shall be reinforced, stiffened, sound deadened and insulated with
impregnated kraft honeycomb core completely filling the inside of the doors
and laminated to inside faces of both panels using contact adhesive applied to
both panels and honeycomb core.
6. Acceptable Manufactures
a) Steelcraft Manufacturing - L Series with flush top closure.
b) Curries Company - 707T, flush top closure, 12 gage hinge channel.
c) Ceco Door Products - Regent.
B. Materials - Interior doors as indicted on the schedule
1. Face sheets are to be made of commercial quality Cold rolled steel that
complies with ASTM A366 or 620. Grade II - 18ga.
2. Vertical edges are to have continuous vertical mechanical interlocking joints at
lock and hinge edges with visible edge seams. The internal portion of the
seam shall be sealed with epoxy.
•
3. Hinge reinforcement shall be not less than 7 gage (3/16") plate 1-1/4" X 9".
Approved equal is a 12 gage continuous channel with formed holes drilled and
tapped. The manufacture to provide test information that this type 10
reinforcement is equal to a 3/16" or 7 gage plate reinforcement.
4. Doors over 7 feet in height and or 3 feet in width shall have continuous type
gear hinges
5. Reinforce tops and bottoms of all doors with a continuous steel channel not
less than 14 gage galvanized A60, extending the full width of the door and
welded to the face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel shall have a steel
closure channel screwed in place so that the web of the channel is flush with
the face sheets and screwed into the door.
6. Doors shall be reinforced, stiffened, sound deadened and insulated with
impregnated kraft honeycomb core completely filling the inside of the doors
and laminated to inside faces of both panels using contact adhesive applied to
both panels and honeycomb core.
7. Acceptable Manufactures:
a) Steelcraft Manufacturing - L.
b) Curries Company - 707T with flush top closure and 12 gage hinge
reinforcement.
c) Ceco Door Products - Regent.
2.06 STEEL FRAMES
A. Materials - exterior and as indicted on the schedule.
•
Section IVb 08100.doc Page 4 Revised: 03/20/07
Section IVb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
1. Are to be hot dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM designations
A924 A60, 16ga.
2. All frames are to have back welded face seams only of the frame corner or
intersection. Grind and dress smooth the weld area. Apply a factory baked on
zinc rich primer over the grinding area, and finish with a matching prime
paint.
3. Acceptable Manufactures:
a) Steelcraft Manufacturing - F series
b) Curries Company - M series
c) Ceco Door Products - SF series
B. Materials all other frames as indicted on the schedule.
1. Will comply with ASTM A366-68 or ASTM A569-66T, 16ga.
4. All frames are to have back welded face seams only of the frame corner or
intersection. Grind and dress smooth the weld area. Apply a factory baked on
zinc rich primer over the grinding area, and finish with a matching prime
paint.
2. Acceptable Manufactures:
d) Steelcraft Manufacturing - F series
e) Curries Company - M series
f) Ceco Door Products - SF series
C. Fabrication
1. General design and construction
a) Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lites, and
other openings to the size and design as shown on the architectural
drawings.
b) All finished work to be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, square, true
and free of defects.
c) Jamb depths, trim, profile and backbends to be as scheduled and shown on
approved shop drawings.
d) When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings shall be
fabricated in sections designed for splicing in the field by others.
e) Hardware reinforcements are to be in accordance with the minimum
standard gages as listed in SDI-100.
f) Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for
template mortised hardware only, in accordance with approved hardware
schedule and template provided by the hardware contractor. Where surface
Section IVb 08100.doc Page 5 Revised: 03/20/07
Section IVb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
mounted hardware is to be applied, frames shall have reinforcing plates
only; all drilling, and tapping shall be done by others.
g) Hinge reinforcements, to be 7ga steel.
D. Anchors
1. Floor anchors shall be provided at each jamb.
2. Anchors for in masonry are to be of the wire type.
3. Anchors for stud partitions are to be steel of a suitable design, not less than
18ga thickness.
4. Dust boxes/mortar guards to be no less than 26 gage.
5. All frames that are welded, to be provided with a steel spreader temporarily
attached to the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and
handling. Spreader bars are for bracing only not to be used to size the frame
opening.
6. Loose glazing stops are to be of 18 gage galvanized at labeled openings and
20 gage galvanized on non-labeled openings, butted at the corner joints and
secured to the frame with countersunk cadmium or zinc-plated screws.
7. Provide 3 silencers on single door and 2 silencers for double door openings
2.07 LABELED DOORS AND FRAMES 0
A. Construct and install doors and frames to comply with current issue of National
Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard Number 80, as scheduled.
B. Doors and/or frames for labeled openings are to bear either a stamped or applied
label from Warnock Hersey or Underwriters Laboratory
2.08 PRIME FINISH:
A. Doors and frames are to be cleaned, and chemically treated to insure maximum
finish paint adhesion. All surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view shall
receive a coat of rust inhibiting baked on primer applied at the factory. The finish
shall meet the requirements for acceptance stated in ANSI A224.1 "Test Procedure
and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces." The baked on prime
finish is not intended to be the final layer of protection from the elements. Field
painting using a good grade of paints are to be used in accordance with the
recommendations of the door and frame manufacturer. For specialty types of
finished coatings, the paint supplier should also be consulted.
PART III - EXECUTION ?.
Section IVb 08100.doc Page 6 Revised: 03/20/07
Section 1Vb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
3.01 INSPECTION
A. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to make sure that all dimensions
for existing opening or existing frames (strike height, hinge spacing, hinge back
set, etc.) given to the steel manufacturer are accurate.
B. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to see that any scratches or
disfigurements caused in shipping or handling are properly cleaned and touched
up with a rust inhibiting primer.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Frames
1. Prior to installation, all frames must be checked for rack, twist and out of
square conditions.
2. Place frames prior to enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in
position, plumbed and braced securely until permanent anchors are set.
3. Fill frames in masonry walls with mortar.
4. When temperature conditions necessitate an additive to be used in the plaster
or mortar to prevent freezing, the contractor installing the frames will coat the
inside of the frames, in the field, with a corrosion inhibiting bituminous
material.
5. SDI-105, "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames" and SDI-
110 "Standard Steel Doors and Frames for Modular Masonry Construction"
shall indicate the proper installation procedures.
B. Doors
1. Install doors plumb and in true alignment in a prepared opening and fasten
them to achieve the maximum operational effectiveness and appearance.
2. Proper door clearance must be maintained in accordance with SDI-110.
3. Where necessary, only metal hinge shims are acceptable to maintain
clearances.
4. "Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware" published by DI-11 is
recommended for further details.
C. Hardware must be applied in accordance with hardware manufacturer's templates
and instructions.
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Check and re-adjust operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just
prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper condition.
Section IVb 08100.doc Page 7 Revised: 03/20/07
Section 1Vb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
B. Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime
coat and apply to touch-up or compatible air-drying primer.
3.04 SCHEDULES
A. After installation, copies of the door schedules will be turned over to the owner
when the building is accepted.
END OF SECTION
•
•
Section 1Vb 08100.doc Page 8 Revised: 03/20/07
Section IVb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
•
WOOD DOORS
Section 08210
PART I - GENERAL
1.01 WOOD DOORS. NON-RATED AND FIRE-RATED
A. Flush
B. Glazed
C. Louvers
•
•
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry
B. Section 06400 -Architectural Woodwork
C. Section 08100 - Metal Frames
D. Section 08700 - Finish hardware
E. Section 08800 - Glazing
1.03 REFERENCES AND REGULATORY REOUIREM[ENTS
A. ASTM E152-81a - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
B. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 1995 Edition.
C. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, 9th Edition.
D. UBC 43-2 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
E. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
F. Quality Standards:
1. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S. 1-A-97 (National Wood Window and Door
Association).
2. AWI Quality Standards 7th Edition, Version 1.0 1997.
3. ANSI A115. W Series, Wood Door Hardware Standards. (American National
Standard Institute)
G. Labeling Agencies
1. Intertek Testing Services-Warnock Hersey (ITS-WH)
Section IVb 08210.doc
Page 1
Revised: 03/20/07
Section M - Supplemental Technical Specifications
1.04 DOOR DESCRIPTION
A. Interior Doors (Non-rated)
1. DPC-1, 5 Ply Particle Board Core Door, 1-3/4" (44mm)
B. Interior Doors (Rated)
1. DFM-90, 90 Minute Mineral Core Door, 1-3/4" (44mm), rated by ITS/WH
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings,
undercuts, special beveling, blocking for hardware in mineral core doors, identify
cutouts.
C. Product Data: Indicate door core materials, thickness, construction, veneer
species, cut and matching requirements, factory machining and factory finishing
criteria.
D. Construction Samples: Submit one or more of manufacturer's standard samples
demonstrating door construction.
E. Finish Samples: A set of 3 illustrating the range of color and grain of the specified
door face materials.
F. Manufacturer's Full Lifetime Warranty
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Meet or exceed NWWDA I.S.1-A Premium Grade and/or AWI Version 7 Custom
Grade.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING AND SITE CONDITIONS
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products under provisions of NWWDA, AWI
and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's standard packaging. Inspect for damage
upon receipt.
C. Do not store in damp or wet areas or in areas where light might cause oxidization.
D. HVAC systems should be operating and balanced prior to arrival of doors.
Acceptable humidity shall be no less than 25% nor greater than 55%.
E. Break seal on packages while at site to permit ventilation.
•
Section IVb 08210.doc Page 2 Revised: 03/20/07
Section IVb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01620.
B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, doorframe and door
hardware installation with a pre-installation conference.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's warranty to the following term:
1. Interior Solid Core Doors: "Full Life of Original Installation" including re-
hang and refinish if door(s) do not comply with Warranty tolerance standards.
PART II - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Algoma
B. Eggers
C. Weyerhaeuser Company
2.02 WORKMANSHIP
A. Comply with NWWDA/AWI workmanship for veneer faces, vertical edges,
crossbands, horizontal edges and dimensional tolerances.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Door Construction Grade
1. Except as may be otherwise shown on the drawings, fabricate the work of this
section to NWWDA "Premium Grade/"AWI "Custom Grade".
B. Flush Door Facing, Slice Or Cut, Matching, And Finish
1. Wood Veneer: AWI - A Grade: The veneer species, slice or cut, finish and
matching shall be:
a. White Maple, Plain Sliced, Book Match, Clear finish / OR
b. Red Oak, Plain Sliced, Book Match, Clear finish
0 C. Doors In Pairs Or Sets
L Specify per project requirements. Door schedule shall reflect pairs and sets by
door numbers.
Section Ivb 08210.doc Page 3 Revised: 03/20/07
Section Nb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
2. The veneer, slice or cut, finish and veneer matching shall match. Matching
between paired doors shall be in a sequence.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Door And Transom Panel Core Construction
1. Non-rated: ANSI A208. 1-LD-2 Particleboard.
2. 45, 60 or 90 minute Fire-Rated: Mineral Core.
3. Bond stiles and rails to core, abrasive sand core assembly to achieve uniform
thickness.
B. Vertical Edges (Stiles)
1. Non-rated
a. Edges to match face veneer. (May include veneer banding and structural
composite lumber backers or inner-plies).
2. 45, 60, 90 Minute Rated Pairs
a. Mineral core door stiles to be veneer banded to match faces veneer over
manufacturer's edge for improved screw holding. (Metal edges required).
3. Mineral Core
a. Mineral core door stiles to be veneer banded to match faces veneer over
manufacturer's edge for improved screw holding.
C. Horizontal Edges (Rails)
1. Mill option structural composite lumber or hardwood lumber.
D. Adhesives
1. Facing Adhesive: Type 1 Waterproof.
E. Inner-blocking For Mineral Core Fire Doors
1. Supply inner-blocking for all surface applied hardware, Through bolts not
accepted.
F. Machining For Rated Doors
1. Factory fit and machine doors for frame and finish hardware in accordance
with hardware and NFPA 80 requirements and dimensions. Do not machine
for surface hardware. Apply appropriate fire labels.
Section 1Vb 08210.doc Page 4 Revised: 03/20/07
is
•
•
Section IVb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Louvers
1. Non-Rated Metal Louvers: Equal to Air Louver model 800A I.
2. Rated Metal Louvers: Equal to Air Louver model 1900AL
B. Glazing Stops
1. Non-Rated:
a. Wood, of the same species/compatible with door species, with mitered
corners.
2. Fire-Rated:
a. Metal Vision Frames.
2.06 FACTORY FINISH
A. Factory finish doors in accordance with NWWDA G-17 Finish System
Description or AWI Division 1500-S4 - Finish System Standards. Factory finish
to be water based stain and ultraviolet (UV) cured polyurethane sealer to comply
with EPA Title 5 guidelines for Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) emissions
limitations. Finish must meet or exceed performance standards of TR-6 catalyzed
polyurethane. Color shall be a Clear finish as specified in section 2.3.B.
B. Factory Finished doors to be installed just prior to substantial completion.
PART III - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify substrate opening conditions.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable and ready to receive this
work.
C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out of tolerance
for size or alignment.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install fire-rated and non-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80, manufacturers'
instructions and fire rated labeling requirements.
B. Trim non-rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges.
C. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum 3/4 inch (19 mm).
Section IVb 08210.doc Page 5 Revised: 03/20/07
Section Mb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
D. Trim fire door height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating
requirements.
E. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes using templates provided by hardware
manufacturer. (Use threaded throughbolts for half surface hinges).
F. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware
G. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing.
H. Install door louvers and light kits plumb and level.
1. Reseal or refinish any doors that required site alteration.
3.03 WARRANTY TOLERANCES
A. Conform to NWWDA standards and testing methods for warp, cup, bow and
telegraphing.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust work under provisions Division 1.
B. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.
3.05 DOOR AND FRAME COMPONENTS SCHEDULES 10
A. Refer to door and frame schedule.
END OF SECTION
E
Section IVb 08210.doc Page 6 Revised: 03/20/07
Section IVb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
U
FINISH HARDWARE
Section 08710
PART I - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work in this section shall include furnishing of all items of finish hardware as
hereinafter specified or obviously necessary to complete the building, except those items
that are specifically excluded from this section of the specification.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
B. Aluminum Doors and Frames
C. Wood Doors and Frames
1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Furnish labor and material to complete hardware work indicated, as specified herein, or
as may be required by actual conditions at building.
B. Include all necessary screws, bolts, expansion shields, other devices, if necessary, as
required for proper hardware application. The hardware supplier shall assume all
responsibility for correct quantities.
C. All hardware shall meet the requirements of Federal, State and Local codes having
jurisdiction over this project, notwithstanding any real or apparent conflict therewith in
these specifications.
D. FIRE-RATED OPENINGS:
1. Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance with A.I.A. (NBFU)
Pamphlet No. 80, NFPA Standards NO. 101, UBC 702 (1997) and UL10C. This
requirement takes precedence over other requirements for such hardware. Provide
only hardware that has been tested and listed by UL for the types and sizes of doors
required, and complies with the requirements of the door and doorframe labels.
2. Where panic exit devices are required on fire-rated doors, provide supplementary
marking on door UL label indicating Fire Door to be equipped with fire exit hardware
and provide UL label on exit device indicating "Fire Exit Hardware".
E. FASTENERS:
1. Hardware as furnished shall conform to published templates generally prepared for
machine screw installation.
Section IVb 08710.doc Page 1 Revised: 03/20/07
Section M - Supplemental Technical Specifications
2. Furnish each item complete with all screws required for installation. Typically, all
exposed screws installation.
1. Insofar as practical, furnished concealed type fasteners for hardware units that have
exposed screws shall be furnished with Phillips flat head screws, finished to match
adjacent hardware.
2. Door closers and exit devices to be installed with closed head through bolts (sex
bolts).
A. Hurricane Openings
1. Provide hardware for hurricane openings in compliance with local jurisdiction. This
requirement takes precedence over other requirements for such hardware. Provide
only hardware that has been tested and listed by local authority for the types and sizes
of doors required, and complies with the requirements of the door and door frame.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The supplier to be a directly franchised distributor of the products to be furnished and
have in their employ an AHC (Architectural Hardware Consultant). This person is to be
available for consultation to the architect, owner and the general contractor at reasonable
times during the course of work.
B. The finish hardware supplier shall prepare and submit to the architect six (6) copies of a
complete schedule identifying each door and each set number, following the numbering'
system and not creating any separate system himself. He shall submit the schedule for
review, make corrections as directed and resubmit the corrected schedule for final
approval. Approval of schedule will not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for
furnishing all necessary hardware, including the responsibility for furnishing correct
quantities.
C. No manufacturing orders shall be placed until detailed schedule has been submitted to the
architect and written approval received.
D. After hardware schedule has been approved, furnish templates required by manufacturing
contractors for making proper provisions in their work for accurate fitting, finishing
hardware setting. Furnish templates in ample time to facilitate progress of work.
E. Hardware supplier shall have an office and warehouse facilities to accommodate the
materials used on this project. The supplier must be an authorized distributor of the
products specified.
F. The hardware manufactures are to supply both a pre-installation class as well as a
post-installation walk-thru. This is to insure proper installation and provide for any
adjustments or replacements of hardware as required.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE. AND HANDLING
A. Wrap, protect finishing hardware items for shipment. Deliver to manufacturing
contractors hardware items required by them for their application; deliver balance of
Section 1Vb 08710.doc Page 2 Revised: 03/20/07
Section IVb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
hardware to job; store in designated location. Each item shall be clearly marked with its
intended location.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. The material furnished shall be warranted for one year after installation or longer as the
individual manufacturer's warranty permits.
B. Overhead door closers shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against failure
due to defective materials and workmanship for a period of ten (10) years commencing
on the Date of Final Completion and Acceptance, and in the event of failure, the
manufacture is to promptly repair or replace the defective with no additional cost to the
Owner.
PART II - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. To the greatest extent possible, obtain each kind of hardware from only one
manufacturer.
B. All numbers and symbols used herein have been taken from the current catalogues of the
following manufacturers.
PRODUCT ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE
MANUFACTURER SUBSTITUTE
1) Hinges Hager Stanley, Bommer
2) Locks & Latches Best Schlage
3) Cylinders, Keys, Keying Best None (No Substitution)
4) Exit Devices Von Duprin None (No Substitution)
5) Door Closers LCN None (No Substitution)
6) OH Stops/Holders Glynn Johnson Rixson
7) Push Button Access Best None (No Substitution)
8) Magnetic Locks Locknetics Sentronics
9) Wall Stops/Floor Stops, Flushbolts Ives Rockwood, Trimco
10) Kick Plates Ives Rockwood, Quality
11) Threshold/Weather-strip National Guard Pemko, Zero
12) Silencers Ives Rockwood, Trimco
13) Key Cabinet Lund Key Control
Section IVb 08710.doc Page 3 Revised: 03/20/07
Section 1Vb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
C. If material manufactured by other than that specified or listed herewith as an equal, is to
be bid upon, permission must be requested from the. architect seven (7) days prior to
bidding. If substitution is allowed, it will be so noted by addendum.
2.02 FINISH OF HARDWARE:
A. Exterior Hinges to be Stainless Steel (32D), Interior Hinges to be Satin Chrome (26D).
Door Closers to be Aluminum. Locks to be Satin Chrome (26D), Exit Devices to be Satin
Chrome (26D). Overhead Holders to be Satin Chrome (26D), Flat Goods to be Satin
Chrome (26D) or Stainless Steel (32D) and the Thresholds to be Mill Finish Aluminum.
2.03 HINGES AND PIVOTS:
A. Exterior butts shall be Stainless Steel. Butts on all out swinging doors shall be furnished
with non-removable pins (NRP).
B. Interior butts shall be as listed.
C. Doors 5' or less in height shall have two (2) butts. Furnish one (1) additional butt for
each 2'6" in height or fraction thereof. Dutch door shall have two (2) butts per leaf.
2.04 KEYING:
A. All locks and cylinders to be keyed to the owner's existing BEST system.
B. Combinated to Owner's instructions. Lock manufacturer shall issue Bittings, directly to
the city only.
C. Provide Two (2) each change keys per lock and Six (6) each grand master, master keys,
two (2) construction and two (2) permanent control keys.
D. Hardware supplier to provide temporary cores during the construction phase. The city
will change out the temporary cores for the permanent cores. All cores become the
property of the city upon completion of the work.
2.05 LOCKSETS:
A. Locksets shall be Heavy Duty Cylindrical type, unless specified otherwise, in
"351T" series, 15H Design as manufactured by BEST on New Construction
"93K" series, 15D Design as manufactured by BEST only where scheduled.
1. Acceptable substitutions:
A. SCHLAGE "L9000" series, 06C design
•
Section IVb 08710.doc Page 4 Revised: 03/20/07
Section Tilb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
2.06 EXIT DEVICES:
A. All devices shall be Von Duprin 98 Series in types and functions specified All
devices must be listed under "Panic Hardware" in accident equipment list of
Underwriters Laboratories. All labeled doors with "Fire Exit Hardware" must have
labels attached and be in strict accordance with Underwriters Laboratories.
B. All exit devices shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 test requirements by a BHMA
certified testing laboratory. A written certification showing successful completion of a
minimum of 1,000,000 cycles must be provided.
C. All surface strikes shall be roller type and come complete with a plate underneath to
prevent movement. And shall be provided with a dead-latching feature to prevent
latchbolt tampering.
D. Vertical rob exit devices NOT recommended. Key removable mullions with rim exit
devices preferred.
1. Acceptable substitutions:
A. None (No Substitution)
2.07 DOOR CLOSERS:
A. All closers shall be LCN 4011 or 4111 Series having non-ferrous covers, forged steel
arms separate valves for adjusting backcheck, closing and latching cycles and adjustable
spring to provide up to 50% increase in spring power. Closers shall be furnished with
parallel arm mounted on all doors opening into corridors or other public spaces and shall
be mounted to permit 180 degrees door swing wherever wall conditions permit. Furnish
with non-hold open arms unless otherwise indicated.
B. Door closer cylinders shall be of high strength cast iron construction to provide low wear
operating capabilities of internal parts throughout the life of the installation. All door
closers shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 test requirements by a BHMA certified
testing laboratory. A written certification showing successful completion of a minimum
of 10,000,000 cycles must be provided.
C. Door closers shall utilize temperature stable fluid capable of withstanding temperature
ranges of 120 degrees Fahrenheit to -30 degrees Fahrenheit, without requiring seasonal
adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door. Closers for fire-rated doors shall be
provided with temperature stabilizing fluid that complies with the standards UBC 7-2
(1997) and UL 10C.
D. Door closers shall incorporate tamper resistant non-critical screw valves of V -slot design
to reduce possible clogging from particles within the closer. Closers shall have separate
and independent screw valve adjustments for latch speed, general speed, and hydraulic
backcheck. Backcheck shall be properly located so as to effectively slow the swing of the
door at a minimum of 10 degrees in advance of the dead stop location to protect the door
frame and hardware from damage. Pressure relief valves (PRV) are not acceptable.
1. Acceptable substitutions:
Section IVb 08710.doc Page 5 Revised: 03/20/07
Section Mb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
A. None (No Substitution)
2.08 TRIM AND PLATES: ?.
A. Kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates, shall be .050 gauge with 32D finish. Kick
plates to be 8" high, mop plates to be 4" high. All plates shall be two (2) inches less full
width of door.
A. Push plates, pull plates, door pulls, and miscellaneous door trim shall be shown in the
hardware schedule.
2.09 DOOR STOPS:
A. Doorstops shall be furnished for all doors to prevent damage to doors or hardware from
striking adjacent walls or fixtures. Wall bumpers equal to Ives WS407 Series are
preferred, but where not practical furnish floor stops equal to Ives FS436 or FS438 series.
Where conditions prohibit the use of either wall or floor type stops, furnish surface
mounted overhead stops equal to Glynn Johnson, 450 Series.
2.10 THRESHOLDS AND WEATHERSTRIP:
A. Thresholds and weather-strip shall be as listed in the hardware schedule.
2.11 DOOR SILENCERS:
A. Furnish rubber door silencers equal to Ives SR64 for all new interior hollow metal'
frames, (2) per pair and (3) per single door frame.
PART III - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. All hardware shall be applied and installed in accordance with the Finish Hardware
schedule. Care shall be exercised not to mar or damage adjacent work.
A. Contractor to provide a secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet
installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items that are not
immediately replaceable, so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by
hardware losses both before and after installation.
B. No hardware is to be installed until the hardware manufactures have provided a
pre-installation class. This is to insure proper installation of the specified products.
•
Section IVb 08710.doc Page 6 Revised: 03/20/07
Section 1Vb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Contractor shall adjust all hardware in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
Prior to turning project to owner, contractor shall clean and make any final adjustments to
the finish hardware.
3.03 PROTECTION:
A. Contractor shall protect the hardware, as it is stored on construction site in a covered and
dry place.
B. Contractor shall protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction
phase.
END OF SECTION
•
•
Section IVb 08710.doc Page 7 Revised: 03/20107
Section rVb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
•
•
•
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
SECTION 09511
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUAEVIARY
A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 - Section 09250 - Gypsum Board
2. Division 15 Sections - Mechanical
3. Division 16 Sections - Electrical
C. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.
B. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.
C. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.
D. Recycled Content: Average percentage based on weight of component materials.
Material recovered or diverted from the solid waste stream, either during the
manufacturing process (pre-consumer) or after consumer use (post-consumer).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Coordinate Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating
penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension members.
2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
Section IVb 09511.doc Page 1 Revised: 03/20/07
Section Ivb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish
required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6 inch by 12-inch samples of each type, color, pattern,
and texture.
2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12 inch long
Samples of each type, finish, and color.
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency, for each acoustical panel ceiling and suspension system.
1. UL Acoustical Compliance: For acoustical performance, each carton of material
must carry Underwriter's Laboratory certification for AC (if applicable), CAC
and NRC.
2. UL Suspension System Load Compliance: Manufacturer must certify that the
metal suspension system is UL Classified to be load compliant per ASTM C635.
For load compliance, each carton of main tees must carry Underwriter's
Laboratory certification for load compliance.
E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling and components.
F. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations:
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
3. Acoustical Ceiling System: Obtain each type of ceiling panel and suspension
system component from a single manufacturer.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with
the following requirements:
1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel
ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119
by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
a. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting
agency.
b. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following
surface-burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A
materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84:
C. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
Section IVb 09511.doc Page 2 Revised: 03/20/07
Section Ivb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
•
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project
site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned
space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity,
temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and
stabilized moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any
way.
1.7 PROTECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are
enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above
ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained
at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before
beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity
installed
2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to
2.0 percent of quantity installed.
3. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed.
•
Section lVb 09511.doc Page 3 Revised: 03/20107
Section IVb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 0'
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply for product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration
indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types,
patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectance, unless otherwise indicated.
L Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which
face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795.
B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for
each product type.
2.3 WATER-FELTED, MINERAL-BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING APC-#1
A. Products:
1. USG Interiors, Inc., product name: Radar C1imaPlus, Item Number(s): [2215,
2415].
B. Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for
Type III, Form 2, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted; and pattern as
follows:
1. Pattern: CD.
C. Color: White.
D. LR: Not less than 0.84.
E. NRC: Not less than 0.55.
F. CAC: Not less than 35.
G. Recycled Content: Not less than 40%.
H. Edge Detail: Square (SQ).
Section IVb 09511.doc Page 4 Revised: 03/20/07
Section 1Vb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
J. Size: [24 by 24 inches] [24 by 48 inches].
K. No deviations
2.4 HIGH-DENSITY. CERAMIC- AND MINERAL BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS
WITH SCRUBBABLE FINISH FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING FOR
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING APC-#2
A. Products:
1. USG Interiors, Inc., product name: SHEETROCK Brand Lay-In Ceiling Tile
C1imaPlus, Item Number(s): [3260, 3270].
B. Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for
Type XX, other types, described as high-density, ceramic- and mineral-base panels with
scrubbable finish, resistance to heat, moisture, and corrosive fumes as follows:
1. Pattern: G.
C. Color: White.
D. LR: Not less than 0.77.
0 E. CAC: Not less than 35.
F. Recycled Content: Not less than 23%.
G. Edge Detail: Square (SQ).
H. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
I. Size: [24 by 24 inches] [24 by 48 inches].
J. No deviations
2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS. GENERAL
A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that
comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.
B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for
Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating
finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system
indicated.
1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating
Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity
finishes are indicated.
Section IVb 09511.doc Page 5 Revised: 03/20/07
Section M - Supplemental Technical Specifications
C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635,
Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated.
1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes
or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable,
conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
a. Type: Postinstalled expansion anchors.
b. Type: Postinstalled adhesive anchors.
C. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition.
d. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with
ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Group 1 alloy 304 or 316 for bolts;
alloy 304 or 316 for anchor.
e. Corrosion Protection: Components fabricated from nickel-copper-alloy
rods complying with ASTM B 164 for UNS No. N04400 alloy.
2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for
application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or
other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by
ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a
qualified testing and inspecting agency.
D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following
requirements:
1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating,
soft temper.
2. Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy
UNS No. N04400.
3. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load
(ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but
provide not less than [0.106-inch] [0.135-inch] diameter wire.
E. [Hanger Rods] [Flat Hangers]: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-
inhibitive paint.
F. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch
thick, galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating
designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch diameter bolts.
G. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate
seismic forces.
H. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure
acoustical panels in-place. 0
Section IVb 0951 Ldoc Page 6 Revised: 03/20/07
Section 1Vb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
2.6 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING APC41
A. Products:
1. USG Interiors, Inc., Donn DXL suspension system.
B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Fire-Rated Steel Suspension System: Main and
cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc
coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30
coating designation, with prefinished 15/16-inch wide metal caps on flanges.
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. Four-foot tees shall carry a
minimum of 12 lbs., per lineal foot and also be rated intermediate duty.
2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type.
3. Face Design: Flat, flush.
4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet.
5. Cap Finish: Painted white.
6. No deviations
2.7 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING APC42
A. Products:
1. USG Interiors, Inc., Donn DXLA suspension system.
B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Fire-Rated Steel Suspension System: Main and
cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc
coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30
coating designation, with prefinished 15/16-inch wide metal caps on flanges.
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. Four-foot tees shall carry a
minimum of 12 lbs., per lineal foot and also be rated intermediate duty.
2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type.
3. Face Design: Flat, flush.
4. Cap Material: Aluminum cold-rolled sheet.
5. Cap Finish: Painted white.
6. No deviations
2.8 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A. Manufacturers:
1. USG Interiors, Inc.
B. Roll-Formed Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if
not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit
acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet
metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension
system runners.
1. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that
forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and
flange at exposed suspension member.
Section lvb 09511.doc Page 7 Revised: 03/20/07
Section IVb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter
required to fit penetration exactly.
3. For narrow-face suspension systems, provide suspension system and
manufacturer's standard edge moldings that match width and configuration of
exposed runners.
2.9 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Products:
1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a. United States Gypsum Co.; SBEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag,
paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in
reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building
construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to
ASTM E 90.
C. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying,
nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant
recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which
acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and
anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border
widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at
borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
•
Section IVb 09511.doc Page 8 Revised: 03/20/07
Section 1Vb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
40 3.3 INSTALLATION. GENERAL
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic
requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling
Systems Handbook."
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension
system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces
hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to
support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension
members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size
supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate
and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated
temperatures.
5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate
framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are
secure and appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type
of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to
deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck.
Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or
adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into
concrete.
7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly
from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches
from ends of each member.
C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of
four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for
hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs.
Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area
and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
0 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs
of moldings before they are installed.
Section 1Vb 0951 Ldoc Page 9 Revised: 03/20/07
Section IVb - Supplemental Technical Specifications
2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and
not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a
tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one
another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension
system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to
provide a neat, precise fit.
1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by
flanges of suspension system runners and moldings.
2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom
of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.
3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system members with box-shaped flanges,
install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension system surfaces
and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners.
4. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of
exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by
acoustical panel manufacturer.
5. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having
jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel
manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for 101
fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for
cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components
that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of
damage.
END OF SECTION
•
Section lVb 09511.doc Page 10 Revised: 03/20/07
Section IVb = Supplemental Technical Specifications
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS AND
INSTALLATION
PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
• E.
SCOPE C
A. The products and materials herein specified for this project are known to
be suitable and were selected to facilitate maintaining parts/service
uniformity and standardization with as many City locations and overhead
door installations as possible. If the Manufacturer's product
specifications have changed subsequent to the issuance of this document,
any concerns and/or conflicting statements shall be presented in writing to
the City's Building and Maintenance Superintendent.
ANSI A216.1 - Sectional Overhead Type Door.
ASTM A446/A446M - Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-
Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality.
ASTM A526/A526M - Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-
Dip Process, Commercial Quality.
NEMA MG-1 - Motors and Generators.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
IF WORK
A. Contractor shall furnish all material, equipment and labor to install
Overhead Door Corporation "Series 424" Overhead Sectional Doors with
the following features:
1. Galvanized 24-gauge minimum, ribbed, roll-formed steel
sections of 2-inch nominal thickness with weather-tight joints
and rabbetted meeting rails. Nominal size shall be appropriate
for specified opening.
2. Intermediate and end stiles shall be 16-gauge minimum.
3. Hinges, fixtures and tracks shall be galvanized.
4. Hardware shall include ball-bearing rollers with hardened steel
races, five-pin tumbler keyed lock and an interior deadbolt with
hole to receive padlock.
5. Finish shall be factory-applied baked-on polyester or epoxy
coating. Color shall be white.
6. Bottom weather strip shall be of flex PVC and be held by
reinforcement retainer.
7. Track system shall be 2-inch minimum, continuous, angle-out,
wood jamb.
8. Spring system shall be rated for 100,000 cycles.
Section IVb Overhead Doors.doc Page 1 Revised: 6/5/2007
Section lVb Supplemental Technical Specifications
9. Tracks shall be sloped from vertical or otherwise designed to
provide tight closure when door is closed.
10. Weather stripping shall include adjustable top gasket,
compressible bottom astragal and jamb seals
11. Wind load and missile impact load ratings for completed
system shall meet or exceed all applicable current industry
standards and Florida Building Code requirements for specific
installation and location. This includes door, all anchorages
and ancillary devices.
Contractor shall furnish all material, equipment and labor to install Overhead Door
Corporation "Series JST" Door Operators with the following features:
1. Operator shall be of heavy-duty, constant-duty design intended
to operate abovementioned door system at a speed of not less
than 2/3 foot per second nor more than 1 foot per second in
either direction, from any position.
2. Motor shall be UL approved, Class A Insulated, 115/230 VAC,
totally-enclosed, single-phase, properly sized (3/4HP
minimum) to meet or exceed abovementioned performance
requirements.
3. Unit shall be instant reversing with approved reversing devices
and automatic-reset thermal overload protector.
4. Unit shall be mounted by trolley (drawbar) or jackshaft (side
or center mount), direct-coupled or chain-coupled as
appropriate for specific installation.
5. Control circuit shall be 24V with both three-button ("Open-
Close-Stop") for interior operation and key-operated stations
for exterior operation. Key operated stations must accept
"Best" Brand of lock cores.
6. Receivers (6 total) shall be commercial style, digital 6-channel
(minimum), 24VAC, 390 MHz. Transmitters (6 total) shall be
of six-channel (minimum) design. Effective operating range of
each radio control system shall be a minimum of 35 feet from
exterior face of closed door to respective transmitter in the
vehicle.
7. Installation shall include limit switch (DPDT), photocell with
commercial through beam, green & red brightly-illuminated
traffic-style warning lights, 6-digit non-resettable cycle counter
and pneumatic edge kit with 2-wire coil cord, air switch and
appropriate air hose.
8. Obstruction protection shall include photoelectric sensors
located at such height as to intercept leading edge of fire
apparatus/vehicle at side of each door. Electrical enclosures
shall be rated NEMA-4.
•
•
Section IVb Overhead Doors.doc Page 2 Revised: 6/5/2007
SECTION lVmC
PROPOSED TRAINING
FACILITY @ FIRE
STATION #48
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
•
•
•
April 25, 2007
ARCHITECT:
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Section 1Vc
Proposed Training Facility at Fire Station #48
Belcher Road
Clearwater, Florida
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER
MECHANICAL ENGINEER
ELECTRICAL ENGINEER:
Plisko Architecture, PA, AIA
800 Drew Street
Clearwater, FL 33755
727-431-0030
McCarthy & Associates, Inc
2555 Nursery Road
Suite 101
Clearwater, FL 33764
727-536-8772
Griner Engineering, Inc.
1628 First Avenue North
St. Petersburg, FL 33713
(727) 822-2335
Griner Engineering, Inc.
1628 First Avenue North
St. Petersburg, FL 33713
(727) 822-2335
Address all communications regarding this work to the Architect at the address listed above.
COVER
1 of 1
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
Training Facility at Clearwater Fire Station #48_
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
April 25, 2007
• Cover Page
• Table of Contents
• Schedule of Drawings
Section
Number Section
Title Page
Number
DIVISION 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01100 ................ Summary .............................................................................................. .........01100 -1 of 2
01320 ................ Construction Progress Documentation ............................................... .........01320 -1 of 3
01322 ................ Photographic Documentation .............................................................. ......... 01322 -1 of 2
01330 ................ Submittals ............................................................................................ .........01330 -1 of 6
01500 ................ Temporary Facilities and Controls ...................................................... ......... 01550 -1 of 3
01524 ................ Construction Waste Management ....................................................... ......... 01524 -1 of 1
01600 ................
01731 ................ Product Requirements .........................................................................
Cutting and Patching ........................................................................... .........01600 -1 of 5
.........01731-1 of 3
01732 ................ Selective Demolition ........................................................................... .........01732 -1 of 3
01770 ................ Closeout Procedures ............................................................................ .........01770 -1 of 4
01781 ................ Project Record Documents .................................................................. ......... 01781-1 of 2
DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION
02220 ................ Site Preparation, Excavation and Earthwork for Foundations .................... 02220 -1 of 5
02361 ................ Termite Control ............................................................................................02361-1 of 2
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03300 ................ Cast-in-Place Concrete ................................................................................. 03300 -1 of 14
03320 ................ Precast Concrete U-Lintels and Sills ...........................................................03320 -1 of 2
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04200 ................ Unit Masonry ................................................................................................04200 -1 of 12
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05120 ................ Structural Steel .............................................................................................05210 -1 of 5
05310 ................ Steel Deck ..................................................................................................... 05310 -1 of 4
05410 ................ Pre-engineered Structural Stud Trusses ....................................................... 05410 -1 of 4
05521 ................ Pipe Railings ................................................................................................. 05521-1 of 2
TOC 1 of 4
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTIC
06160 ................ Sheathing ......................................................................................................06160 -1 of 1
06402 ................ Interior Architectural Woodwork ................................................................ 06402 -1 of 3
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07210 ................ Building Insulation ....................................................................................... 07210 -1 of 3
07411 ................ Metal Roof Panels ........................................................................................07411-1 of 4
07920 ................ Joint Sealants ................................................................................................07920 -1 of 5
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08100 ................ Steel Doors and Frames ................................................................................ 08100 -1 of 5
08211 ................ Flush Wood Doors........................................................................................ 08211-1 of 3
08351 ................ Operable Partitions........................
08411 ................ Aluminum-Framed Entrances ......................................................................08411-1 of 5
08520 ................ Aluminum Windows ....................................................................................08520 -1 of 3
08710 ................ Finish Hardware ...........................................................................................08710 -1 of 7
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09111 ................ Non-Load-bearing Steel Framing ................................................................09111-1 of 3
09220 ................ Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco) ................................................................09220 -1 of 4
09250 ................ Gypsum Board .............................. ................................................................ 09250 -1 of 4
09310 ................ Ceramic Tile .................................................................................................09310 -1 of 5
09511 ................ Acoustical Panel Ceilings .... :........................................................................ 09511-1 of 6
09651 ................ Resilient Floor Tile ....................................................................................... 09651-1 of 3
09624 ................ Resilient Athletic Surfacing .........................................................................09624 -1 of 5
09653 ................ Resilient Wall Base and Accessories ........................................................... 09653 -1 of 3
09680 ................ Carpet ............................................................................................................ 09680 -1 of 2
09900 ................ Painting .........................................................................................................09900 -1 of 8
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10431 ................ Signage.......................................................................................................... 10431-1 of 4
10505 ................ Metal Lockers ............................................................................................... 10505 -1 of 4
10520 ................ Fire-Protection Specialties ...........................................................................10520 -1 of 3
10801 ................ Toilet and Bath Accessories ......................................................................... 10801-1 of 3
10900 ................ Gear Drying Units ........................................................................................10900 -1 of 1
DIVISION 11- EQUIPMENT
(not used)
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12492 ................ Vertical Louver Blinds ................................................................................. 12492 -1 of 2
TOC 2 of 4
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13910...
.............Basic Fire Suppression Materials and Methods ..........................................13910 -1 of 7
13930 ................ Wet-Pipe Fire Suppression Sprinklers ......................................................... 13930 -1 of 5
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
(not used)
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15000 ................ Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ............................................ 15000 -1 of 10
15005 ................ Instructions and Maintenance Manuals ....................................................... 15005 -1 of 1
15007 ................ Identification of Mechanical Systems .......................................................... 15007 -1 of 2
15010 ................ Plumbing Piping ........................................................................................... 15010 -1 of 5
15020 ................ Piping and Fittings: Soil, Waste Vent and Drain ....................................... 15020 -1 of 1
15031 ................ Piping: Condensate Drains - PVC............................................................... 15031-1 of 1
15050 ................ Refrigerant Pipe, Vales, and Specialties ...................................................... 15050 -1 of 3
15110 ................ Pipe, Valves, and Fittings: Potable Water .................................................. 15110 -1 of 2
15190 ................ Hangers, and Supports, Piping Systems ...................................................... 15190 -1 of 1
15200 ................ Plumbing ....................................................................................................... 15200 -1 of 1
15201 ................ Plumbing Fixtures, Trim, and Specialties .................................................... 15201-1 of 3
15210 ................ Domestic Water System ............................................................................... 15210 -1 of 2
15220 ................ Sanitary Drainage Systems ........................................................................... 15220 -1 of 2
15221 ................ Water Heater. Electric ................................................................................. 15221-1 of 1
15400 ................
15611 ................ Insulation, Thermal .......................................................................................
Fans, Ceiling Cabinet Centrifugal, Light Duty ........................................... 15400 -1 of 5
15611-1 of 2
15671 ................ Energy Recovery Ventilator, Air to Air....................................................... 15671-1 of 3
15717 ................ Split System, DX Condensing Unit ............................................................. 15717 -1 of 2
15800 ................ Air Distribution Equipment.......................................................................... 15800 -1 of 3
15810 ................ Terminal Units: Single Inlet; Electric Heating -
Variable Air Volume Units ....................................................................... 15810 -1 of 3
15850 ................ Ductwork - Sheet Metal - Low Pressure .................................................... 15850 -1 of 11
15855 ................ Ductwork-Sheet Metal-High Pressure (All Supply Air Ductwork
Between Air Handler Unit and Inlet to Variable Air Volume Unit ........ 15855 -1 of 9
15963 ................ Building Automation System/Automatic Temperature Control ................. 15963 -1 of 18
15980 ................ Test and Balance - Final .............................................................................. 15980 -1 of 3
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16050 ................ Basic Electrical Materials and Methods ...................................................... 16050 -1 of 2
16060 ................ Grounding and Bonding ............................................................................... 16060 -1 of 5
16070 ................ Electrical Hangers and Supports .................................................................. 16070 -1 of 9
16075 ................ Electrical Identification ................................................................................ 16075 -1 of 5
16100 ................ Wiring Methods................................................ ........................................ 16100 -1 of 4
16123 ................ Building Wire and Cable .............................................................................. 16123 -1 of 4
16130 ................ Raceway and Boxes ...................................................................................... 16130 -1 of 9
16131 ................ Cabinets and Enclosures ............................................................................... 16131-1 of 3
16140 ................ Wiring Devices ............................................................................................. 16140 -1 of 5
16150 ................
16210 ................ Wiring Connections ................................................................................... ...
Electrical Utility Services ............................................................................. 16150 -1 of 3
16210 -1 of 2 ?
16411 ................
Enclosed Switches ........................................................................................ .
16411 - 1 of 3
TOC 3 of 4
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
16423 ................ Enclosed Contactors ..................................................................................... 16423 -1 of 4
16442 ................ Panel Boards .................................................................................................16442 - 1 of 4
16491 ................ Fuses ............................................................................................................. 16491-1 of 3
16510 ................. Interior Luminaires....................................................................................... 16510 -1 of 5
16520 ................ Exterior Luminaires ............................................. 16520 -1 of 5
16530 ................ Emergency Lighting ..................................................................................... 16530 -1 of 4
16620 ................ Emergency Generator System ...................................................................... 16620 -1 of 9
16625 ................ Automatic Load Transfer Switches ............................................................. 16625 -1 of 6
16700 ................ Communications ........................................................................................... 16700 -1 of 2
16721 ................ Fire Alarm and Detection System ................................................................ 16721-1 of 12
End of Table of Contents
•
TOC 4 of 4
APA 03.07
Schedule of Drawings
Architectural
Training Building Fire Station #48
A-1 ................. Title Sheet
A-2 ................. 1/8" Site Plan/Key Plan
A-3 ................. 1/4" Floor Plan, Reflected Ceiling Plan & Exterior Elevations (Exist. Bldg.)
A4.1 .............. 1/4" Floor Plan (West)
A-4.2 .............. 1/4" Floor Plan (East)
A-5 ................. 1/8" Roof Plan
A-6 ................. 1/8" Exterior Elevations
A-7 ................. 1/4" Building Sections
A-8 ................. 1/2" Wall Sections
A-9 ................. Door/Window Schedule.and Details
A-10 ............... 1/8" Reflected Ceiling Plan & Flooring Plan & Room Finish Schedule
A-11 ............... 3/8" Interior Elevations (1-16)
A-12 ............... 3/8" Interior Elevations (17-24)
A-13 ............... 3/8" Interior Elevations (25-45)
A-14 ............... 3/8" Interior Elevations (46-61)
A-15 ............... 3/8" Interior Elevations (62-85)
A-16 ............... 3/8" Interior Elevations (86-101)
A-17 ............... 3/8" Interior Elevations (102-108)
Structural
S0.1 ................. Structural Specifications
50.2 .................Structural Specifications
51.1 .................1/8" Foundation Plan
S1.2 .................1/8" Roof Framing Plan
52.1 .................3/4" Foundation Details
52.2 .................3/4" Masonry Details
53.1 .................Roof Framing Details
Mechanical
M-1 ................Mechanical Legend, Notes and Schedules
M-2 ................Mechanical Plan
M-3 ................Mechanical Partial Plans & Details
M-4 ................Mechanical Details
Electrical
E-1 ..................Electrical Lighting Plan
E-2 ..................Electrical Power Plan
E-3 ..................Electrical System Plan
E-4 ..................Electrical Riser and Fire Alarm Diagrams
E-5 ..................Electrical and Fire Penetration Details
•
•
SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS 1 of 2
APA 03.07
E-6 ..................Electrical Details
E-7 ..................Electrical Symbol Legend and Panel Schedules
ES-1 ................Electrical Site Plan
EP-1 ................Photometric Site Plan
Plumbing
P-1 .................. Site Plan. Legend, and Drawings List - Plumbing
P-2 ..................Floor Plan -Plumbing (Drainage)
P-3 ..................Floor Plan - Plumbing (Water)
P-4 ..................Plumbing Risers
P-5 ..................Plumbing Details
P-6 ..................Plumbing Schedules and Notes
Training Building Fire Station #48
Fire Protection
FP-1 ................Hydraulic Calculations Nodes Site Plan, Legend, & Drawing List - Fire Protection
FP-2 ................Floor Plan - Fire Protection
FP-3 ................Building Section, General Notes & Details - Fire Protection
•
•
SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS 2 of 2
APA 03.07
SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY
PART1-GENERAL
Training Building Fire Station #48
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Work covered by the Contract Documents.
2. Use of premises.
3. Owner's occupancy requirements.
4. Specification formats and conventions.
B. See Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for division of responsibilities for the
Work.
1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project Identification: Proposed Training Facility at Fire Station 48
1. Project Location: 1700 North Belcher Road
Clearwater, Florida
B. Owner: City of Clearwater
1. Owner's Representative: Robert Maue, P.E.
C. Architect: Plisko Architecture, P.A.
800 Drew Street
Clearwater, Florida 33755
D. The Work consists of the following:
1. Construction of a one-story 8,967 square-foot training building.
2. Renovations to the existing training building.
E. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
1.3 USE OF PREMISES
A. General: Contractor shall have fall use of premises for construction operations, including use of
Project site, during construction period.
B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb
portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Fire Station #48.
2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and
available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use
these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.
b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
materials and equipment on-site.
C. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout
construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its
occupants during construction period.
1.4 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and adjacent Fire Station building during entire
construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize
conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-
to-day operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated.
SUMMARY 01100 - 1 of 2
•
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
1.5 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of
entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes.
1.6 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the
16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.
1. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in
the Specifications.
B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract
Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.
Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words
shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where
applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.
Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for
clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by
others when so noted
a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context,
are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01100
•
SUMMARY 01100 - 2 of 2
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress
of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Submittals Schedule.
3. Daily construction reports.
4. Field condition reports.
B. See Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting construction photographs.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,
and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.
1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the
planned early start and finish times.
2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals Schedule: Submit four copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a
tabular format:
1. Scheduled date for first submittal.,
2. Specification Section number and title.
3. Submittal category (action or informational).
4. Name of subcontractor.
5. Description of the Work covered.
6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies of initial schedule, large
enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period
C. Daily Construction Reports: Submit four copies at weekly intervals.
D. Field Condition Reports: Submit four copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of
construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of
subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required
schedules and reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties
involved
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
•
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 1 of 3
APA 03.07
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Training Building Fire Station #48
2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required
by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering,
manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.
1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction
Schedule.
2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of
Final Completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an
early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
B. Activities: Treat each area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the
Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless
specifically allowed by Architect.
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long
lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities
in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals,
approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1
Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in
Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.
4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected
1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.
2. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a. Coordination with existing construction.
b. Limitations of continued occupancies.
C. Unintemiptible services.
d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
e. Use of premises restrictions.
£ Provisions for future construction.
g. Seasonal variations.
h. Environmental control.
3. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the
Work.
•
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 2 of 3
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
2.3 REPORTS
A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site:
1. List of subcontractors at Project site.
2. Equipment at Project site.
3. Material deliveries.
4. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions.
5. Accidents.
6. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
7. Meter readings and similar recordings.
8. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
9. Services connected and disconnected.
10. Equipment or system tests and startups.
B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions
and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report Include a detailed
description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the
Contract Documents.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect
actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly
scheduled progress meeting.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
such meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors,
testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know
schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the
same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned
portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
END OF SECTION 01320
W
LJ
J
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 3 of 3
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
SECTION 01322 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUND4ARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Preconstruction photographs.
2. Periodic construction photographs.
11 SUBAIMALS
A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked
for location and direction of each photograph. Include same label information as corresponding
set of photographs.
B. Construction Photographs: Submit two prints of each photographic view within seven days of
taking photographs.
1. Format: 8-by-10-inch (203-by-254-mm) smooth-surface matte prints on single-weight
commercial-grade photographic paper, enclosed back to back in clear plastic sleeves that
are punched for standard 3-ring binder.
2. Identification: On back of each print, provide an applied label or rubber-stamped
impression with the following information:
a. Name of Project
b. Name and address of photographer.
C. Name of Architect
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Date photograph was taken if not date stamped by camera.
f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point); and
elevation or story of construction.
g. Unique sequential identifier.
3. Digital Images: Submit a complete set of digital image electronic files with each
submittal of prints as a Project Record Document on CD-ROM. Identify electronic
media with date photographs were taken. Submit images that have same aspect ratio as
the sensor, uncropped
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA
A. Digital Images: Provide images in uncompressed JPEG format, produced by a digital camera
with minimum sensor size of 4.0 megapixels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Photographer: Engage a qualified photographer to take construction photographs.
B. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to
clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.
1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each
photographic location.
C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera,
without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.
1. Date and Time: Include date and time in filename for each image.
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01322 - 1 of 2
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images on CD-ROM in the field office at
Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images same as for those
submitted to Architect.
D. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take color digital photographs of
Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction,
from different vantage points, as directed by Architect.
1. Take eight photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting
the Work
2. Take eight photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately
record physical conditions at start of construction.
E. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 12 color digital photographs weekly, with timing
each month adjusted to coincide with the cutoff date associated with each Application for
Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last
photographs were taken.
END OF SECTION 01322
1W
•
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01322 - 2 of 2
APA 03.07 . Training Building Fire Station #48
SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
B. See Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and
reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule.
C. See Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting construction photographs.
D. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties.
E. See Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record
Specifications, and Record Product Data.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive
action. Submittals maybe rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
B. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of
related construction activities.
C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of
the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in
advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time
if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor
when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner
as initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block
2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Name and address of Architect
d. Name and address of Contractor.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 -1 of 6
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
e. Name and address of subcontractor.
f. Name and address of supplier.
g. Name of manufacturer.
h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals
shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
06100.01.A).
i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
1. Other necessary identification.
E. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract
Documents on submittals.
F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless
Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal
may serve as final submittal.
1. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action
taken and will be returned
G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and
handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals
received from sources other than Contractor.
H. Resubmiltals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "REVIEWED."
I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "REVIEWED" taken by
Architect.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
C. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
e. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
f Printed performance curves.
g. Operational range diagrams. •.
h. Compliance with specified referenced standards.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 2 of 6
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
i. Testing by recognized testing agency.
4. Number of Copies: Submit seven copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return five copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project
Record Document.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the
following information, as applicable:
a. Dimensions.
b. Identification of products.
C. Fabrication and installation drawings.
d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and
control wiring.
£ Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
g. Templates and patterns.
h. Schedules.
L Notation of coordination requirements.
j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement
k. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
L Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified
in. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-lY2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches.
3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will
return one copy.
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together
in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
C. Sample source.
d Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-
control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit three full sets of available choices where color,
pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 3 of 6
APA 03.07
R
F
G.
2.2
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Training Building Fire Station #48
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing
and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one
Sample set; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample
set as a Project Record Sample.
Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written
summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location.
1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise
indicated Architect will return two copies.
Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction
Progress Documentation."
Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design.
1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated
Architect will return two copies.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.
1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will not return copies.
2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section
"Quality Requirements."
Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project
Management and Coordination."
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section
"Construction Progress Documentation."
Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience
of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure
Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include
names of firms and personnel certified
Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead cerdffi ring that
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
A.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 4 of 6
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or
on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect
for Project.
M. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
N. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
0. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during
installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
P. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and
normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in
Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."
Q. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
R Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents
manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a
product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of
manufacturer.
S. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized
service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:
1. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
2. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
T. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of
insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of
coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
U. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section
"Photographic Documentation."
V. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner, do not submit to
Architect.
1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return them for
resubmittal.
2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN
• A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 5 of 6
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit
a written request for additional information to Architect
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
submittals, submit three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design
professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or
certified by a design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing
these services.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for
compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with
approval stamp before submitting to Architect
B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp
and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:
1. Reviewed.
2. Revise.
3. Rejected.
4. Furnish as Corrected.
C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to
appropriate party.
D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
without review.
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.
END OF SECTION 01330
•
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 6 of 6
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
0 SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements
for products in those Sections.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is
complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all
openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.
1.3 USE CHARGES
A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum.
Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not
limited to, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for
construction personnel.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its
use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature
controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment for construction operations.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
•
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 1 of 3
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
PART 3 -EXECUTION 0
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 1 Section "Summary."
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
1. Connect temporary sewers to private system indicated as directed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction.
D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location,
operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on 1
completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to
produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
F. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient
size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination
for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
H. Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service,
including electronic mail in field office.
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:
1. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within
construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241.
2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial
Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use
permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
B. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.
C. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or
adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 2 of 3
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
3.4 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
construction period Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1
Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 01500
•
•
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 3 of 3
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
SECTION 01524 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
2. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
B. See Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial
demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting
from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes
packaging.
B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or
selective demolition operations.
C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,
recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another
facility.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE
A. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
3.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove
waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of
accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
B. Burning: Do not bum waste materials.
C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
END OF SECTION 01524
•
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524 - 1 of 1
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for
use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling, manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.
B. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout
C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and
installations specified to be warranted.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless
explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not
considered new products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities
related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties,
appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product
B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment; and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and
accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other
designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of
evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use form provided by Owner.
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and
requirements indicated.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 1 of 5
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
£ List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of constriction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.
j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
k Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.
1. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
results.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within
15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or
documentation, whichever is later.
a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order.
b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
B. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify
product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced Include Specification Section
number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product
request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable
product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional
information or documentation, whichever is later.
a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures."
b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable
product request within time allocated.
C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1
Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously
selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 2 of 5
01
•
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
B. Delivery and Handling:
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, them and other
losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
C. Storage:
1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms.
5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment
6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual
manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to
Owner.
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract
Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide
more rights for Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using appropriate form properly executed
3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific convent requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 3 of 5
APA 03.07
B.
Training Building Fire Station #48
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is
Architect's.
6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish "salient characteristics" of products.
Product Selection Procedures:
1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the
named product that complies with requirements.
2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,
provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and
manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.
4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a
product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.
5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and
manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies
with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for
consideration of an unnamed product.
6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a
product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies
with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for
consideration of an unnamed product.
7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional
requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the
specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions"
Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.
8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of
manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other
named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions,
and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in
Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the
other named manufacturers.
9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established
Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample.
Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions"
Article for proposal of product.
10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected
from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a. product that
complies with other specified requirements.
a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of
colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern,
density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium
items.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 4 of 5
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors,
patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or
texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium
items.
2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the
Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion
of Architect.
B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return
requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner
must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect
for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and
similar considerations.
2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule.
6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work
8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will
return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01600
•
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 5 of 5
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUAE%1ARY
A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to
cutting and patching individual parts of the Work
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before
the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the
following information:
1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate
why they cannot be avoided.
2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance
and other significant visual elements.
3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work.
4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed
5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting
and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be
relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long
services/systems will be disrupted
6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to
structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of
reinforcement with original structure.
7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting
and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of
unsatisfactory work.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change
their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components
in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their
capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased
operational life or safety.
D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or
in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's
aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually
unsatisfactory manner.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 1 of 3
•
?J
•
APA 03.07
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Training Building Fire Station #48
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.
C
•
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to
be performed.
1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,
including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of flee passage
to adjoining areas.
D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems
are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before
cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer, comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size
required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover
openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections
where required by cutting and patching operations.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
01731-2of3
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other Work Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence
of patching and refinishing.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane
surface of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition.
D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely
remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
END OF SECTION 01731 10.'
•
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731- 3 of 3
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
. SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled
B. See Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management" for disposal of demolished
materials.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled
B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and
reinstall them where indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Predemolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of.adjoining construction and site
improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
selective demolition operations. Comply with Division 1 Section "Photographic
Documentation." Submit before Work begins.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as
far as practical.
1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:
a. Television.
b. Overhead projector and screen.
B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.
C. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in construction to be selectively
demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use.
Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present
1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials
except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted
E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 1 of 3
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be
removed and salvaged.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect
E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction
photographs.
1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Photographic
Documentation."
F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition
activities.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility
services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before
proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass
area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other
parts of building.
3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal
remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1 Section
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 2 of 3
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden
space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-
suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management."
B. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site
and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste
Management"
B. Burning: Do not bum demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
END OF SECTION 01732
•
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 3 of 3
APA 01 3.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Warranties.
3. Final cleaning.
B. See Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting Final Completion
construction photographs and negatives.
C. See Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record
Specifications, and Record Product Data.
D. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for
the Work in those Sections.
1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on
the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
.5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals,
Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property
surveys, and similar final record information.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
8. Complete startup testing of systems.
9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection
or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by
Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
?.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 1 of 4
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
1. ' Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final
Completion.
1.3 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final
Completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy
of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance.
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements. 1
4. Submit pest control final inspection report and warranty.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify. Contractor
of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area
affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction
including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
1.5 WARRANTIES
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of
the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-1 1-inch
paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 2 of 4
APA 03.07
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Training Building Fire Station #48
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
b. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
C. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
d. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
e. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
£ Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
g. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish
mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
h. Remove labels that are not permanent.
i. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and
electrical nameplates.
j. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.
Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
k Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
1. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
m. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
•
•
•
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 3 of 4
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
n. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to f-unction with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply
with requirements for new fixtures.
o. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid
Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report
D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or
excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous
materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of
lawfully.
END OF SECTION 01770
•
•
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 4 of 4
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
SECTION 01781- PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record
Documents, including the following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
3. Record Product Data.
B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of
the Work in those Sections.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints.
B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal.
D. Refer to General Conditions Section Three for additional City requirements/
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings
and Shop Drawings.
1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the
marked-up Record Prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
2. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked,
show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.
3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification
on cover sheets.
2. Identification: As follows:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
d. Name of Architect.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781- 1 of 2
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
0 e. Name of Contractor.
2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information m concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
4. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where
applicable.
2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where
applicable.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING AND MAIN'T'ENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project
Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as
they occur, do not wait until the end of Project
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for constriction. Do not use Project
Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and
in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to
Project Record Documents for Architects reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION 01781
•
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781- 2 of 2
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
SECTION 02220 0,
SITE PREPARATION, EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORK FOR FOUNDATIONS
PART 1
1.01
A.
B.
1.02
A
1.03
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
All requirements of Division 0 and Division 1 forms a part of this section.
A subsurface investigation and soils report have been completed for this project. All
work in this section shall comply with the soils report.
REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
Comply with federal, state, local, and other duly constituted authorities in matters
pertaining to:
1. Permitting
2. Disposal of and hauling of waste material
3. Safety precautions
4. Barricades
5. Protection of environmental matters
SCOPE OF WORK
A. Perform all work specified herein as indicated within the grading area, i.e., that area
within which earth grades are shown to be approximately 5 feet outside building
perimeter. Remainder of property is to be left undisturbed, except as otherwise
authorized for such purposes as spoil or stock pile areas, temporary ditches, swales
and/or haul or access roads, in which case such authorized areas become part of the
grading area. This work includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Clearing and grubbing of vegetation and debris of all kinds.
2. Stripping.
3. Excavating to grade and subgrades.
4. Excavating and backfilling for foundations.
5. Providing finish load-bearing subgrades for foundations.
6. Disposal of removed materials.
7. Dewatering.
8. Laboratory testing.
B. Related work not specified under this subdivision.
1. Excavation of backfill for utilities.
2. Finish grading.
1.04 GENERAL
A. Contractor shall obtain a copy of the soils report for use with this section.
B. The Contractor shall examine all drawings and the specifications, consulted the
records of adjacent construction and of any existing utilities, and the connections, if
any, and noted all conditions and limitations which may influence the work required by
this Section.
EARTHWORK 02220 - Page 1 of 5
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
C. Where recommendations presented in the soils report conflict with this section, the
soils report shall govern.
1.05 EXISTING STRUCTURES
A. Care shall be exercised during excavation, backfiliing, and compaction work to avoid
damage to existing buildings or foundations.
1.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect trees and dispose of all removed trees including stumps and roots.
B. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from
equipment and vehicular traffic.
C. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain.
D. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling, underpinning, or other methods
required to prevent cave in or loose soil from falling into excavation.
E. Notify Architect/Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue
affected work in area until notified to resume work.
F. Control grades in vicinity of excavations to prevent surface water running into
excavated areas.
G. Conduct earthwork operations under this division to insure against rainwash and
silting of watercourses, ponds and adjoining property -resulting therefrom. Should
such silting occur, restore such areas to their original condition if outside the grading
areas, or to lines, grades and conditions shown specified if within grading areas, all at
no cost to the Owner.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.01 FILL MATERIALS
A. Fill material shall be as specified in the soils report or at least clean fine sand, free of
rubble, organics, clay, debris and other unsuitable material. Fill should be tested and
approved prior to acquisition.
B. Source of new material and length of haul shall be the Contractor's responsibility.
C. Drainage fill: Crushed stone or gravel so that 100% passes 1-1/2" sieve with not more
than 10% passing a No. 4 sieve.
•
EARTHWORK 02220 - Page 2 of 5
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.
1. Identify known underground utilities. Stake and flag locations.
2. Identify and flag surface and aerial utilities.
3. Notify companies to remove and relocate utilities as required.
4. Maintain and protect existing utilities remaining which pass through work area.
B. If required, perform remedial de-watering prior to any earthwork operations.
C. Clear and grub site as defined in the soils report.
D. Proof-roll the sub-grade in accordance with the soils report and under the observation
of the testing laboratory. Proof-rolling will help locate any zones of especially loose or
soft soils not encountered in the soil test borings. Then undercut, or otherwise treat
these zones as recommended by the testing lab.
E. Testing the sub-grade for compaction will be as directed by the testing laboratory and
as shown on the structural drawings.
3.02 FILL
•
A. Fill in areas where required shall be placed in loose lifts as directed by the soils report.
B. In load-bearing areas, fill shall be compacted as recommended in the soils report or at
least to 95% of maximum modified. Proctor dry density. A moisture content within two
percent (2%) points of optimum indicated by the modified Proctor test (ASTM D-1557)
is recommended.
C. Perform compliance tests within the fill as directed by the testing lab.
3.03 EXCAVATION
A. Excavation shall conform to the dimensions and elevations shown on the drawings,
but excavation lines shall be such as to provide sufficient clearance for the proper
execution of the work to be installed. Allowances shall be made for work and
inspections. Bottom of all excavations shall be trimmed to the levels indicated and
sloping surfaces cut in steps shown on drawings. After carrying the excavation to the
required depth, the Contractor shall await the inspection and testing of the bearing
soil.
B. Control of ground water, including all necessary equipment, to maintain all excavated
areas in a dry condition shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
C. Sides of temporary excavations can be cut to maximum slope of 1:1. However, no
claim may be made by the Contractor for extra work for damages resulting from slope
stability failure.
0
EARTHWORK 02220 - Page 3 of 5
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
to densif
ti
d
ft
D. y
on
er excava
a
The bottom of foundation excavations shall be compacte
any soils loosened in the excavation process. Backfill soils placed adjacent to footing
or walls shall be carefully compacted with a light rubber tired roller or vibratory plate
compactor to avoid damaging the footings and walls. Approved sand fills placed in
footing excavations above the bearing level, in trench excavations, and in other
areas which are expected to provide slab support and foundation embedment
constraint shall be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 6 inches and shall be
compacted to a minimum of 95% of the maximum modified Proctor dry density.
E. Test all footing cuts for compaction to a depth of 1 foot, as directed by the testing
laboratory.
3.04 DEWATERING
A. Refer to the soils report for an estimate of seasonal high ground water table.
B. The geotechnical testing laboratory shall determine the depth of ground water just
prior to construction to determine what dewatering will be required.
C. Water control will consist of, but not necessarily be limited to, well points, sumps, and
pumps, in conjunction with berms and any needed ditches. Deep wells will not be
permitted.
D. Approval by the Architect of data submitted shall not relieve the Contractor of full
responsibility for adequacy of dewatering system. In the event that during the
progress of the work it is determined that the dewatering system Is inadequate, the
Contractor shall install and operate such additional dewatering equipment and/or
make such changes in the system or plan of operation as may be necessary to
perform the dewatering system in an adequate manner.
E. Groundwater shall be maintained at least 24 inches below all earthwork, foundations,
and compacted surfaces, or as directed by the testing laboratory.
3.05 BACKFILL UNDER AND AROUND BUILDING AREA
A. All debris shall be removed from excavations prior to backfiiling and filling.
B. Backfill under and around building area shall be placed in loose layers not exceeding
12" and shall be compacted as defined in the soils report or at least. to a density
equal to 95% of the modified Proctor maximum dry density as per ASTM D698-70.
C. Backfill in electrical plumbing and mechanical trenches shall be compacted to
previously specified density.
3.06 GRADING
A. Grade areas to lines and elevations Indicated, including adjacent transition areas.
Smooth finish surface within specified tolerances. Compact and bring to uniform levels
or slopes between points where elevations are shown or between such points and
existing grades.
B. Unless shown on the drawings, slope the grade evenly to provide drainage away from
the building.
i
EARTHWORK 02220 - Page 4 of 5
APA 03.07 . Training Building Fine Station #48
C. Complete the grading operations after the building has been finished, utilities
installed, site improvements constructed, and all excavated materials, rubbish, and
debris removed from the site. Leave grade for lawns and planted areas clean and at
required grades.
3.07 TESTING
A. A qualified licensed geotechnical testing laboratory shall be retained to perform all
necessary quality control testing for earthwork.
B. All testing shall comply with the project soils report.
C. See structural drawings for a minimum testing program.
D. Provide samples of materials proposed for fills as required. Cooperate with laboratory
personnel in obtaining samples, and during quality control testing.
3.08 SPECIAL NOTES
A. Fill material shall not be placed against walls until 7 days after grouting of masonry
cells. Compaction of exterior fill and interior backfill shall not be performed until wall
grout has cured 14 days.
B. Do not use drum compactor within 6 feet of walls. Compaction within 6 feet of walls
shall be accomplished with a hand operated vibratory compactor.
•
END OF SECTION 02220
•
EARTHWORK 02220 - Page 5 of 5
•
P__?
APA 03.07
SECTION 02361- TERMITE CONTROL
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Soil treatment with termiticide.
Training Building Fire Station #48
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the EPA-Registered Label.
B. Product certificates.
C. Soil Treatment Application Report: Include the following:
1. Date and time of application.
2. Moisture content of soil before application.
3. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide.
4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.
5. Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used
6. Areas of application.
7. Water source for application.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project
is located.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides according to the EPA-Registered
Label.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor
certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent
infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered
during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' continuing
service including monitoring, inspection, and re-treatment for occurrences of termite activity.
Provide a standard continuing service agreement. State services, obligations, conditions, and
terms for agreement period; and terms for future renewal options.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Termiticides:
a. Aventis Environmental Science USA LP; Termidor.
b. Bayer Corporation; Premise 75.
C. Dow AgroSciences LLC; Dursban TC, Equity.
d FMC Corporation, Agricultural Products Group; Talstar, Prevail FT, Torpedo.
e. Syngenta; Demon TC.
TERMITE CONTROL
02361 - 1 of 2
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
2.2 SOIL TREATMENT
A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide
quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide
concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA-Registered Label.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as
wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil
within and around foundations.
B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously
compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied, before placing
compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer.
3.2 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT
A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity
required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of
termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a
continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and
under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly.
1. Slabs-on-Grade: Under ground-supported slab construction, including footings, building
slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete
footings and slabs are placed.
2. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation
walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric
conduit penetrating the slab, and around interior column footers, piers, and chimney
bases; also along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid
soil washout around footings.
3. Masonry: Treat voids.
4. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be
penetrated.
B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.
C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground-
supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label
instructions.
D. Post warning signs in areas of application.
E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading,
landscaping, or other construction activities following application.
END OF SECTION 02361
•
TERMITE CONTROL 02361- 2 of 2
APA 03.07 SECTION 03300 Training Building Fire Station #48
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. SCOPE OF WORK
1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete all
cast-in-place concrete work, including formwork, reinforcing steel and all
related work as shown and specified, except as specifically excluded
hereinafter.
2. In addition to construction of cast-in-place concrete work, the work includes
the items listed below:
a. Setting anchor bolts, frames, and other items indicated to be
embedded in concrete
b. Grouting of structural steel bearing on concrete
c. Concrete curbs
d. Dowels for masonry walls
e. Concrete walks
f. Concrete pavement
g. Laboratory field testing services
3. Cooperate with affected personnel or contractors in setting and/or fastening
sleeves, piping, inserts, conduits, hangers, ties and similar items in the forms,
where such items are to be furnished and installed under other subdivisions
of these specifications.
B. RELATED WORK NOT SPECIFIED UNDER THIS SUBDIVISION
1. Foundations and pads not shown on architectural, civil or structural drawings.
2. Furnishing steel frames and grating.
3. Furnishing miscellaneous steel shapes and plates embedded in concrete.
4. Furnishing anchor bolts for structural steel.
5. Furnishing piping and conduit embedded in concrete.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. APPLICABLE STANDARDS
1. Provide all materials and perform all work in accordance with the latest issue
of ACI 301 "Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete A" and the
reference specifications listed therein.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 1 of 14
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
2. The applicable provisions of the latest issue of the following ACI and CRSI
Standards are made a part of these specifications. Where the provisions of
any reference specification conflict with those of ACI 301, the more stringent
provisions govern.
ACI NUMBER TITLE
302.1 R Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab
Construction
304.R Guide for Measuring, Mixing,
Transporting and Placing Concrete
304.2R-91 Placing concrete by pumping methods.
305R Hot Weather Concreting
306R Cold Weather Concreting
308 Standard Practice for Curing
Concrete
309R Guide for Consolidation of Concrete
315 Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced
Concrete Structures
318-89 & 89R Building code requirements for reinforced concrete
347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork
70-56 Guide for Use of Epoxy Compounds with Concrete -
Committee 503 Report
75-18 Concrete committee 503 report. Cold weather
concreting.
CRSI NUMBER TITLE
63 Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit, not less than 21 days prior to placing of concrete, the, following proposed
concrete mix design data:
1. Intended usage and location for each type
2. Mix design for each type
3. Cement content in pounds per cubic yard
4. Coarse and fine aggregate in pounds per cubic yard
5. Water-cement ratio by weight
6. Cement type and manufacturer
7. Slump range
8. Air content range
9. Admixture types and manufacturers
10. Percent of admixtures by weight
11. Strength test data required to establish mix design
B. Submit complete detail and placing shop drawings for all reinforcing steel including
accessories that have been reviewed and stamped by the General Contractor.
C. Refer to Section 01300 for all submittals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 0
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 2 of 14
0 APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement - ASTM C 150, Type I. Type III may be used where authorized by
the Engineer.
B. Air-Entraining Admixtures - ASTM C 260, Darax AEA, W. R. Grace & Company, SIKA
AER, SIKA, MB-AE90, Master Builders, Air Mix, Euclid Chemical Corp.
C. Water-Reducing Admixtures - ASTM C 494, Type D. WRDA-64, W.R. Grace &
Company Plastiment, SIKA, Pozzolith N, Master Builders.
D. No accelerators, retarders or admixtures containing chlorides will be permitted.
E. Use fresh, clean and drinkable water for concrete.
F. For normal weight concrete use coarse and fine aggregate to conform to ASTM C33.
G. Super Plasticizer ASTM C494 Type F or G where authorized by the Engineer.
H. Fly-ash ASTM C618 Type C618. Maximum loss on ignition shall not exceed 3% by
weight. The combined weight of fly-ash shall not exceed 20 percent of the total
weight of cementitious material. The fly-ash present in blended cement conforming to
ASTM C595 shall be included in the calculated percentage. Do not use for
architectural concrete.
1. Ground granulated blast-fumish slag ASTM C989. the combined weight of GGBFS
shall not exceed 50 percent of the total weight of cementitious material. Slag used in
blended hydraulic cement confirming to ASTM C595 shall be included in the
calculated percentage.
2.02 PROPORTIONING
A. Concrete Strength - See structural drawings for minimum concrete compressive
strength at 28 days.
B. PROPERTIES
1. Provide concrete having the general properties specified for each class of
concrete with the following tables to provide workability and consistency so
concrete can be worked readily into forms and around reinforcement without
segregation or bleeding, and to provide an average compressive strength
adequate to meet acceptance requirements of ACI 301.
2.03 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE
A. Concrete must be batched, mixed and transported in accordance with specifications
for ready-mixed concrete ASTM C 94.
•
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 3 of 14
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
B. Concrete shall be batched to produce a slump of 4" plus/minus 1". Refer to 2.028
unless noted otherwise.
C. Provide at the site, delivery tickets for each batch of concrete showing the following:
1. Batch number, volume and date
2. Time of loading
3. Design 28-day compressive strength
4. Concrete type
5. Cement content in pounds per cubic yard
6. Water content in pounds per cubic yard
7. Admixtures in amount per cubic yard
8. Maximum amount of water that may be added at the job site.
D. Restrict the addition of mix water at the job site. Do not add water without the
approval of the general contractor and do not exceed slump limitations or total
allowable water to cement ratio. Use cold water from the truck tank and remix to
achieve consistency. The reports shall indicate how much water was added at the
job site. Note on delivery ticket amount of water added and name of person
authorizing.
E. During hot weather, conform to the detailed recommendations of ACI 305.
F. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 degrees F., reduce mbdng and delivery
time to 75 minutes. When air temperature is higher than 90 degrees, reduce muting
and deli%ery time to 60 minutes.
G. Concrete should be deposited as nearly as practicable to its final position to avoid
segregation of materials due to re-handling orflowing.
H. Concreting shouts be carried on at such a rate that the concrete is at all times plastic
and flows readly into spaces between reinforcement.
1. The use of the following is prohibited:
1. Partialy hardened concrete
2. Contaminated concrete
3. Re tempered concrete
4. Concrete that has been re-miKed afterit has taken its initial set.
J. After concreting has been started, it shout be carried on as a continuous operation
until placing of a panel or sectbn, as determined by its boundaries or joints, is
completed.
K. All concrete should be thoroughly consolidated by suitable means during placement
and should be worked around reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into comers
of forms.
2.04 PLACING CONCRETE
A. GENERAL
1. Inner surfaces of conveying equipment must be free of hardened concrete
and foreign materials.
2. All reinforcing bars are to be tied in proper position prior to placing concrete.
3. Provide sufficient time for inspection of all preparatory work before proceeding
with the placing of concrete.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 4 of 14
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
4. Immediately prior to placing concrete, sprinkle semi-porous sub-grades
sufficiently to eliminate suction and seal porous sub-grades, except where a
vapor barrier Is used.
5. Deposit concrete In forms in horizontal layers continuously, no deeper than 18
inches. Horizontal cold joints will not be permitted. Fill forms completely using
methods to ensure even distribution of aggregate around reinforcement and
into comers of forms.
6. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and
delivery time to 75 minutes. When air temperature is higher than 90 degrees
F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
7. Concrete shall have a wet cure time of 7 days minimum at 50 degrees
minimum temperature.
8. Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable to its final position to
avoid segregation of materials due to re-handling or flowing.
9. Concreting shall be carried on at such a rate that the concrete is at all times
plastic and flows readily into spaces between reinforcement.
10. The following conditions are prohibited:
a. Partially hardened concrete.
b. Contaminated concrete.
C. Re-tempered concrete.
d. Concrete that has been re-mixed after it has taken its initial set.
11. After concreting has been started, it shall be carried on as a continuous
operation until placing or a panel or section, as determined by its boundaries
or joints, is completed.
B. CONSOLIDATION
1. Consolidate concrete by vibration in accordance with the detailed
recommendations of ACI 309.
2. Internal vibrators must be used in beams, girders and framed slabs and along
bulkheads or slabs-on-grade to thoroughly consolidate the concrete. Do not
use grossly oversized equipment.
3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete within forms.
C. FINISHING
1. Finish concrete slabs In accordance with the finishes and tolerances as
specified in ACI 301, and the detailed recommendations in ACI 302. Confirm
all finishes with Architect.
2. Dusting of slabs with cement or other materials to absorb excess bleed water
is strictly prohibited.
TOLERANCE
ITEM CLASS FINISH
Exterior Pavement B Broom or belt
Exterior Walks/Curbs B Fine broom
Interior Slabs A Troweled
Exterior Steps A Nonslip
3. For flat, very flat and super flat floors, "F" numbers are required for defining
flatness and levelness. Refer to ACI 301 A R, Fig. 8.15.1.1, for minimum
required "F" numbers for type of slab use.
11
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 5 of 14
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48 .
D. NONSLIP FINISH
1. Give surface a dry shake application as specified in ACI 301 using crushed
selected abrasive aggregate of aluminum oxide. The rate of application of
blended mixture should not be less than 25 pounds per 100 square feet of
surface.
2. Acceptable products are:
TYPE MANUFACTURER
Grip-it L&M Construction Chemicals
Frictex N.S. Sonneborn
Nonslip Euclid Chemical Co.
Emag 20 Lambert Corp.
2.05 REINFORCEMENT
A. GENERAL
1. Details of concrete reinforcement and accessories not covered herein or
shown on drawings to be in accordance with ACI 315.
2. Reinforcement is to be secured in proper position and thoroughly clean of
loose rust, scale, grease or other coatings.
B. REINFORCING MATERIALS
1. Unless otherwise indicated, for all reinforcing shown provide deformed bars
conforming to ASTM A 615, or a 616 Grade 60. 4k,
2. Smooth dowels - ASTM A 615 and A 616, plain bars having a minimum yield
strength of 60,000 psi.
3. Welded wire fabric - ASTM A 185 plain wire fabric in flat sheets.
4. Plain wire to conform to ASTM A 82.
5. Accessories to conform to ACI 315.
6. Where reinforcing rods are used as supports, use rods no lighter
than No. 5.
7. Where concrete surfaces are exposed, make those portions of all accessories
in contact with the concrete surface or within 1/2 inch thereof, of plastic or
stainless steel.
8. Reinforcing steel should be free of kinks and non-shop bends. Field bends
should be only as approved by the architect.
C. FIBROUS REINFORCING (Synthetic)
1. Reinforcing fibers to be virgin 100% polypropylene fibers, per ASTM C1116,
specifically manufactured for use in concrete; containing no reprocessed
olefin materials, with the following minimum physical characteristics:
a. specific gravity: 0.91
b. modulus of elasticity: 500-700 KSI
C. tensile strength: 70-110 KSI
d. fiber length: multi-design gradation, 3/4" maximum.
2. Reinforcing fibers to be supplied by the following approved manufacturers:
a. "FIBERSTRAND 100", Euclid Chemical Company
b. "FIBERMESH INFORCE es or STEALTH e? SI Concrete Systems
C. "FORTA SUPER-NET", Forta Corporation
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 6 of 14
APA 03.07 d. "NYLON FIBERS", Nycon, Inc. Training Building Fire Station #48
3. Fibers to be added in manufacturer's approved amount with a minimum of 1.5
pounds per cubic yard for poly and 1.0 pounds per cubic yard for nylon.
4. Concrete to be batched and mixed in accordance with fiber manufacturer's
recommendations for uniform and complete dispersion of fiber bundles into
single strands within concrete.
5. Reinforcing fibers may be used In concrete slabs-on-grade in lieu of VWVF with
approval of the engineer.
6. Submit product data for review and approval.
7. For a "non-hairy" surface use a monofilament fiber. Collated fibrillated fibers
wear away in a short period of time.
D. FIBROUS REINFORCING (allemate to wwf on composite metal decks)
1. AN fibers must meet the criteria in the Steel Deck Institute desbn manual
(Publication No. 30).
2. Cold drawn steel fibers meeting the criteria of ASTM A820, at a minimum
addition rate of 25 lb4d3 (14.8 kg/m3) and possessing an average resdual
strength of at least 80 psi 550 kpa when tested ASTM C1399, may be used as
a suitable akemative to the welded wire fabric specified for temperature and
shrinkage reinforcement.
3. Reinforcing fiber to be supplied by the folbwing approved suppliers:
a. "NOVOMESH 850, or NOVOCON 1050" by SI Concrete Systems
b. "DRAMIX 65/60" by Bekaert
4. Steel fibers do not replace r+ebar overgirders, which are used to control negative
moment.
5. Steel fibers are to be added at the batch plant and in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations foruniform and complete dispersion.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PLACING
A. GENERAL
1. Place reinforcing in conformance with the requirements of CRSI 63. Place
reinforcement in proper position prior to placing concrete. Placing
reinforcement during concrete placement will not be permitted.
2. Unless otherwise shown or Indicated, provide minimum concrete protective
covering for reinforcement as follows:
a. Concrete deposited against the ground, 3".
b. Formed surfaces exposed to weather or in contact with the ground, 2"
for reinforcing bars No. 6 or larger, and 1-1/2" for reinforcing bars No.
5 or smaller.
C. Interior surfaces, 1-1/2" for beams, girders and columns, 3/4" for
slabs, walls and joists.
d. See drawing for special conditions.
3. Support reinforcing for slabs-on-grade on staggered concrete bricks or metal
or plastic bar chairs and spacers with metal plates.
4. Unless specifically authorized, do not bend reinforcement partially embedded
in hardened concrete.
5. Support and fasten all dowels in the formwork prior to placing concrete. Do
not place dowels after concrete is in place.
3.02 JOINTS
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 7 of 14
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
A. CON STRUCTION JOINTS
1. Construction joints not shown in the contract documents must be located and
made to least impair the strength of the structure.
2. No horizontal construction joints will be permitted in beams, girders or slabs.
3. Location of any construction joint not shown is subject to review and
acceptance by Engineer.
4. Reinforcing is continuous through all construction joints. Obtain bond by
roughening surface of concrete in an acceptable manner which will expose
aggregate uniformly and will not leave any latence, loosened particles or
aggregate or damaged concrete at surface.
5. Construction joints shall be cleaned, wetted, and standing water removed.
6. All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by suitable means during
placement and should be worked around reinforcement and embedded
fixtures and into comers of forms.
7. Concrete wet cure time to be 7 days minimum at 50 degrees minimum
temperature.
B. EXPANSION JOINTS
1. Reinforcement or other embedded metal items bonded to the concrete
(except dowels in floors bonded on only one side of joints) will not be
permitted to extend continuously through any expansion joint.
C. DOWELED SLIP JOINTS
1. Use completely smooth round bars for dowels.
2. For construction joints, paint half of bar with red lead paint. When dry, coat
painted end with satisfactory grease to insure against bond with concrete.
3. For control joints, paint and grease entire bar.
4. For expansion joints, paint, grease and provide a metal expansion cap for
one end.
5. Place in forms to insure that bars are perpendicular to joint face. Stop
reinforcement at doweled slip joints so that it will not extend through joint.
D. JOINT MATERIALS
1. Expansion joint filler non-bituminous type - ASTM D 1752, resin impregnated
fiberboard Homosote 300 or Thermosetting Polyurethane, W. R. Meadows'
Rescor. Asphalt impregnated materials are unacceptable.
2. Polyethylene Film - ASTM D 2103 minimum 6 mil.
3. Horizontal Joint Sealer - 2-component self-leveling urethane conforming to
Federal Specification TT-S-227E, Type 1, Class A. Color to match concrete.
Acceptable products are :
TYPE MANUFACTURER
Daraseal-U A. C. Hom
Sonolastic SL2 Sonneborn
Pourthane W. R. Meadows
4. Vertical Joint Sealer - 1-component Polyurethane conforming to Federal
Specification TT-S-002306, Type Il, Class A, color to match concrete.
Acceptable products are:
•
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 8 of 14
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
TYPE MANUFACTURER
SIKAFLEX IA SIKH
SONOLASTIC NPI Sonneborn
5. Epoxy Joint Sealer - semi-rigid epoxy, MM80 as manufactured by Metzger
McGuire Co., master fill 300 by Master Builders.
6. Epoxy Bond - 2-component 100 percent solids epoxy resin, amine cured.
Acceptable materials are Concresive Series by Master Builders, Sonneborn=s
Epogrip and Epiweld 580 by Lambert Corp.
7. Epoxy Grout - Epoxy bond filled with suitable mineral filler, 100 percent
passing the No. 100 sieve, in ratio to insure thixotropic action without
impairment of adhesive properties.
8. Compressive Joint Material - expanded polystyrene having a compressive
strength not less than 8 psi when the board is compressed to a deformation
of 5 percent of its original thickness when tested in conformance with ASTM C
165, modified to change drying temperature to 150°F.
9. Felt - 30 pound asphalt or coal tar roofing felt ASTM D 226 or D 227.
E. PLACING DOWELS IN EXISTING CONCRETE
1. Use deformed reinforcing bars as dowels. Drill holes in existing concrete of
size 1/2" larger in diameter than the dowel using power-driven drill with
tungsten-carbide tipped bit ground to insure against oversize hole. Clean out
holes with air
Thoroughly swab surfaces of hole and embedded portion of dowel with epoxy
grout. Force dowel into place. Wipe off excess grout and let set for not less
than 12 hours at a temperature above 60°F.
3.03 FORMWORK
A. GENERAL
1. Provide and construct formwork in accordance with ACI 301 and 347.
2. Form design by P.E. registered in the State of Florida.
3. Observe and check formwork continuously while concrete is being placed to
determine that there are no evidences of changes of elevations, plumbness,
or camber and adjust forms as necessary. If, during construction, any such
evidence or other defect appears, stop the work, remove concrete placed, if
necessary, and repair formwork or supports before proceeding.
4. Earth cuts may be used as forms for footing vertical surfaces increase size 2
inch.
5. Forms and shoring is the responsibility of General Contractor.
B. FORMWORK MATERIALS
1. Make forms of lumber, plywood, metal or other materials suitable to provide
the strength and tolerances specified herein before and the surface finishes
specified hereinafter.
2. Forming exposed surfaces use any of the following materials as suitable for
the specified finish, and to produce smooth uniform surfaces, true-to-line, in
order that surfaces produced will require little finishing:
a. New plastic-bonded natural plywood, American Plywood Association,
HD Overlay Plyform Class I, Ext-APA, or equal.
3. For forming exposed surfaces use plywood, or other nonmetallic surfaces free
from knots, warps, breaks, or other defects likely to cause irregular surfaces.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 9 of 14
APA 03.07
C.
D.
3.04
A.
B.
Training Building Fire Station #48
4. Provide commercial formulation form coating compounds with maximum VOC
of 350 mg/1 that will not bond with stain or adversely affect concrete surfaces
and will not impair subsequent surface treatments.
REMOVAL OF FORMS
1. Forms and shoring in the formwork supporting the weight of concrete, in
beams, slabs and other structural elements are to remain in place until the
concrete has reached its specified 28-day compressive strength.
2. Formwork and facing forms for members such as grade beams, foundation
walls and spread footings not supporting the weight of concrete may be
removed as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage
from the removal operations.
3. Arrange shores and other vertical supports so that the non-load carving fomi-
facing material may be removed without loosening or disturbing the shores
and supports.
4. Whenever the formwork is removed during the curing period, continue curing
of both the unexposed and exposed concrete by one of the methods
specified in section "Curing and Protection".
REMOVAL STRENGTH
1. Removal Strength - The concrete will be presumed to have reached its
specified strength when additional test cylinders (paid for by contractor) are
field cured along with the concrete they represent and have reached the
strength specified.
REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS
GENERAL
1. Patch all tie holes and repair all honeycombed and defective areas
immediately after form removal.
2. For surfaces other than those to be backfilled against, use patching mortar.
3. For surfaces to be backfilled against, use mastic damp-proofing compound,
except that where reinforcing is exposed, use patching mortar.
4. Remove all honeycombed and defective concrete down to sound concrete
prior to patching. Thoroughly clean the holes of dirt and debris.
PATCHING MORTAR
1. Cut edges of honeycombed and defective concrete to form dove-tail
(undercut) joints. No feather edges will be permitted.
2. Apply a chemical bonding agent to voided surface. An acceptable product is
L&M Construction chemicals - Everbond or equivalent.
3. Patch the cement mortar as specified in ACI 301, or with proprietary patching
compounds, except that proprietary patching mixtures may be not used on
exposed surfaces.
•
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 10 of 14
•
•
•
APA 03.07
C.
3.05
A.
3.06
A.
Training Building Fire Station #48
4. Acceptable proprietary patching mixtures are:
a. Euclid Chemical Corporation - Poly Patch
b. SIKA - Sikaset Mortar
C. Emaco R Series - Master Builders
d. Lambert Corp, Lambco Vinyl Patch
e. Sonnebom - Sonopatch
MASTIC DAMP-PROOFING COMPOUND
1. Patch full depth of hole and flush the surface with emulsified asphalt mastic
heavy viscosity for trowel application. Prepare and place in accordance with
manufacturer's directions. Acceptable products are:
a. W. R. Meadows - Sealmastic Trowel Mastic
b. Euclid Chemical Company - Damp-proofing Asphalt Coatings
C. Sonnebom - Hydrocide 700 Mastic
d. Lambert Corp - Waterban 60M
FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES - GENERAL
After removal of forms, give surfaces of concrete the following finishes as specified in
ACI 301.
SURFACE
Unexposed
Exposed
Exposed to Public View
CURING AND PROTECTION
GENERAL
FINISH
Rough Form
Smooth Form
Smooth Rubbed
1. Conform to the applicable detailed recommendations of ACI 301 and 308.
2. Hot weather curing to be in accordance with applicable ACI Standard 305.
3. All cast-in-place concrete must be maintained with minimal moisture loss at a
relatively constant temperature for a minimum of 7 days following the placing
of the concrete by the use of a water spray, water saturated fabric, moisture
retaining membrane or liquid curing compound.
4. Full curing days will be determined by the cumulative number of days or
fractions thereof during which the temperature of the air in contact with the
concrete is above 50°F.
5. Cure slabs-on-grade for the first 72 hours by the use of:
a. fog spraying
b. ponding
c. sprinkling
d. continuously wet absorptive mats or fabric
e. continue curing by use of moisture retaining cover until
concrete has obtained its specified 28 day compressive strength
f. or liquid curing compound after finishing process is completed.
g. concrete wet cure time to be 7 days minimum at 50 degrees minimum
temperature.
6. Submit materials and method of curing for review.
7. Do not use moisture retaining curing compounds for curing surfaces to receive
the following coverings, unless it has been demonstrated that such
compounds will not prevent bond of:
a. Carpet
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 -Page 11 of 14
APA 03.07
B.
b Training Building Fire Station #48
. Flexible flooring
C. Ceramic tiled floors
d. Other specified floor systems
MATERIALS
1. Where moisture retaining membranes or curing compounds are used for
curing, provide only materials conforming to the following requirements:
a. Polyethylene Film - ASTM C171, Type II
b. Waterproof Paper - ASTM C 171, Type I
C. Absorptive Cover - AASHTO M 182, Class 3, Burlap cloth made from
Jute or Kenaf or ASTM C 440 cotton mats
d. ASTM C309 spray on at max.
C.
TEMPERATURE, WIND AND HUMIDITY
Do not permit concrete not fully cured to be exposed to excessive
temperature changes or high winds.
3.07
A.
B.
EMBEDDED ITEMS
GENERAL
1. Prior to concreting, place all embedded items to be provided under this
subdivision or to be furnished under other subdivisions for installation under
this subdivision.
2. Give all contractors whose work is related to the concrete or must be
supported by it, ample notice and opportunity to introduce and/or furnish
embedded items before the concrete is placed.
3. Make certain that all embedded items furnished and set in forms by them are
secured in position, and exercise due care not to disturb or damage their work
while placing concrete.
4. Set anchor bolts for steel and equipment in accordance with setting drawings
or templates which have been reviewed and found satisfactory.
5. Where holes in concrete for such purposes as recesses for railing posts,
passageways for pipes, and the like are shown formed by sleeves, the
contractor may, at his option, provide such holes by drilling with a acceptable
diamond or tungsten carbide tipped drill bits. Fill with epoxy seal after railings
are in place.
EMBEDDED ITEMS TO BE PROVIDED UNDER THIS SUBDIVISION
1. Dovetail anchor slots and dovetail brick anchors - DAS-G20 beehive dovetail
anchor slot as manufactured by Gateway Building Products, together with
DBA-G14 dovetail brick anchors. provide masonry trades with one anchor for
each 16" of anchor slot or fraction thereof plus one additional anchor for each
vertical
section. Place anchor slots V-4" on center in beams and walls where
masonry abuts and one slot in each face of each column faced with masonry.
Fumish anchors to space 16" "on center in slots.
2. Plastic reglets for above and below grade counter flashing.. Make of Type A
rigid polyvinyl chloride, 0.060" thick, as manufactured by Superior Concrete
Accessories, Inc. or equal.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 12 of 14
0 APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
3. Sleeves - galvanized steel pipe ASTM A 120, or plastic pipe ASTM D 2661,
ASTM D 2665 or ASTM D 2852, bituminized fiber pipe conforming to ASTM D
1861 or Wilson anchor bolt sleeve.
4. Anchor Bolts - ASTM A 307. Furnish with one leveling nut plus one nut and
one washer.
5. Cast Iron Frames and Grates - as manufactured by Neenah Foundry
Company. Castings as manufactured by Flockhart Foundry Company or
McKinley Iron Works may be acceptable, provided the dimensions and design
are comparable in all respells.
6. Water stops locations as shown on drawings.
3.08 VAPOR BARRIER
1. Provide sub-grade under concrete slabs-on-grade with vapor barrier
consisting of polyethylene film not thinner than 6 mils, conforming to ASTM
C171, or asphalt laminated reinforced Kraft paper with polyethylene coating
on both sides. Moistop as manufactured by FortiFiber Building Systems
Group.
2. Provide film in width and length not less than one foot larger than dimensions
of slab sub-grade unless patently impracticable. Where joints are necessary,
lap edges not less than 6" and tape continuously. Take care to avoid
puncturing film. Immediately prior to placing concrete, tape-seal all tears, cuts
and holes.
3.09 GROUTING OF BASE PLATES
. 1. Nonferrous grout acceptable products are:
TYPE MANUFACTURER
Crystex L&M Construction Chemicals
Five Star U.S. Grout
Sonogrout Sonneborn
Euco N.S. Euclid Chemical Company
Construction Grout Master Builders
Vibroprvf #11 Lambert Corp.
2. Mix and place in conformance with printed instructions of the manufacturer.
3.10 TESTING
A. GENERAL
1. The services of an independent testing laboratory shall be retained for
obtaining test specimens and performing quality control work, routine testing
of materials or proposed mix designs and of resulting concrete for compliance
with technical requirements of specifications.
2. Testing of field-cured test cylinders, or testing required because of changes
requested by contractor in materials or proportions of the mix, as well as any
extra testing of concrete or materials occasioned by failure to meet
specification requirements, to be at contractor's expense.
3. Failure of the testing laboratory to detect any defective work or materials is
not in any way to prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered, nor
Is it to obligate the owner for final acceptance.
4. The testing agency and/or its representatives are not authorized to revoke,
alter, relax, enlarge or release any requirement of the specifications, not to
approve or accept any portion of the work, not to act as foreman or perform
• other duties for contractor.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 13 of 14
APA 03.07
B.
3.11
A.
B.
Training Building Fire Station #48
SERVICES PROVIDED BY THE TESTING AGENCY
1. Field Sampling - Secure from different batches, on a truly random basis,
composite samples for all field testing required below in accordance with
ASTM C 172 where applicable. Take all samples at discharge end of
conveying system. Clearly mark each test specimen master as to exact part
of the structure represented, class of concrete curing conditions, temperature
of concrete, and time and date of sample.
2. Compressive Strength Test - mold and cure test cylinders in accordance with
ASTM C 31 and test each cylinder for strength in accordance with ASTM C
39. Take one "test set" consisting of four cylinders for each day's pour of 50
cubic yards, or fraction thereof. Test cylinders one at 7 and two 28 days, one
hold.
3. Slump Tests - determine slump range for each "test set" in conformance with
ASTM C 143.
4. -Air Content Test - determine air content for each "test set" for air-entrained
concrete in accordance with ASTM C 231.
5. Submit two copies of the results in each of the above tests and inspection to
the contractor and the owners representative and Engineer.
6. Should any of the test results fail to meet the requirements specified, make
an immediate telephone report to the contractor and the owner's
representative.
7. Furnish evaluation reports of compression tests as recommended by ACI 214
when any compression test fails to meet the specified strength.
8. Criteria for acceptance of concrete cylinder tests:
a) Every arithmetic average of any consecutive three tests equals or
exceed fc, and
b) No individual strength test (average of two cylinders) <fc by more than
500 psi.
ACCEPTANCE OF STRUCTURE
GENERAL
1. Acceptance of structure will be made in conformance with ACI 301, except
that contractor must pay all costs incurred for providing any additional testing
or analysis required when strength of structure is considered potentially
deficient.
CRACKS
1. The contractor will be required to restore without cost to the owner any
concrete which develops cracks within a period of one year after placement
which has not been caused by action of the owner or others in over stressing
the concrete.
2. Repair the cracks by means that will restore the cracked members to their
designed strength and appearance by acceptable methods which will not
impair the appearance of the affected surfaces, if exposed. Such repairs
must be performed by use of suitable epoxy cements employed by an
organization having satisfactorily demonstrated ability in the techniques
necessary to effect such repairs, or by other acceptable methods.
END OF SECTION 03300
•
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 14 of 14
APA 03.07
PART 1
1.01
A.
Training Building Fire Station #48
SECTION 03320
PRECAST CONCRETE U-LINTELS AND SILLS
GENERAL
SUMMARY
Section includes: precast concrete U-lintels and sills
B. Related Sections:
1. Concrete Masonry Units
2. Concrete Reinforcement
3. Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM)
1. C33 - Specification for Concrete Aggregates
2. C150 - Specification for Portland Cement
B. Precast/Pre-Stressed Concrete Institute (PCI) Standards: Manual for Quality Control for
Precast and Pre-Stressed Concrete MNL-116.
C. American Concrete Institute: Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
(ACI 318)
D. American Concrete Institute: Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures
(ACI 530)
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide manufacturer's catalog engineering data.
B. Manufacturer shall rate U-lintel units for gravity, uplift, and lateral loads in units of pounds
per linear foot.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator's Qualifications: Units shall be fabricated by a firm engaged in the
manufacturing of precast and pre-stressed concrete U-8ntels and sills for a minimum of 5
years. Fabricator shall have a quality assurance program that complies with the
procedures of Manual 116 by the Precast/Pre-Stressed Concrete Institute (PC[).
B. Plant records of production and quality control shall be kept in accordance with PC[
recommendations and made available upon request for the Architect.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. If storage is required prior to erection, take all necessary precautions to provide
protection to prevent damage prior to installation. Maintain units free of dirt and airborne
pollutants until immediately prior to erection.
B. Replace all units that are damaged due to mishandling at the job site.
PRECAST CONCRETE U-LINTELS AND SILLS 03320-Page 1 of 2
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete Materials
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150 Type I or III, gray color
2. Aggregates: ASTM C33
3. Water: Potable
4. Admixtures: Shall not contain calcium chloride or chloride ions
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Unless specified otherwise, conform to PCI MNL-116.
B. All U-lintel units 14 feet in overall length and shorter shall be made of concrete with a
minimum strength of 3500 psi at 28 days.
C. All U-lintel units exceeding 14 feet in overall length shall be made of concrete with a
minimum strength of 6000 psi at 28 days and shall be pre-stressed concrete.
D. All sill units shall be made of concrete with a minimum strength of 3000 psi at 28 days.
E. All units shall be sand block finish except pre-stressed, 6" wide, and 12" wide U-lintels
shall be smooth form finished.
F. Tolerances shall be per PCI MNL-116.
.
G. Minor patching in plant is acceptable provided structural adequacy of units is not '
impaired.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FURNISHING
A. Furnish to the concrete masonry unit installer, all units that will be installed as part of the
work of that section.
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Protect all stored and installed units from job site debris and impact.
B. Units damaged during storage shall be replaced if beyond repair to restore its structural
adequacy.
END OF SECTION 03320
PRECAST CONCRETE U-LINTELS AND SILLS 03320-Page 2 of 2
. APA 03.07 SECTION 04200 Training Building Fire Station #48
UNIT MASONRY
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply this Section.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide labor, material, equipment and perform operations necessary for, and
incidental to, erection of masonry work.
B. Related sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this
section:
1. - Division 3 section "Cast-in-Place Concrete"
C. Products installed but not furnished under this Section Include the following:
1. Steel lintels in unit masonry are specified in Division 5 Section "Metal
Fabrication".
2. Wood nailers and blocking built into unit masonry are specified in Division 6
Section "Rough Carpentry".
3. Reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing are specified in Division 7 Section
Flashing and Sheet Metal".
4. Hollow metal frames In unit masonry openings are specified in Division 8
Section "Steel Doors and Frames".
5. Hollow metal frames In unit masonry openings are specified in Division 8
Section "Custom Hollow Metal Work".
6. Sealants
1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths (f m):
1. fm = 1500 psi on net area.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for review, manufacturers literature and/or drawings of material that is pre-
fabricated or pre-assembled.
1. Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other
manufactured product indicated.
2. Shop drawings for reinforcing detailing fabrication, bending, and placement of
unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of
Concrete Reinforcing" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of
bent bars, and arrangement of masonry reinforcement.
3. Submitted shop drawings must be checked and signed by the General
Contractor.
?J
UNIT MASONRY 04200-Page 1 of 12
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
4. Material certificates signed by manufacturer and Contractor certifying that
each type of masonry unit complies with requirements specified in referenced
unit masonry standard, including fire performance characteristics.
5. Hot weather construction procedures evidencing compliance with
requirements specified in referenced unit masonry standard.
6. Results from tests and inspections performed by Owner's representatives will
be reported promptly and in writing to Architect and Contractor.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Unit masonry standard: ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 "Specifications for Masonry Structures".
B. Fire performance characteristics: Where indicated, provide materials and construction
identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistances has been determined per
ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting organization, by equivalent concrete
masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Single source responsibility for masonry units: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform
quality, including color for exposed masonry, from the manufacturer for each
cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate.
D. The contractor shall retain a qualified testing laboratory to perform the following tests:
1. Sample and test grout in accordance with ASTM C1019 for each 5000 square
foot of masonry.
2. Slump tests - ASTM C143.
E. When requested by the Architect/Engineer, a qualified testing laboratory shall be
retained to perform masonry prism test in accordance with ASTM E447, Method B,
modified as follows:
1. Prisms shall be stack bond, one unit long and thick with a full mortar bed.
2. Limit heighttthickness ratio from 1.33 - 5.00
3. Provide a minimum of one joint.
One set of three (3) prisms prior to construction and during construction for each
5000 square feet of wall.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver masonry material to project in undamaged condition.
B. Store and handle masonry units off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location to
prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes,
contaminants, corrosion, and other causes. If units become wet, do not place until
units are in an air-dried condition.
C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in dry location.
D. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained
and contamination avoided.
E. Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent corrosion and
accumulation of dirt and oil.
UNIT MASONRY 04200-Page 2 of 12
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry
when construction is not in progress.
B. Extend cover to minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in
place.
C. When: one wythe of multi-wythe masonry walls is completed In advance of other
wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe
and hold cover in place.
D. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads
for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.
E. Stain prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to
be left exposed or painted. Remove immediately any grout, mortar, and soil that come
in contact with such masonry.
F. Protect base of walls from rain splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of
covering spread on ground and over wall surface.
G. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
H. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted
and integral finish from mortar droppings.
1. Hot weather construction: Comply with referenced unit masonry standard.
PART2 GENERAL
2.01 MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements specified in
this Section applicable to each material indicated.
2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. General: Comply with requirements indicated below applicable to each form of
concrete masonry required.
B. Masonry Units for Fire-Rated Walls
1: Provide fire-rated units which are rated product of manufacturer listed in latest
revision of building materials list, published by UL. In lieu of above rating,
furnish fire resistive units on basis of examination, tests and report by
nationally recognized testing agency acceptable to governing authorities and
codes having jurisdiction. Report must state that units proposed to be
furnished are equivalent in fire rating to those products furnished by
producers in above UL building materials list.
C. Size: Provide concrete masonry units complying with requirements indicated below for
size that are manufactured to specified face dimensions within tolerances specified in
the applicable referenced ASTM specification for concrete masonry units.
UNIT MASONRY 04200-Page 3 of 12
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
D. Concrete masonry units: Manufactured to specified dimensions of 3/8 inch less than
nominal widths by nominal heights by nominal lengths indicated on drawings.
E. Provide Type II, non-moisture controlled units.
F. Exposed faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Hollow load-bearing concrete masonry units: ASTM C 90, Grade N and as follows:
1. Unit compressive strength: Provide units with minimum average net area
compressive strength indicated below. Not less than the unit compressive
strengths required to produce concrete unit masonry construction of
compressive strength indicated.
2. Use inspection and cleanout holes at bottom of wall reinforced vertical cells
for grouting lifts over 5 feet high. Cleanout holes should be 3" minimum, see
ACI 530.1-02, Section 3.2F. See grout space requirements for various grout
pour heights in ACI 530.1-02, Section 3.5C with Table 7. See Florida
Building Code page 35.1
H. Weight classification: Normal weight
2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Mortar - Type M or S
B. Grout - 2500 psi at 28 days
C. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Provide natural color. lei
D. Ready-mixed mortar: Cementitious materials, water, and aggregate complying with
requirements specified in this article, combined with set controlling admixtures to
produce a ready-mixed mortar complying with ASTM C 270.
E. Hydrated lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
F. Aggregate for mortar. ASTM C 144, except for joints less than 1/4 inch use aggregate
graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve.
G. Aggregate for grout: ASTM C 404.
H. Water: Clean and potable.
2.04 REINFORCING STEEL
A. General: Provide reinforcing steel complying with requirements of referenced unit
masonry standard and this article, formed from the following:
1. Galvanized carbon steel wire, coating class as required by referenced unit
masonry standard for application indicated.
B. Description: Welded wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and
plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated
comer an tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below:
1. Wire diameter for side rods: 0.1483 inch (9 gage).
UNIT MASONRY 04200-Page 4 of 12
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
C. For single wythe masonry provide type as follows with single pair of side rods:
1. Ladder design with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches
O.C.
D. For multi-wythe masonry provide type as follows:
1. Ladder design with perpendicular cross spaced not more than 16 inches O.C.
2. Number of side rods for multi wythe concrete masonry: One side rod for each
face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches or less in nominal width.
E. Tab design with single pair of side rods and rectangular box type cross ties spaced
not more than 16 inches O.C., with side rods spaced for embedment within each face
shell of backup wythe and ties extended to engage the outer wythe by at least 1-1/2"
inches.
F. Use units with adjustable two piece rectangular ties where horizontal joints of facing
wythe do not align with those of backup by more than and where indicated.
G. Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering joint reinforcement that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. AA Wire Products/Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
2. Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
3. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America
2.05 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. General: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles that comply with
requirements for metal and size of reference unit masonry standard and this article.
B. Galvanized carbon steel wire: ASTM A 82, coating class as required by referenced
unit masonry standard for application indicated.
C. Wire diameter. 0.1875 inch.
D. Galvanized heavy thickness steel sheet: ASTM A 635 (commercial quality) hot-rolled
carbon steel sheet hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 525,
Class B3, for rigid anchors fabricated from steel sheet or strip with a thickness of
0.180 inch and greater.
E. Steel plates and bars: ASTM A 36, hot dipped galvanized to comply with ASTM A
123 or ASTM A 153, Class B3, as applicable to size and form indicated.
F. Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1. Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
2. Heckman Building Products, Inc.
3. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
is
UNIT MASONRY 04200-Page 5 of 12
APA 03.07 . Training Building Fire Station #48
2.06 BENT WIRE TIES
A. Individual units prefabricated from bent wire to comply with requirements indicated
below:
1. Tie shape for hollow masonry units laid with cells vertical: Rectangular with
closed ends and not less than 4 inches wide.
B. Type for masonry where coursing between wythes align: Unit ties bent from one piece
of wire.
C. Type for masonry where coursing between wythes does not align: Adjustable ties
composed of two parts, one with pintles, the other with eyes, maximum misalignment
1-1/4 inches.
2.07 ADJUSTABLE ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL WORK
A. General: Two piece assemblies as described below allowing vertical or horizontal
differential movement between wall and framework parallel to plane of wall, but
resisting tension and compression forces perpendicular to it.
B. For anchorage to concrete framework, provide manufacturers standard with dovetail
anchor section formed from sheet metal and triangular shaped wire ties section
seized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face and as follows:
1. Wire diameter: 0.1875 inch
2.08 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS
A. Unit type masonry inserts in concrete: Cast iron or malleable iron inserts of type and
sized indicated.
B. Dovetail slots: Furnished dovetail slots, with filler strips, or slot size indicated,
fabricated from 0.0336 inch (22 gage) sheet metal.
2.09 POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS
A. Anchors as described below, with capacity to sustain, without failure, load imposed
within factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488,
conducted by a qualified independent testing laboratory.
1. Type: Chemical anchors
2. Type: Expansion anchors
B. Corrosion protection: Carbon steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B
633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (5 microns) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild).
C. For cast-in-place and post-installed anchors in concrete: Capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to 4 times loads imposed by masonry.
D. For post-installed anchors in grouted concrete masonry units: Capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to 6 times loads imposed by masonry.
•
UNIT MASONRY 04200-Page 6 of 12
0 APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Non-metallic expansion joint strips: Pre-molded filler strips complying with ASTM D
1056, Type 2 (dosed cell), Class A (cellular rubber and rubber-like materials with
specific resistance to petroleum base oils), Grade 1 (compression deflection range of
2-5 psi), compressible up to 35 percent, of width and thickness indicated, formulated
from the following material:
1. Neoprene
2. Urethane
3. Polyvinyl chloride
B. Pre-formed control joint gaskets: Materials as indicated below, designed to fit
standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and
configuration as indicated.
1. Styrene-Butadiene rubber compound: ASTM D 2000, Designation 2AA-805
2. Polyvinyl Chloride: ASTM D 2287, General Purpose Grade, Type PVC-65406
C. Bond breaker strips: Asphalt saturated organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D
226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
2.11 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Job mixed detergent solution: Solution of trisodium phosphate (112 cup dry measure)
dissolved in one gallon of water.
B. Job mixed muriatic solution: Solution of 1 part muriatic acid and 10 parts clean water,
mixed in a non-metallic container with acid added to water.
C. Proprietary acidic cleaner: Manufacturer's standard strength, general purpose cleaner
designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction
stains from new masonry surfaces of type indicated below without discoloring or
damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer of
masonry units being cleaned.
D. For masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a
concentrated blend of surface acting acids, cheating, and wetting agents..
E. For masonry subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a liquid
blend of organic and Inorganic acids and special inhibitors.
F. Available products: Subject to compliance with requirements, a product that may be
used to dean until masonry surfaces includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. "Sure Wean No. 600 Detergent", ProSoCo, Inc.
2. "Sure Jean No. 101 Lime Solvent", ProSoCo, Inc.
3. "Sure Klean Vana Trol", ProSoCo, Inc.
2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MACES
UNIT MASONRY 04200-Page 7 of 12
APA 03.07 Training Building Fine Station #48
A. General: Do not add admixtures including coloring i ments air-entraining agents,
antifreeze compounds, or admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
C. Procedures of ASTM C780 is to be used to test and evaluate mortar and establish
pre-construction datum and quality control testing for types of mortar indicated below:
1. Type M or S
D. Grout for unit masonry: Comply with ASTM C 478 and referenced unit masonry
standard.
2.13 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Concrete masonry unit tests: For each type, class, and grade of concrete masonry
unit Indicated, units will be tested by qualified independent testing laboratory for
strength, absorption, and moisture content per ASTM C 1400 if required by Architect.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other specific conditions, and other conditions affecting
performance of unit masonry.
B. Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping
connections prior to installation. 01
C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Mix mortar and grout in power driven, drum type mixers. Operate mixer a minimum of 5
minutes after addition of all materials.
B. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other masonry construction to the
full thickness shown. Build single wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry
units, using units of nominal thickness indicated.
C. Build chases and recesses as shown or required to accommodate items specified in
this and other sections of the specifications. Provide not less than 8 inches of
masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent
chases and recesses. Coordinate masonry with all adjacent work of other trades.
D. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After
installation of equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately
adjacent to the opening.
E. Cut masonry units with motor driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges.
Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining constructions.
Use full size units without cutting where possible.
UNIT MASONRY 04200-Page 8 of 12
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
F. Matching existing masonry: Where applicable, match coursing, bonding, color, and
texture of new masonry with existing masonry.
G. Do not use masonry units with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations or other defects.
3.03 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Comply with construction tolerances of ACI 530 or N.C.M.A.
3.04 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Layout walls-in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform
joint widths and for accurate locating of openings, movement type joints, returns, and
offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at comers,, jambs, and where
possible at other locations.
B. Lay up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately
spaced and coordinated with other construction.
C. Bond pattern for exposed masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond
pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4 inch horizontal face dimensions at
corners or jambs.
1. One half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in
courses above and below.
D. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bounded by
lapping not less than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at
comers. Do not use units with less than nominal 4 inch horizontal face dimensions at
corners or jambs.
E. Stopping and resuming work: In each course, rack back 1/2 unit length for one-half
running bond or 1/3 unit length for one -third running bond; do not tooth. Clean
exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly (if required), and
remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.
F. Re-temper mortar as necessary to keep plastic. Use no mortar after setting has begun
or after 2 1/2 hours of initial mixing.
G. Built-in work: As construction progresses, built-in items specified under this and other
sections of the specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
H. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless
otherwise indicated.
i. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a
layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
J. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 3 courses (24 inches) under
bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
K. Reinforced vertical concrete blocks cells, grouting solid where indicated on plan.
3.05 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
UNIT MASONRY 04200-Page 9 of 12
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: With full mortar coverage on horizontal et
and vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all
courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be
filled with grout. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread
out full mortar bed including areas under cells.
3.06 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Install
longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch
of exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches.
B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Provide continuity at comers and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and
'T' sections. Cut and bed reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for
continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special
conditions.
D. Provide horizontal joint reinforcement at doors and windows for first and second block
course above and below apertures. Run reinforcing continuous or extend two feet
from aperture edge.
3.07 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural
members to comply with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch in width between masonry and
structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of
mortar or other rigid materials.
2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in
masonry joints and attached to structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and
26 inches o.c. horizontally.
3.08 MOVEMENT (CONTROL AND EXPANSION) JOINTS
A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build in
related items as masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through
movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or
partition movement.
B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:
1. Fit bond breaker strips on in ends of block units on one side of control joint.
Fill the joint with mortar and rake joints in exposed faces.
3.09 LINTELS
A. Install steel lintels where indicated.
B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than V-0" for
brick size units and 2'-0" for block size units are shown without structural steel or other
UNIT MASONRY 04200-Page 10 of 12
•
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
supporting lintels. Provide reinforced precast concrete lintels. Cure precast lintels
before handling and installation.
C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
3.10 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
A. General: Install reinforced unit masonry to comply with requirements or referenced
unit masonry standard.
B. Temporary formwork: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry
elements during construction. Contractor is completely responsible for the proper
design and construction of all temporary forms and bracing.
C. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make
sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms
to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
D. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient
strength to resist grout pressure.
E. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on
them during construction.
3.11 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or
otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match
adjoining units and in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of
replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes,
and completely fill with mortar. Point up all joints including comers, openings, and
adjacent construction to provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for application
of sealants.
C. Final cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as
follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and non-metallic
scrape hoes or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before
proceeding with cleaning of masonry.
3. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner
by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or
waterproof masking tape.
4. Wet all surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners
promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean concrete masonry by means of cleaning method indicated in N.C.M.A.
TEK 45 applicable to type of stain present on exposed surfaces.
•
UNIT MASONRY 04200-Page 11 of 12
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
D. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable
to Installer, that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at time of
substantial completion.
END OF SECTION 04200
UNIT MASONRY 04200-Page 12 of 12
APA 03.07 SECTION 05120 Training Building Fire Station #48
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. All requirements of the general provisions of the contract including General and
Supplementary Conditions, Division 0 and Division 1 forms a part of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. SCOPE OF WORK
1. This Section includes fabrication, delivery, unload and store in locations
directed and erect all structural steel work, as shown on drawings and
specified, including schedules, notes, and details showing size and location
of members, typical connections, and types of steel required.
B. Related work not specified under this subdivision:
1. Steel joist
2. Setting of anchor bolts, cast in concrete, or masonry.
3. Metal fabrications.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
is A. Submit for review, complete shop drawings covering fabrication and erection of all
work under this subdivision, including schedules, notes, and details showing size and
location of members, typical connections, and types of steel required.
B. Submitted shop drawings must be checked and signed by the General Contractor.
C. Test reports conducted on shop and field bolted and welded connections. Include
data on type(s) of test conducted and test results.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and standards: Comply with applicable provisions of the latest issue of the
following, except as otherwise indicated:
1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) "Code of Standard Practice
for Steel Buildings and Bridges" - except paragraph 4.2.1. AISC
"Specification for Structural Steel Buildings", including "Commentary".
2. "Specifications and Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts"
approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections.
3. Structural Welding Code (AWS D1.1)
4. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)
B. Qualifications for welding work: Qualify welding procedures and welding operations in
accordance with AWS "Qualification" requirements.
C. Welders to have current certificates, If re-certification of welders is required, re-testing
will be Contractor's responsibility.
0
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - Page 1 of 5
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress or work.
Store on site only in authorized locations.
B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-
place concrete or masonry, in ample time to not to delay work.
C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel
members off ground. Protect steel members and packaged materials from exposure
to the weather.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Misc. structural shapes, plates, etc...: ASTM A 36
B. Structural beams, columns, etc...: ASTM A36 or ASTM A992
GR.50 - Refer to structural drawings.
C. Hot-formed steel tubing: ASTM A 501
D. Steel pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B; or ASTM A501
E. Anchor bolts: ASTM A 307, non-headed type, with nuts and washers.
F. Unfinished threaded fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular low-carbon steel bolts,
nuts, and washers. Provide hexagonal heads.
G. High strength threaded fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon
nuts, and hardened washers, complying with ASTM A325.
H. Electrodes for welding: Comply with AWS Code. Use E70XX electrodes.
1. Grout: non-shrink, non-metallic, flowable or plastic with minimum of 7,000 psi at 28
days in accordance with CRD-C 621, Army Corps of Engineers.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as
indicated on final shop drawings. Properly mark-match materials for field assembly.
Fabricate for delivery sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling
of materials.
B. Work shall be executed by skilled workmen under experienced supervision.
C. Connections: Weld or bolt shop connections.
D. Bolt field connections with high-strength bolts, except where welded connections are
indicated.
E. Field verify all existing dimensions and elevations prior to fabrication.
F. High strength bolted construction: Install high strength threaded fasteners in
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - Page 2 of 5
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
accordance with AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 Bolts".
Use bearing type bolts with threads included in shear plane.
G. Welded construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance, and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
H. Holes for other work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel
framing and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on
final shop drawings.
2.03 SHOP PAINTING
A. General: Shop paint all structural steel, except anchor bolts and surfaces to be field
welded.
B. Paint all members after fabrication, except where surfaces would be inaccessible for
surface prep and painting.
C. Apply paint in sufficient volume or coats to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 3
but not more than 5 mils.
D. Surface preparation: Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council
(SSPC - SP3 Power Tool Cleaning).
E. Proprietary Paints
1. Gray metal alkyd-oll primer of any of the following:
Manufacturer Designation
Porter No. 298
Mobile No. 1317812
Tinemec No. 1009
Ameron No. 5102 Amercoat
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspections at tests in
mill, shop, and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections
and tests will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and
fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements.
B. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components that do not comply.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ERECTION
A. Must conform to the applicable provisions of AISC specifications.
B. Temporary planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary
to effectively complete work.
C. Setting bases and bearing plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of
bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - Page 3 of 5
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
surface of base and bearing plates.
D. All anchor bolts shall be built into connections work in advance.
E. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on
leveling nuts. Do not use wedges of shims.
F. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.
Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding cut off flush with edge of base or
bearing plate prior to packing with grout.
G. Field assembly: Set structural frame accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align
and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before
permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in
permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate
for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
H. All bolts, including anchor bolts, shall have enough projection to expose not less than
1-1/2 threads after nuts is tightened. Level and plumb individual members of structure
within specified AISC tolerances.
1. If steel is damaged or does not fit-up, Contractor shall submit proposed corrective
measures for review by Engineer.
J. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins. Drill or ream
holes that must be enlarged to accommodate next larger fastener, where possible.
K. The use of a gas cutting torch in field for correcting fabrication errors in primary
structural members will not be permitted. }
L. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
where shop coat was damaged. Spot and prime areas using same material as used
for shop coat.
M. Set all members so that, in their final location, level, plumbness and alignment are
within the tolerances prescribed by AISC Code.
3.02 QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing and inspection agency shall be retained to inspect structural
steel members high strength bolted connections and welded connections.
B. Testing agency shall conduct and interpret tests, state in each report whether test
specimens comply with requirements, and specifically state any deviations therefrom.
Submit 3 copies of each report to Owner's representative.
C. Provide access for testing agency to places where structural steel work is begin
fabricated or produced so that required inspection and testing can be accomplished.
D. Minimum required testing:
1. Visually inspect all structural steel beams, columns, etc.
2. Visually inspect all bolted and welded connections.
3. Test all beam or column splices.
4. Test a representative sample of all full or partial penetration welds.
•
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - Page 4 of 5
a APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
E. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work that inspections have indicated to be not
in compliance with requirements. Perform additional tests, at Contractors expenses,
as necessary to reconfirm any non-compliance of original work and to show
compliance of corrected work.
3.03 FINAL CLEANUP
A. All temporary guys, braces, falswork, cribbing, rubbish and other debris are to
be removed upon completion of erection.
END OF SECTION 05120
•
11
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - Page 5 of 5
APA 03.07
PART 1
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
1.03
A.
B.
each
C.
D.
E.
1.04
Training Building Fire Station #48
SECTION 05310
STEEL DECK
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, Including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this section.
DESCRIPTION
SCOPE OF WORK
1. This section includes fabrication, delivery, unload and store in locations
directed and erect all roof deck units as shown on drawings and specified.
SUBMITTALS
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division
1 Specification section.
Product data including manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for
type of decking and accessories.
Shop drawings showing layout and type of deck units, anchorage details, and
conditions requiring closure strips, supplementary framing, sump pans, cant strips, cut
openings, special jointing, and other accessories.
Submitted shop drawings must be checked and signed by the General Contractor.
Welder certificate: See Section 05120 for certification submittal requirement.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and standards: Comply with provisions of the following Codes and Standards,
except as otherwise indicated:
1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), "Specification for the Design of Cold-
Formed Steel Structural Members".
2. American Welding Society (AWS), D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet
Steel".
3. Steel Deck Institute (SDI), "Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks
and Roof Decks".
B. Qualification of field welding: Use qualified welding processes and welding operators
in accordance with "Welder Qualifications" procedures of AWS. Welded decking in
place is subject to inspection and testing.
C. FM listing: Provide steel roof deck units that have been evaluated by Factory Mutual
System and are listed in "Factory Mutual Approval Guide" for "Class I" fire-rated
construction.
D. See Structural Steel 05120, 3.02 for testing requirements.
STEEL DECK 05310 - Page 1 of 4
s.
•
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCTS
A. Roof deck to be 1-1/2 inch deep, 22 gauge, wide rib (Type B) with galvanized finish.
Minimum properties are as follows. Computation of properties shall reflect the
"Effective Compress Flange Width" concept.
22 Gauae
1 = 0.169 in." (4)
Sp = 0.189 in .'k (')
S„ = 0.192 in.
Maximum live load deflection = 1/240 of span.
Maximum working stress = 20 ksi
B. Floor deck to be 2 Inches deep, 20 gauge, galvanized permanent composite form
deck. Minimum properties are as follows:
20 Gauge
1 = 0.418 in." (4)
SP = 0.355 in."
S„ = 0.360 in."
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to
the following:
1. Marlyn Steel Products, Inc.
2. H. H. Robertson Company
3. Vulcraft Div., Nucor Corporation
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Steel for galvanized metal deck units: A653 Grade 33 with coating designation G60.
B. Miscellaneous steel shapes: ASTM A 36.
C. Sheet metal accessories: ASTM A 924, galvanized, G60.
D. Galvanizing repair. Where galvanized surfaces are damaged, prepare surfaces and
repair in accordance with procedures specified in ASTM A 780.
E. Flexible closure strips: Manufacturers standard mineral fiber closures.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. General: Form deck units in lengths to span three or more supports, with flush,
telescoped, or nested 2 inch laps at ends and interlocking or nested side laps, of
metal thickness, depth, and width as indicated.
U
STEEL DECK 05310 - Page 2 of 4
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
B. Roof deck units: Provide deck configurations that comply with SDI "Specification and
Commentary for Steel Roof Deck".
C. Roof sump pans: Fabricate from single piece of 0.071 inch min. (14 gauge)
galvanized sheet steel with level bottoms and sloping sides to direct water flow to
draining. Provide sump pans of adequate size to receive roof drains and with bearing
flanges not less than 3 inches wide. Recess pans not less than 1-1/2 inches below
roof deck surfaces unless otherwise shown or required by deck configuration. Holes
for drains will be cut in the field by others.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Delivery and storage: Deliver deck to job site in bundles and store off ground with one
end elevated for water drainage. Cover with waterproof covering, ventilated to avoid
condensation.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations, shop drawings, and as specified herein.
B. Place deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with end
accurately aligned and bearing on supporting members before being permanently
fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks.
C. Align deck units for entire length of run of cells and with close alignment between
cells at ends of abutting units. i
D. Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp or
deflection.
E. Suspended ceiling, light fixtures, ductwork, piling or other utilities shall not be
suspended from decking.
F. Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in locating decking bundles to
prevent overloading of structural members.
G. Fasten roof deck to supporting steel by welding. See drawings for weld pattern.
H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc weld,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welded work.
Minimum puddle welded size = 5/8 inch diameter.
1. Use care in selecting electrodes and amperage to provide positive weld and to
prevent blow-out holes.
J. Use welding washers for all decking 24 gage or thinner.
K. Mechanically fasten side laps of adjacent deck units between supports with No. 10
self-tapping machine screws.
L. Uplift loading: Install and anchor roof deck units to resist gross uplift loading. See
plan for uplift loading requirements.
STEEL DECK 05310 - Page 3 of 4
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
M. Cutting and fitting: Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work
projecting through or adjacent to the decking, as shown.
N. Reinforcement at openings: Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure
pieces as required for strength, continuity of decking, and support of other work
shown.
0. Roof sump pans: Place over openings provided in roof decking and weld to top
decking surface. Space weld not more than 12 inches o.c. with at least one weld at
each comer. Detail on architectural drawings.
P. Closure strips: Provide metal closure strips at open uncovered ends and edges of
roof decking and in voids between decking and other construction. Weld into position
to provide a complete decking installation.
Q. Touch-up painting: After decking installation, wire brush, clean, and paint scarred
areas, welds, and rust spots on top and bottom surfaces of decking units and
supporting steel members.
R. Touch-up galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint applied in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
•
END OF SECTION 05310
is
STEEL DECK 05310 - Page 4 of 4
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
SECTION 05410
PRE-ENGINEERED STRUCTURAL STUD TRUSSES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. SCOPE OF WORK
1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services for fabrication, delivery,
unload and store in locations directed and erect all stud trusses shown and
specified to include the following:
a. Gable-shaped trusses.
b. Hip and girder trusses at hip ends of roof.
C. Scissors trusses.
d. Monopitch trusses.
e. Parallel chord trusses.
f. Piggy back trusses.
?y
B. Related work not specified under this subdivision:
1.03
'A.
1.04
A.
B.
1. Roof sheathing is specified in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" or on the
structural drawings.
2. Setting anchor bolts, weld plates, cast-in-concrete or 6)
3. Steel framing for walls and partitions specified in Section 05400.
DEFINITIONS
Prefabricated cold-formed steel trusses include planar, structural units
consisting of connected members that are fabricated from structural studs and that
have been cut and assembled prior to delivery to the project site.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Codes and Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of the latest issue of the
following, except as otherwise indicted:
1. AISI - Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual
2. ASTM A-653-94 SQ Grade 33 with coating designation G60 steel sheet, zinc
coated (galvanized) by the hot dip process, general requirements.
3. AWS "Code for Welding in Building Construction, 131.3".
4. ANSI 249.1 - 1973 "Safety in Welding and Cutting".
5. ASTM A-568 Standard specification for general requirements for steel,
carbon, and high strength low-alloy hot rolled sheet and cold rolled sheet.
6. AISC "Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural
Steel for Buildings", latest edition.
Welder Qualification
0
05410-Page 1 of 4
PRE-ENGINEERED STRUCTURAL STUD TRUSSES
APA 03.07 Training Building Fine Station #48
1. Qualify welding procedures and operations in accordance with AWS
"Qualification" requirements.
2. Welders must have current certificates. If re-certification of welders is
required, re-testing will be the contractor's responsibility.
C. Single-Source Engineering Responsibility: Provide trusses engineered by the
stud manufacturer to support superimposed dead and live loads indicated, with
design approved and certified by a qualified professional engineer.
D. Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer legally authorized to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated that have resulted in the installation of
stud trusses similar to those of this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.
E. Fabricator's Qualifications: A firm that complies with the following
requirements for quality control and is experienced in prefabricating stud trusses
similar to those of this Project that have a record of successful in-service
performance:
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for review, complete shop drawings covering details and erection of all
work under this subdivision, including pitch, span, overhang, configuration, and
spacing for each type of truss required plus size of all members. Shop drawings are
to include temporary and permanent bracing requirements designed by the truss
engineer.
B. Submit design calculations with shop drawings including load, allowable
stresses, design criteria and other information needed for review that shall bear the
signed seal of a licensed Florida engineer.
C. Submit manufacturer's product information on material and accessories,
including other data that may be required for compliance with performance
requirements specified herein.
D. . Submitted shop drawings must be checked and signed by the General
Contractor.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and
to avoid delaying work of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses.
B. Handle and store trusses with care and comply with manufacturer's
instructions to avoid damage from bending, overturning, or other cause which
trusses are not designed to resist or endure.
1.07 Component Design
A. In accordance with AISA Specification of the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members, latest edition, no composite action shall be considered between collateral
material or roof decking.
r?
PRE-ENGINEERED STRUCTURAL STUD TRUSSES 05410-Page 2 of 4
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
B. Truss members and connections shall be designed for all loads shown on the
contract documents including live, dead, wind, and concentrated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Fabricate metal framing components of structural quality sheet steel with a minimum
yield point of 40,000 psi for studs, and 33,000 psi for runners; ASTM A 446 and A
570.
B. Provide galvanized finish to metal framing components complying with ASTM A 653
with a G60 coating.
C. Minimum gauge requirement = 18 gauge.
2.02 "C" SHAPED STUDS
A. Manufacturer's standard structural steel studs of size and shape, indicated, with
nominal 1-5/8" flange and minimum 1/2" flange return lip. See drawings for gauge.
2.03 AVAILABLE PRODUCTS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the
work include, but are not limited to:
1. Unimast, Inc. or U.S. Gypsum Company
2. Deitrick Industries or Wheeling Corrugating Company
3. Dale/Incur Industries
2.04 FABRICATION
GENERAL
A. Components may be prefabricated into trusses prior to erection. Assemble members
plumb, square, true to line and braced against racking with joints welded or
screwed. Handle prefabricated trusses in a manner to prevent damage or distortion.
B. Splicing of components shall not be permitted.
C. Welding members lighter than 18 gauge will not be permitted.
2.05 FASTENING
A. Attach all components by welding or screws as recommended by manufacturer. No
bolts, rivets, powder-driven shots, or similar devices shall be used for permanent
fastening.
PART 111 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install metal framing system in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed or
written instruction and recommendations. Employ authorized erectors approved by
the manufacturer to do all installation work.
PRE-ENGINEERED STRUCTURAL STUD TRUSSES 05410-Page 3 of 4
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
3.02 ERECTION
A. General: Erect and brace trusses to comply with applicable requirements of
referenced AISC standards.
B. Where trusses do not fit, return them to fabricator and replace with trusses of
correct size; do not alter trusses in the field.
C. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs vertical (plumb) and parallel to each
other, located accurately at design spacings indicated.
D. Hoist trusses in place by means of lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of
trusses required, exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by
out-of-plane bending or other causes.
E. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points to comply with methods and
details indicated.
F. Install permanent bracing and related components to enable trusses to maintain
design spacing, withstand live and dead loads including lateral loads, and to comply
with other indicated requirements.
G. Do not cut or remove truss members.
H. Immediately after erection, clean any field welds connections and abraded
areas where galvanized coating was damaged. Repair these areas with a
galvanizing repair paint applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1. Set all members so that, in their final location, level, plumbness and alignment are
within the tolerances prescribed by the AISC Code.
3.03 Final Cleanup
A. Temporary guys, braces, falsework, cribbing and any debris are to be removed
when erection is completed.
END OF SECTION 05410
•
PRE-ENGINEERED STRUCTURAL STUD TRUSSES 05410-Page 4 of 4
APA 03.07
SECTION 05521- PIPE RAILINGS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Aluminum pipe railings.
Training Building Fire Station #48
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads
and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:,
1. Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ & applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 2001bf applied in any direction.
C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 501bf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft..
b. Uniform load of 251bf/sq. ft. applied horizontally.
C. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For grout and anchoring cement.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
C. Samples: For each exposed finish required.
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Aluminum Pipe Railings:
a. AlumaGuard Corp.
b. ATR Technologies, Inc.
C. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc.
d. Braun, J. G., Company; a division of the Wagner Companies.
e. CraneVeyor Corp.
£ Hollaender Manufacturing Company.
g. Moultrie Manufacturing Company.
h. Pisor Industries, Inc.
i. Sterling Dula Architectural Products, Inc.
j. Superior Aluminum Products, Inc.
k. Thompson Fabricating, LLC.
1. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc.
M. Tuttle Aluminum & Bronze.
•
10)
•
PIPE RAILINGS 05521 - 1 of 2
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
n. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies.
2.2 METALS
A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as
supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Aluminum: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for
type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of
alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required.
1. Extruded Structural Pipe: ASTM B 429, Alloy 6063-T6.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded
B. Grout and Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonmetallic grout complying with
ASTM C 1107; or water-resistant, nonshrink anchoring cement; recommended by manufacturer
for exterior use.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with design, dimensions, and details indicated, but not
less than that required to support structural loads.
B. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings
designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
C. Form changes in direction by bending.
D. Form curves by bending in jigs to produce uniform curvature; maintain cross section of member
throughout bend without cracking or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces.
E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Aluminum:
1. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish:
AA-M12C22A41 complying with AAMA 611.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings
accurately in location, alignment, and elevation.
1. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet
2. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel
with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet
B. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry,
wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint
C. Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into formed or core-drilled holes and grouting annular
space.
D. Adjusting and Cleaning:
1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of
shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting.
2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05521
PIPE RAILINGS 05521 - 2 of 2
APA 03.07
SECTION 06160 - SHEATHING
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Roof sheathing.
Training Building Fire Station #48
1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 ROOF SHEATHING
A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior sheathing.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated.
1. For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide fasteners with corrosion-protective coating
having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1. To meet Florida Building Code and Floida State-Approved Roofing System.
2. NES NER 272 for power-driven fasteners.
3. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."
4. Table 234I-B-1, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23-H-B-2, "Wood Structural Panel Roof
Sheathing Nailing Schedule," in ICBO's "Uniform Building Code."
5. Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule," in BOCA's "BOCA National Building Code."
6. Table 2306. 1, "Fastening Schedule," in SBCCI's "Standard Building Code."
7. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),
"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's "International Residential Code for One- and Two-
Family Dwellings."
8. Table 602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table 602.3(2),
"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's "International One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code."
END OF SECTION 06160
•
1*1
11
SHEATHING 06160 - 1 of 1
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station 48
0 SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUNIIVIARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Plastic-laminate cabinets.
2. Plastic-laminate countertops.
B. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips
unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
C. Samples:
1. Plastic-laminates, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of woodwork.
B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards."
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. - Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Wood Products:
1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
2. Particleboard: None to be used.
3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.
B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD' 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as
required by woodwork quality standard
2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural
woodwork
B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602,170 degrees of
opening, self-closing.
C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches (100 mm) long, 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter.
D. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091.
1. Heavy Duty (Grade IB D-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type;
zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides.
E. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 -1 of 3
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station 48
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to
less than 15 percent moisture content.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site.
Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1. Interior Woodwork Grade: Custom.
2. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to remove
splinters and burrs. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
B. Plastic-Laminate Cabinets:
1. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.
2. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate as follows:
a. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS.
b. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS.
C. Edges: Grade VGS.
3. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure
decorative laminate, Grade VGS.
4. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber.
5. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
6. Colors, Patters, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's
full range of solid colors and patterns, matte finish
C. Plastic-Laminate Countertops:
1. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.
2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's
full range of solid colors and patterns, matte finish.
3. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.
4. Core Material at Sinks: Exterior-grade plywood.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in
installation areas. Examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as
required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
B. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for
fabrication of type of woodwork involved.
C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm
in 2400 mm). Shim as required with concealed shims.
D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish
at cuts.
E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation Use
fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with
woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation.
1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16
inches (400 mm) o.c. with toggle bolts through metal backing or metal framing behind
wall finish.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 2 of 3
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station 48
G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through comer blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant
specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
END OF SECTION 06402
P--?
t
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 3 of 3
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Concealed building insulation.
2. Vapor retarders.
3. Sound attenuation insulation around office
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 7, "Metal Roof Panels for Roof Deck Insulation."
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Plenum Rating: Provide glass-fiber insulation where indicated in ceiling plenums whose test
performance is rated as follows for use in plenums as determined by testing identical products
per "Erosion Test" and "Mold Growth and Humidity Test" described in UL 181, or on
comparable tests from another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Erosion Test Results: Insulation shows no visible evidence of cracking, flaking, peeling,
or delamination of interior surface of duct assembly, after testing for 4 hours at 2500-fpm
(13-m/s) air velocity.
2. Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no evidence of mold growth,
delamination, or other deterioration due to the effects of high humidity, after inoculation
with Chaetomium globosium on all surfaces and storing for 60 days at 100 percent
relative humidity in the dark.
1.3 SUBMITTALS ?•
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 or 2, with
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, based on
tests performed on unfaced core on thicknesses up to 4 inches.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Atlas Roofing Corporation.
b. Dow Chemical Company.
C. Rmax, Inc.
2.3 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A. Available Manufacturers: ?.
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1 of 3
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc.
3. Johns Manville.
4. Knauf Fiber Glass.
5. Owens Corning.
B. Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective
membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less);
Category 1(membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil-scrim-
polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face.
C. Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets
in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated:
1. 3 1/2" thick with R-11 rating.
2. 3" thick sound-attenuation glass-fiber blankets.
2.4 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by insulation
manufacturers for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor-retarder facings.
B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.
C. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to
fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic
spaces and vented eaves.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
application indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any
time to ice, rain, and snow.
C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit
tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere
with placement.
D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls,
coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation
encapsulates piping.
E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from
manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units
to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make
up total thickness.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. .
B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to
edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed
installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.
C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless
otherwise indicated.
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 2 of 3
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to
surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.'
D. Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the
following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If
more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit
between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures.
4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at
vented eaves.
5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm),
support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling
flanges to flanges of metal studs.
E. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by attaching furring at 16" o.c., as noted on
drawings.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN WALLS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION
A. Install 3-inch thick, unfaced glass-fiber blanket insulation in walls as indicated on drawings.
END OF SECTION 07210
•
r?
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 3 of 3
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
SECTION 07411- METAL ROOF PANELS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Standing-seam metal roof panels.
2. Gutter and downspouts.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 5 Section "Sheathing" for custom-fabricated and on-site, roll-formed sheet metal
roofing.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 2140.
B. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for
wind-uplift-resistance class indicated.
1. Uplift Rating: UL 90.
C. Structural Performance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies capable of withstanding the
effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions
indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:
1. Wind Loads: As indicated on structural drawings.
2. Deflection Limits: Metal roof panel assemblies shall withstand wind loads with vertical
deflections no greater than 1/240 of the span.
1.3 SUBMITTALS .
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal roof panels; details of edge
conditions, side-seam and endlap joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings,
closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled
work
C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal roof panel assembly indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data and calculations signed
and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
E. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, based on input from installers of the items
involved.
F. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that roof panels comply with
energy performance requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
1. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements.
G. Product test reports.
H. Field quality-control reports.
I. Maintenance data.
J. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Mans standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace metal roof panel assemblies that fail in materials or waimianship within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
METAL ROOF PANELS 07411- 1 of 4
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of
factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Finish Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PANEL MATERIALS
A. Metal Panels: Galvalume; 24 gauge thickness.
1. Surface: Embossed finish.
2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Kyner Polvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF).
B. Panel Sealants:
1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound
sealant tape with release-paper backing; 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal roof panel
manufacturer.
3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
2.2 FIELD-INSTALLED THERMAL INSULATION
A. Unfaced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 591, Type H, compressive strength of
35 psi, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively,
based on tests performed
1. Thickness: 3 inches.
2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: 40 mils thick minimum, consisting of slip-resisting,
polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive,
with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment
manufacturer.
1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F; ASTM D 1970.
2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970.
3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc., Div. of Carlisle Companies Inc.;
CCW WIP 300HT.
b. Grace Construction Products; a unit of Grace, W. R. & Co.; Ultra.
C. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT.
d Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield
e. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment
B. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felts.
C. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application.
2.4 SUBSTRATE BOARDS
A. Plywood: 5/8" thick Refer to Division 5, "Sheathing."
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded
studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed
fasteners with heads matching color of metal roof panels by means of plastic caps or factory-
applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers.
METAL ROOF PANELS 07411- 2 of 4
s
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry
film thickness per coat Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers,
sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
2.6 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS
A. General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and
interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically
attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure
plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation.
1. Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with
ASTM E 1514.
a. Basis-of-Design Product Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Metal
Roofing Contractors., Inc.; MRC 2000 Series, Metal Roof Assembly or
comparable product
2. Profile: Vertical-rib, snap.
3. Material: 24 gauge Galvalume.
a. Exterior Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer.
b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components approved by roof panel manufacturer and as
required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units,
ridge closures, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match
material and finish of metal roof panels unless otherwise indicated.
1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof
panels.
2. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or
closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch-thick, flexible closure strips; cut or
premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or
necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
3. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from
material recommended by manufacturer.
B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material as roof panels, prepainted with coil coating,
minimum 24 gauge. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to
provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to,-eaves, rakes, comers,
bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish
system as adjacent metal roof panels.
C. Gutters: Formed from same material roof panels; 24 gauge. Match profile as indicated on
ddrawings, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required.
Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-long sections, of size and metal thickness according to
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Furnish gutter supports spaced a maximum
of 36 inches o.c., fabricated from same metal as gutters. Provide wire ball strainers of
compatible metal at outlets. Finish gutters to match metal roof panels.
D. Downspouts: Formed from same material as roof panels. Fabricate in 10-foot-long sections,
complete with formed elbows and offsets, of size and metal thickness according to SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual". Finish 3 inch by 4 inch downspouts to match gutters with
a minimum of three straps per downspout
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible,
by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes and as necessary to fulfill indicated
METAL ROOF PANELS 07411- 3 of 4
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural
requirements.
B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full
length of panel.
C. Fabricate metal roof panel side laps with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that
provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that will seal weathertight
and minimize noise from movements within panel assembly.
D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal,
and other characteristics of item indicated
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Insulation and Plywood Sheathing: Install substrate boards over metal roof deck on entire roof
surface. Attach with fasteners as required by signed and sealed engineered drawings.
3.2 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at
each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by
manufacturer.
1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners.
2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation
instructions.
3. Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely
engaging factory-applied sealant.
4. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved, motorized reamer
tool so clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged
3.3 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and
provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with fleshings and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim,
copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips,
and similar items.
2. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written
installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide
concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated
Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather
resistant.
3. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are
installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of metal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal
roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
END OF SECTION 07411
METAL ROOF PANELS 07411- 4 of 4
•
•
•
APA 03.07
SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
Training Building Fire Station #48
A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by
reference to this Section:
1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
2. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
3. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
4. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous
joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-
resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2
articles.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply
with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24):
1. Sealants: 250 g/L.
2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each
liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified.to be
nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to
ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
C. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for
joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone
testing according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 1 of 5
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
to ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will
come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
E. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Acid-Curing Silicone Sealant:
1. Available Products:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant
b. GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS 1700.
C. Tremco; Tremsil 200
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 0.
F. Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant:
1. Available Products:
a. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM 7200.
b. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex - 2c NS TG.
C. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; NP 2.
d. Tremco; Vulkem 227.
e. Tremco; Vulkem 322 DS.
2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, 0.
G. Multicomponent Pourable Urethane Sealant:
1. Available Products:
a. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 550.
b. Meadows, W. R, Inc.; POURTHANE.
C. Pacific Polymers, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 227 High Shore Type I (Self Leveling).
d. Pacific Polymers, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 227 Type I (Self Leveling).
e. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-200.
f. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-270SL.
g. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM 7201.
h. Tremco; THC-901.
i. Tremco; THC-900.
j. Tremco; Vulkem 245.
k. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR 300, Type H.
1. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR 300, Type M.
2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and P (pourable).
3. Use Related to Exposure: T (traffic).
4. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A; and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated,
0.
H. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant:
1. Available Products:
a. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex - la.
b. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Ultra.
C. Sonnebom, Division of ChemRex Inc.; NP 1.
d Tremco; Vulkem 116. •
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 2 of 5
APA 03.07
•
•
Training Building Fire Station #48
3. Class: 25.
4. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, O.
2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type O P, Grade NF.
B. Available Products:
1. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 600.
2. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.
3. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200.
4. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac.
5. Tremco; Tremflex 834.
2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible
with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface
skin), O (open-cell material), B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding
types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and
of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum
sealant performance:
C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying
with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at
temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size
and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to
optimum sealant performance.
D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or
joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-
adhesive tape where applicable.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to
promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants.
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 3 of 5
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
a Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning,
mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound
substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose
particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out
joints with oil-free compressed air.
2. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
a. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,
harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant
manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply
primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to
areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by
cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
B. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for
use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and
conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint •
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform
beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of
sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 4 of 5
•
•
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
H. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after
removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, producing seal
continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient
temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to
sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
I. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
3.3 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joint Sealant Application: Exterior vertical control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
1. Joint Sealant: Single-component nonsag urethane sealant.
2. Joint-Sealant Color: Color as selected by Architect.
B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior perimeter joints between frames of doors and windows.
1. Joint Sealant: Single-component nonsag urethane sealant.
2. Joint-Sealant Color: Color as selected by Architect
C. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead
surfaces.
1. Joint Sealant: Single-component nonsag urethane sealant.
2. Joint-Sealant Color: Color as selected by Architect.
D. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior control and expansion joints in horizontal traffic surfaces of
concrete walks.
1. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent pourable urethane sealant
2. Joint Sealant Color: Color as selected by Architect.
E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior perimeter joints of exterior openings.
1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant
2. Joint Sealant Color: Color as selected by Architect.
F. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors,
and counters.
1. Joint Sealant: Single-component mildew-resistant neutral-curing silicone sealant
2. Joint-Sealant Color: Match color of plumbing fixtures.
G. Joint-Sealant Application: Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior walls and partitions.
1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant
2. Joint Sealant Color: Color as selected by Architect.
H. Joint-Sealant Application: Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior
doors and windows.
1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant
2. Joint-Sealant Color. Color as selected by Architect
END OF SECTION 07920
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 5 of 5
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
SECTION 08100 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The work under this section shall include the famishing of all items shown on the drawings
and as specified, but not limited to, the following.
1. Steel Doors
2. Steel Door Frames
3. Steel Sidelight, Borrowed lite & transom frames
4. Louvers Installed in Steel Doors
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Masonry mortar
B. Finish carpentry
C. Wood Doors and Frames
D. Finish Hardware
E. Glass and Glazing
F. Painting of steel doors and frames
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Steel Doors and Frames in this section must meet all standards as established by the
following listing.
1. Door and Hardware Preparation ANSI 115.1.
2. Life Safety Codes NFPA-101 (Latest edition).
3. Fire Doors and Windows NFPA-80 (Latest edition).
4. Steel Door Institute ANSI/SDI-100 (Latest edition):
1.4 SUBMITTAL
A. Coordinate approved shop drawings with all other trades and manufacturers whose products
are used in conjunction with the Steel Doors and Frames under section 08100.
B. Finish hardware supplier is to famish templates, template reference number and/or physical
hardware to the steel door and frame supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to
receive the finish hardware items.
C. The steel door and frame supplier will famish to the architect (6) complete copies of the
proposed steel door and frames schedule and/or shop drawings. Using the same reference
number for details and openings as those on the contract drawings. After receipt of the
approved door schedule the steel door and frame supplier will make any corrections submit
to the architect (6) sets of corrected schedules, for file and field use.
D. All door openings including wood, aluminum, overhead etc. must be listed on the steel door
schedule. Include details on the following list of items:
1. Frame elevations
2. Door design elevations
3. Frame sections
4. Details of construction
5. Anchorage
6. Opening conditions
7. Joints and connections
8. Hardware locations
E. If any opening is not by the steel door manufacturer only the door opening number should
be shown along with the type of material (alum, wood etc.).
F. Upon request of the architect or for any substitution to this specification, (4) copies of the
door manufacturers catalog cut sheets are to be submitted to the architect before any
material is placed on the job site.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100 - 1 of 5
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide Steel Doors and Frames complying with the Steel Door Institute recommended
specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames ANSIISDI 100.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All steel doors and flames must be properly marked with door opening mark number to
correspond with the schedule.
B. Deliver all the steel doors in cartons and palletized to provide protection during transit and
job storage.
C. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damage-is to be repaired,
provided they are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the architect.
D. Store doors and frames at the building site under cover. Place units on wood sills or on the
floor in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Avoid the use of non-vented plastic or
canvas shelters, which could create a humidity chamber. If the wrapper on the door
becomes wet, remove the carton immediately. Provide a 1/4 inch space between stacked
doors to promote air circulation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers subject to compliance with requirements; provide product by the following:
1. Steelcraft Manufacturing Company
2.2 HARDWARE LOCATIONS AND GENERAL REINFORCEMENTS
A. Locate hardware on doors and frames in accordance with the manufactures standard
location.
B. Steel frames for use with wood doors the hardware preparation on the doors is governed by
its location on the flames. If the doors are factory mortised, the door supplier is responsible
for coordinating hardware locations.
C. Hardware reinforcements are to be in accordance with the minimum standard gages as listed
in SDI-100.
D. Doors shall be mortised, reinforced and function holes provided at the factory in accordance
with the hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier. Through bolt
holes, attachment holes, drilling and tapping for surface hardware, shall be done by others.
2.3 STEEL DOORS
A. Material - Exterior doors and as indicted on the schedule
1. Face Sheets to be made of commercial quality hot dipped zinc coated steel that
complies with ASTM A924 A60. Grade III - 14ga.
2. Vertical edges are to have continuous vertical mechanical interlocking joints at lock
and hinge edges with visible edge seams. The internal portion of the seam shall be
sealed with epoxy.
3. Hinge reinforcement shall be not less than 7gage (3/16") plate 1-1/4" X 9".
Approved equal is a 12 gage continuous channel with formed holes drilled and tapped.
The manufacture to provide test information that this type reinforcement is equal to
a 3/16" or 7 gage plate reinforcement.
4. Reinforce tops and bottoms of all doors with a continuous steel channel not less than
14 gage galvanized A60, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face
sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel shall have a steel closure channel flush
with the face sheets and screwed into the door. Plastic fillers are not acceptable.
5. Doors shall be reinforced, stiffened, sound deadened and insulated with impregnated
kraft honeycomb core completely filling the inside of the doors and laminated to
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100 - 2 of 5
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
inside faces of both panels using contact adhesive applied to both panels and
honeycomb core.
6. Acceptable Manufacturers
a. Steelcraft Manufacturing - L Series with flush top closure.
b. Curries Company - 707T, flush top closure, 12 gage hinge channel.
C. Ceco Door Products - Regent.
2.4 STEEL FRAMES
A. Materials - exterior and as indicted on the schedule.
1. Are to be hot dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM designations A924
A60, 16ga.
2. All frames are to have back welded face seams only of the frame comer or
intersection. Grind and dress smooth the weld area. Apply a factory baked on zinc
rich primer over the grinding area, and finish with a matching prime paint.
3. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Steelcraft Manufacturing - F series
b. Curries Company - M series
c. Ceco Door Products - SF series
B. Materials all other frames as indicted on the schedule.
1. Will comply with ASTM A366-68 or ASTM A569-66T, 16ga.
2. All frames are to have back welded face seams only of the frame corner or
intersection. Grind and dress smooth the weld area. Apply a factory baked on zinc
rich primer over the grinding area, and finish with a matching prime paint.
3. Acceptable Manufactures:
a. Steelcraft Manufacturing - F series
b. Curries Company - M series
c. Ceco Door Products - SF series
C. Fabrication
1. General design and construction
a. Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lites, and other
openings to the size and design as shown on the architectural drawings.
b. All finished work to be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, square, true and
free of defects.
c. Jamb depths, trim, profile and backbends to be as scheduled and shown on
approved shop drawings.
d . When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings shall be
fabricated in sections designed for splicing in the field by others.
e. Hardware reinforcements are to be in accordance with the minimum standard
gages as listed in SDI-100.
f. Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for
template mortised hardware only, in accordance with approved hardware
schedule and template provided by the hardware contractor. Where surface
mounted hardware is to be applied, flames shall have reinforcing plates only; all
drilling, and tapping shall be done by others.
g. Hinge reinforcements, to be 7ga steel.
D. Anchors
1. Floor anchors shall be provided at each jamb.
2. Anchors for in masonry are to be of the wire type.
3. Anchors for stud partitions are to be steel of a suitable design, not less than 18ga
thickness.
4. Dust boxes/mortar guards to be no less than 26 gage.
5. All frames that are welded, to be provided with a steel spreader temporarily attached
to the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling.
Spreader bars are for bracing only not to be used to size the frame opening.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100 - 3 of 5
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
6. Loose glazing stops are to be of 18 gage galvanized at labeled openings and 20 gage
galvanized on non labeled openings, butted at the comer joints and secured to the
frame with countersunk cadmium or zinc-plated screws.
7. Provide 3 silencers on single door and 2 silencers for double door openings.
2.5 PRIME FINISH:
A. Doors and frames are to be cleaned, and chemically treated to insure maximum finish paint
adhesion. All surfaces of the door and flame exposed to view shall receive a coat of rust
inhibiting baked on primer applied at the factory. The finish shall meet the requirements
for acceptance stated in ANSI A224.1 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime
Painted Steel Surfaces." The baked on prime finish is not intended to be the final layer of
protection from the elements. Field painting using a good grade of paints are to be used in
accordance with the recommendations of the door and fiame manufacturer. For specialty
types of finished coatings, the paint supplier should also be consulted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to make sure that all dimensions for
existing opening or existing flames (strike height, hinge spacing, hinge back set, etc.) given
to the steel manufacturer are accurate.
B. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to see that any scratches or disfigurements
caused in shipping or handling are properly cleaned and touched up with a rust inhibiting
primer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Frames
1. Prior to installation, all frames must be checked for rack, twist and out of square
conditions.
2. Place frames prior to enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position,
plumbed and braced securely until permanent anchors are set.
3. Fill frames in masonry walls with mortar.
4. When temperature conditions necessitate an additive to be used in the plaster or
mortar to prevent freezing, the contractor installing the frames will coat the inside of
the frames, in the field, with a corrosion inhibiting bituminous material.
5. ' SDI-105, "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames" and SDI-110
"Standard Steel Doors and Frames for Modular Masonry Construction". shall indicate
the proper installation procedures.
B. Doors
1. Install doors plumb and in true alignment in a prepared opening and fasten them to
achieve the maximum operational effectiveness and appearance.
2. Proper door clearance must be maintained in accordance with SDI-110.
3. Where necessary, only metal hinge shims are acceptable to maintain clearances.
4. "Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware" published by DHI is recommended for
further details.
C. Hardware must be applied in accordance with hardware manufacturer's templates and
instructions.
3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Check and re-adjust operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper condition.
B. Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and
ying primer.
apply to touch-up or compatible air-dr
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100 - 4 of 5
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
3.4 SCHEDULES
A. After installation, copies of the door schedules will be tumed over to the Owner when the
building is accepted.
END OF SECTION 08100
is
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100 - 5 of 5
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
SECTION 08211- FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.
2. Factory finishing flush wood doors.
3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door, elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and
other pertinent data. .
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
C. Samples:
1. Submit manufacturer's standard samples demonstrating door construction.
2. Finish: A set of three illustrating the range of color and grain of the specified door face
materials.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by
an FSC-accredited certification body.
B. Quality Standard: Meet or exceed NWWDA I.S.1-A "Premium Grade" and/or AWI Version 7
"Custom Grade."
C. Warranty: Provide manufacturer's warranty to the following term:
1. Interior solid core doors: "Full life of original installation," including rehanging and
refinishing if doors do not comply with warranty.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
2. Eggers Industries.
3. Weyerhauser Company
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that
do not contain urea formaldehyde.
B. Particleboard-Core Doors:
1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2, made with binder containing no urea-
formaldehyde resin.
2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate
through-bolting hardware.
C. Mineral-Core Doors:
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1 of 3
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced
quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated
2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved
for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting
hardware.
3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved
screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for
exposed edges.
2.3 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:
1. Grade: NWWDA "Premium Grade" or AWI "Custom Grade."
2. Species: Wood Veneer: AWI - A Grade: The veneer species, slice or cut, finish and
matching shall be:
a. White Maple, Plain Sliced, Book Match, Clear Finish / OR
b. Red Oak, Plain Sliced, Book Match, Clear Finish
3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced).
4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.
5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match.
6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening.
7. Core: Particleboard.
8. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive
planed before veneering.
2.4 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES
A. Metal Louvers: 10)
1. Metal and Finish: Extruded aluminum with Class H, clear anodic finish, AA-
M 12C22A31.
B. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed
of 0.048-inch-thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; with baked-enamel- or powder-coated finish; and
approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of
referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1. Comply with requirements in. NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with
applicable requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
2.6 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication,
including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied,
before finishing.
1. Finish. faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish doors
indicated to receive opaque finish.
C. Factory Transparent Finish:
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211- 2 of 3
•
•
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
1. Factory finish doors in accordance with NWWDA G-17 Finish System Description or
AWI Division 1500-S-4 - Finish System Standards. Factory finish to be water-based
stain and ultraviolet (UV) cured polyurethane sealer to comply with EPA Title 5
guidelines for Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) emissions limitations. Finish must
meet or exceed performance standards of TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane. Color shall be a
clear finish as specified in Section 2.3.B.
2. Factory finished doors to be installed just prior to substantial completion.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and
the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim
stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors.
Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting
and machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.
Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or
covering unless otherwise indicated Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4
inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at
Project site..
F. Warranty Tolerances:
1. Conform to NWWDA standards and testing methods for warp, cup, bow, and
telegraphing.
END OF SECTION 08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08211- 3 of 3
APA 03.07
SECTION 08351- OPERABLE PARTITIONS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 ST. A MARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Paired Operable Partitions.
Training Building Fire Station #48
1.2 RELATED WORK BY OTHERS
A. Preparation of opening will be by the General Contractor. Any deviation of site conditions
contrary to approved shop drawings must be called to the attention of the Architect.
B. All header, blocking, support structures, jambs, track enclosures, surrounding insulation, and
sound baffles as required in 1.4 Quality Assurance.
C. Prepunching of support structure in accordance with approved shop drawings.
D. Paint or otherwise finishing all trim and other materials adjoining head and jamb of operable
partitions.
1.3 SUBAMTALS
A. Complete shop drawings are to be provided prior to fabrication indicating construction and
installation details. Shop drawings must be submitted within 60 days after receipt of signed
contract.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preparation of the opening shall conform to the criteria set forth per ASTM E557 Standard
Practice for Architectural Application and Installation of Operable Partitions.
B. The partition STC (Sound Transmission Classification) shall be achieved per the standard test
methods ASTM E90.
C. Noise isolation classifications shall be achieved per the standard test methods ASTM E336 and
ASTM E413.
D. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) ratings shall be per ASTM C423.
E. Rack testing for 10 years. (tensional strength stress test)
F. The manufacturer shall have a quality system that is registered to the ISO 9001 standards.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Proper storage of partitions before installation and continued protection during and after
installation will be the responsibility of the General Contractor.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Partition system shall be guaranteed for a period of two years against defects in material and
workmanship, excluding abuse.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PAIRED OPERABLE PARTITIONS
A. Basis of design product: Hufcor Series 632 paired operable partition; subject to compliance
with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Modernfold, Inc.
2. Panelfold Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Product to be top-supported Series 632 paired panels as manufactured by Hufcor, Inc.
OPERABLE PARTITIONS '08351-1 of 3
•
011.1;
•
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
1. Panels shall be nominally 3" thick, to 48" in width, and hinged in pairs.
2. Panel fasces shall be laminated to appropriate substrate to meet the STC requirement in
2.4 Acoustical Performance.
a. Optional face material (Not all substrates are available for all STC ratings. Consult
your Hufcor Distributor for more information.):
1) Steel
2) Non-steel
3) Medium Density Fiberboard.
b. Horizontal splice: Heights over 16'-3" with non-steel faces require a structural
splice places at approximately 12'-3" from the floor.
3. Frames shall be of 16 gauge painted steel with integral factory applied aluminum vertical
edge and face protection. Optional: Face finish shall wrap around the vertical panel
edges and provide no protective vertical face trim.
4. Vertical sound seals shall be of tongue and groove configuration; ensure panel-to-panel
alignment and prevent sound leaks between panels.
5. Horizontal top seals shall be fixed continuous contact dual 4-finger vinyl. (Option:
Horizontal top seals shall be retractable, provide 1" nominal operating clearance, and
exert upward force when extended. All panels, including pass door panels and lever
closure panels must have top and bottom seals. Not available with automatic bottom
seals.)
6. Horizontal bottom seals shall be retractable, provide up to 2" nominal operating
clearance, and exert downward force when extended. Optional seals:
a. Horizontal bottom seals shall be automatic and provide up to 2" nominal operating
clearance. (Consult your Hufcor Distributor for more information.)
b. Horizontal bottom seals shall be fixed continuous contact dual 4-forger vinyl.
7. Horizontal trim shall be of aluminum.
8. Low profile hinges on basic panels shall be of steel and project no more than 1/4" beyond
panel faces. Each pair of panels to have a minimum of three hinges.
B. Weight of the panels shall be 5.7-10.2 pounds per square foot, based on options selected.
C. Suspension system:
1. Track shall be of clear anodized architectural grade extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T6.
Track design shall provide precise alignment at the trolley running surfaces and provide
integral support alignment at the trolley running surfaces and provide integral support for
adjoining ceiling, soffit, or plenum sound barrier. Track shall be connected to the
structural support by pairs of minimum 3/8" diameter threaded steel hanger rods. Guide
rails and/or track sweep seals shall not be required.
a. Each panel shall be supported by one 4-wheeled carrier. Wheels to be of hardened
steel ball bearings encased with molded polymer tires.
2. Plenum closure by others: Design of plenum closure must permit lifting out of header
panels to adjust track height Plenum closure required for optimum sound control of
partition.
3. Option (available for select layouts - consult your Hufcor Distributor.): The panels shall
be supported by the Unispan prey truss and post system fabricated of steel and
aluminum. Unispan is attached to the building structure for lateral support only. The load
of the truss and partition is supported by end columns and the system transfers the
partition weight to the floor.
D. Finishes
1. Face finish shall be:
a. Standard upgrade fabrics (color shall be selected from manufacturer's standard
color selector):
1) Factory-applied vertical ribbed carpet (N.R.C. 20).
OPERABLE PARTITIONS 08351- 2 of 3
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
2) Factory-applied 100% polyolefin stain resistant fabric
3) DiVISIONSTM stain repellent fabric by Milliken.
2. Exposed metal trim and seal color shall be selected from Hufcor's Standard Trim
selector.
3. Aluminum track shall be clear anodized.
23 OPERATION
A. Panels shall be manually moved from the storage area, positioned in the opening, and seals set
B. Retractable horizontal seals
1. Retractable horizontal seals shall be activated by a removable quick-set operating handle
located approximately 42 inches from the floor in the panel edge.
2. All retractable seals in each hinged pair shall be operated simultaneously.
3. Seal activation requires approximately 15 pounds of force per panel and approximately a
190 degree turn of the removable handle.
C. Automatic floor seals
1. Horizontal seals shall be activated by pressing the edge of the panel into the edge of the
adjacent panel or wall.
2. Seal activation requires approximately 15 pounds of force per panel.
D. Final partition closure to be by:
1. Lever closure panel with expanding jamb which compensates for minor wall
irregularities and provides a minimum of 250 pounds seal force against the adjacent wall
for optimum sound control. The jamb activator shall be located approximately 45 inches
from the floor in the panel and be accessed from either side of the panel. The jamb is
equipped with a mechanical rack and pinion gear drive mechanism and shall extend 4 to
6 inches by turning the removable operating handle.
E. Stack/Store Panels ,
1. Retract seals and move to storage area.
2.4 ACOUSTICAL PERFORMANCE
A. Acoustical performance shall be tested at a laboratory accredited by the U. S. Department of
Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology, under the National Voluntary
Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) and in accordance with ASTM E90 Test
Standards. Standard test panel shall have obtained an STC rating of 47.
1. Complete, unaltered written test report is to be made available upon request.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The complete installation of the operable wall system shall be by an authorized factory-trained
installer and be in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings and manufacturer's
standard printed specifications, instructions, and recommendations.
B. Cleaning
1. All track and panel surfaces shall be wiped clean and free of handprints, grease, and soil.
2. Cartoning and other installation debris shall be removed to onsite waste collection area
provided by others.
C. Training
1. Installer shall demonstrate proper operation and maintenance procedures to Owner's
representative.
2. Operating handle and'Owner's Manuals shall be provided to Owner's representative.
END OF SECTION 08351
OPERABLE PARTITIONS 08351- 3 of 3
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
SECTION 08411- ALUMMUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior storefront framing.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following
performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective
manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:
1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to,
story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
3. Failure includes the following:
a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.
b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
C. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
structural movements to glazing.
d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements.
C. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
f. Failure of operating units.
B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
C. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated
B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work
1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of
moisture in the system to the exterior.
C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
D. Other Action Submittals:
1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier,
detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and
diagrams.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
F. Product test reports.
G. Field quality-control reports.
H. Maintenance data
I. Warranties: Sample of special warranties:
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
. A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-1 of 5
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
C. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop
Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems
similar to those indicated for this Project.
D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by
dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate
to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are
indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction
testing, field testing, and in-service performance.
E. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and
ICC/ANSI A117.1.
F. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single
manufacturer.
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that
fail in materials or worlananship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal
weathering.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide EFCO Corporation
Series D300 Medium Style Doors in 525 Storefront or comparable product by one of the
following:
1. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company.
2. YKK AP America Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221(ASTM B 221M).
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308B 308M.
5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.
2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness
required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Construction: Nonthermal. .
2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
3. Glazing Plane: Center.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 09411 - 2 of 5
•
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from
thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, fabricated from stainless
steel.
D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts,
complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M.
E. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding
flashing compatible with adjacent materials, Dead-soft, 0.018-inch-thick stainless steel,
ASTM A 240/A 240M of type recommended by manufacturer.
F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by
manufacturer for joint type.
2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS
A. Glazing: 1/4" Standard Gray exterior, 0.090 inner layer and 1/4" clear on interior (9/16"
laminated glass).
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded,
of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.
C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.
2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.
1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- overall
thickness, with minimum 0.188-inch-thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile
members. Mechanically fasten comers with reinforcing brackets that are deeply
penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.
2. Door Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch nominal width.
a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches
above floor or ground plane.
3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed
gaskets.
a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12
requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration
of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or
grinding.
C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following
characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08411- 3 of 5
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture
migrating within the system to exterior.
4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior for
spandrel glazing or metal panels.
7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.
E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and
for installing entrance door hardware.
F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest
extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying
finishes.
H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
Shop Drawings.
2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm, AA-M12C22A31,
Class R, 0.010 mm or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration.
6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated
B. Metal Protection:
L Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint '
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.
E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without
warp or rack.
F. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather
stripping.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 09411 - 4 of 5
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door
hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using
concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
END OF SECTION 08411
•
•
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 09411 - 5 of 5
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fixed aluminum-framed windows.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide aluminum windows capable of complying with performance requirements
indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified,
and that are of minimum test size required by AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.
B. Structural Performance: Provide aluminum windows capable of withstanding the effects of the
following loads, based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass
AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test:
1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind
speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to ASCE 7,
Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade
indicated on Drawings.
a. Basic Wind Speed: 156 m.p.h. at 3 gust.
b. Importance Factor: 1.0.
C. Exposure Category: B.
2. Deflection: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less
than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch, whichever is less, at design pressure based on
testing performed according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load
Deflection Test or structural computations.
C. Windborne-Debris Resistance: Provide glazed windows capable of resisting impact from ! y
wndborne debris, based on the pass/fail criteria as determined from testing glazed windows
identical to those specified, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of aluminum window indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other
work, operational clearances, and installation details
C. Samples: For each exposed finish.
D. Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
E. Field quality-control test reports.
F. Product test reports.
G. Maintenance data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products.
B. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and
with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure to meet performance requirements.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 1 of 3
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or
condensation.
C. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware.
d. Deterioration of metals, other materials, and metal finishes beyond normal
weathering.
e. Failure of insulating glass.
2. Warranty Period:
a. Window: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
b. Glazing: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Metal Finish: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide EFCO Corporation
Series 6600 Fixed or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Kawneer; an Alcoa Company.
2. YKK AP America Inc.
2.2 WINDOW
A. Window Type: Fixed.
2.3 GLAZING
A. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal
and complies with requirements for windborne-debris resistance.
1. Glass color: Standard Gray (1/4" gray outside, 0.090 inner layer with 1/4" clear interior.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate aluminum windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing.
B. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and
ventilator.
C. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior.
D. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged ventilators and similar lines of natural water
penetration.
E. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with
anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances
and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections,
as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of
window units.
F. Subframes: Provide subframes with anchors for window units as shown, of profile and
dimensions indicated but not less than 0.062-inch-thick extruded aluminum. Miter or cope
comers, and weld and dress smooth with concealed mechanical joint fasteners. Finish to match
window units. Provide subframes capable of withstanding design loads of window units.
G. Glazing Stops: Provide snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 8 Section "Glazing"
and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames.
2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Aluminum Anodic Finish: Class II, clear anodic coating complying with AAMA 611.
Is
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 2 of 3
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
PART 3 - EXECUTION 0,
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing
windows, hardware, accessories, and other components.
B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal
movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall
flashing and other adjacent construction.
C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction.
D. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture
migrating within windows to the exterior.
E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic
action at points of contact with other materials.
F. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at
contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate
hardware and moving parts.
G. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective
coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
H. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's
written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels,
and clean surfaces.
1. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during
construction period.
END OF SECTION 08520 ,
LJ
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 3 of 3
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
i SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The work in this section shall include furnishing of all items of finish hardware as
hereinafter specified or obviously necessary to complete the building, except those items
that are specifically excluded from this section of the specification.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
B. Aluminum Doors and Frames
C. Wood Doors and Frames
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Furnish labor and material to complete hardware work indicated, as specified herein, or as
may be required by actual conditions at building.
B. Include all necessary screws, bolts, expansion shields, other devices, if necessary, as required
for proper hardware application. The hardware supplier shall assume all responsibility for
correct quantities.
C. All hardware shall meet the requirements of Federal, State and Local codes having
jurisdiction over this project, notwithstanding any real or apparent conflict therewith in
these specifications.
D. Fire-Rated Openings:
1. Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance with A.I.A. (NBFU)
Pamphlet No. 80, NFPA Standards NO. 101, UBC 702 (1997) and UL10C. This
requirement takes precedence over other requirements for such hardware. Provide
only hardware that has been tested and listed by UL for the types and sizes of doors
required, and complies with the requirements of the door and doorframe labels.
2. Where panic exit devices are required on fire-rated doors, provide supplementary
marking on door UL label indicating Fire Door to be equipped with fire exit hardware
and provide UL label on exit device indicating "Fire Exit Hardware".
E. Fasteners:
1. Hardware as furnished shall conform to published templates generally prepared for
machine screw installation.
2. Furnish each item complete with all screws required for installation. Typically, all
exposed screws installation.
3. Insofar as practical, furnished concealed type fasteners for hardware units that have
exposed screws shall be furnished with Phillips flat head screws, finished to match
adjacent hardware.
4. Door closers and exit devices to be installed with closed head through bolts (sex
bolts).
F. Hurricane Openings
1. Provide hardware for hurricane openings in compliance with local jurisdiction.
2. This requirement takes precedence over other requirements for such hardware.
Provide only hardware that has been tested and listed by local authority for the types
and sizes of doors required, and complies with the requirements of the door and door
frame.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The supplier to be a directly franchised distributor of the products to be furnished and have
in their employ an AHC (Architectural Hardware Consultant). This person is to be available
for consultation to the architect, owner and the general contractor at reasonable times
during the course of work and the warranty period.
FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 1 of 7
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
B. The finish hardware supplier shall prepare and submit to the architect six (6) copies of a
complete schedule identifying each door and each set number, following the numbering
system and not creating any separate system himself. He shall submit the schedule for
review, make corrections as directed and resubmit the corrected schedule for final approval.
Approval of schedule will not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for furnishing all
necessary hardware, including the responsibility for funishing correct quantities.
C. No manufacturing orders shall be placed until detailed schedule has been submitted to the
architect and written approval received.
D. After hardware schedule has been approved, furnish templates required by manufacturing
contractors for making proper provisions in their work for accurate fitting, finishing
hardware setting. Furnish templates in ample time to facilitate progress of work.
E. Hardware supplier shall have an office and warehouse facilities to accommodate the
materials used on this project. The supplier must be an authorized distributor of the
products specified.
F. The hardware manufactures are to supply both a pre-installation class as well as a post-
installation walk-thru. This is to insure proper installation and provide for any adjustments
or replacements of hardware as required.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Wrap, protect finishing hardware items for shipment. Deliver to manufacturing contractors
hardware items required by them for their application; deliver balance of hardware to job;
store in designated location. Each item shall be clearly marked with its intended location.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. The material furnished shall be warranted for one year after installation or longer as the
individual manufacturer's warranty permits.
B. Overhead door closers shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against failure due
to defective materials and workmanship for a period of ten (10) years commencing on the
Date of Final Completion and Acceptance, and in the event of failure, the manufacture is
to promptly repair or replace the defective with no additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. To the greatest extent possible, obtain each kind of hardware from only one manufacturer.
B. All numbers and symbols used herein have been taken from the current catalogues of the
following manufacturers.
PRODUCT ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE
MANUFACTURER SUBSTITUTE
1) Hinges Hager Stanley, Bommer
2) Locks & Latches Best Schlage
3) Cylinders, Keys, Keying Best None (No Substitution)
4) Exit Devices Von Duprin None (No Substitution)
5) Door Closers LCN None (No Substitution)
6) OH Stops/Holders Glynn Johnson Rixson
7) Push Button Access Best None (No Substitution)
8) Magnetic Locks Locknetics Sentronics
9) Wall Stops/Floor Stops, Flushbolts Ives Rockwood, Trimco
10) Kick Plates Ives Rockwood, Quality
11) Threshold/Weather-strip National Guard Pemko, Zero
12) Silencers Ives Rockwood, Trimco
13) Key Cabinet Lund Key Control
FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 2 of 7
•
•
•
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
C. If material manufactured by other than that specified or listed herewith as an equal, is to be
bid upon, permission must be requested from the Architect seven (7) days prior to bidding.
If substitution is allowed, it will be so noted by addendum.
2.2 FINISH OF HARDWARE:
A. Exterior Hinges to be Stainless Steel (32D), Interior Hinges to be Satin Chrome (26D).
Door Closers to be Aluminum. Locks to be Satin Chrome (26D), Exit Devices to be Satin
Chrome (26D). Overhead Holders to be Satin Chrome (26D), Flat Goods to be Satin
Chrome (26D) or Stainless Steel (32D) and the Thresholds to be Mill Finish Aluminum.
2.3 HINGES AND PIVOTS:
A. Exterior butts shall be Stainless Steel. Butts on all out swinging doors shall be furnished with
non-removable pins (NRP).
B. Interior butts shall be as listed.
C. Doors 5' or less in height shall have two (2) butts. Furnish one (1) additional butt for each
2'6" in height or fraction thereof. Dutch door shall have two (2) butts per leaf.
2.4 KEYING:
A. All locks and cylinders to be keyed to the owner's existing BEST system.
B. Combinated to Owner's instructions. Lock manufacturer shall issue Bittings, directly to the
city only.
C. Provide Two (2) each change keys per lock and Six (6) each grand master, master keys, two
(2) construction and two (2) permanent control keys.
D. Hardware supplier to provide temporary cores during the construction phase. The City will
change out the temporary cores for the permanent cores. All cores become the property
of the City upon completion of the work.
E. Finish hardware supplier Consultant to work out with Owner a Keying Schedule and order
cores from Best Access six to eight weeks prior to project completion.
2.5 LOCKSETS:
A. Locksets shall be Heavy Duty Cylindrical type, unless specified otherwise, in
"351T' series, 15H Design as manufactured by BEST on New Construction
"93K" series, 15D Design as manufactured by BEST only where scheduled.
1. Acceptable substitutions:
a. SCHLAGE "L9000" series, 06C design
2.6 EXIT DEVICES:
A. All devices shall be Von Duprin 98 Series in types and functions specified. All devices must
be listed under "Panic Hardware" in accident equipment list of Underwriters Laboratories.
All labeled doors with "Fire Exit Hardware" must have labels attached and be in strict
accordance with Underwriters Laboratories.
B. All exit devices shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 test requirements by a BHMA
certified testing laboratory. A written certification showing successful completion of a
minimum of 1,000,000 cycles must be provided.
C. All surface strikes shall be roller type and come complete with a plate underneath to
prevent movement. And shall be provided with a dead-latching feature to prevent latchbolt
tampering.
D. Vertical rob exit devices NOT recommended. Key removable mullions with rim exit devices
preferred.
1. Acceptable substitutions:
a. None (No Substitution)
FINISH HARDWARE
08710 - 3 of 7
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
2.7 DOOR CLOSERS:
A. All closers shall be LCN 4011 or 4111 Series having non-ferrous covers, forged steel arms
separate valves for adjusting backcheck, closing and latching cycles and adjustable spring to
provide up to 50% increase in spring power. Closers shall be furnished with parallel arm
mounted on all doors opening into corridors or other public spaces and shall be mounted to
permit 180 degrees door swing wherever wall conditions permit. Furnish with non hold
open arms unless otherwise indicated.
B. Door closer cylinders shall be of high strength cast iron construction to provide low wear
operating capabilities of internal parts throughout the life of the installation. All door
closers shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 test requirements by a BHMA certified
testing laboratory. A written certification showing successful completion of a minimum of
10,000,000 cycles must be provided.
C. Door closers shall utilize temperature stable fluid capable of withstanding temperature
ranges of 120 degrees Fahrenheit to -30 degrees Fahrenheit, without requiring seasonal
adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door. Closers for fire-rated doors shall be
provided with temperature stabilizing fluid that complies with the standards UBC 7-2
(1997) and UL 10C.
D. Door closers shall incorporate tamper resistant non-critical screw valves of V-slot design to
reduce possible clogging from particles within the closer. Closers shall have separate and
independent screw valve adjustments for latch speed, general speed, and hydraulic
backcheck. Backcheck shall be properly located so as to effectively slow the swing of the
door at a minimum of 10 degrees in advance of the dead stop location to protect the door
frame and hardware from damage. Pressure relief valves (PRV) are not acceptable.
1. Acceptable substitutions:
a. None (No Substitution)
2.8 TRIM AND PLATES: s
A. Kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates, shall be .050 gauge with 32D finish. Kick plates
to be 8" high, mop plates to be 4" high. All plates shall be two (2) inches less full width of
door.
B. Push plates, pull plates, door pulls, and miscellaneous door trim shall be shown in the
hardware schedule.
2.9 DOOR STOPS:
A. Doorstops shall be famished for all doors to prevent damage to doors or hardware from
striking adjacent walls or fixtures. Wall bumpers equal to Ives WS407 Series are preferred,
but where not practical famish floor stops equal to Ives FS436 or FS438 series. Where
conditions prohibit the use of either wall or floor type stops, finnish surface mounted
overhead stops equal to Glynn Johnson, 450 Series.
2.10 THRESHOLDS AND WEATHERSTRIP:
A. Thresholds and weather-strip shall be as listed in the hardware schedule.
2.11 DOOR SILENCERS:
A. Furnish rubber door silencers equal to Ives SR64 for all new interior hollow metal frames,
(2) per pair and (3) per single door frame.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. All hardware shall be applied and installed in accordance with' the Finish Hardware schedule.
Care shall be exercised not to mar or damage adjacent work. .
B. Contractor to provide a secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet
installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately
FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 4 of 7
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
• replaceable, so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses both
before and after installation.
C. No hardware is to be installed until the hardware manufacturers have provided a pre-
installation class. This is to insure proper installation of the specified products.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Contractor shall adjust all hardware in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
Prior to turning project to owner, contractor shall clean and make any final adjustments to
the finish hardware.
3.3 PROTECTION:
A. Contractor shall protect the hardware, as it is stored on construction site in a covered and
dry place.
B. Contractor shall protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase.
3.4 DOOR HARDWARE SETS
Hardware Set #1
Door: 1, 2
Each to have:
Cylinder As required
Note: Balance of hardware by door manufacturer
Hardware Set #2
Door: 3, 7
Each to have:
6 Hinges BB 11914.5 x 4.5 NRP US32D
1 Lock 45H7D15H US26D
2 Flush Bolts 555-12 US26D
1 Closer 4111EDA TB AL
2 Stops 409 US32D
1 Threshold 2005" 72
1 Weatherstrip 303" 7284
Hardware Set #3
Doors: 4, 5, 6
Each to have:
3 Hinges BB 11914.5 x 4.5 NRP US32D
1 Lock 45H7R15H US26D
1 Closer 4111EDA TB AL
1 Stop 409 US32D
1 Threshold 2005AV 36
1 Weatherstrip 303AV 3684
FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 5 of 7
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
Hardware Set #4
Doors: 25, 27, 29, 28, 26, 30, 31
Each to have:
3 Hinges BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 US26D
1 Lock 45H7D 15H US26D
1 Stop 409 US32D
3 Silencers
Hardware Set 05
Doors: 8, 9, 21
Each to have:
3 Hinges BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 US26D
1 Lock 45H7R15H US26D
1 Closer 4011 TB AL
1 Stop 409 US32D
3 Silencers
Hardware Set #6
Doors: 23, 24, 20, 15, 12, 13, 32
Each to have:
3 Hinges
1 Latch BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 US26D
45HOLF 15H US26D
1 Kick Plate 8 x 2LDW US32D
1 Stop 409 US32D
3 Silencers 33
Hardware Set #7
Doors: 10, 14, 18, 19, 11, 34, 35, 36, El
Each To Have:
3 Hinges BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 US26D
1 Pull Plate 110 x 70C US32D
1 Push Plate .70F 8 x 16 US32D
1 Closer 4011 TB AL
1 Kick Plate 8 x 2"LDW US32D
1 Stop 409 US32D
3 Silencers
Hardware Set #8
Doors: 22
Each to have:
3 Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 US26D
1 Lock 45H7D 15H US26D
1 Closer 4111EDA TB AL
1 Stop 409 US32D
3 Silencers 33
FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 6 of 7
APA 03.07
Hardware Set #9
Doors: 16, 17
Each to have:
3 Hinges
1 Pull Plate
1 Push Plate
1 Closer
1 Kick Plate
1 Stop
3 Silencers
1 Threshold
1 Weather Strip
Hardware Set #10
Doors: E2, E3
Each to have:
3 Hinges
1 Lock
1 Stop
3 Silencers
END OF SECTION 08710
•
BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 US26D
110 x 70C US32D
70F 8 x 16 US32D
4011 TB AL
8 x 2"LDW US32D
409 US32D
2005 AV 72
303 AV 7284
BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 US26D
45H7R15H US26D
409 US32D
Training Building Fire Station #48
FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 7 of 7
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
SECTION 09111- NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:
1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.).
2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameter
wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch-diameter wire.
B.• Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter.
C. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538
inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.
1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches.
D. Furring Channels (Furring Members):
1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide
flanges, 3/4 inch deep.
2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645.
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings; 0.034 inch.
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.
a Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.
2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.034 inch.
B. Hat Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch.
2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and
other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:
1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), •
nonperforated.
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111- 1 of 3
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
0 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply
to framing installation.
3.2 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
B. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension
system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of
trapezes or equivalent devices.
a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced installation standards.
3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
4. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts
that extend through forms.
5. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
C. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet
measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between
parallel members that will receive finishes.
3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
B. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to
terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling.
1. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames;
install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished
assembly.
C. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead
structure.
2. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required
for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to
match framing required above door heads.
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111- 2 of 3
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
C. Direct Furring:
1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,
or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
D. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
END OF SECTION 09111
0.)
•
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 3 of 3
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO)
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following.
1. Exterior portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on metal lath solid-plaster bases.
B. See Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for structural, load-bearing (transverse
and axial) steel studs and joists that support lath and portland cement plaster.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Before stuccoing, install mockups of at least 100 sq. & (9 sq. m) in surface area to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Install mockups for each type of finish indicated.
2. For interior plasterwork, simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements.
B. Exterior Plasterwork: Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F (4.4
deg Q.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified
2.2 METAL LATH
A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653/A 653K G60 (Z180), hot-dip
galvanized zinc coating.
1. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Flat or Self-furring.
a. Weight: 3.41b1sq. yd (1.8 kg/sq. m).
2. Flat Rib Lath: Rib depth of not more than 1/8 inch (3.1 mm).
a. Weight: 3.41b/sq. yd (1.8 kg/sq. m).
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with
thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.
B. Plastic Trim: Fabricated from high-impact PVC.
1. Cornerbeads: With perforated flanges.
a. Small-nose style; use unless otherwise indicated
2. Casing Beads: With perforated flanges in depth required to suit plaster bases indicated
and flange length required to suit applications indicated.
a. Bull-nose style; use unless otherwise indicated.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 -1 of 4
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
3. - Control Joints: One-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped
configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of
control joint.
4. Expansion Joints: Two-piece type, formed to produce slip joint and square-edged 1/2-
inch- wide reveal; with perforated concealed flanges.
5. Soffit Vents: 4 inch wide continuous; insert in stucco.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of
damaging plaster, lath, or accessories.
B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch (13 mm) long,
free of contaminants, manufactured for use in pordand cement plaster.
C. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932.
D. Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C.954, as required
by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths
required to achieve penetration through joined materials of not fewer than three exposed
threads.
E. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063.
F. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls:
1. Asphalt Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),
unperforated.
2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.1 mm) thick, in width to suit steel
stud size.
2.5 PLASTER MATERIALS)
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type [1] [II].
1. Color for Finish Coats: Gray.
B. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897.
2.6 PLASTER MIXES
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated.
1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two
minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in
mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. (0.6 kg of fiber/cu. m) of cementitious
materials. Reduce aggregate quantities accordingly to maintain workability.
B. Portland Cement Base-Coat Mixes:
1. Over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork as follows:
a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 0 to 3/4
parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of
separate volumes of each component material).
b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 0 to 3/4
parts lime. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of
separate volumes of each component material).
2. Over Concrete Unit Masonry: Single base coats for two-coat plasterwork as follows:
a. For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime.
Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate
volumes of each component material). Is
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 2 of 4
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
C. Portland Cement Job-Mixed Finish-Coat Mixes: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part
portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate per part of
cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmfid effects
caused by plastering.
B. Prepare solid-plaster bases that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability required to
bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Where required, install blankets before installing lath unless
blankets are readily installed after lath has been installed on one side.
B. Acoustical Sealant: Where required, seal joints between edges of plasterwork and abutting
construction with acoustical sealant.
3.3 INSTALLING NONSTRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 for applications indicated.
1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for installation of items not addressed in ASTM C 1063.
B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in plaster assemblies to
support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or
similar construction.
C. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural
movement
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members.
Frame both sides of joints independently.
E. Soffits: Unless otherwise detailed on Drawings, install furred or suspended soffits to comply
with requirements for ceiling installation; install framed soffits to comply with requirements for
partition installation.
3.4 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR CEILINGS
A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free of contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay
hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by
bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and tying, either directly to structure or directly to
fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, in a manner that will not cause
them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
4. Do not connect steel framing to or suspend it from ducts, pipes, or conduit
B. Sway-brace suspended steel framing [with hangers used for support] <Insert requirements>.
C. Install steel framing components for ceilings in sizes and spacings indicated but not less than
that required by the referenced steel framing and installation standards.
3.5 INSTALLING METAL LATH
A. Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063.
1. Flat-Ceiling and Horizontal Framing: Install flat diamond-mesh or flat rib lath.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 3 of 4
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
3.6 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES
A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings.
B. Reinforcement for External Corners:
1. Install lath-type extemal-corner reinforcement at exterior locations.
2. Install cornerbead at interior[ and exterior] locations.
C. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings.
1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum sizes:
a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. A (13.4 sq. m).
b. Horizontal and other Nonvertical Surfaces: 100 sq. 8. (9.3 sq. m).
2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet (5.5 m) o.c.
3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length-to-width ratios of not
greater than 2-1/2:1.
4. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster.
5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped areas
(panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the comer formed by the dimension
change.
3.7 PLASTER APPLICATION
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926.
B. Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry and concrete plaster bases.
C. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide float sand finish to match Architect's sample.
3.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, patch, replace, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore
cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, crazing
(check cracking), dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to R
substrate has failed
END OF SECTION 09220
•
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 4 of 4
APA 03.07
0 SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior gypsum board.
2. Tile backing panels.
Training Building Fire Station #48
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated
B. Samples: For the following products:
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each trim
accessory indicated.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to
type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. American Gypsum Co.
b. G-P Gypsum.
C. National Gypsum Company.
d. USG Corporation.
B. Regular Type:
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
2. Long Edges: Tapered
C. Type X:
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
2. Long Edges: Tapered
D. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board.
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
2. Long Edges: Tapered
E. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces.
1. Core: 518 inch (15.9 mm), Type X
2. Long Edges: Tapered
2.2 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A 108.1.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard
b. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board
2. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Plastic.
2. Shapes:
GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 1 of 4
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
a. Cornerbead
b. Bullnose bead.
C. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
£ Expansion (control) joint.
g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound
5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use high-build interior coating product
designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce
Level 5 finish.
D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by
panel manufacturer.
C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
D. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
1. Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
F. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these
GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 2 of 4
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
is locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints
between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
3.2 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Regular Type: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.
3.3 APPLYING TILE BACIING PANELS
A. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install at showers, tubs, and where indicated Install
with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
B. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Comply with manufacturer's written installation
instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap
where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
C. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A 108. 1, at locations indicated to receive tile.
D. Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install regular-type gypsum wallboard panels to produce a flat
surface except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive water-resistant panels.
E. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a
uniform plane across panel surfaces.
3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
0 instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Architect for visual effect.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Comerbead: Use at outside corners.
2. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners.
3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
4. L-Bead: Use where indicated.
5. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for
decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended
for tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated
2. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings.
3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.
. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.
4. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.
E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 3 of 4
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 09250
•
•
GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 4 of 4
•
•
•
APA 03.07
SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Ceramic tile.
2. Stone thresholds.
3. Tile backing panels.
Training Building Fire Station #48
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples:
1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required
2. Assembled samples, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for
each color and finish required.
3. Stone thresholds in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of floor tile installation.
2. Build mockup of wall tile installation.
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount
installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TILE PRODUCTS
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for
types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated
B. Tile Type CT-1: Factory-mounted unglazed ceramic mosaic tile.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.
b. Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.
C. Interceramic.
2. Composition: Porcelain. .
3. Module Size: 2 by 2 inches.
4. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
5. Face: Plain with cushion edges.
6. Surface: Smooth, without abrasive admixture.
7. Finish: Bright, opaque glaze.
8. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range.
CERAMIC TILE
09310 -1 of 5
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
9. Grout Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C. Tile Type CT-2: Glazed wall tile.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.
b. Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.
C. Florida Tile Industries, Inc.
2. Module Size: 6 by 6 inches.
3. Thickness: 5/16 inch.
4. Face: Plain with cushion edges.
5. Finish: Bright, opaque glaze.
6. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
.7. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
8. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat the where applicable
and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected
from manufacturer's standard shapes:
a. Base: Coved, module size 6 by 6 inches.
b. Wainscot Cap: Bullnose cap 6 by 6 inches.
C. External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Bullnose shape, same size as
adjoining flat tile.
d. Internal Comers: Field-butted square corners.
2.2 THRESHOLDS
A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between
adjacent floor finishes.
1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch (1.5
mm) above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit
height of threshold to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less above adjacent floor surface.
B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 12 per
ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish.
1. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining.
2.3 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A 118.9 or ASTM C 1325.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard.
b. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board
2. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
2.4 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.02.
B. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A 118.1.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.
b. Bostik, Inc.
C. C-Cure.
d Laticrete International, Inc.
e. MAPEI Corporation.
CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 2 of 5
APA 03.07
•
B.
2.6
A.
B.
•
Training Building Fire Station 448
f. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
2. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A 118.4.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.
b. Bostik, Inc.
C. C-Cure.
d Laticrete International, Inc.
e. MAPEI Corporation.
£ Summitville Tiles, Inc.
2. Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix to which only water must be added
3. Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive.
4. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
GROUT MATERIALS
Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI Al 18.3.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.
b. Bostik, Inc.
C. Laticrete International, Inc.
d. MAPEI Corporation.
e. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
Grout for Pregrouted Tile Sheets: Same product used in factory to pregrout file sheets.
2.5
A.
ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply with
the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
1. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25;
Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with
fungicide, intended for scaling interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that
are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. DAP Inc.; 100 percent Silicone Kitchen and Bath Sealant
b. Dow Coming Corporation; Dow Corning 786.
C. GE Silicones, a division of GE Specialty Materials; Sanitary 1700.
d Laticrete International, Inc.; Latasil Tile & Stone Sealant
C. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant
£ Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600 White.
Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25;
Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 550.
C.
CERAMIC TILE
09310 - 3 of 5
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
b. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II-SG.
C. Sika Corporation; Sikaflex-2c SL. ,
d. Tremco Incorporated.; Vulkem 245.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based
formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations
indicated.
B. Soap dishes: In gang showers, provide ceramic tile 6 inch by 6 inch soap dishes as indicated on
drawings. Color to match field tile.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of installed tile.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are
incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances
that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by
ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for file floors installed with adhesives
or thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended
by tile-setting material manufacturer.
B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar
bed that complies with ANSI A108. 1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains.
C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project
site before installing.
D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent
grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of
temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods
specified in the installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A 108 Series
"Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation
methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting
materials used.
1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A 108 Series of tile
installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:
a. Exterior file floors.
b. Tile floors in wet areas.
C. Tile swimming pool decks.
d. Tile floors in laundries.
e. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger.
£ Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring'
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for
CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 4 of 5
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other
penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and
center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to
minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless
otherwise indicated.
E. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
2. Glazed WallTile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
F. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
G. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,
contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting
materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above
them.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants."
H. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless
otherwise indicated.
1. At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent
floor finishes, set thresholds in latex-pordand cement mortar (thin set).
I. Install cementitious backer units and treat joins according to ANSI A108.11 and
manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use latex-pordand cement
mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions.
J. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to
produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.
K. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A 108.17 and manufacturer's written
instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.
3.4 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:
1. Tile Installation F114: Cement mortar bed (thickset) with cleavage membrane; epoxy
grout; TCA F114.
a. Tile Type: 2 by 2 inches mosaic.
b. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.
B. Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring:
1. Tile Installation W244: Thin-set mortar on cementitious backer units or fiber cement
underlayment over cleavage membrane; TCA W244.
a. Tile Type: 6 by 6 inches, glazed
b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex pordand cement mortar.
C. Grout. Water-cleanable epoxy grout.
C. Shower Receptor and Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring:
1. Tile Installation B415: Thin-set mortar on cementitious backer unitstfiber cement
underlayment; TCA B415.
a. Tile Type:
1) Walls: 6 inches by 6 inches glazed.
2) Floors: 2 inches by 2 inches mosaic.
b. Thin-Set Mortar-. Latex portland cement mortar.
C. Grouts Water-cleanable epoxy grout.
END OF SECTION 09310
CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 5 of 5
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
SECTION 09511- ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 - Section 09250 - Gypsum Board
2. Division 15 Sections - Mechanical
3. Division 16 Sections - Electrical
C. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.
B. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.
C. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.
D. Recycled Content: Average percentage based on weight of component materials. Material
recovered or diverted from the solid waste stream, either during the manufacturing process (pre-
consumer) or after consumer use (post-consumer).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Coordinate Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and
ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension members.
2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.
C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required,
prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6 inch by 12-inch samples of each type, color, pattern, and
texture.
2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12 inch long
Samples of each type, finish, and color.
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for each acoustical panel ceiling and suspension system.
1.
2. UL Acoustical Compliance: For acoustical performance, each carton of material must
carry Underwriter's Laboratory certification for AC (if applicable), CAC and NRC.
3.
4. UL Suspension System Load Compliance: Manufacturer must certify that the metal
suspension system is UL Classified to be load compliant per ASTM C635. For load
compliance, each carton of main tees must carry Underwriter's Laboratory certification
for load compliance.
E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling and components.
F. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-1 of 6
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station 448
• 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations:
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the
following requirements:
1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings
identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
a. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency.
b. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surface-
burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as
determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84:
C. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in
original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they
will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and stabilized
moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed
and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project
when occupied for its intended use.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
19 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0
percent of quantity installed
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511- 2 of 6
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one product as specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by the to t
manufacturer specified
3.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated
that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical
ratings, and light reflectance, unless otherwise indicated
1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of
test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795.
B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each
product type.
2.3 WATER-FELTED, MINERAL-BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL
PANEL CEILING
A. Products:
1. USG Interiors, Inc., product name: Radar ClimaPlus, Item Number: 2215.
B. Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for Type III,
Form 2, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted; and pattern as follows:
1. Pattern: CD.
C. Color: White.
D. LR: Not less than 0.84.
E. NRC: Not less than 0.55.
F. CAC: Not less than 35.
G. Recycled Content: Not less than 40%.
H. Edge Detail: Square (SQ). 0i
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
J. Size: 24 by 24 inches.
K. No deviations
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with
applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.
B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for
Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.
1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating
Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are
indicated
C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated
D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
2. Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400.
3. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three tunes hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire.
E. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch thick,
galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653K G90 coating designation; with
bolted connections and 5/16-inch diameter bolts.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511- 3 of 6
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
• 2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING
A. Products:
1. USG Interiors, Inc., Donn DXL suspension system.
B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Fire-Rated Steel Suspension System: Main and cross
runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-
dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653K not less than G30 coating designation, with
prefinished 15/16-inch wide metal caps on flanges.
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. Four-foot tees shall carry a
minimum of 12 lbs., per lineal foot and also be rated intermediate duty.
2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type.
3. Face Design: Flat; flush.
4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet.
5. Cap Finish: Painted white.
6. No deviations
2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A. Manufacturers:
1. USG Interiors, Inc.
B. Roll-Formed Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not
indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel
edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material,
finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.
1. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms
reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at
exposed suspension member.
2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter
required to fit penetration exactly.
3. For narrow-face suspension systems, provide suspension system and manufacturer's
standard edge moldings that match width and configuration of exposed runners.
2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Products:
1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a. United States Gypsum Co.; SBEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag,
paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing
airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as
demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
C. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening,
nonsldnning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior
concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical
panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified
in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511- 4 of 6
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel
ceilings. 1 ..
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply
with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 requirements indicated,
per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook"
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions;' offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards and publications.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not
deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or
power actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.
6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
8. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from
hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of
each member.
C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four
tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers,
without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires
into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of
moldings before they are installed. .
2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more
than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8
inch in 12 feet Miter comers accurately and connect securely.
3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511- 5 of 6
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system
ruiners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat,
precise fit
1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of
suspension system runners and moldings.
2. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-
resistance-rated assembly.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 09511
•
•
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511- 6 of 6
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
SECTION 09624 - RESILIENT ATHLETIC SURFACING
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
This Specification specifies No Fault Sport Floor - Resilient Zig Zag Tiles, using recycled
rubber material for flooring applications, including fitness, marketed under the No Fault Safety
Surfacing, by No Fault Sport Group's product line of recycled rubber flooring products. No
Fault Products are an exclusive product to No Fault Sport Group. No FaultTM products can only
be distributed by a pre-approved licensed distributor or agent.
A. Section Includes: Resilient Flooring, including recycled rubber flooring.
1. Type of recycled rubber resilient flooring include
a. Recycled rubber resilient zig zag tiles.
B. Related Sections: Section related to this section includes:
1. Concrete Substrate: Division 3 Concrete Section(s).
1.2 TESTING
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM C423 Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by
the Reverberation Room Method.
2. ASTM C518 Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
3. ASTM D412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers
and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension
4. ASTM D2047 Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Floor
Surfaces as measured by the James Machine
5. ASTM E413 Classification for Rating Sound Insulation
6. ASTM E492 Method for Laboratory Measurement of Impact Sound Transmission
Through Floor-Ceiling Assemblies Using the Tapping Machine
7. ASTM F137 Test Method for Flexibility of Resilient Flooring Materials
8. ASTM F142 Test Method for Indentation of Resilient Floor Coverings (McBumey Test)
9. ASTM F150 Test Method for Electrical Resistance of Conductive Resilient Flooring
10. ASTM F710 Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors and Other Monolithic Floors to
Receive Resilient Flooring
11. ASTM F925 Test Method for Resistance to Chemicals of Resilient Flooring
12. ASTM F970 Test Method for Static Load Limit
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements: Provide recycled rubber resilient flooring to maintain performance
criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage or failure.
B. Installation to be provided by a certified No Fault Sport Floor Installer.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract.
B. Product Data: Submit product data, including Specification Product Data sheet for specified
products.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components.
D. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples for finishes, colors and textures.
E. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following:
RESILIENT ATHLETIC SURFACING 09624 - 1 of 5
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station 948
1. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics and physical properties.
2. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with
specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
3. Manufacturer's Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions
4. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Manufacturer's field reports specified herein.
F. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Maintenance Data: Operation and maintenance data for installed products in accordance
with Contract Include methods for maintaining installed products and precautions
against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance.
2. Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein.
G. Extra Materials
1. Furnish extra materials below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing the contents.
a. Zig Zag Tile: Full size tiles to equal 5 per cent of the quantity installed
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has
specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project
b. Certificate: When requested, submit certificate indicating qualification.
2. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Manufacturer capable of providing field service
representation during construction and approving application method.
B. Pre-installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting with Manufacturer's Agent or Rep
a and approved installer (if applicable) to verify project requirements, substrate conditions,
manufacturer's instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Ordering: Owner or Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead
time requirements to avoid construction delays.
B. General Delivery and Handling:
1. Materials shall be delivered in loose rolls unless otherwise requested.
2. Material shall be delivered to the job site in its original, unopened packaging with all
labels intact
on.
3. Recipient shall inspect all materials for visual defects before beginning the installati
No Labor claim will be honored on material installed with visual defects. Verify the
material delivered is the correct style, color and amount Any discrepancies must be
reported immediately before installation.
C. Storage and Protection: Store materials at temperature and humidity conditions recommended
by manufacturer and protect from exposure to harmful weather conditions.
1.7 PROTECTION CONDITIONS
A. Temperature Requirements: Maintain air temperature in spaces where products will be installed
for time period before, during and after installation as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Field Measurements: Verify actual measiaenments/openings by field measurements before
fabrication, show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements
and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions.
RESILIENT ATHLETIC SURFACING 09624 - 2 of 5
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty
document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to
and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.
C. Warranty Period: 3 years commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.
1.9 MAINTENANCE GUIDELINES
A. No Fault Sport Group shall provide complete maintenance instructions for initial cleaning and
regular maintenance.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 NO FAULT SPORT FLOORTM SURFACING RECYCLED RUBBER FLOORING: ZIG
ZAG TILE
A. Manufacturer / Supplier. No Fault Sport Group, LLC.
1. Contact: 3112 Valley Creek Drive, Suite C, Baton Rouge, LA 7080.8; Telephone (225)
215-7760; Fax (225) 291-3821; e-mail sales@4nofault.com
B. Proprietary Product: No Fault Sport FloorTM Zig Zag Tile Surfacing for health and fitness and
other indoor application. No other company can provide No Fault Sport Flooring.
L Fundamentals recycled rubber resilient tile flooring.
C. No Fault Sport Floor Surfacing "Physical Properties":
1. Tile Dimensions - 2' x 2' x 3/8" depth.
2. Tile Weight -1.751b/f?
D. Colors and Test Data
1. Colors: Standard as specified by architect
2. Product Testing:
a. Tensile Strength, lb/in2 (ASTM D412): 200 min.
b. Flexibility, 1/4-inch mandrel (ASTM F137): pass.
C. Static Load, 1000 lb/in2 (ASTM F970): less than 0.020 in.
d. Coefficient of Friction (ASTM 2047): greater than 0.6.
e. McBurney Indentation, 1 min at 770 F (25°C) (ASTM F142): less than 0.120 in.
f: Static Dissipation (ASTM F150): between 106 L1 and 109 Q.
g. Chemical Resistance (ASTM F925):
1) 5% Acetic Acid: No Change.
2). 70'/o Isopropyl Alcohol: No Change.
3) Mineral Oil: No Change.
4) 5% Sodium Hydroxide: No Change.
5) 5% Hydrochloric Acid: No Change.
6) 5% Ammonia: No Change.
7) Bleach: No Change.
8) 5% Phenol: No Change.
9) Gasoline: No Change.
10) Sulfuric Acid: No Change.
11) Kerosene: No Change.
12) Olive Oil: No Change.
h. Ambient Noise Reduction, Sabin/f12 (ASTM C423): 0.10
i. Thermal Conductivity, BTU-in/hr-ffi2 °F (ASTM C518): approximately 0.406
j. Impact Insulation Class (ASTM E492): 45 minimum.
k. Sound Transmission Coefficient (ASTM 413): 45 minimum.
•
•
RESILIENT ATHLETIC SURFACING
09624 - 3 of 5
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station 948
2.2 BASIS OF DESIGN PRODUCT
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide No Fault Sport F1oorTM Surfacing Recycled
Rubber Flooring: Zig Zag Tile, or a comparable product in strict accordance with No Fault
Sport F1oorTM specifications.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY
A. Source Quality: Obtain recycled rubber resilient flooring materials from a single supplier.
Distributor or agent must be an approved and/or licensed No Fault material supplier.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS
A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's product data, including product technical bulletins,
product catalog installation instructions and product carton instructions for installation
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions, which have been previously
installed under other sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 SUB-FLOOR REQUIREMENTS AND PREPARATION
A. Surface and Sub-Floor Requirements:
1. Surface shall be installed over concrete, approved Portland-based patching and leveling
materials. Note: Gypsum-based patching and leveling compounds are not acceptable.
2.. These are general requirements. Owner, contractor and installer must read complete set
on installation and sub-floor preparations prior to installation of No Fault Sport Floor.
3. Concrete Floors - Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi.
Concrete shall be fully cured and permanently dried.
B. Sub-Floor Preparation
1. Subfloors shall be dry, clean, smooth, level and structurally sound. They shall be free of
dust, solvent, paint, wax, oil, grease, asphalt, sealers, curing and hardening compounds,
alkaline salts, old adhesive residue and other extraneous materials according to ASTM
F710.
2. Subfloors shall be smooth to prevent irregularities,. roughness or defects from
telegraphing through the new floor. The surface shall be flat to the equivalent of 1/8"
(3mm) in 10'(3m).
3. All saw cuts (control joints), cracks, indentations and other non-moving joints in the
concrete must be filled with an approved Portland-based patching compound.
4. Expansion joints in the concrete are designed to allow for expansion and contraction of
the concrete. If a floor covering is installed over an expansion joint, it will likely fail in
that area. Use expansion joint covers designed for resilient flooring.
5. Always allow patching materials to dry thoroughly and install according to the
manufacturer's instructions. Excessive moisture in patching material may cause bonding
problems or bubbling reaction with No Fault adhesive.
3.4 INSTALLATION APPLICATION
A. Recycled Rubber Flooring Installation: Comply with No Fault Sport Floor Sheet Roll Surfacing
Technical Manual for installation procedures and techniques for No Fault Sport Zig Zag Tile
Surfacing recycled rubber resilient flooring installation.
B. Finish Color/Textures/Patterns: As per architects recommendation and approval.
RESILIENT ATHLETIC SURFACING 09624 - 4 of 5
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
3.5 FIELD QUALITY REQUIREMENTS.
A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Upon Owner's request, provide manufacturer's field service
consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visit for inspection of product
installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Site Visits: As approved.
3.6 CLEANING & MAINTENANCE
A. Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or
replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions prior to Owner's acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site and
legally dispose of debris.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protection: Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction.
3.8 SCHEDULES
A. Schedules: Allow 6 to 8 weeks for shipment of materials.
END OF SECTION 09624
•
is
RESILIENT ATHLETIC SURFACING 09624 - 5 of 5
0
•
•
APA 03.07
SECTION 09651- RESILIENT FLOOR TILE
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Vinyl composition floor tile.
Training Building Fire Station #48
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC
content.
C. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required
D. Maintenance data
13 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive
floor tile.
B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer.
C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
E. Install floor file after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Standard EXCELON Imperial Texture.
2. Congoleum Corporation; Alternatives.
3. Tarkett, Inc.; An+ock vinyl composition tile - Standard/Cortina colors.
B. Tile Standard. ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile.
C. Wearing Surface: Smooth
D. Thickness: 0.125 inch.
E. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm).
F. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for
applications indicated
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate
conditions indicated.
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE
09651- 1 of 3
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.
C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and
that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed
with installation only after substrates pass testing.
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor covering manufacturer.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.
1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed
at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation.
3.2 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION - NEW TRAINING BUILDING i
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor
offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using
cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1. Lay tiles square with room axis.
C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed
tiles.
1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent
fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles
to center of door openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device.
G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
is
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651- 2 of 3
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION - EXISTING BUILDING
A. Existing vinyl composition tile contains asbestos. Refer to asbestos report
B. Existing vinyl composition tile is not to be removed. New vinyl flooring shall be installed over
existing file floor as recommended by the vinyl composition file manufacturer.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.
B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor file surfaces
before applying liquid floor polish.
1. Apply two coats.
C. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09651
•
•
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651- 3 of 3
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Resilient base.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not
less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
I A PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive
resilient products.
B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer.
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 RESILIENT BASE
A. Resilient Base:
1. Manufacturers: - Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following.
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.
C. Flexco, Inc.
d Roppe Corporation, USA.
B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.
1. Material Requirement: Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic).
2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous) or Group II (layered).
3. Style: Cove (base with toe) at VCT and Straight (flat or toeless) at carpet and rubber
flooring.
C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.
D. Height: 4 inches.
E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
F. Outside Comers: Preformed.
G. Inside Comers: Preformed.
H. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
1. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
•
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 1 of 3
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY
A. Resilient Molding Accessory:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.
C. Flexco, Inc.
d. Roppe Corporation, USA.
B. Description: Carpet edge for glue-down applications, Reducer strip for resilient floor covering,
Joiner for tile and carpet, and Transition strips.
C. Material: Vinyl.
D. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.
E. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.3 INSTALLATION MATEPIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for
applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.
C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to
protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to
be installed.
1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed
at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation.
3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
40 adjacent pieces aligned.
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 2 of 3
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates
throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet and resilient floor
covering that would otherwise be exposed.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient
products.
B. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09653
•
A
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 3 of 3
1]
•
APA 03.07
SECTION 09680 - CARPET
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUAD4ARY
A. This Section includes direct glue-down carpet.
Training Building Fire Station #48
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated
B. Samples: For each color and texture required.
1. Carpet: 12-inch-square Sample.
2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch-long Samples.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering
Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program
requirements.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and
Section 7.12, "Ventilation."
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of
face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated,
but not less than 10 sq. yd
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LEVEL LOOP
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Mohawk: 1842 Properties R
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
b. Source: At Home Floors, Mark Stiegman, 727-584-3711
B. Fiber Content: 100 percent nylon.
C. Fiber Type: Predyed filament
D. Pile Characteristic: Level-loop pile.
E. Density: 7358
CARPET
09680 - 1 of 2
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
F. Pile Thickness: 0.137. \
G. Stitches: 11 stitches per inch.
H. Gage: 1/10 L.
I. Face Weight: 28 oz./sq. yd.
J. Total Weight: 61.25 oz./sq. yd. for finished carpet.
K. Primary Backing: Woven polypropylene.
L. Secondary Backing: Woven polypropylene.
M. Width: 12 feet.
N. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material.
0. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material.
2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based
formulation provided or recommended by carpet manufacturer.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor
conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is
recommended or provided by carpet manufacturer.
1. VOC Limits: Provide adhesives with VOC content not more than 50g/L when calculated
. according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24).
C. Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet
manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure
seams and to prevent pile loss at seams.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for the
following:
1. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue-Down
Installation."
B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam
locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At
doorways, center seams under the door in closed position.
C. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
D. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
END OF SECTION 09680
•
CARPET 09680 - 2 of 2
r?
C,
•
APA 03.07
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
PART 1- GENERAL
Training Building Fire Station #48
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following:
1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces.
2. Exposed interior items and surfaces.
3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to
shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is
not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an
item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces
whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the
Owner will select from standard colors and finishes available.
1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including
color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of
mechanical and electrical equipment
C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and
labels.
1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:
a. Architectural woodwork and casework.
b. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment
c. Light fixtures.
d. Distribution cabinets.
2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible
spaces:
a. Furred areas.
b. Ceiling plenums.
C. Utility tunnels.
d. Pipe spaces.
3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a. Anodized aluminum.
b. Stainless steel.
4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following.
a. Valve and damper operators.
b. Linkages.
C. Sensing devices.
d. Motor and fan shafts.
5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or
other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or
nomenclature plates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
PAINTING
09900 - 1 of 8
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
1. "Flat" refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at
an 85-degree meter.
2. "Eggshell" refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
3. "Satin" refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured
at a 60-degree meter.
4. "Semigloss" refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
5. "Full gloss" refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured
at a 60-degree meter.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers.
1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each
material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify
each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including
label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material
proposed for use.
Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations
controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for each type of finish-coat material indicated.
1. After color selection, the Owner will fiunish color chips for surfaces to be coated.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE •.
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting
system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record
of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating
system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample of each type of
coating and substrate required on the Project.
1. The Owner will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each
type of coating and substrate to be painted.
a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) of wall surface.
b. Small Areas and Items: The Owner will designate an item or area as required
2. After permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated, apply
coatings in this room or to each surface according to the Schedule or as specified.
Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface.
3. Final approval of colors will be from job-applied samples.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and
containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
PAINTING 09900 - 2 of 8
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
7. Color name and number.
8. VOC content
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean
condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste
daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from
fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C).
B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F (7.2 and 35 deg C).
C. Do not apply paint in rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at
temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the
quantities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for
storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner.
1. Quantity: Furnish the Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.785
L) or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers Names: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
1. Porter Paint Company (Paint Schedule is based on Porter Paint If another manufacturer
is submitted, submit both Pater Data Sheets along with Data Sheets for paint proposed to
be used. All products must be equivalent or exceed quality of Porter Products scheduled
for Architect's approval.)
2. ICI Dulux Paints.
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials
that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service
and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting
will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements.
1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
PAINTING 09900 - 3 of 8
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and
conditions within a particular area. 0.1
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on
characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over
substrates primed by others.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting
fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical
or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection
before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using
workers skilled in the trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances
that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process
will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's
written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and
mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence,
chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze.
If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of
surface preparation.
a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.
Power spray exterior of existing building to be repainted.
b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate
tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and
bum, correct this condition before application Do not paint surfaces where
moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral
spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac
or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill
holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand
smooth when dried.
Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop
coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use
solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting
Council's (SSPC) recommendations.
b. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and
according to requirements of SSPC-SP 10.
C. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat
before priming.
d. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-
brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with
the same primer as the shop coat.
PAINTING 09900 - 4 of 8
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station 948
4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum based solvents so
surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized
sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
1. Stir material before application to produce a mbdure of uniform density. Stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface
film and strain material before using.
2. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when
multiple coats of the- same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish
coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules.
2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,
convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in
place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and
provide desired protection.
5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently
fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through
registers or grilles.
7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.
B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent
surface deterioration.
1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of
application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as
recommended by the manufactuier. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even
surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.
2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply
additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special
attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry
film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat
surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under
moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause
the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
PAINTING 09900 - 5 of 8
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, Or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of
appropriate size for the surface or item being painted.
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by
the manufacturer for the material and texture required.
3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the
manufacturer for the material and texture required.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as
recommended by the manufacturer.
E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items
exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces.
F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports.
2. Ductwork.
3. Insulation.
4. Accessory items.
G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Conduit and fittings.
2. Switchgear.
3. Panelboards.
H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete
coverage with pores filled
I. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by
the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been .
prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or
unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no bum through or other defects
due to insufficient sealing.
J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,
opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,
holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be
acceptable.
K. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no
evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface
imperfections.
L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish,
or repaint work not complying with requirements.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as
the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied:
1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint
material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken,
identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor.
2. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as
required by the Owner:
a. Quantitative material analysis.
b. Abrasion resistance.
C. Apparent reflectivity.
d Flexibility.
PAINTING 09900 - 6 of 8
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
C. Washability.
f. Absorption.
g. Accelerated weathering.
h. Dry opacity.
i. Accelerated yellowness.
j. Recoating.
k Skinning.
1. Color retention.
M. Alkali and mildew resistance.
3. The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results slow material being
used does not comply with specified requirements. The Contractor shall remove
noncomplying paint from the site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated
with the rejected paint. If necessary, the Contractor may be required to remove rejected
paint from previously painted surfaces it on repainting with specified paint, the 2
coatings are incompatible.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded
paint materials from the site.
1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished
surfaces.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct
damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective
wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.
1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P 1.
3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Sand Float Stucco:
1. First Coat: "PorberLock" #6010 Pigmented Sealer
2. Intermediate Coat: "3939 Portersept" Exterior Satin Acrylic
3. Top Coat: "3939 Portersept" Exterior Satin Acrylic
B. Doors and Frames - Galvanized Steel
1. First Coat: "Porter Guard" #215/212 series, DIM Primer
2. Intermediate Coat: "6029 Acri-Pro 100" Semi-gloss Exterior Acrylic
3. Top Coat: "6029 Acri-Pro 100" Semi-gloss Exterior Acrylic
3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Drywall Walls (Flat Finish):
1. First Coat: "Blankit" # 1129 series, Acrylic Primer.
2. Intermediate Coat: "999 Silken Touch" Eggshell Interior Latex
3. Top Coat: "999 Silken Touch" Eggshell Interior Latex
B. Drywall Walls - Restrooms (Satin Finish):
1. First Coat. "Blankit" # 1129 series, Acrylic Primer
2. Intermediate Coat: "1119 Silken Touch" Semi-gloss Interior Acrylic
PAINTING 09900 - 7 of 8
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
3. Top Coat: "1119 Silken Touch" Semi-gloss Interior Acrylic
C. Drywall Ceilings (Flat Finish):
1. First Coat: "Blankit" #1129 series, Acrylic Primer
2. Intermediate Coat: "1119 Silken Touch" Semi-gloss Interior Acrylic
3. Top Coat: "1119 Silken Touch" Semi-gloss Interior Acrylic
D. Metal Door Frames
1. First Coat: "Porterguard" #215 Series, DTM Pimer
2. Intermediate Coat: "1139 Silken Touch" Semi-gloss Interior Acrylic
3. Top Coat: "1139 Silken Touch" Semi-gloss Interior Acrylic
END OF SECTION 09900
•
•
PAINTING 09900 - 8 of 8
•
•
•
APA 03.07
SECTION 10431- SIGNAGE
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUAEAARY
A. This Section includes:
1. Panel Signs
Training Building Fire Station #48
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Product Data:
1. Submit five (5) copies of manufacturer's technical information, installation instructions
and maintenance recommendations.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit five (5) copies of shop drawings clearly indicating:
a. Size, type, layout, colors and wording of signs, letters, plaques and directories.
b. Fabrication, construction and installation details of anchors, grounds,
reinforcements and accessories. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions
for installation of all anchors to be installed, as a unit of work in other sections, for
all signs, letters, plaques and directories anchored to permanent construction.
C. Plans and elevations which indicate the locations of all signs, letters, plaques and
directories as specified for this project
d Large scale sections of typical members and other components.
e. Message list for each sign required
£ Proof copy of metal plaques.
C. Samples:
1. General:
a. The Architect shall make all selections from the samples of standard colors,
patterns and surface textures submitted by the manufacturer.
2. Signs and Letters:
a. Submit one (1) "full - size" sample, representative of each type of sign and letter
specified.
D. Sign Schedule:
1. Submit schedule of signs to be used, indicating Room Name and Number, for review.
Room Numbers may be different than indicated on the schedule depending upon final
numbering issued by the Owner. Verify prior to sign fabrication.
13 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Codes and Standards:
1. Comply with all Codes and Standards applicable to this Section, specifically, the
"Americans with Disabilities Act" of 1991(ADA) including any subsequent revisions
and the 1994 State Requirements for Educational Facilities (SREF) including any
subsequent revisions.
B. Single Source Responsibility:
I. For each separate type of sign required, obtain signs from a single manufacturer capable
of producing first quality work
C. Installation:
1. Manufacturer/Supplier shall be responsible to prcgvide installation in accordance with the
requirements of these specifications including providing all fasteners and/or adhesives
required. In the event of difference between these specifications and the manufacturer's
recommendations, these specifications shall govern.
SIGNAGE
10431-1 of 4
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
2. Remove and replace imperfect or damaged material prior to substantial completion.
3. Throughout the one (1) year warranty period, any broken, faded, delaminated or
otherwise defective product shall be replaced with a new and like product without
material and labor cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERMANENT ROOM DESIGNATIONS
A. General:
1. Permanent Room Designations shall include Room Names and/or Numbers and shall
conform to the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1991(ADA) including any subsequent
revisions.
2. Permanent Room Designations shall be considered "Panel Signs".
3. Letters and numbers shall be considered "Tactile Text".
B. Character Proportion:
1. Letters and numbers on signs shall have a width to height ratio between 3:5 and 1:1 and a
stroke-width to height ratio between 1:5 and 1:10.
C. Character Height:
1. Characters and numbers on signs shall be sized according to the viewing distance from
which they are to be read. The minimum height is measured using an upper case X. Use
upper case characters only.
D. Raised and Brailled Characters & Pictorial Symbol Signs:
1. Letters and numbers (tactile text) on signs shall be raised 1/32", upper case, sans serif or
simple serif type and shall be accompanied with Grade II Braille, raised 1/32", on the
bottom of the sign. Raised tactile text shall be at least 5/8" high, but no higher than 2".
Pictograms, in a minimum 6" x 6" area, may be reverse engraved/subsurface and shall be
accompanied by the equivalent verbal description placed directly below the pictogram.
E. Finish and Contrast:
1. The characters and background of signs shall be eggshell, matte or other non-glare finish.
2. Characters and symbols shall contrast with their background - either light characters on a
dark background or dark characters on a light background.
3. Colors: See 1.2 SUBMITTALS, C. La., page 10431-1.
F. Sign Materials and Product Manufacturers:
1. The signs shall be fabricated from modified acrylic polymers, (MAP) suitable for indoor
use.
Approved Modified Acrylic Polymer PRODUCT MANUFACTURERS:
1. Rowmark "Ultra Mattes"
Rowland, Inc.
15 Massirio Drive
Kensington, Connecticut 06037
(800) 243-3339
2. 'Wiw ,
New Hermes, Inc.
2200 Northmont Pky.
Duluth, Georgia 30136
(800) 843-7637
SIGNAGE 10431 - 2 of 4
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
3. "Crystals"
Innovative Plastics, Inc.
P. O. Box 7065
Algonquin, Illinois 60102
(815) 477-0778
G. Sign Fabrication:
1. Signs shall be a minimum of 1/8" thick, not including raised characters, non-glare (matte)
finished surface with straight edges fte of saw marks or any other imperfections.
2. Signs shall be fabricated by applying a thin layer of ink to the back of the clear base sheet
and a clear protective coating over the ink. Ink colors shall be as specified in 1.2
SUBMITTALS, C.l.a., page 10431-1
3. Raised "Tactile Text" shall be achieved by chemically welding 1/16" thick computer cut,
colorfast MAP text characters into the 1/32" computer recessed area of the face of the
base sheet The text shall be chemically welded to the recessed surface of the base sheet
using methylene chloride and shall, after fabrication, remain raised 1/32" above the face
of the base sheet
4. Grade 11 Braille shall be achieved by pressing optically correct acrylic raster balls into
.003 in. computer drilled holes in the base sheet surface. The acrylic raster balls shall be
U.V. protected and shall be guaranteed against fading. Bordered, depressed Braille is
NOT acceptable.
5. Sip edges shall be square and the comers shall have a 1/2" radius.
6. Text style shall be HELVETICA upper case letters. Text height shall be 3/4" and Number
height shall be 3/4".
7. Approved Modified Acrylic Polymer sign manufacturers:
a. All sign manufacturers shall comply with the specified product and fabrication
requirements.
8. Sign Names, Type and Size:
a. Type A Room Name and/or Number only 4" x 4"
b. Type B Room Name and Number 4" x 6"
(One line of text)
C. Type B-1 Room Name and Number 4" x 8"
("To Accommodate Text')
d. Type C Multiple lines of Text and Room Number 6" x 6"
e. Type C-1 Multiple lines of Text and Room Number 6" x 8"
("To Accommodate Text')
£ Type D Pictogram Sign and Room Name and Number 9" x 6"
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Panel Wall Signs shall be located where shown on the drawings and as called out in these
specifications.
B. Panel Wall Signs shall be installed level and plumb with sign surfaces free from distortion or
other defects of appearance.
C. Mounting Heights:
1. Signs mounted flat against the wall:
a. Panel Wall Signs shall be mounted 60" above the finish floor to the centerline of
the sign
b. Conform to ADAAG 4.4 Protruding Objects for all flat wall mounted signage.
SIGNAGE 10431- 3 of 4
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
3.2 PERMANENT ROOM DESIGNATIONS:
A. Signs shall be located as shown on the drawings and as directed by the Architect.•
1. Signs shall be mounted on the wall adjacent to the latch side of the door, located where a
person can approach within 3" of the door and avoid the door swing and protruding
objects.
2. Signs shall be installed as follows:
a. Signs shall be attached to the wall with two (2) #8 flat head cadmium plated, (or
equivalent) steel threaded, tamper/vandal proof fasteners into expansion shields
penetrating not less than 3/4" into the substrate. All holes shall be silicone filled.
b. Both the vertical and the horizontal sides of the signs shall be installed into a bed
of silicone sealant which shall be screeded even with the outside square edge of the
signs.
C. Should shim plates be necessary to obtain a true and level secure attachment, they
shall be aluminum with pre-drilled and counter sunk holes, silicone filled
d. Signs shall be mounted to glass with standard liquid silicone adhesive. Use double
sided vinyl tape where recommended by the manufacturer to hold the sign in place
until the silicone adhesive has fully cured. Use a backer plate, of the same material
and color of the sign, on the opposite side of the glass to hide the silicone adhesive.
END OF SECTION 10431
•
?J
SIGNAGE 10431- 4 of 4
APA 02.07 Fire Station #48
SECTION 10505 - METAL LOCKERS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Heavy-duty metal lockers.
2. Locker benches.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated
B. Shop Drawings: For metal lockers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments
to other work.
C. Samples: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Maintenance data.
E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.3 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of metal lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish,
within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Two years from date of Substantial
Completion.
0 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008K Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, suitable
for exposed applications.
B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653K Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
A60 (ZF 180) zinc-iron, alloy (galvannealed) coating designation.
C. Expanded Metal: ASTM F 1267, Type H (flattened), Class I, 3/4-inch (19-mm) steel mesh,
with at least 70 percent open area.
D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
E. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221(ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper recommended by
aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.
F. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, cold rolled.
G. Particleboard ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
H. Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type, exposed bolt heads; with self-locking nuts
or lock washers for nuts on moving parts.
1. Anchors: Material, type, and size required for secure anchorage to each substrate.
1. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of
exterior walls, and elsewhere as indicated, for corrosion resistance.
2. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in=place anchors.
2.2 STANDARD METAL LOCKERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
. 1. Art Metal Products; Standard K.D., Lockers.
2. ASI Storage Solutions Inc.; Traditional Collection.
3. Lyon Workspace Products, LLC; Standard Lockers.
METAL LOCKERS 10505 -1 of 4
APA 02.07
Fire Station #48
4. Penco Products, Inc.; Vanguard Lockers.
5. Republic Storage Systems Company; Standard Lockers.
B. Locker Arrangement: Single tier, as indicated on Drawings.
C. Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.
D. Body and Shelves: Assembled by riveting or bolting body components together. Fabricate
from unperforated 0.024-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.
E. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; lapped and
factory welded at comers; with top and bottom main frames factory welded into vertical main
frames. Form continuous, integral door strike full height on vertical main frames.
F. Doors: One piece; fabricated from 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; formed into
channel shape with double bend at vertical edges and with right-angle single bend at horizontal
edges.
1. Doors for box lockers less than 15 inches wide may be fabricated from 0.048-inch
nominal-thickness steel sheet.
2. Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard reinforcing angles, channels, or stiffeners for
doors more than 15 inches wide; welded to inner face of doors.
3. Stiffeners: Manufacturer's standard full-height stiffener fabricated from 0.048-inch
nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded to inner face of doors.
4. Sound-Dampening Panels: Manufacturer's standard, designed to stiffen doors and reduce
sound levels when doors are closed, of die-formed metal with full perimeter flange and
sound-dampening material; welded to inner face of doors.
5. Door Style: Louvered vents at top and bottom.
G. Hinges: Welded to door and attached to door frame with no fewer than two factory-installed
rivets per hinge that are completely concealed and tamper resistant when door is closed;
fabricated to swing 180 degrees.
1. Continuous Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, steel, full height.
H. Recessed Door Handle and Latch: Stainless-steel cup with integral door pull, recessed so
locking device does not protrude beyond face of door; pry and vandal resistant.
1. Single-Point Latching: Nonmoving latch hook with steel padlock loop that projects
through recessed cup and is finished to match metal locker body.
a. Latch Hook: Equip each door with one latch hook, fabricated from 0.105-inch
nominal-thickness steel sheet, welded midway up full-height door strike; with
resilient silencer.
I. Equipment: Equip each metal locker with identification plate and the following unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Single-Tier Units: Shelf, one double-prong ceiling hook, and two single prong wall
hooks.
I Accessories:
1. Recess Trim: Fabricated from 0.048-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.
2. Filler Panels: Fabricated from manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.036-
inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.
3. Finished End Panels: Fabricated from 0.024-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.
K. Finish: Powder coat.
1. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 LOCKER BENCHES
A. Provide bench units with overall assembly height of 17-1/2 inches.
B. Bench Tops: Manufacturer's standard one-piece units, with rounded corners and edges.
1. Size: Minimum 9-1/2 inches wide by 11/4 inches thick
2. Laminated clear hardwood with one coat of clear sealer on all surfaces and one coat of
clear lacquer on top and sides.
METAL LOCKERS 10505 - 2 of 4
APA 02.07
Fire Station #48
C. Fixed Pedestals: Manufacturer's standard supports, with predrilled fastener holes for attaching
bench top and anchoring to floor, complete with fasteners and anchors, and as follows:
1. Tubular steel: 1 U2 inch diameter steel tubing see Section "Pipe and Tube Railings."
a. Color selection by Architect.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, and without warp and with metal faces flat and free of
dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch and free of sharp edges and burrs.
1. Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for complete
installation.
B. Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, and
back, and common intermediate uprights separating compartments. Factory weld frame
members of each metal locker together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly.
C. Knocked-Down Construction: Fabricate metal lockers using nuts, bolts, screws, or rivets for
preassembly at plant prior to shipping.
D. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed type, aluminum or steel; zinc plated
E.; Identification Plates: Manufacturer's standard, etched, embossed, or stamped aluminum or
plastic plates, with numbers and letters at least 3/8 inch high.
F. Recess Trim: Fabricated with minimum 2-1/2-inch face width and in lengths as long as
practical; finished to match lockers.
G. Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners, except for
perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers.
1. Provide one-piece panels for double-row (back-to-back) locker ends.
2.5 STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply
manufacturer's standard, baked-polymer, thermosetting powder finish. Comply with resin
manufacturer's written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry fihn thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.
1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more
than 36 inches o.c. Using concealed fasteners, install anchors through backup reinforcing
plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion.
2. Anchor single rows of metal lockers to walls near top and bottom of lockers.
3. Anchor back-to-back metal lockers to floor.
B. Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Assemble with standard fasteners, with no exposed fasteners
on door faces or face frames.
C. Equipment and Accessories: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately
together to form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates.
1. Attach hooks with at least two fasteners.
2. Attach door locks on doors using security-type fasteners.
3. Identification Plates: Identify metal lockers with identification indicated on Drawings.
a Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two aluminum
rivets.
METAL LOCKERS
4. Attach recess trim to recessed metal lockers with concealed clips.
10505 - 3 of 4
APA 02.07
Fire Station #48
5. Attach filler panels with concealed fasteners. Locate filler panels where indicated on
Drawings.
6. Attach sloping-top units to metal lockers, with closures at exposed ends.
7. Attach boxed end panels with concealed fasteners to conceal exposed ends of
nonrecessed metal lockers.
8. Attach finished end panels with fasteners only at perimeter to conceal exposed ends of
nonrecessed metal lockers.
D. Fixed Locker Benches: Provide no fewer than two pedestals for each bench, uniformly spaced
not more than 72 inches apart Securely fasten tops of pedestals to undersides of bench tops,
and anchor bases to floor.
END OF SECTION 10505
•
E
METAL LOCKERS 10505 - 4 of 4
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
SECTION 10520 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Portable fire extinguishers.
2. Fire-protection cabinets.
3. Mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.
B. See Division 9 painting Sections for field painting fire-protection cabinets.
C. See Division 13 Section "Fire-Suppression Piping" for hose systems, racks, and valves.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated
1. Fire Extinguishers: lnclude rating and classification.
2. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Include door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, panel style,
and details of installation.
3. Show location of knockouts for hose valves.
B. Maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable
Fire Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements of
ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers
indicated are accommodated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufactuuers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008K Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type
of use and finish indicated, and as follows:
1. Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221(ASTM B 221M).
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
D. Copper-Alloy Brass Sheet: ASTM B 36/B 36K alloy UNS No. C26000 (cartridge brass,
70 percent copper).
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - l of 3
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
E. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick,
Class 1 (clear).
F. Acrylic Bubble: One piece.
2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. Amerex Corporation.
2. Ansul Incorporated.
3. Badger Fire Protection.
4. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.
5. Fire End & Croker Corporation.
6. General Fire Extinguisher Corporation.
7. JL Industries, Inc.
8. Kidde Fymetics.
9. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
10. Modem Metal Products; Div. of Technico.
11. Moon American.
12. Potter Roemer, Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.
13. Watrous; Div. of American Specialties, Inc.
B. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet
and mounting bracket indicated
1. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,
Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections,
maintenance, and recharging.
C. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 2-A:10-B:C, 5-lb (2.3-kg)
nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel,
container.
2.4 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. Fire End & Croker Corporation.
2. General Accessory Mfg. Co.
3. JL Industries, Inc.
4. Kidde Fymetics.
5. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
6. Modern Metal Products; Div. of Technico.
7. Moon American.
8. Potter Roemer, Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.
9. Watrous; Div. of American Specialties, Inc.
B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.
C. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.
D. Cabinet Material: Aluminum.
E. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth to suit style of
trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping
surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).
1. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2 21/2 inch backbend depth.
F. Door Material: Aluminum sheet.
G. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame.
H. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear).
I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet
type, trim style, and door material and style indicated
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 2 of 3
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
J. Finishes:
1. Aluminum: Baked enamel.
a Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door,
and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated Weld joints and grind
smooth.
1. Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428-inch- (1.1-mm-)
thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/&inch- (16-mm-) thick, fire-barrier
material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated
and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected
1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum
1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.
2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground
smooth.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed
cabinets will be installed.
0 B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. Remove and replace damaged,
defective, or undercharged units.
C. Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of
cabinet and trim style.
D. Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not
indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is
not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire-protection cabinets.
2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels.
3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb.
F. Identification: Apply decals at locations indicated.
G. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral
locking devices operate properly.
H. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair.
END OF SECTION 10520
•
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 3 of 3
APA 03.07
SECTION 10801- TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Public-use washroom accessories.
2. Public-use shower room accessories.
Training Building Fire Station #48
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated
B. Product Schedule:
1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings.
2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of
the following:
1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
2. American Specialties, Inc.
3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
4. Bradley Corporation.
5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO).
B. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser Type `B":
1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc; 0264-1A.
2. Double-roll dispenser.
3.- Mounting: Surface mounted.
4. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with standard spindle.
5. Capacity: Designed for Two rolls up to 6" diameter tissue rolls.
6. Material and Finish: Satin-finish aluminum bracket with plastic spindle.
C. Paper Towel (Folded) Dispenser Type "F":
1. Basis-of-Design Product American Specialties, Inc.; 0210.
2. Mounting: Surface mounted.
3. Minimum Capacity: 400 C-fold or 525 multifold towels.
4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
5. Lockset: Tumbler type.
6. Refill Indicators: Pierced slots at sides or front.
D. Waste Receptacle Type' K":
1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc.; 0828
2. Mounting: Surface mounted.
3. Minimum Capacity: Seven Gallons
4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
5. Liner: Reusable vinyl liner.
E. Liquid-Soap Dispenser Type "B":
1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc.; 2001
2. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form.
3. Mounting: Vertically oriented, surface mounted.
4. Capacity: 30 oz.
•
•
0
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801-1 of 3
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
• 5. Materials: ABS plastic.
6. Lockset: Tumbler type.
7. Refill Indicator: Window type.
F. Grab Bar Types "C," "D," and "H":
1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc.; 3800
2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.
3. Material: Stainless steel, 18 gauge.
a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area.
4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches.
5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.
G. Mirror Unit Type "A":
1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc.: 0600
2. Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 0.05 inch thick.
a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth.
3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated
below.
a. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices
requiring a special tool to remove.
4. Size: As indicated on Drawings.
H. Robe Hook Type 'T':
1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc.: 0785-Z
2. Description: Double-prong unit.
3. Material and Finish: Polished brass-plated zinc alloy (zamac).
4. Use 0785-ZD in dry locations and 0785-ZW in wet locations.
2.2 PUBLIC-USE SHOWER ROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of
the following:
1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
2. American Specialties, Inc.
3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
4. Bradley Corporation.
5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO).
B. Shower Curtain Rod Type "T":
1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc. 1204
2. Description: 1-1/4-inch OD; fabricated from nominal 0.05-inch-thick stainless steel.
3. Mounting Flanges: Stainless-steel flanges designed for exposed fasteners.
4. Finish No. 4 (satin). 18 gauge type 304 stainless steel.
5. Length: As indicated on drawings.
C. Shower Curtain Type "J":
1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc.; 1200-V
2. Size: Minimum 6 inches wider than opening by 72 inches high.
3. Material: Vinyl, minimum 0.006-inch4hick, opaque, matte.
4. Color: White.
5. Grommets: Corrosion resistant at minimum 6 inches o.c. through top hem.
6. Shower Curtain Hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless-steel, spring wire curtain hooks with
snap fasteners, sized to accommodate specified curtain rod Provide one hook per curtain
grommet. American Specialties, Inc.; 1200 SHU
D. Folding Shower Seat Type "G":
1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc.; 8206
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801- 2 of 3
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
2. Configuration: L-shaped seat, designed for wheelchair access.
3. Seat: Phenolic or polymeric composite of slat-type or one-piece construction in color as
selected by Architect.
4. Mounting Mechanism: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
5. Dimensions: 22 7/8" x 33" overall; Right or Left as indicated on drawings.
2.3 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc.
2. TCI Products.
3. Truebro, Inc.
B. Underlavatory Guard at Lavatory in Existing Building:
1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies, that
prevent direct contact with and burns from piping, and allow service access without
removing coverings.
2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded-plastic, white.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate
to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
END OF SECTION 10801
0.,
•
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801- 3 of 3
APA 03.07
0 SECTION 10900 - GEAR DRYING UNITS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:
1. Turnout gear drying units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer:
1. Archimedes Products, Inc.
21 Floyds Run
Bohemia, NY 11716
(631) 589-1215
www.dwAchydmtor.com
2.2 TURNOUT GEAR DRYING UNITS
A. Product
1. The Dehydrator: Provide six eight-station drying units.
Training Building Fire Station #48
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Deliver fully assembled and set up per manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION 10900
GEAR DRYING UNITS 10900 - 1 of 1
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station #48
SECTION 12492 - VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUIVEVIARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Vertical louver blinds, PVC vanes.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for vertical louver blinds.
C. Samples: For each exposed finish.
D. Product certificates.
E. Maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide vertical louver blinds with the fire-test-response
characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated
below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701.
B. Product Standard: Provide vertical louver blinds complying with WCSC A 100.1.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver vertical louver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name,
fire-test-response characteristics, and location of installation using same designations indicated
on Drawings and in a window treatment schedule.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS, PVC VANES
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Hunter Douglas; Permaline #6 Headrail System.
2. Levolor, a Newell Rubbermaid Company; Excaliber 3 1/2" Headrail System.
3. Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc.; Grabar 6-71 Supervue Track System.
B. Rail System: Headrail.
1. Rails: Extruded aluminum.
a. Anodized aluminum, clear.
C. Vanes: Lead-free, UV-stabilized, integrally colored, opaque, permanently flexible, extruded
PVC that will not crack or yellow; with flat profile and not less than 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) overlap
when vanes are rotated fully closed.
1. Nominal Vane Width: 3-1/2 inches.
D. Vane Directional Control: Manual.
E. Traversing Control: Manual.
F. Draw and Stack Position: As indicated on Drawings.
G. Cord-Tensioner Mounting: Wall.
H. Valance: One.
1. Finish Color Characteristics: Match color, texture, pattern, and gloss of vanes. •
I. Louver Bottom: Connecting or spacing chains.
J. Mounting. Ceiling mounting.
VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS 12492 -1 of 2
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station #48
K. Stack Release: Permitting stacked vanes to be moved away from stacking position for total
access to glazed opening.
L. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 VERTICAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION
A. Product Description: Vertical louver blind consisting of equally spaced, synchronized vanes
and rail system with self-aligning carrier mechanisms, carriers, traverse and vane directional
mechanisms and controls, and installation hardware.
B. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.
1. Louver Directional and Traversing Control Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated
moving parts.
C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows:
1. Blind Units Installed between (inside) Jambs: Width equal to 1/4 inch (6 mm) per side or
1/2 inch (13 mm) total less than jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which each blind
is installed Length equal to 1/4 inch (6 mm), plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm), less than
head-to-sill dimension of opening in which each blind is-installed.
D. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of blind, for supporting
headrail, valance, and operating hardware, and for hardware position and blind mounting
method indicated.
E. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal
noncorrosive to blind hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to
supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use.
F. Color-Coated Finish: For metal components exposed to view, unless anodized or plated finish
is indicated. Apply manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with manufacturer's written
instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum
dry film thickness.
G. Component Color: Provide cords and exposed-to-view metal and plastic matching or
coordinating with vane color, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting
performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install vertical louver blinds level and plumb and aligned with adjacent units according to
manufacturer's written instructions, and located so exterior vane edges in any position are not
closer than 2 inches (51 mm) to interior face of glass. Install intermediate support as required to
prevent deflection in headrail. Allow clearances between adjacent blinds and for operating
glazed opening's operation hardware, if any.
B. Flush Mounted: Install vertical louver blinds with vane edges flush with finish face of opening
when vanes are tilted open.
C. Head Mounted. Install headrail on face of opening head.
D. Adjust vertical louver blinds to operate smoothly, easily, safely and free of binding or
malfimction throughout entire operational range.
E. Clean vertical louver blind surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
END OF SECTION 12492
VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS 12492 - 2 of 2
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station # 48
SECTION 13910 - BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUAEVIARY
A. Section includes pipe, fittings, valves, and connections for sprinkler standpipe and fire
hose combination sprinkler and standpipe systems.
B. Related Sections:
1. Refer to appropriate architectural section for Paints and Coatings: Execution
requirements for piping painting specified by this section.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME B16.1- Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
2. ASME B 16.11- Forged Steel Fittings - Socket Welding and Threaded
3. ASME B 16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
4. ASME B 16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
Fittings.
5. ASME B 16.25 - Buttwelding Ends.
6. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.
7. ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings.
8. ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
9. ASME B16.9 - Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings.
10. ASME B36.IOM - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe.
B. ASTM International:
1. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot
Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
2. ASTM A135 - Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe.
3. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought
Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service.
4. ASTM A795 - Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use.
5. ASTM F438 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.
6. ASTM F439 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
7. ASTM F442/F442M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR).
8. ASTM F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly
(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
C. American Welding Society:
1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding.
2. AWS Dl.I - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION MATERIALS AND METHODS 13910 -1 of 7
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station # 48
D. American Water Works Association:
1. AW WA C 110 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iran and Grey-Iron
Fittings, 3 in. through 48 in. (75 mm through 1200 mm), for Water and Other
Liquids.
2. AWWA C I I I - American National Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for
Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
3. AW WA C 151- American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally
Cast, for Water.
E. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
2. NFPA 24 - Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances.
3. Applicable codes and standards adapted August 8, 2005 by State Fire Marshall's
Rule 69A3.012F.A.C.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to appropriate architectural section for Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall
penetration seals. Indicate install ation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and
piping connections.
C. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and
ratings
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to appropriate architectural section for Execution Requirements: Project Record
documents.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts lists.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13 State Municipality of Highways Public
Work's standard
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer. Company specializing in mamifacturing products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100
miles of Project
BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION MATERIALS AND METHODS 13910 - 2 of 7
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station # 48
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three
years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to appropriate architectural section for Product Requirements: Product storage and
handling requirements.
B. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labeling in place.
C. Furnish cast iron and steel valves with temporary protective coating.
D. Furnish temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Refer to appropriate architectural section for Execution Requirements: Product warranties
and product bonds.
B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for basic fire suppression materials and methods.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 VALVES
A. Furnish materials in accordance with State Municipality of Highways Public Work's
standards.
B. Gate Valves:
1. Up to and including 2 inches: Bronze body and trim, rising stem, hand wheel,
solid wedge or disc, threaded ends.
2. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem pre-grooved for mounting
tamper switch, hand wheel, OS&Y, solid rubber covered bronze or cast iron
wedge, flanged grooved ends.
3. Over 4 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem with bolted bonnet, solid
bronze wedge, flanged ends, iron body indicator post assembly.
C. Globe or Angle Valves:
1. Up to and including 2 inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and hand
wheel, inside screw, renewable rubber disc, threaded ends, with back seating
capacity packable under pressure.
2. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel, OS&Y, plug-
type disc, flanged ends, renewable seat and disc.
D. Ball Valves:
•
BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION MATERIALS AND METHODS 13910 - 3 of 7
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station # 48
1. Up t0 and including 2 inches: Bronze Stainless steel two piece body, brass,
chrome plated bronze, or stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring,
lever handle and balancing stops, threaded ends with union.
2. Over 2 inches: Manufacturers: Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon
seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle or gear drive hand wheel for sizes 10
inches and over, flanged
E. Butterfly Valves:
1. Bronze Body: Stainless steel disc, resilient replaceable seat, threaded or grooved
ends, extended neck, hand wheel and gear drive and integral indicating device,
and built-in tamper proof switch rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC.
2. Cast or Ductile Iron Body: Cast or ductile iron, chrome or nickel plated ductile
iron or aluminum bronze disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer, lug, or
grooved ends. With extended neck, hand wheel and gear drive and integral
indicating device, and internal external tamper switch rated 10 amp at 115 volt
AC.
•
F. Check Valves:
1. Up to and including 2 inches: Bronze body and swing disc, rubber seat, threaded
ends.
2. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing check with rubber disc, renewable
disc and seat, flanged ends with automatic ball check.
3. 4 inches and Over. Iron body, bronze disc with stainless steel spring, resilient
seal, threaded, wafer, or flanged ends.
G. Drain Valves:
1. Compression Stop: Bronze with hose thread nipple and cap.
2. Ball Valve: Brass with cap and chain, 3/4 inchinch hose thread.
2.02 BURIED PIPING
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B, ASTM A135, ASTM A795, or ASME B36.10,
Schedule 40 black galvanized, with ASME C 105 polyethylene jacket, or double layer,
half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape.
1. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, butt welded; ASME B16.25, butt
weld ends; ASTM A234/A234M, wrought carbon steel and alloy steel; ASME
B 16.5, steel flanges and fittings; ASME B 16. 11, forged steel rocket welded and
threaded, with double layer, half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape.
2. Cast Iran Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings.
3. Joints: AWS DIA, welded
4. Casing: Closed glass cell insulation. Polyurethane insulation with high density
polyethylene jacket and heat shrink sleeves.
B. Cast Iron Pipe: AW WA C 151.
1. Fittings: AW WA C 110, standard thickness.
2. Joints: AW WA C 111, rubber gasket.
3. Mechanical Couplings: Shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and
washers.
BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION MATERIALS AND METHODS
13910-4of7
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station # 48
2.03 ABOVE GROUND PIPING
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B; ASTM A135; ASTM A135 UL listed,
threadable, light wall; ASTM A795; or ASME B36.10; Schedule 5 10 40 black
galvanized.
1. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, butt welded; ASME B16.25, butt
weld ends; ASTM A234/A234M, wrought carbon steel and alloy steel; ASME
B 16.5, steel flanges and fittings; ASME B 16. 11, forged steel socket welded and
threaded.
2. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B 16. 1, flanges and flanged fittings; ASME B 16.4,
threaded fittings.
3. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, threaded fittings ASTM 47.
4. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and
lock, "C" shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers;
galvanized for galvanized pipe.
5. Mechanical Formed Fittings: Carbon-steel housing with integral pipe stop and O-
ring pocked and O-ring uniformly compressed into permanent mechanical
engagement onto pipe.
B. CPVC Pipe: ASTM F442/F442M, SDR 13.5.
1. Fittings: ASTM F438 schedule 40, or ASTM F439 schedule 80, CPVC.
2. Joints: ASTM F493, solvent weld.
C. Polybutylene Pipe: ASTM D3309, SDR 11.
1. Fittings: ASTM D3309, Polybutylene.
2. Joints: Fusion welds.
D. Cast Iron Pipe: AW WA C 151.
1. Fittings: AW WA C 110, standard thickness.
2. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket.
3. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and
lock, "C" shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers;
galvanized for galvanized pipe.
2.04 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Conform to NFPA 13.
B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron Carbon steel, adjustable swivel,
split ring.
C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inch and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
D. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches: Cast iron hook.
F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel
clamp.
BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION MATERIALS AND METHODS 13910 - 5 of 7
APA 03.07
G.
H.
I.
Training Building Fire Station # 48
Vertical Support~ Steel riser clamp Angle ring.
Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and
concrete pier or steel support.
Copper Pipe Support:Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install piping in accordance with NFPA 13 for sprinkler systems and NFPA 24 and City
of Clearwater utility standards for service mains.
•
B. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain
gradient.
C. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other
work.
D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
E. Install pipe sleeve at piping penetrations through footings partitions, walls, and floors.
Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to maintain fire resistance equivalent to fire separation.
F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or
connected equipment.
•
G. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Install in accordance with NFPA 13.
2. Install hangers to with minimum 12 inch space between finished covering and
adjacent work
3. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
4. Use hangers with 1-U2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for
pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
5. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of
connected horizontal piping.
6. Where installing several pipes in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple
or trapeze hangers.
7. Install copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping sheet lead packing
between hanger or support and piping.
BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION MATERIALS AND METHODS
13910-6of7
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station # 48
8. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 09900. Hangers
and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces
are not considered exposed.
H. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Install eccentric reducers to
maintain top of pipe level.
I. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support
members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one
coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
J. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated.
K. Where more than one piping system material is specified, install compatible system
components and joints. Install flanges, union, and couplings at locations requiring
servicing.
L. Die cut threaded joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed
oil or other non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only.
M. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings
prior to after installation.
N. Install gate ball or butterfly valves for shut-off or isolating service.
0. Install drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus.
P. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and install through-bolt
with recessed square steel plate and nut above flush with top of recessed into and grouted
flush with slab.
3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Inserts:
1. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms.
2. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
reinforced concrete beams.
3. Install hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe
over 4 inches.
4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Refer to appropriate architectural section for Execution Requirements: Final cleaning.
B. Clean entire system after other construction is complete.
END OF SECTION
0-
*III
•
BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION MATERIALS AND METHODS 13910 - 7 of 7
APA 03.07
Training Building Fire Station # 48
SECTION 13930 - WET-PIPE FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes wet-pipe sprinkler system, system design, installation, and certification.
B. Related Sections:
1. Refer to appropriate section of division 16 for Wiring Connections and Fire
Alarm System: Execution requirements for electric connections to equipment
specified by this section
1.2 REFERENCES
A. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
•
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. System to provide coverage for entire building. building areas noted. building areas noted
in Schedule.
B. Provide hydraulically designed system to NFPA 13 light hazard ordinary hazard
requirements.
C. Determine volume and pressure of incoming water supply from water flow test data.
Revise design when test data become available prior to submittals.
D. Interface system with building control system. building fire and smoke alarm system.
E. Provide fire department connections as indicated on Drawings.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to appropriate architectural section for Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of finished ceiling areas indicating sprinkler locations
coordinated with ceiling installation Indicate detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports,
sprinklers, components and accessories. Indicate system controls;
C. Product Data: Submit data on sprinklers, valves, and specialties, including manufacturers
catalog information Submit performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, support
requirements, and piping connections.
D. Samples: Submit two of each style of sprinkler specified.
•
E. Design Data: Submit design calculations; signed and sealed by professional engineer
WET-PIPE FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 13930 - 1 of 5
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station # 48
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to appropriate architectural section for Submittal Procedures for Execution
Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping
from drawings. Indicate drain and test locations.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit components of system, servicing requirements,
record drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location
and numbers of service depot.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13 State Municipality of Florida.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer. Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three
years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
C. Design system under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of
this Work and licensed at Project location. in State of.
1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Refer to appropriate architectural section for Submittal Procedures for Administrative
Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to appropriate architectural section for Submittal Procedures for Product
Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Store products in shipping containers until installation.
C. Furnish piping with temporary inlet and outlet caps until installation.
•
a
•
WET-PIPE FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 13930 - 2 of 5
APA 03.07 Training Building Fire Station # 48
0 1.10 WARRANTY
A. Refer to appropriate architectural section for Submittal Procedures for Execution
Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for.
1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Refer to appropriate architectural section for Submittal Procedures for Execution
Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B. Furnish extra sprinklers under provisions of NFPA 13.
C. Furnish suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type.
D. Furnish metal storage cabinet in location designated located adjacent to alarm valve.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SPRINKLERS
A. Furnish materials in accordance with NFPA 13 standards.
B. Suspended Ceiling Type:
1. Type: Standard Semi-recessed Recessed Concealed pendant type with matching
push on clamp on screw on escutcheon plate.
2. Finish: Brass. Chrome plated. Enamel, color as selected
3. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Brass. Chrome plated Enamel, color as selected.
4. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type Glass bulb type temperature rated for
specific area hazard.
C. Exposed Area Type:
1. Type: Standard upright type with guard.
2. Finish: Brass. Chrome plated. Enamel, color as selected
3. Fusible Link Fusible-solder link type Glass bulb type temperature rated for
specific area hazard.
D. Side wall Type:
1. Type: Standard Semi-recessed Recessed horizontal side wall type with matching
push on clamp on screw on escutcheon plate and guard.
2. Finish: Brass. Chrome plated. Enamel, color as selected
3. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Brass. Chrome plated Enamel, color as selected
4. Fusible Link Fusible-solder link type Glass bulb type temperature rated for
specific area hazard.
0 E. Guards: Finish to match sprinkler finish.
WET-PIPE FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 13930 - 3 of 5
APA 03.07
2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES
Training Building Fire Station # 48
A. Wet Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check type valve with divided seat ring, rubber faced
clapper to automatically actuate water motor alarm and electric alarm, with pressure retard
chamber and variable pressure trim; with test and drain valve.
B. Electric Alarm: Electrically operated chrome plated red enameled gong with pressure
alarm switch.
C. Water Flow Switch: Vane type switch for mounting horizontal or vertical, with two
contacts; rated 10 amp at 125 volt AC and 2.5 amp at 24 volt DC.
D. Fire Department Connections:
1. Type: Flush mounted wall type with brass chrome plated finish.
2. Outlets: Two-way with fire department thread size. Threaded dust-cap and chain
of matching material and finish.
3. Drain: 3/4 inch automatic drip, outside connected to drain.
4. Label: "Sprinkler - Standpipe - Fire Department Connection"
2.3 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS
A. Electrical Characteristics: In accordance with refer to appropriate section of division 16
for the following (if pressure maintenance pump is required):
1. hp. rated load amperes.
2. volts, single three phase, 60 Hz.
3. amperes maximum fuse size circuit breaker size over current protection.
4. minimum circuit ampacity.
5. percent minimum power factor at rated load
B. Controls: Supervisory switches.
C. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount in control panel on equipment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with NFPA 13
B. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or
adjacent Siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle.
C. Locate outside alarm-gong on building wall as indicated on Drawings.
D. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work
E. Install piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings.
J
WET-PIPE FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 13930 - 4 of 5